IB Physics QB

1. Which of the following cont ain s one funda m e n t a l and one derive d unit?
A. amp e r e kilogr a m
B. amp e r e coulom b
C. joule newt o n
D. joule coulom b
(Tot al 1 mar k )
2. The cur r e n t , I, throu g h a resis to r is me a s u r e d with a digital am m e t e r to be

0.10 A. The unce r t ai n t y in the calcul a t e d value of I 2 will be
A. 1 %.
B. 2 %.
C. 5 %.
D. 20 %.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
3. A skydive r of mas s 80 kg falls vertic ally with a const a n t spee d of 50 m s –1 .

The upw a r d force acting on the skydive r is appr oxi m a t e ly
A. 0 N.
B. 80 N.
C. 800 N.
D. 4000 N.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics 1
4. Joseph runs along a long str aig h t tra ck. The varia tion of his spe e d v with
time t is show n below.
After 25 secon d s Josep h has run 200 m. Which of the following is cor r e c t at
25 secon d s ?
Ins t a n t a n e o u s Aver a g e spe e d / m

sp e e d / m s –1 s –1
A. 8 m s –1 8 m s –1
B. 8 m s –1 10 m s –1
C. 10 m s –1 8 m s –1
D. 10 m s –1 10 m s –1
(Tot al 1 mar k )
5. A car of mas s 1000 kg accel e r a t e s on a str ai g h t , flat, horizon t a l roa d with
an accele r a t i o n
a = 0.3 m s –2 .
The driving force F on the car is oppos e d by a resis tive force of 500 N.
The net (result a n t ) force on the car is
A. 200 N.
B. 300 N.
C. 500 N.
D. 800 N.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
6. A tennis ball of mas s m moving horizon t a lly with spe e d u strike s a vertic al
tenni s racke t. The ball bounc e s back with a horizon t al spe e d v .
The mag ni t u d e of the chan g e in mom e n t u m of the ball is
A. m (u + v ).
B. m (u – v ).
C. m (v – u ).
D. zero.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
7. A brot h e r and sister take the sam e time to run up a set of step s. The siste r
has a grea t e r mas s than her brot h e r . Which of the following is corr e c t ?
Has don e the mo s t Has dev e l o p e d the

work gre a t e s t pow e r
A. brot h e r brot h e r
B. brot h e r siste r
C. siste r brot h e r
D. siste r siste r
(Tot al 1 mar k )
8. A nucle a r power station prod u c e s 10 GW of elect ric al powe r . The powe r
gen e r a t e d by the nuclea r reaction s in the core of the rea c t o r is 25 GW. The
efficiency of the powe r station is
A. 15 %.
B. 35 %.
C. 40 %.
D. 60 %.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
9. A cyclist rides arou n d a circul a r tra ck at a unifor m spe e d. Which of the

following corr e c tly gives the net horizont a l force on the cyclist at any given
insta n t of time?
Net horiz o n t a l forc e Ne t horiz o n t a l forc e

alo n g dire c t i o n of nor m a l to dire c t i o n of
mot i o n mo t i o n
A. zero zero
B. zero non zero
C. non zero zero
D. non zero non zero
(Tot al 1 mar k )
10. A solid piece of tungs t e n melts into liquid withou t a cha n g e in tem p e r a t u r e .
Which of the following is corr ec t for the molec ul e s in the liquid pha s e
comp a r e d with the molec ul e s in the solid pha s e ?
Kin e t i c en e r g y Pot e n t i a l en e r g y
A. sam e gre a t e r
B. sam e sa m e
C. grea t e r gre a t e r
D. grea t e r sa m e
(Tot al 1 mar k )
11. What is the mas s of car bo n- 12 tha t cont ai n s the sam e num b e r of atom s as
14 g of silicon- 28?
A. 6 g
B. 12 g
C. 14 g
D. 24 g
(Tot al 1 mar k )
12. A heat e r of const a n t powe r heat s a liquid of mass m and specific hea t
capacity c . The grap h below shows how the tem p e r a t u r e of the liquid varies
with time.
The gra di e n t of the gra p h is k and no ene r gy is lost to the surr o u n d i n g s .

What is the powe r of the heat e r ?
A. km c
k
B. mc
mc
C. k
1
D. km c
(Tot al 1 mar k )
13. A tran sv e r s e wave travels from left to right. The diagr a m below show s how,
at a particul a r insta n t of time, the displa c e m e n t of particle s in the medi u m
varies with position. Which arrow rep r e s e n t s the direc tion of the velocity of
the particle mar k e d P?
(Tot al 1 mar k )
14. The gra p h shows how the displa c e m e n t varies with time for an objec t
unde r g oi n g simple har m o ni c motion.
Which gra p h shows how the object’s accel e r a ti o n a varies with time t ?
(Tot al 1 mar k )
15. Light travels from air into glass as show n below.
What is the refr ac tive index of glas s?
s in P
A. s in S
s inQ
B. s in R
s in P
C. s in R
s inQ
D. s in S
(Tot al 1 mar k )
16. Which of the following elect r o m a g n e t i c waves has a freq u e n c y gr e a t e r
than that of visible light?
A. Ultraviolet
B. Radio
C. Microw av e s
D. Infra r e d
(Tot al 1 mar k )
17. One elect r o nv olt is equ al to
A. 1.6 × 10 –19 C.
B. 1.6 × 10 –19 J.
C. 1.6 × 10 –19 V.
D. 1.6 × 10 –19 W.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
18. A batt e r y of inter n al resis t a n c e 2 Ω is conn e c t e d to an exte r n a l resist a n c e
of 10 Ω. The cur r e n t is 0.5 A.
What is the emf of the bat t e r y?
A. 1.0 V
B. 5.0 V
C. 6.0 V
D. 24.0 V
(Tot al 1 mar k )
19. In the circuit below, which of the following will caus e the gre a t e s t incr e a s e
in the readi n g of the voltm e t e r ?
A. An incr e a s e in tem p e r a t u r e
B. An incr e a s e in light inten sity
C. A decr e a s e in tem p e r a t u r e
D. A decr e a s e in light intensi ty

(Tot al 1 mar k )
20. A sphe ric al plan e t of unifor m density has thr e e time s the mas s of the Eart h
and twice the aver a g e radius. The mag nit u d e of the gravit a tio n al field
str e n g t h at the surface of the Eart h is g .
What is the gravit a tion al field stre n g t h at the surfa c e of the plane t ?
A. 6 g
2
g
B. 3
3
g
C. 4
3
g
D. 2
(Tot al 1 mar k )
21. An elect r o n pass e s the nort h pole of a bar mag n e t as show n below.
What is the direction of the ma g n e t i c forc e on the elect r o n ?
A. Into the pag e
B. Out of the page
C. To the left
D. To the right
(Tot al 1 mar k )
22. Which of the following gives the corr e c t num b e r of proton s and neut r o n s in
14
a nucleu s of car bo n- 14 ( 6 C )?
Prot o n s Ne u t r o n s
A. 8 6
B. 6 8
C. 14 6
D. 6 14
(Tot al 1 mar k )
23. A fres hly prep a r e d sam pl e cont ain s 4.0 μg of iodine- 131. After 24 days, 0. 5
μg of iodine- 131 rem ai n. The best estim a t e of the half- life of iodine- 131 is
A. 8 days.
B. 12 days.
C. 24 days.
D. 72 days.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
24. Which of the following caus e s the gre a t e s t num b e r of ioniza tion s as it
pass e s throu g h 1 cm of air?
(The total ener gy of the ionizing radia tio n is the sam e .)
A. An alpha particle
B. A bet a particle
C. A gam m a- ray
D. An X-ray
(Tot al 1 mar k )
25. What is the pheno m e n o n that best explains why gre e n h o u s e gas e s absor b
infrar e d radiation?
A. Reson a n c e
B. Interf e r e n c e
C. Refrac tion
D. Diffractio n
(Tot al 1 mar k )
26. In which of the following places will the albe do be gre a t e s t ?
A. A forest
B. A gras sl a n d
C. An ocea n
D. A polar ice cap

(Tot al 1 mar k )
27. A wind tur bin e produ c e s a powe r P whe n the wind spe e d is v . Assumin g
that the efficiency of the turbi n e is const a n t , the best estim a t e for the
powe r prod u c e d when the wind spe e d beco m e s 2 v is
A. 2 P.
B. 4 P.
C. 6 P.
D. 8 P.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
28. A sphe ric al black body has absolut e tem p e r a t u r e T 1 . The sur r o u n di n g s are
kept at a lower absolut e tem p e r a t u r e T 2 . What is the net powe r per unit
are a lost by the body?
A. σT 1 4
B. σT 2 4
C. σ( T 1 4 – T 2 4 )
D. σ( T 1 4 + T 2 4 )
(Tot al 1 mar k )
29. The desig n of a nuclea r powe r station includ e s an elect ric a l gen e r a t o r . The
function of the gene r a t o r is to conve r t
A. nuclea r ener gy to kinetic ene r gy.
B. kinetic ener gy to ther m al ene r gy.
C. ther m al ener gy to elect ric a l ene r gy.
D. kinetic ener gy to elect ric al ene r gy.

(Tot al 1 mar k )
30. What is the unit of surfac e heat capa city?
A. J kg –1 K–1
B. J K –1
C. J m –2 K–1
D. J m –3 K–1
(Tot al 1 mar k )
31. Data analysis ques tion.
The photog r a p h below shows a mag nifie d imag e of a dark cent r a l disc
sur r o u n d e d by conce n t r i c dark rings. These rings wer e prod u c e d as a
res ult of interfe r e n c e of monoc h r o m a t i c light.
The gra p h below shows how the ring diam e t e r D varies with the ring
num b e r n.
The inner m o s t ring corr e s p o n d s to n = 1. The corr e s p o n d i n g dia m e t e r is
labelled in the photo g r a p h . Erro r bars for the diam e t e r D are show n.
(a) Stat e on e piece of eviden c e tha t shows that D is not propo r tio n a l to n .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) On the gra p h above, draw the line of bes t- fit for the data points.
(2)
(c) Theory sugg e s t s that D 2 = kn .
A grap h of D 2 agains t n is show n below. Error bar s are show n for the
first and last data points only.
(i) Using the first grap h, calcul a t e the perc e n t a g e unc e r t a i n t y in D 2 ,
of the ring n = 7.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Based on the secon d gra p h, stat e on e piec e of evide nc e that

suppo r t s the relation s hi p D 2 = kn .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) Use the secon d grap h to dete r m i n e the value of the cons t a n t k,
as well as its unce r t a i n t y.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(iv) Stat e the unit for the const a n t k .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 11 mark s )
32. This ques tion is abou t motion in a ma gn e t i c field.
An elect r o n, that has been accele r a t e d from rest by a pote n ti al differ e n c e

of 250 V, ent e r s a region of ma gn e t i c field of stre n g t h 0.12 T that is
direct e d into the plane of the pag e.
(a) The elect r o n’s path while in the region of mag n e ti c field is a qua r t e r
circle. Show that the
(i) spee d of the elect r o n afte r accele r a t i o n is 9.4 × 10 6 m s –1 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) radi us of the pat h is 4.5 × 10 –4 m.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b) The diagr a m below shows the mom e n t u m of the elect r o n as it ent e r s
and leaves the region of ma gn e t i c field. The mag ni t u d e of the initial
mom e n t u m and of the final mom e n t u m is 8.6 × 10 –24 N s.
(i) On the diagr a m above, draw an arro w to indica t e the vector

repr e s e n t i n g the cha n g e in the mom e n t u m of the elect r o n .
(1)
(ii) Show that the magni t u d e of the cha n g e in the mom e n t u m of the
elect r o n is
1.2 × 10 –23 Ns.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) The time the elect r o n spe n d s in the region of mag n e ti c field is
7.4 × 10 –11 s.
Estim a t e the magni t u d e of the aver a g e force on the elect r o n .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
33. This ques tion is abou t circula r motion.
A ball of mas s 0.25 kg is attac h e d to a string and is ma d e to rota t e with

cons t a n t spee d v along a horizon t al circle of radius r = 0.33 m. The string
is att ac h e d to the ceiling and make s an angle of 30° with the vertical.
(a) (i) On the diagr a m above, draw and label arrow s to

repr e s e n t the forces on the ball in the position show n.
(2)
(ii) Stat e and explain whet h e r the ball is in equilibri u m .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b) Deter m i n e the spee d of rota tio n of the ball.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
34. This ques tion is abou t a nuclea r rea c t o r .
(a) Uraniu m is used as a fuel in a small res e a r c h nucle a r rea c t o r. The

235
conce n t r a t i o n of 9 2 U in a sam pl e of ura ni u m mus t be incr e a s e d
befor e it can be used as a fuel.
235
Stat e the nam e of the proc e s s by which the conc e n t r a t i o n of 92 U is
incr e a s e d .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) The reac t o r produ c e s 24 MW of powe r. The efficiency of the reac t o r is

32 %. In the fission of one ura ni u m- 235 nucle u s 3.2 × 10 –11 J of ene r gy
is relea s e d .
Deter m i n e the mass of ura ni u m- 235 that unde r g o e s fission in one year
in this react o r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(c) Explain what would happ e n if the mode r a t o r of this reac t o r wer e to be
rem ove d.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(d) During its nor m al oper a tio n, the following set of reac tio n s take s plac e
in the reac t o r .
1
0n  29328U  239
9 2U (I)
239 239 0
92U  9 3N p  –1 e v (II)
239 239 0
9 3 N p  9 4P u  –1e v (III)
(i) Stat e the nam e of the proc e s s repr e s e n t e d by reac tio n (II).
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Com m e n t on the inte r n a t i o n a l implic atio n s of the prod u c t of

thes e reac tion s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 11 mark s )
35. This ques tion is abou t simple har m o ni c oscillations .
A longit u di n al wave travels throu g h a mediu m from left to right.
Grap h 1 show s the variation with time t of the displa c e m e n t x of a particle

P in the mediu m .
Grap h 1
(a) For par ticle P,
(i) stat e how gra p h 1 shows that its oscillation s are not dam p e d .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) calcula t e the mag nit u d e of its maxim u m accele r a ti o n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) calcula t e its speed at t = 0.12 s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iv) stat e its directio n of motion at t = 0.12 s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b) Grap h 2 shows the variatio n with position d of the displa c e m e n t x of

particl es in the mediu m at a partic ul a r insta n t of time.
Grap h 2
Deter m i n e for the longit u di n a l wave, using gra p h 1 and gra p h 2,
(i) the frequ e n cy.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) the spee d.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
Grap h 2 – repr o d u c e d to assist with answ e ri n g (c)(i).
(c) The diagr a m shows the equilibriu m positions of six par ticle s in the
medi u m .
(i) On the diagr a m above, draw cros s e s to indic at e the positions of
thes e six particle s at the insta n t of time whe n the displa c e m e n t is
given by grap h 2.
(3)
(ii) On the diagr a m above, label with the lette r C a par ticl e that is at
the cent r e of a com p r e s s i o n.
(1)
(Tot al 14 mark s )
36. This ques tion is abou t mech a ni c s and the r m a l physic s.
The gra p h shows the variation with time t of the spe e d v of a ball of mas s
0.50 kg, that has been relea s e d from rest above the Eart h’s surfa c e .
The force of air resist a n c e is not negligible. Assum e that the accel e r a t io n
of free fall is
g = 9.81 m s –2 .
(a) Stat e, witho u t any calcula tion s , how the gra p h could be use d to
dete r m i n e the dista n c e fallen.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) (i) In the spac e below, dra w and label arrow s to rep r e s e n t
the forces on the ball at
2.0 s.
(1)
(ii) Use the grap h opposit e to show that the accel e r a t io n of the ball
at 2.0 s is appr oxi m a t e ly 4 m s –2 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Calculat e the magni t u d e of the force of air resis t a n c e on the ball
at 2.0 s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iv) Stat e and explain whet h e r the air resist a n c e on the ball at t = 5.0
s is smaller than, equal to or gre a t e r tha n the air resist a n c e at t
= 2.0 s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c) After 10 s the ball has fallen 190 m.
(i) Show that the sum of the pot e n ti al and kinetic ene r gi e s of the
ball has decr e a s e d by 780 J.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) The specific heat capa city of the ball is 480 J kg –1 K–1 . Estim a t e
the incr e a s e in the tem p e r a t u r e of the ball.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Stat e an assu m p t i o n mad e in the esti m a t e in (c)(ii).
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 14 mark s )
37. This ques tion is abou t nuclea r physics.
(a) (i) Define bindin g ener g y of a nucle u s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
239
(ii) The mas s of a nucle u s of plutoniu m ( 9 4 P u ) is 238.99 0 3 9 6 u.
Deduc e that the bindin g ene r gy per nucle on for pluto ni u m is 7.6
MeV.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(b) The grap h shows the variatio n with nucle on num b e r A of the bindin g
ener gy per nucleon.
239
Plutoni u m ( 9 4 P u ) und e r g o e s nucle a r fission accor di n g to the rea c tion
given below.
239 1 91 146 1
9 4P u 0 n  3 8S r  5 6Ba x 0 n
(i) Calculat e the num b e r x of neut r o n s prod u c e d .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Use the grap h to estim a t e the ene r gy rele a s e d in this rea c tion.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c) Stable nuclei with a mass num b e r gre a t e r tha n about 20, cont ai n mor e
neut r o n s than proton s . By refe r e n c e to the prope r ti e s of the nucle a r
force and of the elect r o s t a t i c force, sugg e s t an explan a ti o n for this
obse rv a tio n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 11 mark s )
38. This ques tion is abou t elect ri c circ uit s.
(a) Define
(i) electro m o ti v e force (emf ) of a batt e r y.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) electrical resista n c e of a condu c t o r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b) A batt e r y of emf ε and negligibl e inter n al resist a n c e is conne c t e d in
series to two resisto r s . The cur r e n t in the circuit is I.
(i) Stat e an equa tio n giving the total powe r delive r e d by the batt e r y.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) The poten ti al differ e n c e acros s resisto r R 1 is V 1 and that acros s

resis to r R 2 is V 2 .
Using the law of the cons e rv a tio n of ene r gy, ded uc e the equ a tio n
below.
ε = V1 + V2
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c) The grap h shows the I-V cha r a c t e r i s ti c s of two cond uc t o r s , X and Y.
On the axes below, sketc h gra p h s to show the variatio n with pote n ti al
differ e n c e V of the resist a n c e of cond u c t o r X (label this gra p h X) and
cond u c t o r Y (label this gra p h Y).
You do not nee d to put any num b e r s on the vertical axis.
(3)
(d) The condu c t o r s in (c) are conn e c t e d in serie s to a batt e r y of emf ε and
negligible inter n al resis t a n c e .
The powe r dissip a t e d in eac h of the two resisto r s is the sam e .
Using the grap h given in (c),
(i) det e r m i n e the emf of the batt e r y.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) calcula t e the total powe r dissipa t e d in the circ uit.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 12 mark s )
39. This ques tion is abou t the ene r gy bala nc e of the Ear t h.
(a) The inten sity of the Sun’s radia tio n at the position of the Eart h is
appr oxi m a t ely
1400 W m –2 .
Sugg e s t why the aver a g e powe r receive d per unit are a of the Eart h is
350 W m –2 .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) The diagr a m shows a simplifie d model of the ene r gy bala nc e of the
Eart h’s surfac e.
The diagr a m shows radi ation ent e ri n g or leaving the Eart h’s surfa c e
only.
The aver a g e equilibri u m tem p e r a t u r e of the Ear t h’s surfa c e is T E and

that of the atmo s p h e r e is T A = 242 K.
(i) Using the data from the diagr a m , stat e the emissivity of the
atm os p h e r e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Show that the intensity of the radia tio n radia t e d by the
atm os p h e r e towar d s the Eart h’s surfa c e is 136 W m –2 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) By refer e n c e to the ene r gy bala n c e of the Eart h’s surfa c e ,

calcula t e T E .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c) (i) Outline a mec h a ni s m by which part of the radia tion

radi at e d by the Eart h’s surfa c e is abso r b e d by gre e n h o u s e gas e s
in the atm os p h e r e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) Sugg e s t why the incomi n g solar radia tio n is not affect e d by the
mech a ni s m you outline d in (c)(i).
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Carbo n dioxide (CO 2 ) is a gre e n h o u s e gas. Stat e on e sour c e and

on e sink (object that re move s CO 2 ) of this gas.
Sourc e: ............................................................................................
..................
Sink: ................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 13 mark s )
40. This ques tion is abou t stan di n g (station a r y) wave s.
(a) Descri b e two ways that sta n di n g waves are differ e n t from travelling
waves.
1. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) An expe ri m e n t is car ri e d out to mea s u r e the spe e d of sound in air,
using the appa r a t u s show n below.
A tube that is open at both ends is plac e d vertic ally in a tank of wate r ,
until the top of the tube is just at the surfa c e of the wate r . A tunin g
fork of freq u e n cy 440 Hz is soun d e d above the tube. The tube is
slowly rais e d out of the wat e r until the loudn e s s of the soun d reac h e s
a maxim u m for the first time, due to the form a tio n of a sta n di n g wave.
(i) Explain the form a tio n of a sta n di n g wave in the tube.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Stat e the position in the tube tha t is always a node.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) The tube is raise d a little furt h e r . Explain why the loudn e s s of the
soun d is no longe r at a maxim u m .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(c) The tube is rais e d until the loudn e s s of the soun d rea c h e s a maxim u m
for a secon d time.
Betwe e n the two positions of maxim u m loudn e s s , the tube has bee n
raise d by 36.8 cm.
The frequ e n c y of the sound is 440 Hz. Estim a t e the spee d of sound in
air.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
41. This ques tion is abou t the Dopple r effect.
The sound emitt e d by a car’s hor n has frequ e n c y f, as me a s u r e d by the

driver. An observ e r moves towa r d s the station a r y car at const a n t spe e d and
meas u r e s the frequ e n c y of the soun d to be f ′.
(a) Explain, using a diagr a m , any differ e n c e betw e e n f ′ and f.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(b) The frequ e n c y f is 3.00 × 10 2 Hz. An obse rv e r moves towa r d s the
station a r y car at a const a n t spe e d of 15.0 m s –1 . Calcula t e the
obse rv e d frequ e n cy f ′ of the sound.
The spee d of soun d in air is 3.30 ×1 0 2 m s –1 .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
42. This ques tion is abou t optical resolution and accom m o d a t i o n.
A woma n is walking along a straig h t pat h, which is at right angl es to a

telep h o n e line, as show n in the diagr a m below. Two birds are perc h e d on
the line, 0.40 m apar t.
(diagra m not to scale)
The diam e t e r of the pupil of the wom a n’s eye is 2.5 mm and the aver a g e
wavele n g t h of visible light is 550 nm.
(a) Use the Rayleigh criterion to estim a t e the dista n c e D at which the
wom a n will just be able to see two sepa r a t e birds.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(b) The wom a n looks down at her watc h and is able to focus on it clea rly.
Explain how her eyes are able to focus on nea r object s as well as far
object s.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
43. This ques tion is abou t the photo el e c t r i c effect.
In an experi m e n t to inves tig a t e the photoel e c t ri c effect, light of freq u e n c y f

is inciden t on the met al surface A, show n in the diagr a m below. A pote n t i al
differ e n c e is applied betw e e n A and B. The photoel e c t ri c cur r e n t is
meas u r e d by a sensitive am m e t e r . (Note: the comple t e elect ric al circ uit is
not show n.)
When the frequ e n cy of the light is reduc e d to a cert ai n value, the cur r e n t
meas u r e d by the am m e t e r beco m e s zero. Explain how Einst ei n’s
photo el e c t r i c theo ry accou n t s for this obse rv a ti o n.
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(Tota l 4 mark s )
44. This ques tion is abou t atomic spec t r a .
Diagr a m 1 shows some of the ene r gy levels of the hydrog e n atom. Diagr a m
2 is a rep r e s e n t a t i o n of part of the emission spec t r u m of atomic hydrog e n .
The lines show n rep r e s e n t tran si tion s involving the –3.40 eV level.
(a) Deduc e that the ene r gy of a photon of wavel e n g t h 658 nm is 1.89 eV.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(b) (i) On dia g r a m 1 , dra w an arrow to show the elect r o n
tran si tion bet w e e n ene r gy levels that gives rise to the emission of
a photon of wavelen g t h 658 nm. Label this arro w with the lette r
A.
(1)
(ii) On dia g r a m 1 , draw arrow s to show the elect r o n tra n si tion s

betw e e n ene r gy levels that give rise to the emis sion of photo n s of
wavele n g t h s 488 nm, 435 nm and 411 nm.
Label thes e arro w s with the lette r s B, C and D.
(1)
(c) Explain why the lines in the emission spe ct r u m of atomic hydro g e n ,
show n in dia g r a m 2 , beco m e close r toge t h e r as the wavele n g t h of the
emitt e d photo n s decr e a s e s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
45. This ques tion is abou t radioa ctive dec ay.
Iodine- 124 (I-124) is an uns t a bl e radioisot o p e with proton num b e r 53. It

unde r g o e s bet a plus decay to form an isotop e of telluriu m (Te).
(a) Stat e the reaction for the dec ay of the I-124 nuclide.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) The grap h below show s how the activity of a sam pl e of iodine- 124
chan g e s with time.
(i) Stat e the half- life of iodine- 124
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Calculat e the activity of the sam pl e at 21 days.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(iii) A sam pl e of an unkno w n radioisoto p e has a half- life twice tha t of
iodine- 124 and the sam e initial activity as the sam pl e of iodine-
124. On the axes opposit e , dra w a gra p h to show how the activity
of the sam pl e would cha n g e with time.
Label this grap h X.
(1)
(iv) A secon d sam pl e of iodine- 124 has half the initial activity as the
origin al sam pl e of iodine- 124. On the axes opposit e, dra w a
grap h to show how the activity of this sam pl e would cha n g e with
time. Label this grap h Y.
(1)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
46. This ques tion is abou t analog u e and digital stor a g e .
As part of a physics lesson, Isobel and Claire eac h make an audio recor di n g
of their teac h e r . They then comp a r e the quality of their recor di n g s . Isobel’s
reco r di n g is in analog u e form a t whe r e a s Claire’s recor di n g is digital and
stor e d on a CD.
(a) Stat e on e possible analog u e met h o d of stor a g e use d by Isobel.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) The first time the reco r di n g s are playe d, their qualitie s are identic al.
Outline whet h e r the quality of eac h recor di n g is expe c t e d to rem a i n
the sam e after many uses.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c) Use the following infor m a ti o n to dete r m i n e the num b e r of bits use d in
Clair e’s digit al recor di n g.
Total time of recor di n g = 30 minut e s

Sam plin g freq u e n c y = 40 kHz
For m a t of recor di n g = Ste r e o (2 cha n n e l s )
Num b e r of bits per sam pl e = 16
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
47. This ques tion is abou t char g e- couple d device s (CCDs).
An imag e of the surfac e of the Eart h is recor d e d by a digital cam e r a from

an aero pl a n e. Each imag e cover s 144 km 2 of the Eart h’s surfa c e and is
reco r d e d by a squa r e CCD of are a 36 cm 2 .
(a) Calcula t e the mag nifica tio n of the syste m .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) The CCD cont ai n s 1.0 × 10 8 pixels. Deduc e the minim u m dista n c e
betw e e n two points on Eart h that can be resolve d by this cam e r a .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c) It is propos e d to improve the qua n t u m efficiency of the CCD. Sta t e the
effect, if any, on the resolution of the syst e m .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
48. This ques tion is abou t a Schmit t trigg e r .
The diagr a m below show s a Sch mit t trigg e r circ uit bas e d on an oper a t io n a l
amplifie r (op- amp).
The outpu t of this Schmit t trigg e r is positive satu r a ti o n (+13 V) or nega tive
satu r a ti o n (–13 V).
(a) Stat e two prop e r t i e s of an ideal op- amp.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) Deter m i n e the input value tha t will caus e the outpu t to switc h from –
13 V to +1 3 V.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c) Explain how a Schmit t trigg e r can be use d to res h a p e a digital puls e.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
49. This ques tion is abou t a mobile phon e netwo r k.
Erin is a pass e n g e r on a train making a call to a sta n d a r d fixed telep h o n e

line (“landline”) from her mobile phon e. The train move s Erin betw e e n
adjac e n t com m u ni c a t io n cells. Outline the cha n g e s , if any, tha t take place
in the
(a) cellular excha n g e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) public switch e d telep h o n e netwo r k (PSTN).
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 2 mark s )
50. This ques tion is abou t lengt h contr a c ti o n and simult a n e i ty.
(a) Define proper lengt h.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) A space s hi p is travelling to the right at spe e d 0.75 c, thro u g h a tunn el

which is open at both ends. Obse rv e r A is sta n di n g at the cent r e of
one side of the tunn el. Obse rv e r A, for whom the tunn el is at rest,
mea s u r e s the lengt h of the tunn el to be 240 m and the lengt h of the
space s hi p to be 200 m. The diag r a m below shows this situa tion from
the pers p e c t ive of obse rv e r A.
Observ e r B, for whom the spac e s hi p is station a r y, is sta n di n g at the
cent r e of the spac e s hi p.
(i) Calculat e the Lorent z factor, γ, for this situa tion.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Calculat e the lengt h of the tunn el accor di n g to obs e rv e r B.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) Calculat e the lengt h of the spa c e s hi p accor di n g to obse rv e r B.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iv) Accor din g to obse rv e r A, the spa c e s hi p is compl e t e ly inside the

tunn el for a shor t time. Sta t e and explain whet h e r or not,
accor di n g to obs erv e r B, the spac e s hi p is eve r compl e t ely inside
the tunn el.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c) Two sour ce s of light are locat e d at eac h end of the tunn el. The
diagr a m below show s this situa tion from the pers p e c tiv e of obse rv e r
A.
Accordi n g to observ e r A, at the insta n t whe n obse rv e r B pas s e s

obse rv e r A, the two sour c e s of light emit a flash. Obse rv e r A see s the
two flashe s simult a n e o u s ly. Discus s whet h e r or not obse r v e r B sees
the two flashe s simult a n e o u s ly.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
51. This ques tion is abou t meso n s .
(a) Stat e what is mea n t by an exch a n g e par ticle.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) In 1935, the physicist Hide ki Yukawa pre dic t e d that the stron g
inter a c ti o n betw e e n nucleon s was medi a t e d by particle s calle d
meson s . Given that the rang e of the stron g inte r a c t io n is
appr oxi m a t ely 1.5 × 10 –15 m, calcula t e a possible value for the res t
mas s of a meso n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c) A meson called the pion was det e c t e d in cosmic ray reac tio n s in 1947
by Powell and Occhialini. The pion com e s in thr e e possible cha r g e
stat e s: π + , π – and π 0 The Feyn m a n diagr a m below rep r e s e n t s a
possible reac tion in which a pion particip a t e s .
Stat e and explain whet h e r the meso n prod u c e d is a π + , π – or a π 0 .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(d) Stat e the possible spin num b e r s of meso n s and explain your answ e r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(e) Explain why, accor di n g to the qua r k model, it is not possible for a
particl e to consist of two up qua r k s only.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
52. A particle of mas s m is moving with const a n t spee d v in unifor m circul a r

motion. What is the total work done by the cent ri p e t a l force during one
revolutio n?
A. Zero
m v2
B. 2
C. mv 2
D. 2π mv 2
(Tot al 1 mar k )
53. Which of the following is equivale n t to the principl e of ene r gy
cons e r v a t i o n?
A. Newt o n’s first law
B. The first law of ther m o dy n a m i c s
C. Newt o n’s secon d law
D. The secon d law of ther m o d y n a m i c s

(Tot al 1 mar k )
54. An ideal gas und e r g o e s the the r m o d y n a m i c cha n g e s rep r e s e n t e d in the P –

V diagr a m below
(P → Q → R → P).
Volume / m 3
Which of the following is the net work done by the gas in a cycle?
A. 4.5 × 10 5 J
B. 3.0 × 10 5 J
C. 1.0 × 10 5 J
D. Zero
(Tot al 1 mar k )
55. Light travels from air into glass as show n below.
The refr ac tive index of the glas s is
s in3 0
A. s in8 0
s in8 0
B. s in3 0
s in6 0
C. s in1 0
s in1 0
D. s in6 0
(Tot al 1 mar k )
56. The funda m e n t a l (first har m o nic) frequ e n c y for a partic ul a r orga n pipe is
330 Hz. The pipe is close d at one end but open at the othe r . What is the
frequ e n c y of its secon d har m o ni c ?
A. 110 Hz
B. 165 Hz
C. 660 Hz
D. 990 Hz
(Tot al 1 mar k )
57. Light is diffract e d at a single slit. Which of the following gra p h s best
repr e s e n t s how the inten sity I of the diffrac t e d light varies with the
diffractio n angle θ?
A.
B.
C.
D.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
58. Light of wavele n g t h λ is emitt e d by two point sour c e s . The light pass e s
thro u g h a circul a r ape r t u r e of diam e t e r b and is rec eive d by an obse rv e r .
The angul a r sep a r a t i o n of the sour c e s from the obse r v e r’ s position is θ. The
sour c e s are not resolve d by the obse rv e r . Which of the following
mat h e m a t i c al relation s hi p s applie s?
λ
A. θ < 1.22 b
λ
B. θ > 1.22 b
λ
C. θ = 1.22 b
λ
D. θ = b
(Tot al 1 mar k )
59. Plane- polarize d light is incide n t nor m ally on a polariz e r which is able to
rota t e in the plane per p e n di c ul a r to the light as show n below.
In diagr a m 1, the intensity of the incide n t light is 8 W m –2 and the

tran s mi t t e d inten si ty of light is 2 W m –2 . Diagr a m 2 show s the polariz e r
rota t e d 90° from the orient a t io n in diagr a m 1. What is the new tra n s m i t t e d
inten si ty?
A. 0 W m –2
B. 2 W m –2
C. 6 W m –2
D. 8 W m –3
(Tot al 1 mar k )
60. A light- dep e n d e n t resis to r (LDR) and a fixed resisto r are conne c t e d in the
poten ti al divider circuit show n below.
The voltm e t e r read s 3.0 V. Which of the following chan g e s would caus e the
readi n g on the voltm et e r to incr e a s e ?
A. Swap pi n g the positions of the LDR and the fixed resisto r
B. Incr e a si n g the resist a n c e of the fixed resis to r
C. Incr e a si n g the amou n t of light shining on the LDR
D. Decr e a s i n g the amou n t of light shining on the LDR

(Tot al 1 mar k )
61. A coil of wire has a large num b e r of turn s. It is move d relative to a fixed
mag n e ti c field. The emf gen e r a t e d will be equal to the
A. rat e of chan g e of magn e t i c flux linka g e .
B. rat e of chan g e of the magn e ti c flux throu g h the coil.
C. chan g e of mag n e t i c flux linka g e .
D. chan g e of the mag n e ti c flux thro u g h the coil.

(Tot al 1 mar k )
62. A sinus oid al ac powe r supply has rms voltag e V and supplie s rms cur r e n t I.
What is the maxim u m insta n t a n e o u s powe r delive r e d ?
A. 2 VI
B. 2 VI
C. VI
VI
D. 2
(Tot al 1 mar k )
63. A positively char g e d par ticle follows a circul a r path as show n below.
Which of the following elect ric fields could have caus e d the cha r g e d
par ticl e to follow the above pat h?
(Tot al 1 mar k )
64. A stone is throw n from a cliff and it lands in the sea as show n below. Air
resis t a n c e is negligible.
Which of the following stat e m e n t s is corr e c t whilst the stone is in motion?
A. The vertic al compo n e n t of the stone’s displa c e m e n t is const a n t .
B. The horizont al compo n e n t of the stone’s displa c e m e n t is const a n t .
C. The vertic al compo n e n t of the stone’s velocity is const a n t .
D. The horizont al compo n e n t of the stone’s velocity is cons t a n t .

(Tot al 1 mar k )
65. Which of the diag r a m s below bes t rep r e s e n t s the equipot e n t i al surfa c e s
arou n d two identical point mas s e s ?
(Tot al 1 mar k )
66. Which of the following grap h s repr e s e n t s how the total ene r gy E of an
orbitin g sat ellite varies with orbital radius r?
A.
B.
C.
D.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
67. The diagr a m below show s a circ uit involving a photo el e c t r i c cell. Whe n UV
light is shon e onto the met al catho d e , elect r o n s are emitt e d esta blis hi n g a
photoc u r r e n t .
Which of the following chan g e s could caus e the photoc u r r e n t to stop?
A. Incr e a si n g the poten ti al differe n c e of the powe r supply.
B. Incr e a si n g the frequ e n c y of the UV light.
C. Incr e a si n g the intensity of the UV light.
D. Chan gi n g the met al surfac e to one with a smalle r work function.

(Tot al 1 mar k )
68. Elect r o n s are accel e r a t e d from rest thro u g h a pote n ti al differ e n c e V . Their
de Broglie wavel en g t h is λ. The accel e r a t i n g pote n ti al differ e n c e is
incr e a s e d to 2 V . Which of the following gives the new de Broglie
wavele n g t h ?
A. 2λ
B. 2λ
λ
C. 2
λ
D. 2
(Tot al 1 mar k )
69. Which of the following ene r gy level diag r a m s bes t rep r e s e n t s the kine tic
ene r gy E K of the “elect r o n in a box” model, whe r e an elect r o n is confine d to
move in one dim en sio n ? The varia bl e n is an inte g e r (1, 2, 3, 4 etc. ).
A.
B.
C.
D.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
70. A proton is confine d within a nucle u s. What is the orde r of ma gni t u d e of

the unce r t a i n t y in its mom e n t u m ?
A. 10 –30 Ns
B. 10 –20 Ns
C. 10 –10 Ns
D. 1 Ns
(Tot al 1 mar k )
71. Differe n t nuclides spont a n e o u s ly und e r g o radioa c tive dec ay, emittin g
eithe r α, β or γ radi ation.
Which of the following cor r e c tly identifies all the emission s tha t do not
have discr e t e ener gi e s ?
A. α
B. β
C. γ
D. α and γ
(Tot al 1 mar k )
72. The half- life of a radioac tive isotop e is 10 days. What is the perc e n t a g e of
the sam pl e rem ai ni n g after 25 days?
A. 0 %
B. 18 %
C. 25 %
D. 40 %
(Tot al 1 mar k )
73. Which of the following fuels has the highe s t ene r gy density?
A. Coal
B. Gas
C. Oil
D. Uraniu m
(Tot al 1 mar k )
74. The decim al num b e r 18 is rep r e s e n t e d in bina ry by a five bit digital
num b e r . Which of the following cor r e c tly identifies the least- significa n t bit
(LSB) and the most- significan t bit (MSB) of the bina ry num b e r ?
LSB MS B
A. 0 0
B. 0 1
C. 1 0
D. 1 1
(Tot al 1 mar k )
75. A CD stor e s digital inform a t io n with a serie s of bum p s (lands) and pits. The
dept h of each pit is d . Which of the following is the most appr o p ri a t e
wavele n g t h of laser light to recove r the infor m a ti o n?
d
A. 2
B. d
C. 2d
D. 4d
(Tot al 1 mar k )
76. Which of the following digital device s is least likely to use a char g e- couple d
device (CCD) in its const r u c t io n?
A. Fax machin e
B. Cam e r a
C. Watch
D. X-ray machi n e
(Tot al 1 mar k )
77. Data analysis ques tion.
The photog r a p h below shows a mag nifie d imag e of a dark cent r a l disc
sur r o u n d e d by conce n t r i c dark rings. These rings wer e prod u c e d as a
res ult of interfe r e n c e of monoc h r o m a t i c light.
The gra p h below shows how the ring diam e t e r D varies with the ring
num b e r n.
The inner m o s t ring corr e s p o n d s to n = 1. The corr e s p o n d i n g dia m e t e r is
labelled in the photo g r a p h . Erro r bars for the diam e t e r D are show n.
(a) Stat e on e piece of eviden c e tha t shows that D is not propo r tio n a l to n .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) On the gra p h opposit e, dra w the line of best- fit for the data points.
(2)
(c) It is sugg e s t e d that the rela tion s hi p betw e e n D and n is of the form
D = cn p
whe r e c and p are const a n t s .
Explain what grap h you would plot in orde r to det e r m i n e the value of
p.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
1
(d) Theory sugg e s t s that p = 2 and so D 2 = kn (whe r e k = c 2 ).
A grap h of D 2 agains t n is show n below. Error bar s are show n for the
first and last data points only.
(i) Using the first grap h, calcul a t e the perc e n t a g e unc e r t a i n t y in D 2 ,

of the ring n = 7.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Based on the secon d gra p h, stat e on e piec e of evide nc e that

suppo r t s the relation s hi p D 2 = kn .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) Use the secon d grap h to dete r m i n e the value of the cons t a n t k,
as well as its unce r t a i n t y.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(iv) Stat e the unit for the const a n t k .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 14 mark s )
78. This ques tion is abou t a prob e in orbit.
A prob e of mas s m is in a circul a r orbit of radius r arou n d a sphe ri c al

plane t of mas s M .
(a) Stat e why the work done by the gravit a tio n a l force durin g one full
revolution of the prob e is zero.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) Deduc e for the prob e in orbit that its
GM
(i) spee d is v = r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
GM m

(ii) total ener gy is E = 2r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c) It is now requi r e d to place the prob e in anot h e r circul a r orbit furth e r
away from the plane t.
To do this, the prob e’s engin e s will be fired for a very short time.
Stat e and explain whet h e r the work done on the prob e by the engin e s
is positive, neg ative or zero.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
79. This ques tion is abou t polarizatio n.
(a) Stat e what is mea n t by polariz e d light.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) Unpola rize d light is incide n t on the surfa c e of a plastic. The angle of
inciden c e is θ.
The reflect e d light is viewe d thro u g h an analys e r whos e tra n s m i s sio n
axis is vertical.
The variatio n with θ of the inte n si ty I of the tra n s m i t t e d light is show n

in the grap h.
(i) Explain why ther e is an angle of incide n c e , for which the

inten si ty of the tran s mi t t e d light is zero.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Calculat e the refr ac tive index of the plastic.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c) Unpola rize d light from a sour c e is split, so that the r e is a path
differ e n c e of half a wavel e n g t h betw e e n the two bea m s .
A lens brings the light to focus at point P on a scre e n . The lens does
not introd u c e any addition a l path differ e n c e .
Stat e and explain whet h e r any light would be obse rv e d at P, in the

case in which the polarize r s have their tra n s m i s sio n axes
(i) par allel.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) at right angles to each othe r.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 9 mark s )
80. This ques tion is abou t ther m o dy n a m i c s .
The P–V diagr a m shows the expa n sio n of a fixed mas s of an ideal gas, from
stat e A to stat e B.
The tem p e r a t u r e of the gas in stat e A is 400 K.
(a) Calcula t e the tem p e r a t u r e of the gas in stat e B.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) (i) Calculat e the work done by the gas in expa n di n g from
stat e A to stat e B.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Dete r mi n e the amou n t of the r m a l ene r gy tra n sf e r r e d during the

expa n sio n from stat e A to sta t e B.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c) The gas is isoth e r m a lly comp r e s s e d from stat e B back to stat e A.
(i) Using the P–V diagr a m axes above, dra w the variation of
pres s u r e with volum e for this isoth e r m a l comp r e s s io n.
(1)
(ii) Stat e and explain whet h e r the ma gni t u d e of the the r m a l ene r gy
tran sf e r r e d in this case would be less tha n, equ al to or gre a t e r
than the ther m a l ene r gy tra n sf e r r e d in (b)(ii).
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................

..................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

81. This ques tion is abou t circula r motion.
A ball of mas s 0.25 kg is attac h e d to a string and is ma d e to rota t e with

cons t a n t spee d v along a horizon t al circle of radius r = 0.33 m. The string
is att ac h e d to the ceiling and make s an angle of 30° with the vertical.
(a) (i) On the diagr a m above, draw and label arrow s to

repr e s e n t the forces on the ball in the position show n.
(2)
(ii) Stat e and explain whet h e r the ball is in equilibri u m .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) Deter m i n e the spee d of rota tio n of the ball.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
82. This ques tion is abou t char g e- couple d device s (CCDs) and photon s .
(a) Stat e on e factor that affect s the resolutio n of an imag e obtain e d with
a CCD.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) Stat e on e adva n t a g e of a CCD imag e, comp a r e d to an imag e on

ordina ry photo g r a p h i c film.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(c) Light of inten si ty 5.3 × 10 –3 W m –2 and frequ e n c y 3.9 × 10 14 Hz is
inciden t on a pixel of a CCD. The are a of the pixel is 4.2 × 10 –12 m 2
and the quan t u m efficiency is 80 %.
The capacit a n c e of the pixel is 14 pF.
(i) Show that the num b e r of photon s incide n t on the pixel of the
CCD per secon d is 8.6 × 10 4 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) Calculat e the char g e that acc u m ul a t e s in the pixel durin g a time
of 25 ms.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Dete r mi n e the poten ti al differ e n c e at the ends of the pixel.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iv) Calculat e the mom e n t u m of one of the incide n t photon s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(v) Using your ans w e r to (c)(iv), estim a t e the pres s u r e exer t e d by
the photon s in (c)(i) on the pixel of the CCD.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 11 mark s )
83. This ques tion is abou t simple har m o ni c oscillations .
A longit u di n al wave travels throu g h a mediu m from left to right.
Grap h 1 show s the variation with time t of the displa c e m e n t x of a particle

P in the mediu m .
Grap h 1

(a) For par ticle P,
(i) stat e how gra p h 1 shows that its oscillation s are not dam p e d .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) calcula t e the mag nit u d e of its maxim u m accele r a ti o n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) calcula t e its speed at t = 0.12 s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iv) stat e its directio n of motion at t = 0.12 s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) Grap h 2 shows the variatio n with position d of the displa c e m e n t x of
particl es in the mediu m at a partic ul a r insta n t of time.
Grap h 2
Deter m i n e for the longit u di n a l wave, using gra p h 1 and gra p h 2,
(i) the frequ e n cy.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) the spee d.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

Grap h 2 – repr o d u c e d to assist with answ e ri n g (c)(i).
(c) The diagr a m shows the equilibriu m positions of six par ticle s in the
medi u m .
(i) On the diagr a m above, draw cros s e s to indic at e the positions of

thes e six particle s at the insta n t of time whe n the displa c e m e n t is
given by grap h 2.
(3)

(ii) On the diagr a m above, label with the lette r C a par ticl e that is at
the cent r e of a com p r e s s i o n.
(1)
(Tot al 14 mark s )
84. This ques tion is abou t mech a ni c s and the r m a l physic s.
The gra p h shows the variation with time t of the spe e d v of a ball of mas s
0.50 kg, that has been relea s e d from rest above the Eart h’s surfa c e .
The force of air resist a n c e is not negligible. Assum e that the accel e r a t io n
of free fall is
g = 9.81 m s –2 .
(a) Stat e, witho u t any calcula tion s , how the gra p h could be use d to
dete r m i n e the dista n c e fallen.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) (i) In the spac e below, dra w and label arrow s to rep r e s e n t
the forces on the ball at 2.0 s.
(1)
(ii) Use the grap h opposit e to show that the accel e r a t io n of the ball
at 2.0 s is appr oxi m a t e ly 4 m s –2 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Calculat e the magni t u d e of the force of air resis t a n c e on the ball
at 2.0 s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iv) Stat e and explain whet h e r the air resist a n c e on the ball at t = 5.0
s is smaller than, equal to or gre a t e r tha n the air resist a n c e at t
= 2.0 s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c) After 10 s the ball has fallen 190 m.
(i) Show that the sum of the pot e n ti al and kinetic ene r gi e s of the
ball has decr e a s e d by 780 J.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) The specific heat capa city of the ball is 480 J kg –1 K–1 . Estim a t e
the incr e a s e in the tem p e r a t u r e of the ball.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................

..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) Stat e an assu m p t i o n mad e in the esti m a t e in (c)(ii).
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 14 mark s )
85. This ques tion is abou t nuclea r physics.
(a) (i) Define bindin g ener g y of a nucle u s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
239
(ii) The mas s of a nucle u s of plutoniu m ( 9 4 P u ) is 238.99 0 3 9 6 u.
Deduc e that the bindin g ene r gy per nucle on for pluto ni u m is 7.6
MeV.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(b) The grap h shows the variatio n with nucle on num b e r A of the bindin g
ener gy per nucleon.
239
Plutoni u m ( 9 4 P u ) und e r g o e s nucle a r fission accor di n g to the rea c tion
given below.
239 1 91
94Pu  0 n  3 8S r  15466Ba x 01 n
(i) Calculat e the num b e r x of neut r o n s prod u c e d .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Use the grap h to estim a t e the ene r gy rele a s e d in this rea c tion.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) Stable nuclei with a mass num b e r gre a t e r tha n about 20, cont ai n mor e
neut r o n s than proton s . By refe r e n c e to the prope r ti e s of the nucle a r
force and of the elect r o s t a t i c force, sugg e s t an explan a ti o n for this
obse rv a tio n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 11 mark s )
86. This ques tion is abou t qua n t u m aspe c t s of the elect r o n .
The wav efunction ψ for an elect r o n confine d to move within a “box” of

linea r size
L = 1.0 × 10 –10 m, is a stan di n g wave as show n.

(a) Stat e what is mea n t by a wavefu n c tio n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) Stat e the position nea r which this elect r o n is most likely to be found.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(c) Calcula t e the mom e n t u m of the elect r o n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(d) The ene r gy, in joules, of the elect r o n in a hydro g e n atom, is given by
2.1 81 0 1 8

E = n2 whe r e n is a positive inte g e r . Calcula t e the
wavelen g t h of the photo n emitt e d in a tra n si tion from the first excit e d
stat e of hydro g e n to the grou n d stat e.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(e) The elect r o n stays in the first excite d stat e of hydrog e n for a time of
appr oxi m a t ely
∆t = 1.0 × 10 –10 s.
(i) Dete r mi n e the unce r t a i n t y in the ene r gy of the elect r o n in the

first excit ed stat e.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Sugg e s t , with refer e n c e to your answ e r to (e)(i), why the photo n s
emitt e d in tran si tion s from the first excite d sta t e of hydro g e n to
the grou n d stat e will, in fact, have a small rang e of wavele n g t h s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(f) Diagr a m 1 show s the thr e e lowes t ene r gy levels for an elect r o n in the
hydrog e n atom.
Using the ener gy axis on diagr a m 2, dra w the thr e e lowes t ene r gy
levels for the elect r o n in a box model. You do not have to put any
num b e r s on the vertical axis.
(2)
(Tot al 13 mark s )
87. This ques tion is abou t elect ri c circ uit s.
(a) Define
(i) electro m o ti v e force (emf ) of a batt e r y.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) electrical resista n c e of a condu c t o r .
.........................................................................................................

..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b) A batt e r y of emf ε and negligibl e inter n al res ista n c e is conne c t e d in

series to two resisto r s .
The cur r e n t in the circuit is I.
(i) Stat e an equa tio n giving the total powe r delive r e d by the batt e r y.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) The poten ti al differ e n c e acros s resisto r R 1 is V 1 and that acros s

resis to r R 2 is V 2 .
Using the law of the cons e rv a tio n of ene r gy, ded uc e the equ a tio n
below.
ε = V1 + V2
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) The grap h shows the I-V cha r a c t e r i s ti c s of two cond uc t o r s , X and Y.
On the axes below, sketc h gra p h s to show the variatio n with pote n ti al
differ e n c e V of the resist a n c e of cond u c t o r X (label this gra p h X) and
cond u c t o r Y (label this gra p h Y).
You do not nee d to put any num b e r s on the vertical axis.
(3)

(d) The condu c t o r s in (c) are conn e c t e d in serie s to a bat t e r y of emf ε and
negligible inter n al resis t a n c e .
The powe r dissip a t e d in eac h of the two resisto r s is the sam e .
Using the grap h given in (c),
(i) det e r m i n e the emf of the batt e r y.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) calcula t e the total powe r dissipa t e d in the circ uit.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 12 mark s )

88. This ques tion is abou t the ene r gy bala nc e of the Ear t h.
(a) The inten sity of the Sun’s radia tio n at the position of the Eart h is
appr oxi m a t ely
1400 W m –2 .
Sugg e s t why the aver a g e powe r receive d per unit are a of the Eart h is
350 W m –2 .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) The diagr a m shows a simplifie d model of the ene r gy bala nc e of the
The diagr a m shows radi ation ent e ri n g or leaving the Eart h’s surfa c e
only.
The aver a g e equilibri u m tem p e r a t u r e of the Ear t h’s surfa c e is T E and

that of the atmo s p h e r e is T A = 242 K.
(i) Using the data from the diagr a m , stat e the emissivity of the
atm os p h e r e .
.........................................................................................................

..................
(1)

(ii) Show that the intensity of the radia tio n radia t e d by the
atm os p h e r e towar d s the Eart h’s surfa c e is 136 W m –2 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) By refer e n c e to the ene r gy bala n c e of the Eart h’s surfa c e ,

calcula t e T E .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c) (i) Outline a mec h a ni s m by which part of the radia tion

radi at e d by the Eart h’s surfa c e is abso r b e d by gre e n h o u s e gas e s
in the atm os p h e r e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

(3)
(ii) Sugg e s t why the incomi n g solar radia tio n is not affect e d by the
mech a ni s m you outline d in (c)(i).
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Carbo n dioxide (CO 2 ) is a gre e n h o u s e gas. Stat e on e sour c e and

on e sink (object that re move s CO 2 ) of this gas.
Sourc e: ............................................................................................
..................
Sink: ................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 13 mark s )
89. This ques tion is abou t motion in a ma gn e t i c field and elect r o m a g n e t i c

inductio n
An elect r o n, that has been accele r a t e d from rest by a pote n ti al differ e n c e

of 250 V, ent e r s a region of ma gn e t i c field of stre n g t h 0.12 T that is
direct e d into the plane of the pag e.

(a) The elect r o n’s path while in the region of mag n e ti c field is a qua r t e r
circle. Show that the
(i) spee d of the elect r o n afte r accele r a t i o n is 9.4 × 10 6 m s –1 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) radi us of the pat h is 4.5 × 10 –4 m.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) time the elect r o n spen d s in the region of ma g n e ti c field is 7.5 ×

10 –11 s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b) The diagr a m below shows the mom e n t u m of the elect r o n as it ent e r s
and leaves the region of ma gn e t i c field. The mag ni t u d e of the initial
mom e n t u m and of the final mom e n t u m is 8.6 × 10 –24 Ns.
(i) On the diagr a m above, draw an arro w to indica t e the vector

repr e s e n t i n g the cha n g e in the mom e n t u m of the elect r o n .
(1)

(ii) Show that the magni t u d e of the cha n g e in the mom e n t u m of the
elect r o n is
1.2 × 10 –23 Ns.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) Estim a t e the magni t u d e of the aver a g e force on the elect r o n .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(c) A squa r e loop of condu c ti n g wire is place d nea r a str ai g h t wire

car ryin g a const a n t curr e n t I. The wire is in the sam e plan e as the
loop.
The loop is mad e to move with const a n t spe e d v towa r d s the wire.

(i) Explain, by refer e n c e to Far a d a y’s and Lenz’s laws of
elect r o m a g n e t i c inductio n, why work must be done on the loop.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) Sugg e s t what beco m e s of the work done on the loop.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 12 mark s )
90. This ques tion is abou t som e of the plane t s in the solar syste m .
Four of the plane t s in the solar syste m are Mars, Venus, Jupite r and
Nept u n e .
(a) List thes e plane t s in orde r of incre a si n g dista n c e from the Sun.
(2)

(b) List thes e plane t s in orde r of decr e a si n g diam e t e r .
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )
91. This ques tion is abou t the Hert zs p r u n g–R u s s e ll (HR) diagr a m and using it
to det e r m i n e some prop e r t i e s of sta r s.
The diagr a m below show s the grid of an HR diagr a m , on which the

position s of select e d star s are show n. (L S = luminosity of the Sun.)
(a) (i) Draw a circle arou n d the sta r s that are red giant s.
Label this circle R.
(1)

(ii) Draw a circle arou n d the sta r s that are white dwarfs. Label this
circle W.
(1)
(iii) Draw a line throu g h the sta r s tha t are main sequ e n c e sta r s.
(1)
(b) Explain, witho u t doing any calcul a tion, how astro n o m e r s can dedu c e
that star B has a large r diam e t e r tha n sta r A.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c) Using the following dat a and inform a ti o n from the HR diagr a m , show
that star A is at a dista n c e of abou t 800 pc from Eart h.
Appa r e n t brigh t n e s s of the Sun =

3 –2
1.4 × 10 W m
Appa r e n t brigh t n e s s of sta r A = 4.9 ×
–9 –2
10 Wm
Mea n dista n c e of Sun from Eart h =
1.0 AU
1 pc = 2.1 × 10 5 AU
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)

(d) Explain why the dista n c e of sta r A from Eart h canno t be det e r m i n e d
by the met ho d of stellar par allax.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tot al 11 mark s )
92. This ques tion is abou t cosmology.
(a) Stat e how the obser v e d red- shift of many galaxies is explaine d.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) Explain how the cos mic micro w a v e backg r o u n d (CMB) radia tio n is
consis t e n t with the Big Bang model.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c) Calcula t e the tem p e r a t u r e of the unive r s e whe n the peak wavel e n g t h
of the CMB was equal to the wavel e n g t h of red light (7.0 × 10 –7 m).
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(Tota l 5 mark s )

93. This ques tion is abou t the main sequ e n c e sta r Khad (Phi Orionis).
The luminosity of Khad is 2.0 × 10 4 L S , whe r e L S is the luminosity of the

Sun.
(a) Assumin g that the expon e n t n in the mas s–lumi no si ty relation is 3.5,
show that the mass of Khad is about 17 solar mas s e s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) Outline the likely evolution of the sta r Khad afte r it leave s the main
sequ e n c e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
94. This ques tion is abou t Hubbl e’s law and the age of the unive r s e .

(a) (i) Stat e Hubbl e’s law.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Stat e why Hubbl e’s law cannot be use d to det e r m i n e the dista n c e
from Eart h to near by galaxie s, suc h as Andro m e d a .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
1
(b) (i) Show that H 0 is an esti m a t e of the age of the
univer s e, wher e H 0 is the Hubbl e const a n t .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Assumi n g H 0 = 80 km s –1 M pc –1 , estim a t e the age of the

univer s e in secon d s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
95. This ques tion is abou t modula tio n.
In orde r to test a tem po r a r y radio com m u ni c a ti o n link, an audio signal is

broa d c a s t using amplit u d e modul a tio n (AM). The powe r spect r u m of the
res ulti ng carri e r wave is show n below.

(a) Use the inform a t io n in the powe r spec t r u m to det e r m i n e the
(i) frequ e n c y of the carri e r wave.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) frequ e n c y of the audio signal.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) ban d wi d t h of this signal.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b) (i) Disting ui s h betw e e n AM and frequ e n c y modul a tio n

(FM).
AM: .................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
FM: ..................................................................................................
.................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Outline on e advan t a g e and on e disa dv a n t a g e of using FM as

oppos e d to AM for the tra n s m i s sio n.
Advant a g e : ......................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
Disadva n t a g e : .................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

96. This ques tion is abou t data tran s m i s sio n syste m s .
The block diagr a m below rep r e s e n t s an elect r o nic syste m , S 1 , which

conver t s an analog u e input signal into a serial digital outpu t signal rea dy
for tran s m i s sio n. It involves thre e sepa r a t e syste m blocks labelle d A, B and
C.
(a) Stat e whet h e r the signal betw e e n block A and block B is analog u e ,
digital or multiplex e d.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) Stat e the function of syste m block A.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(c) A similar syste m , S 2 , is bas e d on the sam e syste m blocks as S 1 , but

has fewer signal lines betw e e n block B and block C, as show n below.
Explain what differ e n c e s , if any, the r e are betw e e n S 1 and S 2 with

res p e c t to the maxim u m quality of the rep r o d u c t io n of the analog u e
signal after tran s m i s sio n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(d) The serial digit al outp u t signal is tra n s m i t t e d using an optic al fibre
link. The atte n u a t i o n per unit lengt h of the optic al fibre is –4 dB km –1 .
(i) Define atten u a tio n .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) The input powe r to the fibre optic cable is 100 mW and the
outp u t powe r at the end of the cable is 1 mW. Dete r m i n e the
lengt h of the cable.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Stat e two proce s s e s that mus t take place in orde r for this digital
signal to be tran s m i t t e d over a very long dist a n c e .
1. .....................................................................................................
..................
2. .....................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

97. This ques tion is abou t satellit es .
A geos t a t io n a r y satellite is used by one count r y to broa d c a s t infor m a ti o n to

a differ e n t count r y.
(a) Stat e which part of the elect r o m a g n e t i c spe ct r u m is use d for this type
of com m u ni c a t i o n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) Explain two disadv a n t a g e s of using a polar satellite for this type of
com m u ni c a t io n, when comp a r e d with using a geost a tio n a r y satellite.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c) Outline on e possible ethic al issue associa t e d with this broa d c a s t .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 4 mark s )
98. This ques tion is abou t a Schmit t trigg e r .
The diagr a m below show s a Sch mit t trigg e r circ uit bas e d on an oper a t io n a l
amplifie r (op- amp).

The outpu t of this Schmit t trigg e r is positive satu r a ti o n (+13 V) or nega tive
satu r a ti o n (–13 V).

(a) Stat e two prop e r t i e s of an ideal op- amp.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) Deter m i n e the input value tha t will caus e the outpu t to switc h from –
13 V to +1 3 V.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c) Explain how a Schmit t trigg e r can be use d to res h a p e a digital puls e.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(Tota l 8 mark s )

99. This ques tion is abou t a mobile phon e netwo r k.
Erin is a pass e n g e r on a train making a call to a sta n d a r d fixed telep h o n e

line (“landline”) from her mobile phon e. The train move s Erin betw e e n
adjac e n t com m u ni c a t io n cells. Outline the cha n g e s , if any, tha t take place
in the
(a) cellular excha n g e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) public switch e d telep h o n e netwo r k (PSTN).
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 2 mark s )
10 0 . This ques tion is abou t dispe r sio n.
(a) Stat e an appr oxi m a t e value for the wavele n g t h of visible light.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) Descri b e what is mean t by dispe r si o n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

(2)

(c) A nar r o w bea m , consisti n g of a mixtu r e of red and blue light, is
inciden t upon a rect a n g u l a r glass block. The nor m al to the incide n t
surfac e is show n.
On the diag r a m above, dra w labelle d lines to show the pat h s of the
red and blue bea m s , as they pass thro u g h the glass block and out to
the air on the othe r side.
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
10 1 . This ques tion is abou t a convex lens.
The diagr a m below, draw n to scale, shows a small object O plac e d in front
of a thin convex (conver gi n g) lens. The focal points of the lens are show n,
labelled F. The lens is repr e s e n t e d by the straig h t line XY.

(a) (i) Define the ter m focal point .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) On the diagr a m above, cons t r u c t the pat hs of two rays in orde r to
locat e the position of the imag e form e d by the lens. Label the
imag e I.
(3)
(iii) Explain whet h e r the imag e is real or virtual.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b) A conver gi n g lens, of focal lengt h 5.0 cm, is use d as a simple

magnifying glass to view an object of lengt h 0.80 cm. The obse rv e r’s
eye is very close to the lens. The image is form e d at the nea r point (25
cm).
(i) Dete r mi n e the dista n c e of the objec t from the lens.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Dete r mi n e the lengt h of the imag e.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
10 2 . This ques tion is abou t using a diffra c tio n gra tin g to view the emission
spect r u m of sodiu m.
Light from a sodiu m disch a r g e tube is incide n t nor m a lly upon a diffra ctio n
gratin g having 8.00 × 10 5 lines per met r e . The spec t r u m cont ai n s a doubl e
yellow line of wavelen g t h s 589 nm and 590 nm.
(a) Deter m i n e the angul a r sepa r a t i o n of the two lines whe n viewe d in the
secon d order spect r u m .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)

(b) Stat e why it is mor e difficult to obse rv e the doubl e yellow line whe n
viewe d in the first orde r spect r u m .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
10 3 . This ques tion is abou t X-rays.
Elect r o n s are accel e r a t e d thro u g h a pote n ti al differ e n c e of 25 kV and strike

a molybd e n u m targ e t .
The res ulti n g X-ray spect r u m is show n below.
The accel e r a t i n g pot en ti al differ e n c e is cha n g e d to 15 kV.
(a) Calcula t e the minim u m wavele n g t h of the X-rays produ c e d .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) On the gra p h above, sketc h the X-ray spect r u m that would be
prod u c e d .
(3)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

10 4 . This ques tion is abou t wedg e film inte rfe r e n c e .
One flat, glass slide is place d at an angle on top of a secon d identic al slide.
The slides are in cont a c t along one short edge and are sepa r a t e d at the
othe r edge by a thin piece of pape r, as show n below.
A thin wedg e of air of variabl e thickn e s s , t , is tra p p e d betw e e n the two

slides. The arr a n g e m e n t is viewe d nor m a lly from above, using light of
wavele n g t h 590 nm. The glass plate s are coat e d, so that reflection only
takes place at the botto m surfa c e of the top plat e and the top surfa c e of the
botto m plate.
A series of str aig h t bright and dark fringe s , equally sepa r a t e d and par allel
to the shor t edge of the slides, is see n.
(a) Deduc e that the thickn e s s of the air wedg e t that gives rise to a brigh t
1
fringe, is given by 2 t = (m + 2 )λ.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) The lengt h of the air wedg e , L , is 8.2 cm. The bright fringe s are each
sepa r a t e d by a dista n c e of 1.2 mm. Calcula t e the thickn e s s of the
pape r.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
10 5 . This ques tion is abou t lengt h contr a c ti o n and simult a n e i ty.
(a) Define proper lengt h.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) A space s hi p is travelling to the right at spe e d 0.75 c, thro u g h a tunn el

which is open at both ends. Obse rv e r A is sta n di n g at the cent r e of
one side of the tunn el. Obse rv e r A, for whom the tunn el is at rest,
mea s u r e s the lengt h of the tunn el to be 240 m and the lengt h of the
space s hi p to be 200 m. The diag r a m below shows this situa tion from
the pers p e c t ive of obse rv e r A.

Observ e r B, for whom the spac e s hi p is station a r y, is sta n di n g at the
cent r e of the spac e s hi p.

(i) Calculat e the Lorent z factor, γ, for this situa tio n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Calculat e the lengt h of the tunn el accor di n g to obs e rv e r B.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) Calculat e the lengt h of the spa c e s hi p accor di n g to obse rv e r B.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iv) Accor din g to obse rv e r A, the spa c e s hi p is compl e t e ly inside the

tunn el for a shor t time. Sta t e and explain whet h e r or not,
accor di n g to obs erv e r B, the spac e s hi p is eve r compl e t ely inside
the tunn el.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) Two sour ce s of light are locat e d at eac h end of the tunn el. The
diagr a m below show s this situa tion from the pers p e c tiv e of obse rv e r
A.
Accordi n g to observ e r A, at the insta n t whe n obse rv e r B pas s e s

obse rv e r A, the two sour c e s of light emit a flash. Obse rv e r A see s the
two flashe s simult a n e o u s ly. Discus s whet h e r or not obse r v e r B sees
the two flashe s simult a n e o u s ly.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

10 6 . This ques tion is abou t relative velocitie s and ene r gy at rela tivistic spe e d s .
Two identic al rocket s are moving along the sam e str ai g h t line as viewe d
from Eart h.
Rocket 1 is moving away from the Eart h at spe e d 0.80 c rela tiv e to the
Eart h and rocket 2 is moving away from rocke t 1 at spe e d 0.60 c relat iv e
to rock e t 1 .
(a) Calcula t e the velocity of rocke t 2 rela tive to the Eart h, using the
(i) Galilean tran sfo r m a t i o n equ a tio n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) relativistic tran sfo r m a t i o n equ a tio n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b) Comm e n t on your ans w e r s in (a).
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................

.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) The rest mas s of rocke t 1 is 1.0 × 10 3 kg. Dete r mi n e the relat ivi s t i c
kinetic ener gy of rocke t 1, as me a s u r e d by an obs e rv e r on Eart h.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
10 7 . This ques tion is abou t the Michels o n–Mo rl ey expe ri m e n t .
The diagr a m below show s the ess e n ti al feat u r e s of the app a r a t u s used in
the Michelso n–Mo rl ey experi m e n t .

(a) Stat e and explain how this appa r a t u s was use d to try to mea s u r e the
spee d of the Eart h relative to the ethe r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(b) Stat e the res ult of this expe ri m e n t and explain how this res ult
suppo r t s the special theo ry of relativity.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

10 8 . This ques tion is abou t gravit a tio n a l red- shift.
Two identic al laser s are situa t e d on the surfa c e of the Eart h. One is
direct e d horizon t ally towa r d s obse rv e r A, who me a s u r e s the frequ e n c y to
be 4.62 × 10 14 Hz. The othe r is dire c t e d vertic ally upw a r d s towa r d s
obse rv e r B, who is at a height of 1.00 × 10 2 m
(a) (i) Stat e how the freq u e n c y as mea s u r e d by obs e rv e r B

comp a r e s with the freq u e n c y as mea s u r e d by obse rv e r A.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Calculat e the differ e n c e in freq u e n c y bet w e e n the lase r light as

meas u r e d by obse rv e r s A and B.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Stat e on e assu m p ti o n tha t you ma d e in (a)(ii).
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) The laser s are now place d on a spa c e s hi p, which is acc el e r a t i n g
upw a r d s at a const a n t rate of 9.81 m s –2 , far away from any othe r
mas s e s as shown below. The dista n c e of obse rv e r D from the lase r is
1.00 × 10 2 m. Obse rv e r C is at the botto m of the spa c e s hi p.
Explain, with refer e n c e to the equivale n c e principle, the frequ e n ci e s

mea s u r e d by observ e r s C and D, as comp a r e d to obse rv e r s A and B.
.........................................................................................................................
.............
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

10 9 . This ques tion is abou t soun d inte nsi ty levels.
As part of a safety inspec tion of a new factory, a data logge r mea s u r e s the
inten si ty of the soun d s gen e r a t e d by the mac hi n e s . The soun d inten sity
levels nee d to be within acce p t a bl e limits.
(a) Define intensit y and intensit y level .
Inten sit y: .................................................................................................

.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Inten sit y
level: ...............................................................................................
..............
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) The data logge r is moved betw e e n five differ e n t location s in the
factory (A → E).
The readi n g s are show n below.
Rea di n g on dat a log g e r /

Loca t i o n
mW m –2
A 302
B 158
C 891
D 413
E 524
(i) Dete r mi n e the intensi ty level at the noisies t location.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) Using your ans w e r to (b)(i), discus s whe t h e r or not it is
nece s s a r y for the mac hin e ope r a t o r s to use ear prot e c t o r s whe n
workin g in this factory.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) One possibl e effect on hea ri n g of long- ter m expos u r e to noise is

tinnitu s . Outline what is me a n t by tinnitu s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
11 0 . This ques tion is abou t medic al imagin g.
A patie n t is susp e c t e d of having a parti al blocka g e in his intes ti n e as it

leads away from his stom a c h . Possible me dic al imagi n g tech ni q u e s includ e
X-ray photo g r a p h y, ultr a s o u n d and the use of an endos c o p e .
(a) When prod u ci n g the X-ray photo g r a p h , the dose is kept to a minim u m
by a tech ni q u e called enh a n c e m e n t .
(i) Outline why the dos e nee d s to be kept to a minim u m .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................

..................
(2)

(ii) Describ e on e possible enha n c e m e n t tech ni q u e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Discus s any extr a proc e d u r e s that are nee d e d to get an

app r o p r i a t e imag e of the inte s tin e in this situa tion.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b) A succe s sf ul ultr a s o u n d scan relies on cha n g e s of acous tic impe d a n c e

arou n d the struc t u r e being imag e d .
(i) Define acous tic impe d a n c e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Stat e the SI unit in which it is me a s u r e d .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) Explain, in ter m s of acous tic impe d a n c e , why gel nee d s to be
applied on the surfac e of the skin befor e the ultra s o u n d scan.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c) The blocka g e is cut out and re mov e d in a proc e d u r e which involves a
laser and an endos co p e .
(i) Outline how it is possible to use a lase r as a scalpel (knife).
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) By refer r i n g to the role playe d by optic fibre s, disc us s how an

endos co p e is used in this situa tion.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 14 mark s )

11 1 . This ques tion is abou t radiation in me dicin e.
A nucle a r stres s test is used to inves tig a t e the blood flow within a patie n t’s
hea r t durin g exer cis e.
The radioisot o p e thalliu m- 201 is inject e d into the patie n t’s blood and a
gam m a- ray det ec t o r is then use d to recor d its distrib u tio n within the hea r t
muscle.
The following infor m a t io n about this proc e d u r e is availabl e.
Mass of patien t = 75 kg
Dose equivale n t for a nucle a r stre s s test = 25 mSv
(a) The quality factor of the ga m m a- rays is 1. Dete r m i n e the ene r gy

absor b e d by the patien t as a res ult of the thallium injection.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(b) Sugg e s t whet h e r you would expe c t the ene r gy calcula t e d in (a) to
res ult in a significan t incre a s e in the patie n t’s tem p e r a t u r e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(c) On aver a g e , 1 in every 1000 patie n t s who und e r t a k e a nucle a r str e s s
test go on to develop canc e r as a result of the radioa c tive dos e that
they received durin g the test.
(i) By refer r i n g to the conc e p t of bala n c e d risk, outline why the test
may still be of benefit to the patie n t .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) The hospit al tech nicia n who admini st e r s the test could also
receive an incr e a s e d dos e.
Outline how film badg e s are use d to prot e c t tec hni ci a n s from
receiving exces sive dos es of radia tio n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
11 2 . This ques tion is abou t meso n s .
(a) Stat e what is mea n t by an exch a n g e par ticle.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) In 1935, the physicist Hide ki Yukawa pre dic t e d that the stron g
inter a c ti o n betw e e n nucleon s was medi a t e d by particle s calle d
meson s . Given that the rang e of the stron g inte r a c t io n is
appr oxi m a t ely 1.5 × 10 –15 m, calcula t e a possible value for the res t
mas s of a meso n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c) A meson called the pion was det e c t e d in cosmic ray reac tio n s in 1947
by Powell and Occhialini. The pion com e s in thre e possibl e cha r g e
stat e s: π + , π – and π 0 The Feyn m a n diagr a m below rep r e s e n t s a
possible reac tion in which a pion particip a t e s .
Stat e and explain whet h e r the meso n prod u c e d is a π + , π – or π 0 .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(d) Stat e the possible spin num b e r s of meso n s and explain your answ e r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(e) Explain why, accor di n g to the qua r k model, it is not possible for a
particl e to consist of two up qua r k s only.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

11 3 . This ques tion is abou t accel er a ti n g par ticle s.
The diagr a m below show s the basic struc t u r e of a cyclotr o n.
Char g e d particle s are emitt e d from a sour c e at the cent r e . They move in a
vacuu m throu g h two D-shap e d cavitie s or “dee s”. Ther e is a unifor m
mag n e ti c field direc t e d into the pag e, within the region of the dee s.
(a) Outline why the voltag e applie d acros s the dee s must cha n g e polarity
every half revolutio n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) Show that the frequ e n c y, f, of the applied pote n ti al differ e n c e is given
by the expr e s sio n
qB
f = 2 πm
whe r e
q = char g e of particle
m = mas s of particle
B = mag n e t i c field stre n g t h .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c) Stat e two disadv a n t a g e s of using a cyclotr o n rath e r tha n a

synch r o t r o n to accel e r a t e particle s.
1. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(d) Explain why it is nece s s a r y to acc ele r a t e particl e s to high spee d s in

orde r to crea t e new par ticl e s of large mass.

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(e) High ene r gy particles are used to prob e the nucle u s. Explain why
alph a particle s would give bett e r resolution tha n proton s moving at
the sam e spee d.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 12 mark s )
11 4 . This ques tion is abou t ener gy and cons e rv a tio n laws.
Two proton s moving at the sam e spe e d in opposit e direc tio n s, collide with
each othe r produ ci n g thr e e proto n s and an anti- proton, as show n below.
p + p →p + p + p + p
(a) Calcula t e the minim u m possibl e kinetic ene r gy of on e of the colliding

proto n s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) Explain why the following rea c tion is not possible, even if the colliding
particl es have enou g h ene r gy.
p + n →p + p + p
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )
11 5 . This ques tion is abou t cosmology and string s .
(a) The bindin g ener gy of a helium nucle u s is abou t 28 MeV. Calcula t e

the tem p e r a t u r e of the unive r s e above which helium nuclei could not
have exist e d.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) Stat e two fund a m e n t a l differ e n c e s betw e e n the sta n d a r d model and
the theo ry of string s.
1. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
2. .............................................................................................................

.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )

11 6 . Which of the following will red uc e ran do m erro r s in an expe ri m e n t ?
A. Using an instr u m e n t having a gre a t e r precision
B. Checkin g the calibr a ti o n of the inst r u m e n t use d
C. Checkin g for zero erro r on the instr u m e n t use d
D. Repe a ti n g readi n g s
(Tot al 1 mar k )
11 7 . A body accele r a t e s from rest with a unifor m accele r a t i o n a for a time t . The
unce r t ai n t y in a is 8 % and the unc e r t a i n t y in t is 4 %. The unc e r t a i n t y in
the spee d is
A. 32 %.
B. 12 %.
C. 8 %.
D. 2 %.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
11 8 . Which of the following lists two scala r qua n ti tie s ?
A. emf, mom e n t u m
B. emf, weigh t
C. impuls e, kinetic ener gy
D. magn e t i c flux, kinetic ener gy

(Tot al 1 mar k )

11 9 . The gra p h shows the variation with time t of the acc el e r a t io n a of an objec t.
Which of the following is the cha n g e in velocity of the object in the time
interv al 0 to 4 s?
A. –8 m s –1
B. –4 m s –1
C. +4 m s –1
D. +8 m s –1
(Tot al 1 mar k )

12 0 . A car accele r a t e s from rest. The accele r a t i o n incr e a s e s with time. Which
grap h shows the variatio n with time t of the spe e d v of the car?
(Tot al 1 mar k )
12 1 . Which of the following is the condition for a body to be in tra n sl a tio n a l

equilibriu m ?
A. The result a n t force on the body in any direc tio n is zero.
B. The velocity of the body in any direc tion is zero.
C. No exte r n al force is acting on the body.
D. No work is done on the body.

(Tot al 1 mar k )

12 2 . A stone attac h e d to a string is moving in a horizon t a l circle. The const a n t
spee d of the stone is v .
The diagr a m below show s the ston e in two differ e n t positions , X and Y.
Which of the following shows the direc tio n of the cha n g e of velocity of the
ston e when moving from position X to position Y?
(Tot al 1 mar k )

12 3 . The gra p h shows the variation with force F of the exte nsio n s of a sprin g.
The work done in chan gi n g the exte n sion of the sprin g from 3.0 cm to 6.0
cm is
A. 15 N cm.
B. 30 N cm.
C. 45 N cm.
D. 60 N cm.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
12 4 . The ener gy of the molec ul e s of an ideal gas is
A. ther m al only.
B. ther m al and pote n ti al.
C. poten ti al and kinetic.
D. kinetic only.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

12 5 . Oil with volum e V has specific heat capa city c at tem p e r a t u r e T . The
density of oil is ρ.
Which of the following is the the r m a l capa ci ty of the oil?
A. ρcV
cV
B. ρ
C. ρcVT
cV
D. ρT
(Tot al 1 mar k )
12 6 . The volum e of an ideal gas in a cont ai n e r is incre a s e d at const a n t

tem p e r a t u r e . Which of the following sta t e m e n t s is/ar e cor r e c t abou t the
molecul e s of the gas?
I. Their spee d rem ai n s const a n t .
II. The frequ e n cy of collisions of molec ul e s with unit are a of the

cont ai n e r wall decr e a s e s .
III. The force betw e e n the m dec r e a s e s .
A. I only
B. I and II only
C. I and III only
D. II and III only

(Tot al 1 mar k )

12 7 . A particle oscillat es with simple har m o ni c motion with period T .
At time t = 0, the particl e has its maxim u m displ ac e m e n t . Which gra p h

shows the variation with time t of the kinetic ene r gy E k of the par ticle?
(Tot al 1 mar k )

12 8 . An object is und e r g oi n g simple har m o nic motion with light dam pi n g. The
natu r al frequ e n c y of oscillation of the objec t is f 0 . A periodic force of
frequ e n c y f is applied to the object. Which of the following gra p h s best
shows how the amplit u d e a of oscillation of the object varie s with f?
(Tot al 1 mar k )

12 9 . The gra p h shows meas u r e m e n t s of the heigh t h of sea level at differe n t
times t in the Bay of Fundy.
Which of the following gives the app r oxi m a t e am plit u d e and period of the
tides?
Amplit u d e Peri o d
A. 6.5 m 6 hour s
B. 13 m 12 hour s
C. 6.5 m 12 hour s
D. 13 m 6 hour s
(Tot al 1 mar k )

λ
13 0 . Two waves meet at a point. The waves have a path differ e n c e of 4 . The
phas e differe n c e betw e e n the waves is
π
A. 8 rad.
π
B. 4 rad.
π
C. 2 rad.
D. π rad.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
13 1 . Two elect r o d e s , sepa r a t e d by a dista n c e d , in a vacuu m are maint ai n e d at a

cons t a n t pote n ti al differ e n c e . An elect r o n, accel e r a t e d from one elect r o d e
to the other , gains kinetic ener gy E k . The dist a n c e betw e e n the elect r o d e s
1
is now chan g e d to 3 d .
What is the gain in kinetic ener gy of an elect r o n that is accele r a t e d from

one elect r o d e to the other ?
Ek
A. 3
B. Ek
C. 3 Ek
D. 9 Ek
(Tot al 1 mar k )

13 2 . The gra p h shows the I–V char a c t e r i s ti c s of two resisto r s .
When resisto r s X and Y are conn e c t e d in serie s, the cur r e n t in the resisto r s
is 2.0 A. What is the resist a n c e of the serie s com bin a tio n of X and Y?
A. 7.0 Ω
B. 1.3 Ω
C. 1.1 Ω
D. 0.14 Ω
(Tot al 1 mar k )
13 3 . The definition of the amp e r e refe r s to the
A. num b e r of elect r o n s passin g a given point per secon d.
B. force betw e e n par allel cur r e n t- car ryin g condu c t o r s .
C. powe r dissip at e d per unit resist a n c e .
D. amou n t of char g e tran sf e r r e d per secon d.

(Tot al 1 mar k )

13 4 . A space c r af t travels away from Eart h in a strai g h t line with its motor s shut
down. At one insta n t the spee d of the spac e c r a f t is 5.4 km s –1 . After a time
of 600 s, the spee d is 5.1 km s –1 . The aver a g e gravit a tio n a l field stre n g t h
acting on the spac e c r af t during this time inte rv al is
A. 5.0 × 10 –4 N kg –1
B. 3.0 × 10 –2 N kg –1
C. 5.0 × 10 –1 N kg –1
D. 30 N kg –1
(Tot al 1 mar k )
13 5 . Two isol ated point char g e s , –7 μC and +2 μC, are at a fixed dist a n c e apa r t .
At which point is it possible for the elect ric field str e n g t h to be zero?
(not to scale)
(Tot al 1 mar k )
13 6 . A long str ai g h t wire carri es an elect ric cur r e n t per p e n di c ul a r ly out of the
pap e r . Which of the following repr e s e n t s the ma gn e t i c field patt e r n due to
the curr e n t ?
(Tot al 1 mar k )

13 7 . Which nucleon s in a nucleu s are involve d in the Coulom b inte r a c ti o n and
the stron g short- ran g e nuclea r inte r a c ti o n?
Coul o m b int er a c t i o n Str o n g sh or t- ran g e

int e r a c t i o n
A. proton s proto n s , neut r o n s
B. proton s neut r o n s
C. proton s proto n s
D. proton s , neut r o n s neut r o n s
(Tot al 1 mar k )
13 8 . Two sam pl e s of radioa ctiv e subs t a n c e s X and Y have the sam e initial
activity. The half- life of X is T and the half- life of Y is 3 T . After a time of 3 T
the ratio
a c t ivit of
y s u b s t a n cX
e
a c t ivit of
y s u b s t a n cY
e is
A. 8.
B. 4.
1
C. 4.
1
D. 8.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

13 9 . The nuclea r equ atio n below is an exa m pl e of the tra ns m u t a t i o n of mer c u r y
into gold.
2
1H  18909H g  197
7 9 Au + X
The particle X is a
A. gam m a- ray photon.
B. heliu m nucleu s .
C. proto n.
D. neut r o n.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
14 0 . The Sank ey diag r a m of a fossil- fuelled powe r station is show n below.
Which of the following bes t identifies the the r m a l ene r gy rem ov e d by wat e r
and the useful elect ric al ener gy outpu t of the station?
Ther m a l en er g y Us e f u l el e c t r i c a l en e r g y
re m o v e d out p u t
A. 2 1
B. 2 3
C. 3 1
D. 1 2
(Tot al 1 mar k )

14 1 . World ener gy resou r c e s include coal, nucle a r fuel and geot h e r m a l ene r gy.
Which of the following lists thes e resou r c e s in orde r of pri m a r y ene r gy use
in the world?
A. nuclea r , geot h e r m a l , coal
B. nuclea r , coal, geot h e r m a l
C. coal, geot h e r m a l , nuclea r
D. coal, nucle a r , geot h e r m a l

(Tot al 1 mar k )
14 2 . Which of the following proce s s e s leads to the produ c tio n of a nucle u s of

plutoni u m- 239 from a nucleu s of ura ni u m- 238?
A. Neut r o n capt u r e by uraniu m nucle u s
B. Radioa ctive decay of uraniu m nucle u s
C. Elect r o n capt u r e by uraniu m nucle u s
D. Nucle a r fission of urani u m nucle u s

(Tot al 1 mar k )

14 3 . Wate r is cont ai n e d in a tidal basin behin d a dam. The wat e r has a dept h h
at high tide and zero at low tide, as show n in the diagr a m .
The gravit a tion al pote n ti al ene r gy of the wate r stor e d in the basin betw e e n
a high tide and a low tide is propo r tio n a l to
A. h.
B. h.
C. h 2.
D. h 3.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

14 4 . Surfac e X has a tem p e r a t u r e T X and emissivity ε x . Surfa c e Y has a
tem p e r a t u r e T Y and emis sivity ε y . The two surfa c e s emit radi a tion at the
sam e rat e.
TX
What is the ratio TY ?
1
εy 4
 
ε 
A.  x 
1
εx 4
 
εy 
B.  
4
εy 
 
ε 
C.  x 
4
εX 
 
 εy 
D.  
(Tot al 1 mar k )
14 5 . Large area s of rainfor e s t s are cut down and bur n e d every year. The result
of thes e actions is
A. red uc e d albed o.
B. red uc e d car bo n fixation.
C. incr e a s e d evapo r a t io n rat e.
D. incr e a s e d mas s of atmos p h e r i c met h a n e .

(Tot al 1 mar k )

14 6 . Data analysis ques tion.
The spee d v of waves on the surfa c e of dee p wate r dep e n d s only on the
wavele n g t h λ of the waves. The dat a gath e r e d from a par tic ul a r region of
the Atlantic Ocea n are plott e d below.
The unce r t a i n t y in the speed v is ±0. 3 0 m s –1 and the unc e r t a i n t y in λ is too

small to be show n on the diagr a m .
(a) Stat e, with refer e n c e to the gra p h,
(i) why v is not directly propo r tio n a l to λ.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) the value of v for λ = 39 m.
.........................................................................................................

..................
(1)

(b) It is sugg e s t e d that the rela tion s hi p betw e e n v and λ is of the form
v = a λ
whe r e a is a const a n t . To test the validity of this hypot h e s i s, values of

v 2 agains t λ are plott e d below.
(i) Use your answ e r to (a)(ii) to show that the absolut e unce r t a i n t y
in v 2 for a wavele n g t h of 39 m is ±5 m 2 s –2 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) The absolut e uncer t a i n t y in v 2 for a wavele n g t h of 2.5 m is ±1 m 2

s –2 . Using this value and the value in (b)(i), const r u c t error bars
for v 2 at the dat a points for

λ = 2.5 m and 39 m.
(1)

(iii) Stat e why the plott e d dat a in (b)(ii) sugg e s t that it is likely that v
is propo r tio n al to λ.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iv) Use the grap h above to det e r m i n e the cons t a n t a .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
k
(v) Theory shows that a = 2 π . Dete r mi n e a value for k .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

14 7 . This ques tion is abou t kine m a t i c s.
Lucy stan d s on the edg e of a vertic al cliff and throw s a ston e vertic ally
upwa r d s .
The stone leaves her han d with a spe e d of 15 m s –1 at the insta n t her hand
is 80 m above the surfac e of the sea. Air resist a n c e is negligibl e and the
accele r a ti o n of free fall is 10 m s –2 .
(a) Calcula t e the maxim u m heigh t rea c h e d by the ston e as me a s u r e d from

the point wher e it is throw n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) Deter m i n e the time for the stone to rea c h the surfa c e of the sea afte r
leaving Lucy’s hand.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
14 8 . This ques tion is abou t inter n al ene r gy and the r m a l ene r gy (hea t).
(a) Disting ui s h betw e e n inter n a l ene r gy and the r m a l ene r gy.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(b) Descri b e, with refer e n c e to the ene r gy of the molec ul e s , the

differ e n c e in inter n al ener gy of a piec e of iron and the inter n al ene r gy
of an ideal gas.
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) A piece of iron is place d in a kiln until it rea c h e s the tem p e r a t u r e θ of
the kiln. The iron is then quickly tra n sf e r r e d to wat e r held in a
ther m ally insulat e d cont ai n e r . The wat e r is stirr e d until it rea c h e s a
ste a dy tem p e r a t u r e . The following data are availa bl e.
Ther m al capa city of the piece of iron = 60 J

K–1
Ther m al capa city of the wate r = 2.0 ×
10 3 J K –1
Initial tem p e r a t u r e of the wat e r = 16 °C
Final tem p e r a t u r e of the wat e r = 45 °C
The ther m al capa ci ty of the cont ai n e r and insula tion is negligible.
(i) Stat e an expr e s s io n, in ter m s of θ and the above dat a, for the
ene r gy tran sf e r of the iron in cooling from the tem p e r a t u r e of the
kiln to the final tem p e r a t u r e of the wat e r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Calculat e the incre a s e in inte r n a l ene r gy of the wat e r as the iron
cools in the wat e r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) Use your answ e r s to (c)(i) and (c)(ii) to det e r m i n e θ.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

14 9 . This ques tion is abou t simple har m o ni c motion (SHM) and a wave in a
string.
(a) By refer e n c e to simple har m o ni c motion, stat e wha t is mea n t by

amplit u d e.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) A liquid is cont ain e d in a U-tube.
Dia g r a m 1 Dia gr a m 2
The pres s u r e on the liquid in one side of the tube is incr e a s e d so tha t
the liquid is displac e d as show n in diag r a m 2. Whe n the pres s u r e is
sudd e nly relea s e d the liquid oscillat e s .
The dam pi n g of the oscillation s is small.
(i) Describ e what is mea n t by da m pi n g.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) The displac e m e n t of the liquid surfa c e from its equilibri u m
position is x . The accele r a ti o n a of the liquid in the tube is given
by the expr e s si o n
2g
 x
a = l
wher e g is the accele r a t io n of free fall and l is the total lengt h of

the liquid colum n.
The total lengt h of the liquid colum n in the tube is 0.32 m.
Dete r mi n e the period of oscillation.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(c) A wave is travelling along a strin g. The string can be modelle d as a

single line of particles and each particl e execu t e s simple har m o ni c
motion. The period of oscillation of the particle s is 0.80 s.
The grap h shows the displa c e m e n t y of par t of the string at time t = 0.

The dist an c e along the string is d.

(i) On the grap h, draw an arro w to show the dire c tion of motion of
par ticl e P at the point mark e d on the string.
(1)
(ii) Dete r mi n e the mag nit u d e of the velocity of particle P.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(iii) Show that the spee d of the wave is 5.0 m s –1 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(iv) On the grap h above, label with the lette r X the position of

par ticl e P at t = 0.40 s.
(1)
(Tot al 15 mark s )
15 0 . This ques tion is abou t unified atomic mass unit and a nucle a r rea c tio n.
(a) Define the ter m unified atomic mas s unit .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) The mas s of a nucleu s of rut h e rf o r di u m- 254 is 254.1 0 0 1 u. Calcula t e
the mas s in GeV c –2 .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(c) In 1919, Ruthe r fo r d produ c e d the first artificial nucle a r tra n s m u t a t i o n

by bomb a r di n g nitrog e n with α-par ticle s. The rea c tion is repr e s e n t e d
by the following equ atio n.
14
α+ 7N  187 O + X
(i) Identify X.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) The following dat a are availa bl e for the rea c tio n.
Rest mass of α = 3.742 8 GeV c –2

14
Rest mass of 7N = 13.09 4 2 GeV c –2
17
Rest mass of 8O + X = 16.83 8 3 GeV c –2
The initial kinetic ene r gy of the α-par ticle is 7.68 MeV.

Dete r mi n e the sum of the kinetic ene r gi e s of the oxyge n nucle u s
and X. (Assu m e that the nitrog e n nucle u s is station a r y.)
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(d) The reac tion in (c) prod u c e s oxyge n (O-17). Othe r isotop e s of oxyge n
includ e O-19 which is radioa c tive with a half- life of 30 s.
(i) Stat e what is mean t by the ter m isotop e s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Define the ter m radioactiv e half- life .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(e) A nucleu s of the isotop e O-19 dec ays to a stable nucle u s of fluorin e.
The half- life of O-19 is 30 s. At time t = 0, a sam pl e of O-19 cont ai n s a
larg e num b e r N 0 nuclei of O-19.
On the grid below, draw a gra p h to show the variation with time t of
the num b e r N of O-19 nuclei rem ai ni n g in the sam pl e . You should
conside r a time of t = 0 to t = 120 s.

(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
15 1 . This ques tion is abou t power prod u c tio n and global war mi n g.
(a) In any cyclical proc es s design e d to continu o u s ly conve r t the r m a l

ener gy to work, some ene r gy is always deg r a d e d . Explain what is
mea n t by degr a d e d ener gy.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) A nuclea r powe r station uses ura ni u m- 235 (U- 235) as fuel. Outline the
(i) proce s s e s and ener gy chan g e s that occur thro u g h which the r m a l
ene r gy is produ c e d .
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(ii) role of the heat exch a n g e r of the rea c t o r and the tur bi n e in the
gen e r a t io n of elect ric al ene r gy.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(c) Identify on e proce s s in the powe r station whe r e ene r gy is degr a d e d .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(d) The maxim u m powe r outp u t of the Drax coal- fired powe r station in the
UK is 4.0 GW. Dete r mi n e the minim u m mas s of pur e U-235 that would
be requir e d by a nuclea r powe r sta tion to provide the sam e maxim u m
annu al ener gy outpu t as the Drax powe r station.
Ener gy density of U-235 = 82 TJ kg –1

1 year = 3.2 × 10 7 s
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

(2)

(e) The Drax powe r station produ c e s an enor m o u s amou n t of carbo n
dioxide, a gas classified as a gre e n h o u s e gas. Outline, with refe r e n c e
to the vibratio n al beh aviou r of molec ul e s of car bo n dioxide, wha t is
mea n t by a gre e n h o u s e gas.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(f) It has bee n sugg e s t e d that the prod u c tio n of gre e n h o u s e gas e s by
coal- fired powe r station s has incre a s e d global war mi n g . One piec e of
eviden c e to suppo r t this sugg e s ti o n is the incre a s e in sea- level due to
an incr e a s e in tem p e r a t u r e of the ocea n s . Over the past 100 yea rs it is
sugg e s t e d that sea- levels have rise n by 6.4 × 10 –2 m due to volum e
expan si o n.
Using the following dat a, det e r m i n e the aver a g e rise in tem p e r a t u r e

in the top levels of the ocea n s in the last 100 years.
Mean dept h of ocea n s that is affect e d by global war mi n g =

4.0 × 10 2 m
Coefficien t of volum e expa n sio n of sea wat e r =
5.1 × 10 –5 K–1
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................

.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 18 mark s )

15 2 . This ques tion is abou t elect ri c cha r g e .
(a) A plastic rod XY is held at end X. The end Y is rubb e d with a piec e of
cloth and, as a res ult, the end Y beco m e s elect ric ally cha r g e d .
The proce d u r e is now rep e a t e d using a coppe r rod and it is found tha t
the copp e r rod rem ai n s elect ric ally neut r a l. Explain thes e
obse rv a tio n s in ter m s of the prop e r ti e s of cond u c t o r s and insulat o r s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(5)

(b) Two plastic rods each have a positive char g e + q situa t e d at one end.
The rods are arr a n g e d as show n.
Assum e that the char g e at the end of eac h rod beha v e s as a point
char g e . Draw, in the shad e d are a on the diagr a m , the elect ric field
patt e r n due to the two cha r g e s .
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
15 3 . This ques tion is abou t power and efficie ncy.
A bus is travelling at a const a n t spe e d of 6.2 m s –1 along a section of road

that is incline d at an angle of 6.0° to the horizont al.

(a) (i) The bus is rep r e s e n t e d by the black dot show n below.
Draw a labelled sketc h to rep r e s e n t the force s acting on the bus.
(4)
(ii) Stat e the value of the rat e of cha n g e of mom e n t u m of the bus.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b) The total outp u t powe r of the engin e of the bus is 70 kW and the
efficiency of the engin e is 35 %. Calcula t e the input powe r to the
engin e.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c) The mas s of the bus is 8.5 × 10 3 kg. Dete r mi n e the rat e of incr e a s e of
gravit atio n al poten ti al ene r gy of the bus.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(d) Using your ans w e r to (c) and the dat a in (b), estim a t e the magni t u d e
of the resistive forces acting on the bus.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(e) The engin e of the bus sudd e nly stops workin g.
(i) Dete r mi n e the mag nit u d e of the net force opposin g the motion of
the bus at the inst an t at which the engin e stops.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Discus s, with refer e n c e to the air resis t a n c e , the cha n g e in the
net force as the bus slows down.
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 17 mark s )

15 4 . This ques tion is abou t elect ri ca l resist a n c e .
(a) A resis to r of resist a n c e 1.5 Ω is mad e from copp e r wire of radi us 0 .18
mm. The resistivity of coppe r is 1.7 × 10 –8 Ω m. Dete r m i n e the lengt h
of copp e r wire used to make the resisto r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) The man uf a c t u r e r of the resisto r in (a) gua r a n t e e s tha t the resist a n c e
is within 10 % of 1.5 Ω , provide d tha t the powe r dissipa tio n in the
resisto r does not exce e d 1.0 W.
(i) Sugg e s t why the resist a n c e of the resis to r mi ght be gre a t e r tha n
1.65 Ω if the powe r dissipa tion in the resisto r is gre a t e r tha n 1.0
W.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Show that, for a powe r dissipa tio n of 1.0 W, the curr e n t in a
resis to r of resist a n c e 1.5 Ω is 0.82 A.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) The 1.5 Ω resisto r is conne c t e d in series with a varia bl e resis to r
and batt e r y of emf 6.0 V and inte rnal resist a n c e 1.8 Ω.
Estim a t e the resist a n c e R of the variabl e resisto r that will limit

the curr e n t to 0.82 A.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
15 5 . This ques tion is abou t stan di n g (station a r y) wave s.
The diagr a m repr e s e n t s a stan di n g wave of wavele n g t h λ set up on a string

of lengt h L .
The string is fixed at both ends.
(a) For this stan di n g wave

(i) stat e the relation s hi p betw e e n λ and L.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) label, on the diag r a m , two antino d e s wher e the string is

vibratin g in phas e. Label the antinod e s with the lette r A.
(2)
(b) The stan di n g wave has wavele n g t h λ and frequ e n c y f. Sta t e and
explain, with res p e c t to a sta n di n g wave, what is rep r e s e n t e d by the
prod u c t f λ.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
15 6 . This ques tion is abou t the eye and resolution.
A stud e n t meas u r e s the aper t u r e of the iris of one of her eyes as 2.0 mm in
sunligh t and 7.0 mm in moonligh t. The inten sity at her eye of sunlight is
106 times grea t e r than the inte n si ty of moonlig h t.
(a) (i) Dete r mi n e the following ratio.
p ow e ro f lig h te n t e r in tgh ee yein s u n lig h t

p o w e rof lig h te n t e r in tgh ee yein m o o n lig h t
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................

..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) Sugg e s t why your answ e r in (a)(i) indica t e s that the cha n g e in
diam e t e r of the iris is not the princip al mec h a ni s m by which the
eye is able to adjus t to differ e n t light inte n sitie s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b) (i) Stat e the Rayleigh crite rion.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Sugg e s t , with refer e n c e to the Rayleig h crite rio n, whe t h e r the
ability of the eye to resolve the imag e of two object s is gre a t e r in
sunligh t or in moonligh t.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(c) Outline the differ e n t functions of the rods and the cones on the retin a
of the eye in their res po n s e to sunligh t and to moonligh t.
Rods: .......................................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Cones: .....................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 14 mark s )
15 7 . This ques tion is abou t the photo el e c t r i c effect.
(a) Stat e what is mea n t by the photo el e c t r i c effect.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) Light of frequ e n cy 8.7 × 10 14 Hz is incide n t on the surfa c e of a met al
in a photocell.
The surf ac e area of the met al is 9.0 × 10 –6 m 2 and the inte n sity of the
light is
1.1 × 10 –3 W m –2 .
(i) Deduc e that the maxim u m possible photo el e c t r i c cur r e n t in the

photoc ell is 2.7 nA.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) The maxim u m kinetic ene r gy of photo el e c t r o n s rele a s e d from the

met al surfac e is 1.2 eV. Calcula t e the value of the work function
of the met al.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
15 8 . This ques tion is abou t the de Broglie hypot h e si s .
(a) Stat e the de Broglie hypot h e si s.
.................................................................................................................

.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) Deter m i n e the de Broglie wavele n g t h of a proto n tha t has bee n
accel e r a t e d from rest thro u g h a pote n ti al differe n c e of 1.2 kV.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c) Explain why a precis e knowle d g e of the de Broglie wavele n g t h of the

proto n implies that its position cannot be obs e rv e d.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
15 9 . This ques tion is abou t radioa ctive dec ay.
13
Nitrog e n- 13 ( 7 N ) is an isotop e that is use d in medic al diagn osi s. The dec ay
cons t a n t of nitrog e n- 13 is 1.2 × 10 –3 s –1 .
(a) (i) Define decay cons ta n t .
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) A sam pl e of nitrog e n- 13 has an initial activity of 800 Bq. The
sam pl e canno t be use d for diagno s ti c pur po s e s if its activity
beco m e s less than 150 Bq. Dete r m i n e the time it take s for the
activity of the sam pl e to fall to 150 Bq.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b) (i) Calculat e the half- life of nitrog e n- 13
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Outline how the half- life of a sam pl e of nitrog e n- 13 can be

meas u r e d in a labor a t o r y.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(c) Nitro g e n- 13 und e r g o e s β + dec ay. Outline the expe ri m e n t a l evide nc e
that sugg e s t s anot h e r particle, the neut ri n o, is also emitt e d in the
decay.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 9 mark s )
16 0 . This ques tion is abou t digital sam plin g.
(a) A comp a c t disc stor e s music in digit al form. The music is sam pl e d at a
frequ e n c y of 44.1 kHz. Each sa m pl e consis t s of two 16- bit wor ds.
(i) Stat e what is mean t by digital form.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) The disc stor e s music that takes one hour for playba c k.
Dete r mi n e the minim u m num b e r of bits that are stor e d on the
disc.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................

..................
(2)

(b) A pag e from a book has 45 lines of writing. Eac h line of the book has,
on aver a g e , 65 lett e r s and spa c e s . The text of the book is to be stor e d
on comp a c t disc whe r e eac h lette r or spac e on a line is rep r e s e n t e d by
an eight- bit num b e r . Deter m i n e the num b e r of pag e s of text tha t can
be stor e d on a comp a c t disc simila r to that in (a).
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
16 1 . This ques tion is abou t a digital cam e r a .
(a) By refer e n c e to what is mea n t by a pixel, desc ri b e the struc t u r e of a

char g e- couple d device (CCD).
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(b) The CCD in a cam e r a has an are a of 16 cm 2 and is divide d into 5.6
meg a pix els.
The cam e r a is used to take a photog r a p h with a linea r ma gnific a tion
of 0.030.
(i) Calculat e the sepa r a t i o n of pixels on the CCD.
.........................................................................................................

..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Dete r mi n e the minim u m sepa r a ti o n of two point s on an object
such that they may be see n sepa r a t e ly on the imag e. Diffrac tio n
effect s at the lens may be ignor e d .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
16 2 . This ques tion is abou t an oper a tio n a l amplifier (op- amp) circuit.
The circuit diagr a m is for a non- inver tin g amplifie r.
The oper a ti o n al amplifier is ideal.
Calculat e the
(a) gain of the amplifier circuit.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) input pote n ti al V IN at which the amplifier satu r a t e s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )
16 3 . This ques tion is abou t a mobile phon e netwo r k.
Describ e the role of the cellula r exch a n g e durin g the making of a call from
a mobile phon e.
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(Tota l 4 mark s )

16 4 . This ques tion is abou t relativity.
Carri e is in a spac es hi p that is travelling towa r d s a sta r in a str ai g h t- line at

cons t a n t velocity as obse rv e d by Pete r . Pete r is at rest relative to the sta r.
(a) Car ri e meas u r e s her spac e s hi p to have a lengt h of 100 m. Pete r

mea s u r e s Carrie’s spac es hi p to have a lengt h of 91 m.
(i) Explain why Carrie mea s u r e s the prop e r lengt h of the spa c e s hi p.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Show that Carri e travels at a spe e d of appr oxi m a t e l y 0.4 c

relative to Pete r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b) Accordi n g to Carri e, it take s the sta r ten year s to rea c h her. Using
your ans w e r to (a)(ii), calcula t e the dist a n c e to the sta r as mea s u r e d
by Peter .
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) Accordi n g to Pete r, as Carrie pas s e s the sta r she send s a radio signal.
Deter m i n e the time, as mea s u r e d by Carri e, for the mes s a g e to reac h
Pete r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

16 5 . This ques tion is abou t a light clock.
Describ e the principle of a light clock.
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(Tota l 2 mark s )
16 6 . This ques tion is abou t qua r k s.
The quar k cont e n t of a π + meso n includ e s an up qua r k.
The Feyn m a n diagr a m repr e s e n t s the decay of a π + meso n.

(a) Identify the par ticles labelle d A and B.
A: .............................................................................................................
....................
B: .............................................................................................................
....................
(2)
(b) Stat e, with refer e n c e to their prop e r t i e s , two differ e n c e s betw e e n a

photon and a W boson.
1. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c) The appr oxi m a t e rang e of the weak inte r a c ti o n is 10 –18 m. Dete r mi n e ,
in kg, the likely mass of the W boson.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
16 7 . This ques tion is abou t stra n g e n e s s .
(a) Outline two prop e r t i e s of str a n g e n e s s .
1. .............................................................................................................

.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) The following particle inte r a c ti o n is propos e d .
p + π – → K– + π +
In this inter a c ti o n, char g e is cons e r v e d .
Stat e, in ter m s of baryo n and stra n g e n e s s cons e rv a t i o n, whet h e r the

inter a c ti o n is possible.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )
16 8 . This ques tion is abou t the prope r ti e s of a sta r.
(a) Descri b e what is mean t by a
(i) cons t ella tio n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) stellar clust e r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) Some dat a for the variabl e sta r Betelg e u s e are given below.
Avera g e absolut e ma gni t u d e = –5.1

Avera g e appa r e n t mag nit u d e = + 0.60
Avera g e appa r e n t brigh t n e s s = 1.6 × 10 –7 W m –2
Radius = 790 solar radii
The luminosity of the Sun is 3.8 × 10 26 W and it has a surfa c e

tem p e r a t u r e of 5700 K.
(i) Show that the dista n c e from Eart h to Betelge u s e is about 4.0 ×
10 18 m.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) Dete r mi n e , in ter m s of the luminosity of the Sun, the luminosity

of Betelg e u s e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Calculat e the surfac e tem p e r a t u r e of Betelg e u s e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................

..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c) On the Hertzs p r u n g–R u s s e ll diagr a m above,
(i) label the position of Betelg e u s e with the lette r B.

(1)
(ii) sketc h the position of main sequ e n c e star s.

(1)

(d) Some star s, such as Betelg e u s e , are in combi n a tio n with a comp a nio n
sta r formin g a spect r o s c o pi c bina ry syste m . Descri b e and explain the
char a c t e r i s ti c s of a spect r o s c o pi c bina ry syste m .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 15 mark s )
16 9 . A force F is applied to a body moving along a str ai g h t line. A resis tive force
f acts on the body.
Both forces act along the sam e straig h t line as the motion of the body. The
rat e of chan g e of mom e n t u m of the body is equal to
A. F – f.
B. F.
C. F + f.
D. f.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

17 0 . The diagr a m below show s a unifor m elect ri c field of str e n g t h E. The field is
in a vacuu m .
An elect r o n ente r s the field with a velocity v in the dire c tion show n. The
elect r o n is moving in the plan e of the pape r . The path followe d by the
elect r o n will be
A. par a b olic.
B. in the directio n of E.
C. in the directio n of v .
D. circul a r.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
17 1 . A space c r af t moves from point X to point Y in the gravit a tion a l field of

Eart h. At point X, the gravit a tion a l pote n ti al is –14 MJ kg –1 . At point Y, the
gravit a tion al poten t i al is –2 MJ kg –1 . Which of the following desc ri b e s the
direction of the motion of the spac e c r a f t rela tive to Eart h and the cha n g e in
gravit a tion al poten t i al?
Dire c t i o n of Chan g e in gravit a t i o n a l

Moti o n pot e n t i a l
A. towa r d s Eart h +1 2 MJ kg –1
B. towa r d s Eart h –12 MJ kg –1
C. away from Eart h +1 2 MJ kg –1
D. away from Eart h –12 MJ kg –1
(Tot al 1 mar k )

17 2 . A space c r af t is in orbit at a dista n c e r from the cent r e of the Eart h. The
engine of the space c r af t is fired and it moves to a new orbit of radi us 2 r.
Which of the following desc ri b e s the varia tio n s in kine tic ene r gy and total
ene r gy of the space c r af t ?
Kin e t i c Tot al en e r g y
en e r g y
A. decr e a s e incr e a s e
B. decr e a s e decr e a s e
C. incr e a s e incr e a s e
D. incr e a s e decr e a s e
(Tot al 1 mar k )
17 3 . The volum e of an ideal gas in a cont ai n e r is incre a s e d at const a n t

tem p e r a t u r e . Which of the following sta t e m e n t s is/ar e cor r e c t abou t the
molecul e s of the gas?
I. Their spee d rem ai n s const a n t .
II. The frequ e n cy of collisions of molec ul e s with unit are a of the

cont ai n e r wall decr e a s e s .
III. The force betw e e n the m dec r e a s e s .
A. I only
B. I and II only
C. I and III only
D. II and III only

(Tot al 1 mar k )

17 4 . During an adiab a tic expa n sio n, a gas does 50 J of work agains t the
sur r o u n di n g s . It is then cooled at cons t a n t volum e by removing 20 J of
ene r gy from the gas. The mag nit u d e of the total cha n g e in inte r n a l ene r gy
of the gas is
A. 70 J.
B. 50 J.
C. 30 J.
D. 20 J.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
17 5 . The diagr a m shows the pres s u r e volum e relations hi p for a fixed mas s of an
ideal gas that unde r g o e s a cycle XYZ.
In which part(s) of the cycle is exte r n a l work done on the gas?
A. Y → Z only
B. Y → Z and Z → X only
C. X → Y and Z → X only
D. X → Y only
(Tot al 1 mar k )

17 6 . A string vibrat e s with fund a m e n t a l frequ e n c y f. The wavele n g t h of the
soun d produ c e d in air is λ. Which of the following cor r e c tly gives the
frequ e n c y of vibration of the fourt h har m o ni c of the string and the
wavele n g t h of the sound in air?
Freq u e n c y Wave l e n g t h
f λ
A.
2 4
B. 4 f 4λ
f
C. 4λ
2
λ
D. 4 f
4
(Tot al 1 mar k )
17 7 . A rada r spee d gun is used to me a s u r e the spee d of a car. The car is moving
with spee d v away from the gun.
The rada r emits microw av e s of frequ e n c y f and spe e d c . Which of the

following is the frequ e n cy of the microw a v e s mea s u r e d at the gun afte r
reflection by the car?
 2v 
 f
A. f +  c 
v 
 f
B. f + c 
 2v 
 f
C. f –  c 
v 
 f
D. f – c 
(Tot al 1 mar k )

17 8 . An optically active subs t a n c e
A. compl et ely absor b s polariz e d light.
B. unpol arize s polarized light.
C. polarize s unpola riz e d light.
D. rotat e s the plane of polariz a tion.

(Tot al 1 mar k )
17 9 . The diagr a m below show s two identic al filame n t lamps sepa r a t e d by a

small dista n c e. Light from the lamps is incide n t on a nar r o w slit behin d a
gree n filter. The slit is par allel to the filame n t of eac h lamp.
A photog r a p h is taken of the lamps throu g h the slit. The imag e s of the
filam e n t s on the photog r a p h are just resolve d.
The gre e n filter is replac e d by a red filter and the n by a violet filter. For
each filter a photog r a p h is take n of the lamps throu g h the slit. Which of the
following corr e c tly describ e s the resolution of the imag e s using a red and
using a violet filter?
Red filt er Viol e t filt e r

A. resolve d resolve d
B. resolve d not resolve d
C. not resolve d resolve d
D. not resolve d not resolve d
(Tot al 1 mar k )

18 0 . Two resis to r s , of resis t a n c e R 1 and R 2 , are conn e c t e d in serie s with a cell of
emf ε and negligibl e inter n al resist a n c e .
Which expr e s si o n gives the pote n ti al differe n c e acros s the resis to r of

resis t a n c e R 1 ?
 R1 
 ε
A.  R1 R 2 
 R1 R 2 
 ε
B.  R1 
 R2 
 ε
C.  R1 R 2 
 R1 R 2 
 ε
D.  R2 
(Tot al 1 mar k )

18 1 . The gra p h shows the variation with time t of the mag n e t i c flux φ thro u g h a
coil that is rotati n g in a unifor m magn e t i c field.
The mag ni t u d e of the emf induc e d acros s the ends of the coil is maxim u m
at time(s)
A. t 1 and t 3 .
B. t 2 and t 4 .
C. t 3 only.
D. t 4 only.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
18 2 . The rms cur r e n t ratin g of an elect ric hea t e r is 4 A. What direc t cur r e n t
would produ c e the sam e powe r dissipa tio n in the elect ric hea t e r ?
4
A
A. 2
B. 4 A
C. 4 2A
D. 8 A
(Tot al 1 mar k )

18 3 . Two sam pl e s of radioa ctiv e subs t a n c e s X and Y have the sam e initial
activity. The half- life of X is T and the half- life of Y is 3 T . After a time of 3 T
the ratio
a c t ivit of
y s u b s t a n cX
e
a c t ivit of
y s u b s t a n cY
e is
A. 8.
B. 4.
1
C. 4.
1
D. 8.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
18 4 . In a fission reaction, the total mas s and the total binding ene r gy befor e the
reaction are M i and E i res p e c t ively, whe r e the binding ene r gy is define d as
a positive quan tity. After the rea c tion the total mas s is M f and the total
bindin g ener gy is E f . Which of the following corr e c tly comp a r e s the total
mas s e s and the total binding ene r gi e s ?
Total ma s s Total bindi n g

en e r g y
A. Mf > Mi Ef < Ei
B. Mf > Mi Ef > Ei
C. Mf < Mi Ef < Ei
D. Mf < Mi Ef > Ei
(Tot al 1 mar k )

18 5 . Monoc h r o m a t i c light is incide n t on a met al surf ac e and elect r o n s are
relea s e d . The intensi ty of the incide n t light is incre a s e d . What cha n g e s , if
any, occur in the rat e of emission of elect r o n s and the kinetic ene r gy of the
emitt e d elect r o n s ?
Rat e of emi s s i o n of Kin e t i c en e r g y of th e

el e c t r o n s e m i t t e d el e c t r o n s
A. incr e a s e incr e a s e
B. decr e a s e no cha n g e
C. decr e a s e incr e a s e
D. incr e a s e no cha n g e
(Tot al 1 mar k )
18 6 . An elect r o n is confine d to move in one dim e n sio n in a box of lengt h L .

Which of the following gives the mom e n t u m of the elect r o n in its lowes t
ene r gy stat e?
h
A. 4L
h
B. 2L
h
C. L
2h
D. L
(Tot al 1 mar k )

18 7 . The diagr a m below show s som e of the ene r gy levels availa ble to an
elect r o n in a caesiu m atom.
Photon s of ener gy 0.9 eV pass thro u g h a sa m pl e of low pres s u r e caesiu m

vapou r . Which of the following gives the ene r gy tra n si tion of the elect r o n
when a photon is abso r b e d ?
A. From –3.9 eV to 0
B. From –2.5 eV to –1.6 eV
C. From –1.6 eV to –2.5 eV
D. From 0 to –3.9 eV
(Tot al 1 mar k )
18 8 . The mag ni t u d e of the unce r t a i n t y in the position of a par ticle is equal to the
de Broglie wavel en g t h of the particl e. Which of the following is the
minim u m unce r t a i n t y in the mom e n t u m p of the par ticle?
p
A. 4π
4π
B. p
h
C. p
p
D. h
(Tot al 1 mar k )

18 9 . Which of the following provide s evide n c e for the qua n tiz a tio n of nucle a r
ene r gy levels?
I. Alpha particle s have discr e t e value s of kinetic ene r gi e s
II. Gam m a- ray photo n s have discr e t e ene r gi e s
III. Atomic line emission spec t r a
A. I only
B. II only
C. I and II only
D. I, II and III
(Tot al 1 mar k )
19 0 . A radioac tive subs t a n c e S has a dec ay const a n t λ S , subs t a n c e T has a dec ay

cons t a n t λ T . Initially, a sam pl e of S cont ai n s N S nuclei and a sa m pl e of T
cont ai n s N T nuclei. The initial activity of both sam pl e s is the sam e .
NS
The ratio N T is
A. 1
λS
B. λT
λT
C. λS
D. λSλT
(Tot al 1 mar k )

19 1 . Which of the following desc ri b e s the role of the atmos p h e r e in the
gree n h o u s e effect?
A. The atm os p h e r e is tran s p a r e n t to all solar radia tio n.
B. The atm os p h e r e absor b s infrar e d radia tio n from the grou n d.
C. The atm os p h e r e scat t e r s red light more tha n blue light.
D. Clouds in the atmos p h e r e preve n t abso r p t io n of infra r e d radia tion.

(Tot al 1 mar k )
19 2 . What is the value of the bina ry num b e r 1100 1 in decim al nota tion?
A. 50
B. 38
C. 25
D. 19
(Tot al 1 mar k )
19 3 . A CCD cam e r a is used to capt u r e the image of a paintin g. The are a of the
paintin g is 2.0 m 2 and the are a of the imag e is 50 mm 2 . Which of the
following is the linear mag nific a tion of the imag e ?
A. 2.5 × 10 –5
B. 5.0 × 10 –3
C. 2.0 × 10 2
D. 4.0 × 10 4
(Tot al 1 mar k )

19 4 . An analog u e signal is sam pl e d at time inte rval s t . Each sam pl e is conve r t e d
to a digital num b e r having n bits. What is the total num b e r of bits produ c e d
in a time T ?
nT
A. t
nt
B. T
C. ntT
n
D. Tt
(Tot al 1 mar k )
The spee d v of waves on the surfa c e of dee p wate r dep e n d s only on the
wavele n g t h λ of the waves. The dat a gath e r e d from a par tic ul a r region of
the Atlantic Ocea n are plott e d below.
The unce r t a i n t y in the speed v is ±0. 3 0 m s –1 and the unc e r t a i n t y in λ is too

small to be show n on the diagr a m .

(a) Draw a best- fit line for the data.
(1)
(b) Stat e, with refer e n c e to the line you have dra w n in (a),
(i) why v is not directly propo r tio n a l to λ.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) the value of v for λ = 39 m.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(c) It is sugg e s t e d that the rela tion s hi p betw e e n v and λ is of the form
v = a λ
whe r e a is a const a n t . To test the validity of this hypot h e s i s, values of

v 2 agains t λ are plott e d below.

(i) Use your answ e r to (b)(ii) to show tha t the absolut e unc e r t a i n t y
in v 2 for a wavele n g t h of 39 m is ±5 m 2 s –2 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) The absolut e uncer t a i n t y in v 2 for a wavele n g t h of 2.5 m is ±1 m 2

s –2 . Using this value and the value in (c)(i), const r u c t error bar s
for v 2 at the dat a points for
λ = 2.5 m and 39 m.
(1)
(iii) Stat e why the plott e d dat a in (c)(ii) sugg e s t tha t it is likely tha t v
is propo r tio n al to λ.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iv) Use the grap h above to det e r m i n e the cons t a n t a .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................

..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

k
(v) Theory shows that a = 2 π . Dete r mi n e a value for k .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 12 mark s )
19 6 . This ques tion is abou t kine m a t i c s.
Lucy stan d s on the edg e of a vertic al cliff and throw s a ston e vertic ally
upwa r d s .
The stone leaves her han d with a spe e d of 15 m s –1 at the insta n t her hand
is 80 m above the surfac e of the sea. Air resist a n c e is negligibl e and the
accele r a ti o n of free fall is 10 m s –2 .
(a) Calcula t e the maxim u m heigh t rea c h e d by the ston e as me a s u r e d from

the point wher e it is throw n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) Deter m i n e the time for the stone to rea c h the surfa c e of the sea afte r
leaving Lucy’s hand.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
19 7 . This ques tion is abou t inter n al ene r gy and the r m a l ene r gy (hea t).
(a) Disting ui s h betw e e n inter n a l ene r gy and the r m a l ene r gy.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(b) A piece of iron is place d in a kiln until it rea c h e s the tem p e r a t u r e θ of

the kiln. The iron is then quickly tra n sf e r r e d to wat e r held in a
ther m ally insulat e d cont ai n e r . The wat e r is stirr e d until it rea c h e s a
ste a dy tem p e r a t u r e . The following data are availa bl e.
Ther m al capa city of the piece of iron = 60 J

K–1
Ther m al capa city of the wate r = 2.0 ×
10 3 J K –1
Initial tem p e r a t u r e of the wat e r = 16 °C
Final tem p e r a t u r e of the wat e r = 45 °C
The ther m al capa ci ty of the cont ai n e r and insula tion is negligible.

(i) Stat e an expr e s s io n, in ter m s of θ and the above dat a, for the
ene r gy tran sf e r of the iron in cooling from the tem p e r a t u r e of the
kiln to the final tem p e r a t u r e of the wat e r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Calculat e the incre a s e in inte r n a l ene r gy of the wat e r as the iron
cools in the wat e r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) Use your answ e r s to (b)(i) and (b)(ii) to det e r m i n e θ.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
19 8 . This ques tion is abou t the unified atomic mass unit and a nucle a r rea c tio n.
(a) Define the ter m unified atomic mas s unit .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) The mas s of a nucleu s of rut h e rf o r di u m- 254 is 254.1 0 0 1 u. Calcula t e

the mas s in GeV c –2 .

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(c) In 1919, Ruthe r fo r d produ c e d the first artificial nucle a r tra n s m u t a t i o n
by bomb a r di n g nitrog e n with α-par ticle s. The rea c tion is repr e s e n t e d
by the following equ atio n.
14 17
α+ 7N  8O + X
(i) Identify X.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) The following dat a are availa bl e for the rea c tio n.
Rest mass of α = 3.742 8 GeV c –2

14
Rest mass of 7N = 13.09 4 2 GeV c –2
17
Rest mass of 8O + X = 16.83 8 3 GeV c –2
The initial kinetic ene r gy of the α-par ticle is 7.68 MeV.

Dete r mi n e the sum of the kinetic ene r gi e s of the oxyge n nucle u s
and X. (Assu m e that the nitrog e n nucle u s is station a r y.)
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

19 9 . This ques tion is abou t chan g e s of stat e of a gas.
(a) A cylinde r fitted with a piston cont ai ns 0.23 mol of heliu m gas.
The following data are availa ble for the heliu m with the piston in the
position show n.
Volume = 5.2 × 10 –3 m 3
Press u r e = 1.0 × 10 5 Pa
Temp e r a t u r e = 290 K
(i) Use the dat a to calcula t e a value for the univer s a l gas const a n t .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Stat e the assu m p t io n mad e in the calcul a tio n in (a)(i).
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b) The gas is now comp r e s s e d isothe r m a lly by the piston so that the
volum e of the gas is red uc e d . Explain why the comp r e s s i o n must be
car ri e d out slowly.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................

.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) After the comp r e s s i o n, the gas is now allowe d to expa n d adia b a ti c a lly
to its original volum e. Use the first law of the r m o dy n a m i c s to explain
whet h e r the final tem p e r a t u r e will be less tha n, equal to or gre a t e r
than 290 K.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tota l 9 mark s )
20 0 . This ques tion is abou t the emf induc e d in a coil.
(a) Define magn e t i c flux .
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) A coil is rotat e d at const a n t spee d in a region of unifor m ma g n e ti c
field.
The grap h shows the variatio n with time t of the emf ε induc e d in the
coil for one cycle of rota tio n.
(i) On the grap h label, with the lette r T, a time at which the flux
linkag e in the coil is a maxim u m .
(1)
(ii) Use the grap h to dete r m i n e the rat e of cha n g e of flux at t = 4.0
ms. Explain your answ e r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Calculat e the root me a n squ a r e value of the induc e d emf.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................

..................
(1)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
20 1 . This ques tion is abou t elect ri c cha r g e and resis t a n c e .
(a) A plastic rod XY is held at end X. The end Y is rubb e d with a piec e of
cloth and, as a res ult, the end Y beco m e s elect ric ally cha r g e d .
The proce d u r e is now rep e a t e d using a coppe r rod and it is found tha t
the copp e r rod rem ai n s elect ric ally neut r a l. Explain thes e
obse rv a tio n s in ter m s of the prop e r ti e s of cond u c t o r s and insulat o r s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(5)

(b) Two plastic rods each have a positive char g e + q situa t e d at one end.
The rods are arr a n g e d as show n.
Assum e that the char g e at the end of eac h rod beha v e s as a point
char g e . Draw, in the shad e d are a on the diagr a m
(i) the elect ric field patt e r n due to the two cha r g e s .
(2)
(ii) a line to repr e s e n t an equipot e n ti a l surfa c e. Label the line with

the lett e r V.
(1)
(c) A resis to r of resist a n c e 1.5 Ω is mad e from copp e r wire of radi us 0 .18
mm. The resistivity of coppe r is 1.7 × 10 –8 Ω m. Dete r m i n e the lengt h
of copp e r wire used to make the resisto r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

(2)

(d) The man uf a c t u r e r of the resisto r in (c) gua r a n t e e s tha t the resist a n c e
is within 10 % of 1.5 Ω , provide d tha t the powe r dissipa tio n in the
resisto r does not exce e d 1.0 W.
(i) Sugg e s t why the resist a n c e of the resis to r might be gre a t e r tha n
1.65 Ω if the powe r dissipa tion in the resisto r is gre a t e r tha n 1.0
W.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Show that, for a powe r dissipa tio n of 1.0 W, the curr e n t in a
resis to r of resist a n c e 1.5 Ω is 0.82 A.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) The 1.5 Ω resisto r is conn e c t e d in seri es with a varia bl e resis to r
and batt e r y of emf 6.0 V and inte r n a l resist a n c e 1.8 Ω.
Estim a t e the resist a n c e R of the variabl e resisto r that will limit

the curr e n t to
0.82 A.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 16 mark s )
20 2 . This ques tion is abou t orbit al motion.
(a) A satellite, of mass m , is in orbit about Eart h at a dista n c e r from the

cent r e of Eart h. Deduc e that the kinetic ene r gy E K of the sat ellite is
equal to half the magni t u d e of the pote n ti al ene r gy E P of the satellite.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................

.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(b) The grap h shows the variatio n with dist a n c e r of the Eart h’s
gravit atio n al poten ti al V .
Values of V for r < R , whe r e R is the radius of Eart h, are not show n.
The satellite in (a) has a mas s of 8.2 × 10 2 kg and it is in orbit at a

dista n c e of 1.0 × 10 7 m from the cent r e of Eart h. Using data from the
grap h and your ans w e r to (a), calcula t e for the satellite
(i) its total ene r gy.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) its orbit al spee d.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) the ener gy it mus t gain to move to an orbit a dista n c e 2.0 × 10 7
m from the cent r e of the Eart h.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 9 mark s )
20 3 . This ques tion is abou t power prod u c tio n and global war mi n g.
(a) In any cyclical proc es s design e d to continu o u s ly conve r t the r m a l

ener gy to work, some ene r gy is always deg r a d e d . Explain what is
mea n t by degr a d e d ener gy.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) A nuclea r powe r station uses ura ni u m- 235 (U- 235) as fuel. Outline the
(i) proce s s e s and ener gy chan g e s that occur thro u g h which the r m a l
ene r gy is produ c e d .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(ii) role of the heat exch a n g e r of the rea c t o r and the tur bi n e in the
gen e r a t io n of elect ric al ene r gy.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(c) Identify on e proce s s in the powe r station whe r e ene r gy is degr a d e d .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(d) The maxim u m powe r outp u t of the Drax coal- fired powe r station in the
UK is 4.0 GW. Dete r mi n e the minim u m mas s of pur e U-235 that would
be requir e d by a nuclea r powe r sta tion to provide the sam e maxim u m
annu al ener gy outpu t as the Drax powe r station.

Ener gy density of U-235 = 82 TJ kg –1
1 year = 3.2 × 10 7 s
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(e) It has bee n sugg e s t e d that the prod u c tio n of gre e n h o u s e gas e s by
coal- fired powe r station s has incre a s e d global war mi n g . One piec e of
eviden c e to suppo r t this sugg e s ti o n is the incre a s e in sea- level due to
an incr e a s e in tem p e r a t u r e of the ocea n s . Over the past 100 yea rs it is
sugg e s t e d that sea- levels have rise n by 6.4 × 10 –2 m due to volum e
expan si o n.
Using the following dat a, det e r m i n e the aver a g e rise in tem p e r a t u r e

in the top levels of the ocea n s in the last 100 years.
Mean dept h of ocea n s that is affect e d by global war mi n g =

4.0 × 10 2 m
Coefficien t of volum e expa n sio n of sea wat e r =
5.1 × 10 –5 K–1
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 15 mark s )
20 4 . This ques tion is abou t char g e- couple d device (CCD).
(a) Stat e two advan t a g e s of storing infor m a ti o n in a digit al form rat h e r

than an analog u e form.
1. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................

.....................
(2)

(b) A CCD is effectively a silicon chip that is divide d into small are a s
called pixels.
Each pixel is provide d with elect r o d e s . Outline how light incide n t on a
pixel prod u c e s a chan g e in pote n t i al differ e n c e acros s the pixel.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c) Light of frequ e n cy 7.2 × 10 14 Hz and inte n si ty 1.6 mW m –2 is incide n t

on a pixel for a time of 18 ms. The are a of the pixel is 2.0 × 10 –10 m 2
and its capacit a n c e is 12 pF. The res ultin g cha n g e in pote n ti al
differ e n c e acros s the pixel is 10 μV.
(i) Deduc e that the num b e r of photo n s incide n t on the pixel is 1.2 ×
10 4 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Dete r mi n e the quan t u m efficiency of the pixel.
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
20 5 . This ques tion is abou t power and efficie ncy.
A bus is travelling at a const a n t spe e d of 6.2 m s –1 along a section of road

that is incline d at an angle of 6.0° to the horizont al.
(a) (i) The bus is rep r e s e n t e d by the black dot show n below.
Draw a labelled sketc h to rep r e s e n t the force s acting on the bus.
(4)
(ii) Stat e the value of the rat e of cha n g e of mom e n t u m of the bus.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) The total outp u t powe r of the engin e of the bus is 70 kW and the
efficiency of the engin e is 35 %. Calcula t e the input powe r to the
engin e.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) The mas s of the bus is 8.5 × 10 3 kg. Dete r mi n e the rat e of incr e a s e of
gravit atio n al poten ti al ene r gy of the bus.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(d) Using your ans w e r to (c) and the dat a in (b), estim a t e the magni t u d e
of the resistive forces acting on the bus.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 13 mark s )

20 6 . This ques tion is abou t photo el e c t r i c effect and de Broglie wavele n g t h .
The diagr a m is a rep r e s e n t a t i o n of appa r a t u s use d to study the

photo el e c t r i c effect.
Light from the monoc h r o m a t i c sour c e is incide n t on a catho d e plac e d in an

evacu a t e d tube.
A variable voltag e supply is conn e c t e d betw e e n anod e and catho d e and the
photo el e c t r i c cur r e n t is regis t e r e d by the micro a m m e t e r . The sketc h gra p h
shows how the photoel e c t ri c cur r e n t I varies with the pote n ti al differe n c e
V betw e e n anod e and catho d e for two sour c e s of light, A and B, of differ e n t
frequ e n ci e s and intensi ti es.

(a) Explain with refer e n c e to the Einst ei n model, which gra p h, A or B,
corr es p o n d s to the light with the gre a t e r frequ e n c y.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(b) The frequ e n c y of the light that prod u c e s gra p h A is 8.8 × 10 14 Hz. The
magni t u d e of V A is 1.6 V.
(i) Stat e the value of the maxim u m ene r gy, in eV, of the elec t r o n s
emitt e d from the catho d e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Dete r mi n e the work function, in eV, of the surfa c e of the catho d e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................

..................
(2)

(c) The frequ e n c y of the incide n t light is incr e a s e d but the inte n sity
rem ai n s const a n t .
Explain why this incr e a s e in frequ e n c y res ult s in a cha n g e to the
maxim u m photo el e c t r i c cur r e n t (satu r a ti o n cur r e n t ) .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(d) The elect r o n s emitt e d from the photo- catho d e have an associa t e d de
Broglie wavele n g t h .
Descri b e what is mean t by the de Broglie wavele n g t h .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 12 mark s )
20 7 . This ques tion is abou t simple har m o ni c motion (SHM), wave motion and
polarization.
(a) By refer e n c e to simple har m o ni c motion, stat e wha t is mea n t by

amplit u d e.
.................................................................................................................

.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) A liquid is cont ain e d in a U-tube.
Dia g r a m 1 Dia gr a m 2
The pres s u r e on the liquid in one side of the tube is incr e a s e d so tha t
the liquid is displac e d as show n in diag r a m 2. Whe n the pres s u r e is
sudd e nly relea s e d the liquid oscillat e s .
The dam pi n g of the oscillation s is small.
(i) Describ e what is mea n t by da m pi n g.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) The displac e m e n t of the liquid surfa c e from its equilibri u m

position is x . The accele r a ti o n a of the liquid in the tube is given
by the expr e s si o n
2g
 x
a = l
wher e g is the accele r a t io n of free fall and l is the total lengt h of

the liquid colum n.
Explain, with refer e n c e to the motion of the liquid, the
significan c e of the minus sign.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) The total lengt h of the liquid colum n in the tube is 0.32 m.
Dete r mi n e the period of oscillation.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(c) A wave is travelling along a strin g. The string can be modelle d as a

single line of particles and each particl e execu t e s simple har m o ni c
motion. The period of oscillation of the particle s is 0.80 s.
The grap h shows the displa c e m e n t y of par t of the string at time t = 0.

The dist an c e along the string is d.

(i) On the grap h, draw an arro w to show the dire c tion of motion of
par ticl e P at the point mark e d on the string.
(1)

(ii) Dete r mi n e the mag nit u d e of the velocity of particle P.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(iii) Show that the spee d of the wave is 5.0 m s –1 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(iv) On the grap h above, label with the lette r X the position of
par ticl e P at t = 0.40 s.
(1)

(d) The string in (c) is fixed at both ends and is mad e to vibra t e in a
vertical plane in its first har m o ni c.
(i) Describ e how the stan di n g wave in the string gives rise to the
first har m o ni c.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) Outline how a travelling wave in a string can be use d to desc rib e
the nat u r e of polarize d light.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(e) James is weari n g polarize d sungl a s s e s and views the sunlight
reflect e d from the smoot h surf ac e of a lake.
The angle θ is the angle betw e e n the surfa c e of the lake and Jame s’s
line of sight.
Calcula t e the value of θ at which the reflec t e d sunlight from the
surfac e is minimize d.
The refra ctive index of the wate r is 1.3.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 25 mark s )
20 8 . This ques tion is abou t the prope r ti e s of a sta r.
(a) Descri b e what is mean t by a
(i) cons t ella tio n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) stellar clust e r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) Some dat a for the variabl e sta r Betelg e u s e are given below.
Avera g e absolut e ma gni t u d e = –5.1

Avera g e appa r e n t mag nit u d e = + 0.60
Avera g e appa r e n t brigh t n e s s = 1.6 × 10 –7 W m –2
Radius = 790 solar radii
The luminosity of the Sun is 3.8 × 10 26 W and it has a surfa c e

tem p e r a t u r e of 5700 K.
(i) Show that the dista n c e from Eart h to Betelge u s e is about 4.0 ×
10 18 m.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) Dete r mi n e , in ter m s of the luminosity of the Sun, the luminosity

of Betelg e u s e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Calculat e the surfac e tem p e r a t u r e of Betelg e u s e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................

..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c) On the Hertzs p r u n g–R u s s e ll diagr a m above,
(i) label the position of Betelg e u s e with the lette r B.

(1)
(ii) sketc h Betelge u s e’s likely evolution a r y path.

(1)

(d) Some star s, such as Betelg e u s e , are in combi n a tio n with a comp a nio n
sta r formin g a spect r o s c o pi c bina ry syste m . Descri b e and explain the
char a c t e r i s ti c s of a spect r o s c o pi c bina ry syste m .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 15 mark s )
20 9 . This ques tion is abou t the density of the unive r s e .
(a) Explain, with refer e n c e to the possible fate of the unive r s e , the
significan c e of the critical density of matt e r in the univer s e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(b) Sugg e s t on e reas o n why it is difficult to estim a t e the density of mat t e r
in the univer s e.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
21 0 . This ques tion is abou t the evolution of sta r s.
(a) Stat e what is mea n t by the
(i) Chan d r a s e k h a r limit.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Oppe n h ei m e r –Volkoff limit.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) Sugg e s t how your ans w e r s in (a) can be use d to pre dic t the fate of a
main sequ e n c e star.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
21 1 . This ques tion is abou t the Hubbl e cons t a n t .
(a) Outline the mea s u r e m e n t s that mus t be take n in orde r to dete r m i n e a

value for the Hubbl e const a n t .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(b) One esti m a t e of the Hubbl e const a n t is 60 km s –1 Mpc –1 . Cygnus A is a
radio galaxy at a dist an c e of 6.0 × 10 8 ly from Eart h. Calcula t e , in km
s –1 , the rece s sio n al spee d of Cygnus A rela tive to the Eart h.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
21 2 . This ques tion is abou t modula tio n.
(a) Outline what is mean t by the modula tio n of a wave.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) The frequ e n c y spect r u m of the signal from a radio tra n s m i t t e r is

show n below.

(i) Stat e the nam e of this form of radio tra n s m i s sio n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Stat e the frequ e n c y of the car rie r wave.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) Dete r mi n e the band wi d t h of this signal.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
Describ e the role of the cellula r exch a n g e durin g the making of a call from
a mobile phon e.
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(Tota l 4 mark s )

21 4 . This ques tion is abou t the tran s m i s s io n of signals.
The signal from a micro p h o n e is amplified and the n tra ns m i t t e d to a dista n t

receive r.
The variation with time t of the amplified signal befor e tran s m i s si o n is
show n below.
(a) The amplified signal is tran s m i t t e d using a coaxial cable as illust r a t e d .
On the axes below, sketc h the wavefor m of the signal at point X afte r
tran s m i s sio n along the coaxial cable.
(3)

(b) A secon d tran s m i s sio n syste m , as show n below, uses a cable
cont ai nin g many sepa r a t e fibre s (multi- core optic cable).
(i) Sugg e s t why a multi- core optic cable is requi r e d rath e r tha n a
single- core optic fibre.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Stat e what circuit s should be includ e d in the tra n s m i s sio n syste m
so that a single- core optic fibre may be use d.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(c) The receive d signal of the secon d tra n s m i s s io n syste m is show n below.
Calcula t e the
(i) minim u m num b e r of outp u t bits of the ADC.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) sam plin g frequ e n c y of the ADC.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(d) Stat e on e adva n t a g e and on e disa dva n t a g e of the coaxial cable

tran s m i s sio n as comp a r e d with the fibre optic cable.
Advant a g e : ..............................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Disadv a n t a g e : .........................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 11 mark s )
21 5 . This ques tion is abou t signal powe r and atte n u a t i o n.
An optic fibre in a telep h o n e syste m has lengt h 48 km. The noise powe r in
the optic fibre is
2.5 × 10 –18 W.
(a) The signal- to- noise ratio is not to fall below 25 dB. Show that the
minim u m signal power in the fibre is 7.9 × 10 –16 W.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) The att e n u a t i o n per unit lengt h of the signal in the fibre is 2.7 dB km –
1
. Use the data in (a) to dete r m i n e the powe r of the input signal to the
fibre so that the signal- to- noise ratio does not fall below 25 dB.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )

21 6 . This ques tion is abou t an oper a tio n a l amplifier (op- amp) circuit.
The diagr a m shows an incom pl e t e circ uit.
The oper a ti o n al amplifier is ideal.
(a) On the incom pl e t e diag r a m above, desig n a circ uit for a non- inver tin g
amplifier.
(2)
(b) Calcula t e the
(i) gain of the amplifier circuit.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) input poten ti al V IN at which the amplifie r satu r a t e s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

21 7 . This ques tion is abou t prope r ti e s of elect r o m a g n e t i c waves.
(a) Stat e two prop e r t i e s that are com m o n to all elect r o m a g n e t i c waves.
1. .............................................................................................................
.....................
2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) A single lens is used to form a mag nifie d real imag e of an objec t.
Explain, with refer e n c e to the dispe r sio n of light, why the imag e has
colour e d edg e s.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c) Outline why a clear sky is blue in colour.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

21 8 . This ques tion is abou t a conve r gi n g lens.
(a) Define angular magnificatio n .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) A thin conver gi n g lens of focal lengt h 4.5 cm is to be use d as a

magnifying glass.
The obse rv e r places the lens close to her eye. The leas t dista n c e of
distinct vision is 24 cm.
(i) Show that the dista n c e of the object from the lens is 3.8 cm.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Dete r mi n e the ang ul a r ma g nific a tio n prod u c e d by the lens.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(c) Sugg e s t two reas o n s why, for high mag nifica tion s , a combin a tio n of
lens e s is used rath e r than a single lens.
1. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 9 mark s )
21 9 . This ques tion is abou t interf e r e n c e of light.
Two coher e n t nar r o w bea m s of light pass throu g h two identic al evac u a t e d
tubes, as show n below.
The two coher e n t nar r o w beam s are brou g h t to a focus at point P on a

scre e n .
(a) Stat e what is mea n t by cohe r e n c e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) Stat e, with refer e n c e to the wavele n g t h , the condition tha t must be
satisfied for a brigh t fringe to be form e d on the scre e n at point P.

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(c) Air is allowe d to ent e r gra d u a lly into one of the evac u a t e d tube s . The
bright n e s s of the light at point P is see n to decr e a s e and the n incr e a s e
again repe a t e d ly.
(i) Stat e the effect on the wavele n g t h of the light in the evac u a t e d
tube as the air is introd u c e d .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Sugg e s t why ther e is a variatio n in the bright n e s s of the light at

point P.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 4 mark s )
22 0 . This ques tion is abou t X-ray diffrac tion.
An X-ray tube fitted with a coppe r targ e t emits radia tion with a
char a c t e r i s ti c wavele n g t h of 1.54 × 10 –10 m.
(a) Explain why the char a c t e r i s t ic wavele n g t h is dep e n d e n t on the tar g e t

mat e ri al.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(b) The X-ray bea m is inciden t on a sodiu m chloride cryst al. The minim u m
angle θ at which the X-rays of wavele n g t h 1.54 × 10 –10 m reinforc e
const r u c t iv ely when scat t e r e d from a plane of atom s in the cryst al is
15.9°, as show n below.
(i) Calculat e the dista n c e d betw e e n neigh b o u r i n g plan e s of atom s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) Dete r mi n e any othe r values of θ at which maxim u m inten sity

occu r s for the X-ray bea m scatt e r e d from the cryst al.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) Stat e why it is pref er a bl e to mea s u r e mor e than one angle θ in orde r
to det e r m i n e the spacin g of the plan e s of atom s.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
22 1 . This ques tion is abou t relativity.
Carri e is in a spac es hi p that is travelling towa r d s a sta r in a str ai g h t- line at

cons t a n t velocity as obse rv e d by Pete r . Pete r is at rest relative to the sta r.
(a) Car ri e meas u r e s her spac e s hi p to have a lengt h of 100 m. Pete r

mea s u r e s Carrie’s spac es hi p to have a lengt h of 91 m.
(i) Explain why Carrie mea s u r e s the prop e r lengt h of the spa c e s hi p.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Show that Carri e travels at a spe e d of appr oxi m a t e l y 0.4 c

relative to Pete r .
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b) Accordi n g to Carri e, it take s the sta r ten year s to rea c h her. Using
your ans w e r to (a)(ii), calcula t e the dist a n c e to the sta r as mea s u r e d
by Peter .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c) Accordi n g to Pete r, as Carrie pas s e s the sta r she send s a radio signal.
Deter m i n e the time, as mea s u r e d by Carri e, for the mes s a g e to reac h
Pete r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(d) Car ri e and Louise, two obse rv e r s in a spa c e s hi p, view a light sour c e
place d close to Car rie. When the spac e s hi p is travelling at a const a n t
velocity, they both mea s u r e the frequ e n c y of the light sour c e and
obtain identic al values.
The mag ni t u d e of the velocity of the spac e s hi p incre a s e s .
Stat e and explain any chan g e s to the freq u e n c y of the light sourc e , as
mea s u r e d by Louis e, that occur during the accel e r a t io n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 12 mark s )
22 2 . This ques tion is abou t relativistic mec h a ni c s .
(a) Calcula t e the pote n ti al differe n c e thro u g h which a proto n, sta r ti n g

from rest, mus t be accel e r a t e d for its mas s–e n e r g y to be equ al to
thr e e times its rest mas s- ene r gy.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(b) Calcula t e the mom e n t u m of the proto n afte r accel e r a ti o n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
22 3 . This ques tion is abou t the Michels o n–Mo rl ey expe ri m e n t .
(a) (i) Outline the pur po s e of the expe ri m e n t .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Stat e and explain why Michelso n and Morley rota t e d the
app a r a t u s throu g h 90°.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................

..................
(2)

(b) Stat e and explain the signific a n c e of the res ul t of the expe ri m e n t .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
22 4 . This ques tion is abou t spac e ti m e .
(a) Descri b e what is mean t by spa c e ti m e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) Stat e the shap e of the pat h in spac e ti m e of a body
(i) moving at cons t a n t velocity.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) orbitin g the Eart h.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(c) Explain how spac eti m e is use d to desc ri b e the gravit a tio n a l attr a c ti o n
betw e e n Eart h and a satellite orbitin g the Eart h.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
22 5 . This ques tion is abou t heari n g.
(a) Stat e what is mea n t by the
(i) inten si ty I of a sound wave.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) thre s h ol d inten sity I 0 of hea ri n g.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) A pneu m a t i c drill prod u c e s noise of inten sity level 98 dB at the ear of
a worke r.
(i) Calculat e the intensi ty of the noise at the ear.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) The intensity level at which discomfo r t is felt is 108 dB. Seve r al
pneu m a t i c drills, each one produ ci n g an inte n si ty level of noise of
98 dB at the ear, are being used at the sam e time. Dete r m i n e the
num b e r of pne u m a t i c drills that must be in use befor e the
work e r , who has no hea ri n g prot e c tio n, expe ri e n c e s disco mfor t.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

22 6 . This ques tion is abou t ultr as o u n d .
The diagr a m shows part of a cross- section thro u g h the leg of a patie n t who
is unde r g oi n g an ultr as o u n d scan.
Data for the spee d c of ultr a s o u n d in differ e n t media are show n below,
toget h e r with values for the acous tic impe d a n c e Z .
c / m s –1 Z / kg m –2 s –1
air 3.3 × 10 2 4.3 × 10 2
gel 1.5 × 10 3 1.5 × 10 6
muscl e 1.5 × 10 3 1.4 × 10 6
bone 4.1 × 10 3 7.8 × 10 6
(a) Use the data from the table to calcula t e a value for the density of
bone.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) The fraction F of the inten si ty of an ultr a s o u n d wave reflect e d at the

boun d a r y betw e e n two media having acous tic impe d a n c e s Z 1 and Z 2 is
given by the following equ a tio n.

(Z 1  Z 2 ) 2
2
F = ( Z 1 Z 2 )

Deter m i n e the fraction F for the boun d a r y betw e e n
(i) air and muscle.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) gel and muscl e.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c) Use your answ e r s in (b) to explain the nee d for a gel on the patie n t’s
skin.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

22 7 . Outline the princi ples of the prod u c tio n of an imag e using comp u t e d
tomog r a p h y (CT).
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(Tota l 5 mark s )
22 8 . This ques tion is abou t radiation expos u r e .
(a) A radiation worke r is accide n t a lly expos e d to a sourc e of radia tio n.

Stat e why it is easier to mea s u r e the expos u r e rath e r tha n the
absor b e d dose for the worke r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

(2)

(b) Expos u r e to γ-radiation may be mea s u r e d using a small met al can. The
can cont ai n s
3.6 × 10 –3 g of dry air at atmos p h e r i c pres s u r e . A met al wire,
insulat e d from the can, is situa t e d along the axis of the can, as show n
below.
A pot en ti al differ e n c e is applied betw e e n the can and the cent r a l wire.
The can is expos e d to γ-radia tio n for a time of 90 s. During this time,
the sensitive am m e t e r recor d s a cur r e n t of 4.8 × 10 –7 A.
(i) Dete r mi n e the expos u r e prod u c e d by the γ-radia tio n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) The ener gy req ui r e d to produ c e one ion- pair in air is 34 eV.
Dete r mi n e the rat e, in watts, of deposition of ene r gy in the air in
the can.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

The quar k cont e n t of a π + meso n includ e s an up qua r k.
The Feyn m a n diagr a m repr e s e n t s the decay of a π + meso n.
(a) Identify the par ticles labelle d A and B.
A: .............................................................................................................
....................
B: .............................................................................................................
....................
(2)
(b) Stat e, with refer e n c e to their prop e r t i e s , two differ e n c e s betw e e n a

photon and a W boson.
1. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c) The appr oxi m a t e rang e of the weak inte r a c ti o n is 10 –18 m. Dete r mi n e ,
in kg, the likely mass of the W boson.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

23 0 . This ques tion is abou t a synch r o t r o n .
(a) Stat e and explain how the particle s in a sync h r o t r o n bea m are
accel e r a t e d .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(b) In a synch r o t r o n , bea m s of proton s and antipr o t o n s attain ene r gi e s of

1400 GeV.
The radius of the synch r o t r o n is 4.9 km.
(i) The mag n e t i c field stre n g t h in the synch r o t r o n is 0.95 T.

Dete r mi n e , statin g any assu m p t i o n s you make, the mas s of a
proton in the bea m.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(ii) Outline why, even at the very high ene r gi e s of this par ticle bea m ,
the collisions are unlikely to lead to the cre a tion of a single
unbou n d quar k.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(c) Outline two ben efits of inter n a ti o n a l coope r a ti o n in the const r u c t i o n

and use of high- ener gy particle accele r a t o r s .
1. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 13 mark s )
23 1 . This ques tion is abou t stra n g e n e s s .
(a) Outline two prop e r t i e s of str a n g e n e s s .
1. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) The following particle inte r a c ti o n is propos e d .
p + π – → K– + π +
In this inter a c ti o n, char g e is cons e r v e d .
Stat e, in ter m s of baryo n and stra n g e n e s s cons e rv a t i o n, whet h e r the

inter a c ti o n is possible.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )
23 2 . This ques tion is abou t deep inelas tic scat t e r i n g.
(a) Outline what is mean t by dee p inelas ti c scatt e r i n g.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) Sugg e s t , with refer e n c e to asym p t o ti c free do m , why dee p inelas tic
scat t e r i n g experi m e n t s indica t e tha t qua r k s beh av e as free particl e s
within a nucleo n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

(2)
(Tota l 3 mark s )

23 3 . This ques tion is abou t conditions in the early unive r s e .
At one mom e n t in the early unive r s e the aver a g e particle ene r gy was 500
keV.
Nucleosy n t h e s i s is thou g h t to have bee n the domin a n t mec h a ni s m for
par ticl e inter a c ti o n at this time.
(a) Show that the tem p e r a t u r e of the unive r s e at which nucleosy n t h e s i s

occur r e d is
4 × 10 9 K.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) Nucleo syn t h e s i s was only domin a n t for a shor t time in the early
univer s e . Explain why the time was shor t and why nucleosy n t h e s i s did
not re- occur.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )
23 4 . The best esti m a t e for the time it take s light to cross the nucle u s of the
hydro g e n atom is

A. 10 –23 s.
B. 10 –20 s.
C. 10 –15 s.
D. 10 –7 s.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

23 5 . The lengt h of each side of a suga r cube is mea s u r e d as 10 mm with an
unce r t ai n t y of ±2 mm.
Which of the following is the absolut e unce r t a i n t y in the volum e of the
suga r cube?
A. ±6 mm 3
B. ±8 mm 3
C. ±4 0 0 mm 3
D. ±6 0 0 mm 3
(Tot al 1 mar k )
23 6 . The time taken for a stone drop p e d from res t to fall vertic ally thro u g h 16 m
is 2.0 s. Based on thes e meas u r e m e n t s , wha t is the bes t estim a t e for the
accele r a ti o n of free fall?
A. 4.0 m s –2
B. 8.0 m s –2
C. 9.8 m s –2
D. 10 m s –2
(Tot al 1 mar k )
23 7 . A woode n block is sliding down an incline d plane at const a n t spe e d. The

mag ni t u d e of the friction al force betw e e n the block and the plan e is equ al
to
A. zero.
B. the mag nit u d e of the weigh t of the block.
C. the mag nit u d e of the compo n e n t of weight of the block par allel to the
plan e.
D. the mag nit u d e of the compo n e n t of the nor m al rea c tio n par allel to the
plan e.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

23 8 . Which of the following is a corr e c t stat e m e n t of New to n’s secon d law of
motion?
A. A force acting on a body is propo r tio n a l to the mas s of the body.
B. The rate of chan g e of mom e n t u m of a body is equ al to the net exte r n a l

force acting on the body.
C. The mom e n t u m of a body is propo r tio n a l to the net exte r n a l force

acting on the body.
D. A force acting on a body is propo r tio n a l to the accele r a ti o n of the

body.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
23 9 . A ball of weigh t W is travelling horizon t ally towa r d s a vertic al wall. It

strikes the wall and rebo u n d s horizon t ally. The cha n g e in the mag nit u d e of
the mom e n t u m of the ball is ∆p. Which of the following is the mag nit u d e of
the impuls e that the ball impa r t s to the wall?
A. W + ∆p
B. W – ∆p
C. W
D. ∆p
(Tot al 1 mar k )

24 0 . Two object s unde r g o an inelas tic collision. Which of the following is corr e c t
in resp e c t of both the cons e r v a ti o n of mom e n t u m and the cons e r v a ti o n of
total ener gy of the syste m ?
Mo m e n t u m Tot al en e r g y
A. cons e r v e d not cons e rv e d
B. cons e r v e d cons e r v e d
C. not cons e rv e d not cons e rv e d
D. not cons e rv e d cons e r v e d
(Tot al 1 mar k )
24 1 . A particle P is moving anti- clockwis e with const a n t spe e d in a horizont a l

circle.
Which diagr a m corr e c tly shows the direc tio n of the velocity v and
accele r a ti o n a of the par ticle P in the position show n?
(Tot al 1 mar k )

24 2 . Two object s are in ther m al cont a c t with eac h othe r . Which of the following
will det er m i n e the directio n of the tra n sf e r of the r m a l ene r gy betw e e n the
bodies?
A. The mas s of each body
B. The area of cont a ct betw e e n the bodies
C. The specific heat cap acity of eac h body
D. The tem p e r a t u r e of each body

(Tot al 1 mar k )
24 3 . The mole is define d as
1
A. 1 2 the mas s of an atom of the isotop e car bo n- 12.
B. the amou n t of a subst a n c e that cont ai n s as many ele m e n t a r y entitie s

as the num b e r of atom s in 12 g of the isotop e carbo n- 12.
C. the mas s of one atom of the isotop e car bo n- 12.
D. the amou n t of a subst a n c e that cont ai n s as many nuclei as the num b e r

of nuclei in 12 g of the isotop e carbo n- 12.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

24 4 . A gas is cont ai n e d in a cylinde r by a piston.
The gas is comp r e s s e d rapidly by moving the piston in the direc tio n show n.
The best explan a ti o n for the resul tin g incr e a s e in tem p e r a t u r e of the gas is
that the molec ul e s of the gas gain kinetic ene r gy
A. from the moving piston.
B. by colliding more frequ e n tly with each othe r.
C. by being pus h e d close r toge t h e r .
D. by colliding more frequ e n tly with the walls of the cylinde r .

(Tot al 1 mar k )

24 5 . The gra p h shows how the velocity v of an objec t und e r g oi n g simple
har m o ni c motion varies with time t for one compl e t e period of oscillation.
Which of the following sketc h gra p h s bes t shows how the total ene r gy E of
the object varies with t ?
(Tot al 1 mar k )

24 6 . A force that varies sinus oid ally is applied to a syste m that is lightly
dam p e d . Which of the following mus t be true of the force for reson a n c e to
occu r?
A. It mus t always be in anti- pha s e with the oscillations of the syst e m .
B. Its directio n must always be in the direc tio n of motion of the

oscillations of the syste m .
C. Its frequ e n c y mus t be equ al to the freq u e n c y of oscillation of the

syste m .
D. Its amplit u d e mus t be equ al to the amplit u d e of oscillation of the

syste m .
(Tot al 1 mar k )
24 7 . Which of the following is a value of wavele n g t h tha t is found in the visible

region of the elect r o m a g n e t i c spec t r u m ?
A. 4 × 10 –5 m
B. 4 × 10 –7 m
C. 4 × 10 –9 m
D. 4 × 10 –11 m
(Tot al 1 mar k )
24 8 . Two waves meet at a point in spac e. Which of the following prope r ti e s

always add toget h e r ?
A. Displac e m e n t
B. Amplitud e
C. Spee d
D. Freq u e n c y
(Tot al 1 mar k )

24 9 . A point char g e of magni t u d e 2.0 μC is move d betw e e n two points X and Y.
Point X is at a poten ti al of +6. 0 V and point Y is at a pote n ti al of +9. 0 V.
The gain in poten ti al ene r gy of the point cha r g e is
A. 0.20 μJ.
B. 1.5 μJ.
C. 6.0 μJ.
D. 30 μJ.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
25 0 . A resisto r of resis t a n c e 12 Ω is conne c t e d in serie s with a cell of negligibl e

inter n al resist a n c e . The powe r dissipa t e d in the resisto r is P. The resist o r is
repl ac e d with a resis to r of resist a n c e 3.0 Ω. What is the powe r dissip a t e d in
this resisto r ?
A. 0.25 P
B. P
C. 2.0 P
D. 4.0 P
(Tot al 1 mar k )

25 1 . The elect r o m o t ive force (emf) of a cell is define d as
A. the powe r supplie d by the cell per unit curr e n t from the cell.
B. the force that the cell provide s to drive elect r o n s roun d a circuit.
C. the ene r gy supplied by the cell per unit cur r e n t from the cell.
D. the poten ti al differ e n c e acros s the ter mi n a l s of the cell.

(Tot al 1 mar k )
25 2 . The weight of an object of mas s 1 kg at the surfa c e of Mars is about 4 N.

The radius of Mars is about half the radius of Eart h. Which of the following
is the best estim a t e of the ratio below?
m a s so f M a r s
m a s sof E a r t h
A. 0.1
B. 0.2
C. 5
D. 10
(Tot al 1 mar k )

25 3 . Three positive point char g e s of equ al mag ni t u d e are held at the corn e r s X,
Y and Z of a right- angled trian gl e . The point P is at the midpoin t of XY.
Which of the arrow s shows the dire c tion of the elec t ri c field at point P?
(Tot al 1 mar k )

25 4 . An elect r o n travelling in the direc tion show n by the arro w X, ent e r s a
region of unifor m mag n e ti c field. It leave s the region of field in the
direction show n by the arrow Y.
The direction of the mag n e t i c field is
A. in the directio n of X.
B. into the plane of the pap e r .
C. in the opposit e direc tio n to X.
D. out of the plane of the pap e r .

(Tot al 1 mar k )
25 5 . Emission and abso r p ti o n spect r a provide evide nc e for
A. the nuclea r model of the atom.
B. nat u r al radioac tivity.
C. the existe n c e of isotop e s.
D. the existe n c e of atomic ene r gy levels.

(Tot al 1 mar k )

25 6 . Which of the following is true in resp e c t of both the Coulom b inte r a c ti o n
and the stron g inter a c ti o n betw e e n nucleon s in an atom?
Coul o m b int er a c t i o n Str o n g int e r a c t i o n

exi s t s bet w e e n exi s t s bet w e e n
A. proto n s only neut r o n s only
B. both proto n s and neut r o n s only
neut r o n s
C. proto n s only both proto n s and
neut r o n s
D. both proto n s and both proto n s and
neut r o n s neut r o n s
(Tot al 1 mar k )
25 7 . Which of the following cor r e c tly identifies the thr e e particle s emitt e d in the
45 45
decay of the nucle u s 2 0 Ca into a nucle u s of 2 1S c ?
A. α, β–, γ
B. β –, γ, v
C. α, γ, v
D. α, β–, v
(Tot al 1 mar k )
25 8 . The nuclea r reactio n
2
1H  31 H  4 1
2 H e 0 n
is an exam pl e of
A. nuclea r fission.
B. radioac tive decay.
C. nuclea r fusion.
D. artificial tran s m u t a t i o n .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

25 9 . Degr a d e d ene r gy is ener gy that is
A. stor e d in the Ear t h’s atmo s p h e r e .
B. availabl e from non- rene w a bl e ene r gy sour c e s .
C. conve r t e d into work in a cyclical proc e s s.
D. no longer available for the perfor m a n c e of useful work.

(Tot al 1 mar k )
26 0 . Which of the following cor r e c tly desc ri b e s both the role of the mode r a t o r
and of the cont r ol rods in a nucle a r reac t o r ?
Mod er a t o r Con tr o l rod s

A. slows down the maint ai n a const a n t rat e of
neut r o n s fission
B. cools down the react o r extr a c t the r m a l ene r gy
C. cools down the react o r maint ai n a const a n t rat e of
fission
D. slows down the extr a c t the r m a l ene r gy
neut r o n s
(Tot al 1 mar k )
26 1 . Which of the following cor r e c tly shows the ene r gy chan g e in a photovolt aic
cell and in a solar heati n g pan el?
Phot o v o l t a i c cell Sol ar he a t i n g

pan e l
A. solar → elect ric al solar → the r m a l
B. elect ric al → solar → elect ric al
ther m al
C. solar → elect ric al elect ric al →
the r m a l
D. elect ric al → solar → the r m a l
ther m al
(Tot al 1 mar k )

26 2 . The albedo for the ocea n s is lowe r tha n that for glacie r s. This is bec a u s e ,
comp a r e d to ice, sea wat e r
A. has a grea t e r density.
B. has a grea t e r specific heat capa ci ty.
C. has a grea t e r coefficien t of volum e expa n sio n.
D. absor b s a grea t e r amou n t of radia tive powe r.

(Tot al 1 mar k )
26 3 . Which of the following is most likely to red uc e the enh a n c e d gre e n h o u s e

effect?
A. Replace the use of gas- fired powe r station s with oil-fired powe r
stations
B. Replace coal- fired powe r station s with nucle a r powe r stations
C. Incr e a s e the use of all non- rene w a b l e ene r gy sourc e s
D. Decr e a s e the efficiency of powe r produ c tio n

(Tot al 1 mar k )

The gra p h shows the variation with tem p e r a t u r e T of the resist a n c e R of an

elect ric al com po n e n t .
(a) A stud e n t hypot h e siz e s that the resist a n c e is inver s ely propo r tio n a l to
the tem p e r a t u r e .
Use dat a from the gra p h to show whet h e r the hypot h e s i s is suppo r t e d .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................

.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(b) A secon d stud e n t sugg e s t s that the relations hi p is of the form
b
lg R = a + T
whe r e a and b are const a n t s .
The stud e n t plots the grap h below. Erro r bar s have bee n includ e d for
the sake of clarity.

(i) Explain how the grap h dra w n could be use d as evide nc e to
suppo r t the stud e n t’s sugg e s tio n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Use the grap h to dete r m i n e the const a n t s a and b .
b : .....................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
a: .....................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(iii) Using your ans w e r s to (b)(ii), dete r m i n e a value for the

resis t a n c e of the compo n e n t at a tem p e r a t u r e of 260 K.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 11 mark s )
26 5 . This ques tion is abou t forces.
An athlet e trains by dra g gi n g a heavy load acros s a roug h horizont al

surfac e.
The athl et e exer t s a force of ma gni t u d e F on the load at an angle of 25° to

the horizont al.
(a) Once the load is moving at a stea dy spee d, the aver a g e horizon t a l
friction al force acting on the load is 470 N.
Calcula t e the aver a g e value of F that will ena bl e the load to move at
const a n t spee d.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) The load is moved a horizon t a l dista n c e of 2.5 km in 1.2 hour s.
Calcula t e
(i) the work done on the load by the force F.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) the minim u m aver a g e powe r requi r e d to move the load.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c) The athlet e pulls the load uphill at the sam e spe e d as in par t (a).
Explain, in ter m s of ene r gy cha n g e s , why the minim u m aver a g e powe r

req ui r e d is grea t e r than in (b)(ii).
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
26 6 . This ques tion is abou t solar hea ti n g pan el s.
(a) Stat e the ener gy chan g e tha t take s plac e in a solar pan el.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) A village consist s of 120 hous e s . It is propos e d tha t solar pan els be
used to provide hot wate r to the hous e s .
The following data are availa ble.
aver a g e powe r need e d per hous e to hea t wate r = 3.0 kW

aver a g e surfac e solar inten sity = 650 W m –2
efficiency of ene r gy conve r sio n of a solar pan el = 18 %
Calcula t e the minim u m surfa c e are a of the solar pan els requi r e d to
provide the total powe r for wat e r hea tin g.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c) Sugg e s t two disadv a n t a g e s of using sola r powe r to provide ene r gy for
heatin g wat e r.
1: .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
2: .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

26 7 . This ques tion is abou t solar radi a tion.
(a) Stat e the Stefan–Boltzm a n n law for a black body.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) The following data relat e s to the Eart h and the Sun.
Eart h- Sun dist a n c e = 1.5 × 10 11 m

radius of Eart h = 6.4 × 10 6 m
radius of Sun = 7.0 × 10 8 m
surfac e tem p e r a t u r e of Sun = 5800 K
(i) Use data from the table to show tha t the powe r radi a t e d by the
Sun is abou t
4 × 10 26 W.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Calculat e the solar powe r incide n t per unit are a at a dista n c e
from the Sun equ al to the Eart h’s dista n c e from the Sun.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................

..................
(2)

(iii) The aver a g e powe r absor b e d per unit are a at the Eart h’s surfa c e
is 240 W m –2 .
Stat e two reas o n s why the value calcula t e d in (b)(ii) differs from
this value.
1: .....................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
2: .....................................................................................................................
..
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iv) Show that the value for powe r absor b e d per unit are a of 240 W
m –2 is consist e n t with an aver a g e equilibri u m tem p e r a t u r e for
the Eart h of abou t 255 K.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c) Explain, by refer e n c e to the gre e n h o u s e effect, why the aver a g e

tem p e r a t u r e of the surfac e of the Eart h is gre a t e r tha n 255 K.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(d) Sugg e s t why the burnin g of fossil fuels may lead to an incr e a s e in the
tem p e r a t u r e of the surfac e of the Eart h.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 15 mark s )
26 8 . This ques tion is abou t kicking a football.
A ball is susp e n d e d from a ceiling by a string of lengt h 7.5 m. The ball is

kicked horizon t ally and rises to a maxim u m height of 6.0 m.
(a) Assumin g that the air resist a n c e is negligible, show that the initial
spee d of the ball is 11 m s –1 .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) The mas s of the ball is 0.55 kg and the impa c t time of the kicke r’s foot
with the ball is 150 ms. Estim a t e the aver a g e force exer t e d on the ball
by the kick.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c) (i) Explain why the tension in the string incr e a s e s

imm e di a t ely after the ball is kicke d.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) Calculat e the tension in the string imm e di a t e ly afte r the ball is
kicked. Assum e that the string is vertic al.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(Tot al 10 mark s )

26 9 . This ques tion is abou t wat e r wave motion.
A small sphe r e , mount e d at the end of a vertic al rod, dips below the surfa c e
of shallow wat e r in a tray. The sphe r e is drive n vertic ally up and down by a
motor att ac h e d to the rod.
The oscillation s of the sphe r e produ c e travelling waves on the surfa c e of
the wate r .
(a) The diagr a m shows how the displa c e m e n t of the wat e r surfa c e at a
particul a r insta n t in time varies with dista n c e from the sphe r e . The
period of oscillation of the sphe r e is 0.027 s.
Use the diagr a m to calcul a t e , for the wave,
(i) the amplitu d e.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) the wavele n g t h .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) the frequ e n cy.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iv) the spee d.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b) The wave moves from region A into a region B of shallowe r wate r . The
waves move mor e slowly in region B. The diag r a m (not to scale) shows
som e of the wavefr o n t s in region A.

(i) With refer e n c e to a wave, disting uis h betw e e n a ray and a
wavefro n t .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) The angle betw e e n the wavefr on t s and the inte rf a c e in region A
is 60°. The refrac tive index An B is 1.4.
Dete r mi n e the angle betw e e n the wavefro n t s and the inte rfa c e in
region B.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) On the diagr a m above, cons t r u c t thr e e lines to show the position
of thre e wavefro n t s in region B.
(2)

(c) Anothe r sphe r e is dippe d into the wate r . The sphe r e s oscillat e in
phas e. The diagr a m shows some lines in region A along which the
distu r b a n c e of the wat e r surfa c e is a minim u m .
(i) Outline how the regions of minim u m distu r b a n c e occur on the

surfac e.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) The frequ e n cy of oscillation of the sphe r e s is incr e a s e d .
Stat e and explain how this will affect the position s of minim u m
distu r b a n c e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 15 mark s )
27 0 . This ques tion is abou t nuclea r proc e s s e s .
226
(a) A nucleu s of radiu m- 91 ( 9 1 Ra ) unde r g o e s alpha particle dec ay to form
a nucle u s of radon (Rn).
(i) Identify the proto n num b e r and nucle on num b e r of the nucle u s of
Rn.
Proto n
num b e r : ..................................................................................
...............
Nucleo n
num b e r : ..................................................................................
............
(2)
(ii) The half- life of radiu m- 91 is 1600 yea rs. Dete r mi n e the lengt h of
time taken for 87.5 % of the radiu m to disint e g r a t e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) Imm e di a t ely after the dec ay of a station a r y radiu m nucle u s , the alpha
particl e and the rado n nucle u s move off in opposit e dire c tion s and at
differ e n t spee d s .
Outline the reas o n s for thes e obse rv a tio n s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c) Outline why a bet a particl e has a longe r rang e in air tha n an alpha
particl e of the sam e ene r gy.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

27 1 . This ques tion is abou t an elect ric al hea t e r .
An elect ric al heat e r consist s of two hea ti n g elem e n t s E 1 and E 2 . The

elem e n t s are conn e c t e d in par allel. Each elem e n t has a switc h and is
conne c t e d to a supply of emf 240 V. The supply has negligibl e inter n al
resis t a n c e .
Elem e n t E 1 is mad e from wire that has a cros s- section a l are a of 6.8 × 10 –8
m 2 . The resistivity of the wire at the oper a ti n g tem p e r a t u r e of the elem e n t
is 1.1 × 10 –6 Ωm.
(a) (i) The total lengt h of wire is 4.5 m. Show tha t the
resis t a n c e of E 1 is 73 Ω.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Calculat e the powe r outp u t of E 1 with only this elem e n t

conne c t e d to the supply.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) Elem e n t E 2 is mad e of wire of the sam e cross- section and
mat e ri al as E 1 . The lengt h of wire use d to make E 2 is 1.5 m.
Dete r mi n e the total powe r outpu t whe n both E 1 and E 2 are
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(iv) With refer e n c e to the powe r outp u t, explain why it would be

inapp r o p r i a t e to conn e c t the hea ti n g ele m e n t s in serie s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(b) Each elem e n t in the elect ri c a l heat e r is woun d as a coil as show n.

Each tur n of the coil may be conside r e d to act as a cur r e n t- car ryin g
long str ai g h t wire.

(i) On the diagr a m , draw the mag n e t i c field arou n d a curr e n t-
carryi n g long str ai g h t wire. The arro w shows the dire c tion of the
curr e n t .
(3)
(ii) Stat e and explain whet h e r the turn s of wire will attr a c t or rep el
one anot h e r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 15 mark s )
27 2 . This ques tion is abou t heati n g a liquid.
(a) Sugg e s t why, in ter m s of the molec ul a r model, the ene r gy associa t e d
with melting is less than that associ a t e d with boiling.
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) Milk in a cup is heat e d to boiling point by passin g stea m throu g h it.
Whilst cooling subs e q u e n t l y, some milk evapo r a t e s .
(i) Disting ui s h betw e e n evapo r a t io n and boiling.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) The cup cont ai n s 0.30 kg of milk at an initial tem p e r a t u r e of 18

°C. Estim a t e the minim u m mas s of ste a m at 100 °C tha t is
requi r e d to heat the milk to 80 °C.
Specific latent heat of vaporiz a tio n of wate r = 2.3 × 10 6 J

kg –1
Specific heat capacity of wate r = 4200 J kg –1
K–1
Specific heat capacity of milk = 3800 J kg –1
K–1
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................

..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(iii) Stat e two reas o n s , othe r than evapo r a ti o n, why the ans w e r to (b)
(ii) is likely to be differ e n t from the act u al mas s of cond e n s e d
stea m .
1: .....................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
2: .....................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
27 3 . This ques tion is abou t the eye and sight.
(a) Stat e, by refer e n c e to hum a n vision, wha t is me a n t by

accom m o d a t i o n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) Explain how accom m o d a t i o n is achieve d in the hum a n eye.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(c) The light outpu t from two par tic ul a r lamps is desc ri b e d as “war m-
white” and as “cold- white”. Both lamps emit the full spec t r u m of
colour s. Stat e how the visual impr e s s io n of tem p e r a t u r e differ e n c e
may be achieve d.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
27 4 . This ques tion is abou t the Dopple r effect.
At one point in an arte ry, blood cells flow along the axis of the arte ry with
spee d v , as show n.
A par allel bea m of ultra s o u n d of freq u e n c y 4.5 MHz is incide n t on the

art e r y at an angle of 40°.
The spee d of ultra s o u n d in the body tissu e s is c = 1.5 × 10 3 m s –1 .
The ultra s o u n d dete c t e d after reflection from the blood cells is found to be
Doppler- shifted in frequ e n cy by 740 Hz.
The expr es sio n for the Dopple r shift ∆f of the ultra s o u n d of freq u e n c y f may
be ass u m e d to be

(2 fv c osθ )
∆f = c .

(a) For this stat e d expr e s s io n, explain the inclusion of
(i) the factor of 2.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) the factor cos θ.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b) Deter m i n e a value for the spe e d of the blood cells in the art e r y.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
27 5 . This ques tion is abou t polarizatio n.
.................................................................................................................

.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) Descri b e and explain how polariz a tio n may be use d in stre s s analysis.
You may draw a diagr a m if you wish.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(6)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

27 6 . This ques tion is abou t the wave nat u r e of matt e r .
(a) Descri b e the de Broglie hypot h e si s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) Outline an experi m e n t to verify the de Broglie hypot h e s i s.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(c) Show that the de Broglie wavel e n g t h of elect r o n s accel e r a t e d from
rest thro u g h a pote n ti al differe n c e of 150 V is 1.0 ×1 0 –10 m.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
27 7 . This ques tion is abou t alpha ( α) par ticle scat t e r i n g .
An experi m e n t is car ri e d out in which alph a (α) par ticle s of initial kinetic
ene r gy 5.0 MeV are fired at a piece of gold foil. The proton num b e r of gold
is 79.
Dete r mi n e the dista n c e of close s t appr o a c h of an alpha (α) particle to a

gold nucleu s .
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(Tota l 4 mark s )

27 8 . This ques tion is abou t β+ (posit ro n) dec ay.
(a) In a β + decay, a positro n is em itted along with a neut ri n o, and a γ-ray

photon.
Althoug h the ener gy spect r u m for γ-ray s involved is discr e t e , the
ener gy spect r u m for the positr o n s is continu o u s .
(i) Stat e the differ e n c e betw e e n a disc r e t e ene r gy spec t r u m and a

contin uo u s ener gy spec t r u m .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Explain how the exist e n c e of the neut ri n o accou n t s for the
contin uo u s nat u r e of the positro n ene r gy spec t r u m .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b) Sodiu m- 22 is a radioisot o p e use d in nucle a r medicin e that unde r g o e s

β + decay.
The half- life of sodiu m- 22 is 2.6 yea rs.
A sam pl e of sodiu m- 22 has an initial activity of 6.2 × 10 9 Bq.
(i) Define decay cons ta n t .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Calculat e the decay const a n t of sodiu m- 22.

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) Calculat e the activity of the sam pl e of sodiu m- 22 afte r 8.0 year s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
27 9 . This ques tion is abou t storin g infor m a t io n.
Infor m a ti o n may be stor e d eithe r in analog u e form or in digital form.
(a) Disting ui s h betw e e n analog u e inform a t io n and digital infor m a t io n.
Analogu e: ................................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Digital: ....................................................................................................
....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) Stat e on e met ho d by which inform a t io n may be stor e d in
(i) analog u e form.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) digital form.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(c) Stat e and explain two rea s o n s why, for many pur po s e s , digital stor a g e
of infor m a ti o n is replacin g analog u e stor a g e .
1: .............................................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
2: .............................................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(d) Sugg e s t two possible implica tion s for society of the ever- incr e a si n g
capa bility of data stor a g e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

28 0 . This ques tion is abou t an amplifier circuit.
The diagr a m below show s an amplifie r circuit incor p o r a t i n g an ideal

oper a tio n al amplifier (op- amp).
The oper a ti o n al amplifier uses a +9 V / 0 / –9 V supply.
(a) Calcula t e the gain of the amplifier circuit.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) Deter m i n e the outp u t pote n ti al V out for value s of input pote n ti al V in
equal to
(i) –0.9 V.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) +2. 0 V.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
Describ e the role of bas e stations and a cellula r excha n g e when a mobile
phon e is switch e d on and befor e a call is ma d e.
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(Tota l 5 mark s )

28 2 . This ques tion is abou t relativistic kine m a t i c s .
(a) Define inertial fram e of refer e n c e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) Ann and Sue are twins. Sue rem ai n s on Eart h. Ann travels to the sta r
Sirius in a spac es hi p moving at a spe e d of 0.80 c, as mea s u r e d by Sue.
The dist an c e betw e e n Eart h and Sirius is 8.8 ly, as mea s u r e d by Sue.
(i) Calculat e the time elaps e d , as mea s u r e d by Sue, betw e e n Ann

leaving Ear t h and rea c hi n g Sirius.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Stat e and explain whet h e r Ann or Sue mea s u r e s the prope r time
betw e e n Ann leaving Eart h and arriving at Sirius.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Calculat e the time take n for the spa c e s hi p to reac h Sirius, as
meas u r e d by Ann.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

(2)

(iv) As Ann appr o a c h e s Sirius, she sends a radio mess a g e back to
Sue. The dista n c e betw e e n Sirius and Eart h, as mea s u r e d by
Ann, is 5.28 ly. Deter m i n e the time, as mea s u r e d by Ann, that it
takes for the signal to reac h Sue.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
28 3 . This ques tion is abou t funda m e n t a l inte r a c ti o n s .
(a) Stat e an excha n g e par ticle for
(i) the weak inter a c ti o n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) the elect r o m a g n e t i c inter a c tio n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b) Comm e n t , with refer e n c e to the mass of the excha n g e particle s , on

the rang e of the weak and elect r o m a g n e t i c inte r a c ti o n s .

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c) Descri b e the proce s s repr e s e n t e d by the Feyn m a n diagr a m below.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(d) Stat e what is mea n t by a virtual par ticle.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(e) Explain how the Heise n b e r g unce r t a i n t y princi ple for ene r gy and time
applies to the inter a c t io n in (c).

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(f) The unce r t ai n t y in the time for the elect r o m a g n e t i c inte r a c tio n
betw e e n two elect r o n s is 1.6 × 10 –16 s. Dete r mi n e the unc e r t a i n t y in
the ene r gy of the virtu al photon.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
28 4 . Which of the following quan ti tie s can be dete r m i n e d from a spe e d- time
grap h of a particle travelling in a straig h t line?
A. Only the mag nit u d e of the accel e r a ti o n at a given insta n t
B. Both the velocity and the acc el e r a t io n at a given insta n t
C. Only the dista n c e travelled in a given time
D. Both the dista n c e travelle d in a given time and the ma gni t u d e of the
accel e r a t i o n at a given inst a n t
(Tot al 1 mar k )
28 5 . Which of the following is a corr e c t definition of work?
A. Produ c t of force and dista n c e
B. Produ c t of force and dista n c e move d in the dire c tion of the force
C. Produ c t of powe r and time
D. Produ c t of force and displa c e m e n t

(Tot al 1 mar k )

28 6 . The diagr a m shows two par allel met al plat e s X and Y.
Plate X is at Eart h pot en ti al (0 V) and the pote n ti al of plat e Y is V 0 .
Which of the following is corr ec t in resp e c t of the mag nit u d e and the
direction of the elect ric field betw e e n the plat e s ?
Ma g n i t u d e Dire c t i o n
A. const a n t X→Y
B. incr e a si n g Y→ X
C. const a n t Y→ X
D. incr e a si n g X→Y
(Tot al 1 mar k )
28 7 . Gravit atio n al poten ti al at a point is define d as the work done
A. per unit mas s in moving a small mass from infinity to the point.
B. in moving a unit mas s from infinity to the point.
C. in moving a small mas s from infinity to the point.
D. per unit mas s in moving a unit mas s from infinity to the point.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

28 8 . The esca p e spee d from the surfa c e of a plan e t dep e n d s on
A. both the radius and the mass of the plane t.
B. only the radi us of the plane t .
C. only the mas s of the plane t.
D. only the gravit a tion al field stre n g t h at the surfa c e of the plan e t.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
28 9 . Wate r at a tem p e r a t u r e of 0 °C is kept in a the r m a lly insula t e d cont ai n e r . A

lump of ice, also at 0 °C, is plac e d in the wate r and comple t ely subm e r g e d .
Which of the following is true in resp e c t of both the net amou n t of ice that
will melt and the chan g e in tem p e r a t u r e of the wat e r ?
Net am o u n t of Cha n g e in
ice te m p e r a t u r e of
tha t m el t s wat e r
A. all will melt no cha n g e
B. som e will melt decr e a s e
C. none will melt no cha n g e
D. all will melt decr e a s e
(Tot al 1 mar k )

29 0 . The beh aviou r of a mona t o mi c gas such as heliu m will appr oxi m a t e to that
of an ideal gas when it is kept at
A. a tem p e r a t u r e close to absolut e zero.
B. low pres s u r e .
C. very high pres s u r e .
D. very high tem p e r a t u r e .

(Tot al 1 mar k )
29 1 . The diagr a m shows the pres s u r e p and volum e V relation s hi p for one cycle
of oper a tio n of an engin e.
Which of the labelled par t s of the cycle identify isoba ric cha n g e s and
adiab a ti c chan g e s of stat e?
Isob a ri c Adiab a t i c
A. IV only I and II only
B. I and III only II and IV only
C. II and III only IV only
D. I and III only II only
(Tot al 1 mar k )

29 2 . The funda m e n t a l (first har m o nic) frequ e n c y of the note emitt e d by an
organ pipe closed at one end is f. What is the funda m e n t a l frequ e n c y of the
note emitt e d by an orga n pipe of the sa m e lengt h tha t is open at both ends?
f
A. 4
f
B. 2
C. 2f
D. 4f
(Tot al 1 mar k )
29 3 . Which of the following wave phe no m e n a is associ a t e d with blood flow

meas u r e m e n t s ?
A. Polarization
B. Diffractio n
C. Refrac tion
D. Doppl er effect
(Tot al 1 mar k )

29 4 . A bea m of coher e n t light is incide n t on a single slit of width b . After
passin g throu g h the slit, the light is incide n t on a scre e n at a dista n c e D
from the slit.
Which of the following chan g e s , carri e d out sepa r a t e ly, in res p e c t of b and
D will result in an incr e a s e in width of the first diffra ctio n maxim u m form e d
on the scre e n ?
b D
A. decr e a s e incr e a s e
B. incr e a s e incr e a s e
C. decr e a s e decr e a s e
D. incr e a s e decr e a s e
(Tot al 1 mar k )
29 5 . The imag e s of two sourc e s are just resolve d. Which of the following is a
corr e c t stat e m e n t of the Rayleigh crite rion for this situa tion ?
A. The cent r al maxim u m of the diffrac tion patt e r n of one sour c e must
coincide with the cent r al maxim u m of the diffrac tio n patt e r n of the
other sourc e.
B. Light from the sour c e s must pass throu g h a circul a r ape r t u r e .
C. Light from the sour c e s must be cohe r e n t .
D. The first minim u m of the diffra c tion patt e r n of one sourc e must
coincide with the cent r al maxim u m of the diffrac tio n patt e r n of the
other sourc e.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

29 6 . An optically active subs t a n c e is a subs t a n c e tha t
A. has a refr ac tive index that depe n d s on the plane of pola riz a tio n of
inciden t light.
B. compl et ely absor b s incide n t unpola riz e d light.
C. rotat e s the plane of polariz a tion of incide n t polariz e d light.
D. polarize s unpola riz e d light.

(Tot al 1 mar k )
29 7 . A copp e r shee t is sus p e n d e d in a region of unifor m magn e t i c field by an

insulati n g wire conne c t e d to a horizon t al suppo r t . The she e t is pulle d to
one side so that it is outsid e the region of the field, and the n rele a s e d .
The unifor m mag n e ti c field is dire c t e d into the plan e of the pape r.
Which of the following is true for both the dire c tion of the induc e d cur r e n t
in the sheet and the chan g e in amplit u d e of the oscillation s of the she e t
with time?
Dire c t i o n of indu c e d Chan g e in am p l i t u d e

curr e n t
A. stays the sam e no cha n g e
B. chan g e s decr e a s e s
C. stays the sam e decr e a s e s
D. chan g e s no cha n g e
(Tot al 1 mar k )

29 8 . An alter n a ti n g curr e n t supply of negligible inter n al resist a n c e is conne c t e d
to two resis to r s that are in par all el.
The resist a n c e of each resisto r is R and the peak volta g e of the ac supply is
V 0 . Which of the following is the aver a g e powe r dissip a t e d in the circ uit?
2
2V0
A. R
2
V0
B. R
2
V0
C. 2R
2
V0
D. 2R
(Tot al 1 mar k )

29 9 . Which of the following is true in resp e c t of both the Coulom b inte r a c ti o n
and the stron g inter a c ti o n betw e e n nucleon s in an atom?
Coul o m b int er a c t i o n Str o n g int e r a c t i o n

exi s t s bet w e e n exi s t s bet w e e n
A. proto n s only neut r o n s only
B. both proto n s and neut r o n s only
neut r o n s
C. proto n s only both proto n s and
neut r o n s
D. both proto n s and both proto n s and
neut r o n s neut r o n s
(Tot al 1 mar k )
30 0 . Light of freq u e n c y f is inciden t on a met al surf ac e . The work function of the

met al is φ. Which o f the following is the maxim u m kinetic ene r gy of the
elect r o n s emitt e d from the surfa c e ?
A. hf – 
h
( f  )
B. e
C.  – hf
h
(  f )
D. e
(Tot al 1 mar k )

30 1 . An elect r o n is accel er a t e d from rest thro u g h a pote n ti al differ e n c e V .
Which of the following is the de Broglie wavele n g t h of the elect r o n afte r

accele r a ti o n?
h
2m e V e
A.
2m e h
B. V2
C. 2m e V 2 e 2
V2
D. 2m e h
(Tot al 1 mar k )
30 2 . Which of the following is an assu m p t i o n of the Schr ö di n g e r model of the

hydro g e n atom?
A. The orbit al pat h of the elect r o n fits a sta n di n g wave.
B. The position of the elect r o n is undefin e d but its mom e n t u m is well

define d.
C. The mom e n t u m of the elect r o n is und efine d but its position is well
define d.
D. The elect r o n is desc ri b e d by wavefun c tio n s .

(Tot al 1 mar k )
30 3 . A Bainbri d g e mass spect r o m e t e r may be use d to mea s u r e the mas s of
A. an atom.
B. an ion.
C. an isotop e.
D. a molecul e.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

30 4 . A nucle u s of the isotop e potas si u m- 40 dec ays to a nucle u s of the isotop e
argo n- 40. The reaction equ a tio n for this dec ay may be writt e n as
40 40
19K  Z Ar X ν
Which of the following cor r e c tly identifies the proto n num b e r of argo n- 40
and the particle X?
Z X
A. 18 β–
B. 18 β+
C. 19 β+
D. 19 β–
(Tot al 1 mar k )
30 5 . For the five- bit binary num b e r 1101 0, which of the following corr e c tly
identifies both the most- significa n t bit (MSB) and the equivale n t decim al
num b e r ?
MS B Dec i m a l
A. 1 52
B. 0 26
C. 1 26
D. 0 52
(Tot al 1 mar k )

30 6 . The capa cit a n c e of a pixel of a CCD is 3.2 pF. A pulse of light is incide n t on
the pixel and as a res ult, 10 4 elect r o n s are eject e d from the pixel. The
mag ni t u d e of the chan g e in pote n ti al of the pixel is
A. 5.0 × 10 –16 V
B. 5.0 × 10 –4 V
C. 2.0 × 10 3 V
D. 2.0 × 10 15 V
(Tot al 1 mar k )
30 7 . Which of the following ratios is the definition of qua n t u m efficiency of a

pixel?
n u m b eor f p h ot onins c id e n t
A. n u m b eof
r e le c t r o nesm it t e d
n u m b eof
r e le c t r o nesm it t e d
B. n u m b eor f p h ot onins c id e n t
in t e n s itoyf in c id e nlig
t ht
C. in t e n s itoyf e m it t e lig
d ht
in t e n s itoyf e m it t e lig
d ht
D. in t e n s itoyf in c id e nlig
t ht
(Tot al 1 mar k )
30 8 . Degr a d e d ene r gy is ener gy that is
A. stor e d in the Ear t h’s atmo s p h e r e .
B. availabl e from non- rene w a bl e ene r gy sour c e s .
C. conve r t e d into work in a cyclical proc e s s.
D. no longer available for the perfor m a n c e of useful work.

(Tot al 1 mar k )

30 9 . A coal- fired powe r station has a powe r outp u t of P and its efficiency is ε. It
bur n s a mas s of coal M every secon d. The best estim a t e of the ene r gy
density of the coal used is
A. Pε M
Mε
B. P
Pε
C. M
P
D. εM
(Tot al 1 mar k )

The gra p h shows the variation with tem p e r a t u r e T of the resist a n c e R of an

elect ric al com po n e n t .
(a) A stud e n t hypot h e siz e s that the resist a n c e is inver s ely propo r tio n a l to
the tem p e r a t u r e .
Use dat a from the gra p h to show whet h e r the hypot h e s i s is suppo r t e d .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................

.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(b) A secon d stud e n t sugg e s t s that the relations hi p is of the form
b
lg R = a + T
whe r e a and b are const a n t s .
The stud e n t plots the grap h below. Erro r bar s have bee n includ e d for
the sake of clarity.

(i) Explain how the grap h dra w n could be use d as evide nc e to
suppo r t the stud e n t’s sugg e s tio n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Use the grap h to dete r m i n e the const a n t s a and b .
b : .....................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
a: .....................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(iii) Using your ans w e r s to (b)(ii), dete r m i n e a value for the

resis t a n c e of the compo n e n t at a tem p e r a t u r e of 260 K.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 11 mark s )
An athlet e trains by dra g gi n g a heavy load acros s a roug h horizont al

surfac e.
The athl et e exer t s a force of ma gni t u d e F on the load at an angle of 25° to

the horizont al.
(a) Once the load is moving at a stea dy spee d, the aver a g e horizon t a l
friction al force acting on the load is 470 N.
Calcula t e the aver a g e value of F that will ena bl e the load to move at
const a n t spee d.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) The load is moved a horizon t a l dista n c e of 2.5 km in 1.2 hour s.
Calcula t e
(i) the work done on the load by the force F.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) the minim u m aver a g e powe r requi r e d to move the load.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c) The athlet e pulls the load uphill at the sam e spe e d as in par t (a).
Explain, in ter m s of ene r gy cha n g e s , why the minim u m aver a g e powe r

req ui r e d is grea t e r than in (b)(ii).
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
31 2 . This ques tion is abou t solar hea ti n g pan el s.
(a) A village consist s of 120 hous e s . It is propos e d tha t solar pan els be
used to provide hot wate r to the hous e s .
aver a g e powe r need e d per hous e to hea t wate r = 3.0 kW

aver a g e surfac e solar inten sity = 650 W m –2
efficiency of ene r gy conve r sio n of a solar pan el = 18 %
Calcula t e the minim u m surfa c e are a of the solar pan els requi r e d to
provide the total powe r for wat e r hea tin g.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................

.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(b) Sugg e s t two disadv a n t a g e s of using sola r powe r to provide ene r gy for
heatin g wat e r.
1: .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
2: .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
31 3 . This ques tion is abou t a gen e r a t o r .
(a) Define electro m o t i v e force .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) The grap h shows the variatio n with time of elect r o m o tive force (emf)
for a gene r a t o r .

(i) Calculat e the rms value of the emf of the gen e r a t o r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) The spee d of rotation of the gene r a t o r is halved with no othe r

chan g e s being mad e.
On the grap h, sketc h the variatio n of emf with time.

(2)
(iii) Explain why the grap h you drew in (ii) is differ e n t from the
origin al grap h.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

31 4 . This ques tion is abou t an ideal gas.
(a) The grap h shows a pres s u r e- volum e (P–V ) rela tion s hi p for a fixed
mas s of an ideal gas.
The gas und e r g o e s a thr e e- stag e cycle AB, BC and CA.
(i) Identify the isocho ric (isovolu m e t r i c) cha n g e of stat e.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Use data from the gra p h to show that the chan g e AB is
isothe r m a l .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................

..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(iii) Stat e the two chan g e s for which the r m a l ene r gy is tra n sf e r r e d
from the gas.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iv) Calculat e the work done by the gas in the cha n g e BC.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b) The amou n t of gas in part (a) is 0.74 mol.
Calcula t e the maxim u m tem p e r a t u r e of the gas durin g the cycle in

part (a).
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)

(c) The fixed mass of gas is heat e d from tem p e r a t u r e T 1 to T 2 at const a n t
volum e. Explain why, if this fixed mas s of gas is hea t e d from T 1 to T 2
at const a n t pres s u r e , the amou n t of ene r gy requi r e d is differ e n t .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 14 mark s )
31 5 . This ques tion is abou t solar radi a tion.
(a) Stat e the Stefan–Boltzm a n n law for a black body.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) The following data relat e to the Eart h and the Sun.
Eart h- Sun dist a n c e = 1.5 × 10 11 m

radius of Eart h = 6.4 × 10 6 m

radius of Sun = 7.0 × 10 8 m
surfac e tem p e r a t u r e of Sun = 5800 K

(i) Use data from the table to show tha t the powe r radi a t e d by the
Sun is abou t
4 × 10 26 W.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Calculat e the solar powe r incide n t per unit are a at a dista n c e
from the Sun equ al to the Eart h’s dista n c e from the Sun.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) The aver a g e powe r absor b e d per unit are a at the Eart h’s surfa c e
is 240 W m –2 .
Stat e two reas o n s why the value calcula t e d in (b)(ii) differs from
this value.
1: .....................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
2: .....................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iv) Show that the value for powe r absor b e d per unit are a of 240 W
m –2 is consist e n t with an aver a g e equilibri u m tem p e r a t u r e for
Eart h of abou t 255 K.

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) Explain, by refer e n c e to the gre e n h o u s e effect, why the aver a g e
tem p e r a t u r e of the surfac e of the Eart h is gre a t e r tha n 255 K.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(d) Sugg e s t why the burnin g of fossil fuels may lead to an incr e a s e in the
tem p e r a t u r e of the surfac e of the Eart h.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 15 mark s )

31 6 . This ques tion is abou t char g e- couple d device s (CCDs).
(a) List two adva n t a g e s of using CCDs as comp a r e d to using film for
imag e capt u r e .
1: .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
2: .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) A CCD used to capt u r e X-ray imag e s consis t s of a squa r e 2600 0 ×

2600 0 arr a n g e m e n t of pixels. Eac h pixel produ c e s 16 levels of
infor m a t io n. Imag e s capt u r e d by the CCD are stor e d on a disk which
can stor e a maxim u m of 4.0 × 10 11 bits of dat a.
Deter m i n e the num b e r of imag e s that may be stor e d on one disk.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c) Outline
(i) how X-rays inciden t on a pixel in a CCD prod u c e a volta g e signal.

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) how voltag e signal s such as that in (c)(i) are use d to stor e the X-
ray infor m a ti o n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
31 7 . This ques tion is abou t wat e r wave s.
A small sphe r e , mount e d at the end of a vertic al rod, dips below the surfa c e
of shallow wat e r in a tray. The sphe r e is drive n vertic ally up and down by a
motor att ac h e d to the rod. The oscillation s of the sphe r e prod u c e travelling
waves on the surfac e of the wat e r.
(a) Stat e what is mea n t by a travelling (prog r e s sive ) wave.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) The diagr a m shows how the displa c e m e n t of the wat e r surfa c e at a
particul a r insta n t in time varies with dista n c e from the sphe r e . The
period of oscillation of the sphe r e is 0.027 s.
Use the diagr a m to calcul a t e , for the wave,
(i) the amplitu d e.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) the wavele n g t h .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) the frequ e n cy.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iv) the spee d.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(c) The wave moves from region A into a region B of shallowe r wate r . The
waves move mor e slowly in region B. The diag r a m (not to scale) shows
som e of the wavefr o n t s in region A.
(i) On the diagr a m , draw thr e e lines to comple t e the wavefro n t s in

region B.
(2)

(ii) Theory sugg e s t s that the wave spe e d c is relat e d to the wat e r
dept h d by
gd
c =
wher e g is a const a n t .
The refr ac tive index for waves travelling from region A to region
B is 1.4.
Dete r mi n e the following ratio.
w a t e dr e p t hin A
w a t e dr e p t hin B
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(d) Anothe r sphe r e is dippe d into the wate r . The sphe r e s oscillat e in
phas e. The diagr a m shows some lines in region A along which the
distu r b a n c e of the wat e r surfa c e is a minim u m .

(i) Outline how the regions of minim u m distu r b a n c e occur on the
surfac e.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) The frequ e n cy of oscillation of the sphe r e s is incr e a s e d .
Stat e and explain how this will affect the position s of minim u m
distu r b a n c e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................

..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 15 mark s )

31 8 . This ques tion is abou t projectile motion.
A sphe r e is project e d horizont a lly. The sphe r e is photog r a p h e d at inte rv als

of 0.10 s. The imag e s of the sphe r e are show n again s t a grid on the
diagr a m . Air resis t a n c e is negligible.

(a) Use dat a from the diagr a m to det e r m i n e the accel e r a ti o n of free fall.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(b) Deter m i n e the spee d of the sphe r e 1.2 s afte r rele a s e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(5)

(c) On the grid, draw the path of the sphe r e assu mi n g air resis t a n c e is
not negligible.
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

31 9 . This ques tion is abou t nuclea r dec ay and ioniza tion.
226
(a) A nucleu s of radiu m- 91 ( 9 1 Ra ) unde r g o e s alpha particle dec ay to form
a nucle u s of radon (Rn).
Identify the proton num b e r and nucleo n num b e r of the nucle u s of Rn.
Proton
num b e r : ...........................................................................................
.................
Nucleo n
num b e r : ...........................................................................................
..............
(2)
(b) Imm e di a t ely after the dec ay of a station a r y radiu m nucle u s , the alpha
particl e and the rado n nucle u s move off in opposit e dire c tion s and at
differ e n t spee d s .
(i) Outline the reas o n s for thes e obse rv a ti o n s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) Show that the ratio
in it ia kl in e t ice n e r g oy f a lp h ap a r t ic le
in it ia kl in e t ice n e r g of
y r a d o na t o m
is abou t 56.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(c) The initial kinetic ener gy of the alpha par ticle is 4.9 MeV. As the alpha
particl e pas s e s thro u g h air, it loses all its kine tic ene r gy by causin g
the ionization of 1.7 × 10 5 air molec ul e s .
(i) Stat e what is mean t by ionization.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Estim a t e , in joules, the aver a g e ene r gy nee d e d to ionize an air

molecul e.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(d) Outline why a bet a particl e has a longe r rang e in air tha n an alpha
particl e of the sam e ene r gy.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 14 mark s )
32 0 . This ques tion is abou t radio waves.
A satellite is travelling directly away from a spac e shuttl e with a spe e d of

7.9 km s –1 .
The satellite is tran s m i t ti n g radio wave s of frequ e n c y 150.00 0 000 MHz.
(a) (i) Calculat e the frequ e n c y to which an astr o n a u t on the

shuttl e will need to set a rec eive r in orde r to rec eive the signal
from the satellite.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) The satellite now pass e s close to a secon d spac e shuttl e.
Describ e the chan g e s tha t will nee d to be mad e to the setti ng of
the receive r as the sat ellit e appr o a c h e s and moves away from the
secon d shut tl e.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(iii) Sugg e s t why the form ul a use d in the calcul a tion in (a)(i) would
not be suita bl e for radia tio n from a dista n t galaxy moving away
from the Eart h at 90 % of the spe e d of light.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b) A space shuttl e orbits at a heigh t of 300 km above the surfa c e of the
Eart h. It carri es two pan els sepa r a t e d by a dista n c e of 24 m. The
panels reflect light of wavel e n g t h 500 nm towa r d s an obse rv e r on the
The obse rv e r views the pan els with a tele sc o p e of ape r t u r e dia m e t e r
85 mm. The panels act as point sourc e s of light for the obse r v e r .
(i) Describ e what is mea n t by the Rayleigh crite rion.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Dete r mi n e whet h e r the imag e s of the pan els form e d by the
teles co p e will be resolve d.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 11 mark s )
32 1 . This ques tion is abou t an elect ric al hea t e r .
An elect ric al heat e r consist s of two hea ti n g elem e n t s E 1 and E 2 . The

elem e n t s are conn e c t e d in par allel. Each elem e n t has a switc h and is
conne c t e d to a supply of emf 240 V. The supply has negligibl e inter n al
resis t a n c e .
Elem e n t E 1 is mad e from wire that has a cros s- section a l are a of 6.8 × 10 –8
m 2 . The resistivity of the wire at the oper a ti n g tem p e r a t u r e of the elem e n t
is 1.1 × 10 –6 Ωm.

(a) (i) The total lengt h of wire is 4.5 m. Show tha t the
resis t a n c e of E 1 is 73 Ω.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Calculat e the powe r outp u t of E 1 with only this elem e n t
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Elem e n t E 2 is mad e of wire of the sam e cross- section and

mat e ri al as E 1 . The lengt h of wire use d to make E 2 is 1.5 m.
Dete r mi n e the total powe r outpu t whe n both E 1 and E 2 are
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(iv) With refer e n c e to the powe r outp u t, explain why it would be

inapp r o p r i a t e to conn e c t the hea ti n g ele m e n t s in serie s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................

..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(b) Each elem e n t in the elect ri c a l heat e r is woun d as a coil as show n.
Each tur n of the coil may be conside r e d to act as a cur r e n t- car ryin g
long str ai g h t wire.
(i) On the diagr a m , draw the mag n e t i c field arou n d a curr e n t-

carryi n g long str ai g h t wire. The arro w shows the dire c tion of the
curr e n t .
(3)
(ii) Stat e and explain whet h e r the turn s of wire will attr a c t or rep el
one anot h e r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 15 mark s )

32 2 . This ques tion is abou t the hydro g e n atom.
(a) A par allel beam of visible light is shone throu g h mona t o m i c hydro g e n
gas.
The radiation em er gi n g from the gas is analys e d by comp a r i n g the

inciden t and eme r gi n g inte nsi ti e s at various wavele n g t h s . It is found
that at a wavelen g t h of 490 nm the inte nsity of the eme r g e n t bea m is
grea tly reduc e d .
The diagr a m shows some of the elect r o n ene r gy stat e s of the

hydrog e n atom wher e n is the qua n t u m num b e r of the ene r gy level.
(i) Calculat e the ene r gy, in eV, of a photon of light of wavele n g t h

490 nm.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Use your answ e r in (a)(i) and the ene r gy level diag r a m to explain
the redu c tio n in inten sity of the eme r g e n t bea m .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(b) Outline how the Schr ö di n g e r model of the hydrog e n atom leads to the
idea of discr e t e elect r o n ene r gy stat e s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................

.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

32 3 . This ques tion is abou t det er m i ni n g some prop e r t i e s of the sta r Wolf 359.
(a) The star Wolf 359 has a par allax angle of 0.419 arcs e c o n d s .
(i) Describ e how this par allax angl e is mea s u r e d .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(ii) Calculat e the dista n c e in light- year s from Eart h to Wolf 359.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Stat e why the met h o d of par allax can only be use d for star s at a
dist a n c e of less than a few hund r e d par s e c s from Eart h.
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) The ratio
a p p a r e nbtr ig h t n e of
s s Wo lf3 5 9
a p p a r e nbtr ig h t n e os sf t h eS u n is 3.7 × 10 –15 .
Show that the ratio
lu m in o s itoyf Wolf3 5 9
lu m in o s itof
y t h eS u n is 8.9 × 10 –4 . (1ly = 6.3 × 10 4 AU)
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(c) The surf ac e tem p e r a t u r e of Wolf 359 is 2800 K and its luminosity is
3.5 × 10 23 W.
Calcula t e the radius of Wolf 359.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(d) By refer e n c e to the data in (c), sugg e s t why Wolf 359 is neith e r a
white dwarf nor a red giant.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 15 mark s )
32 4 . This ques tion is abou t the density of the unive r s e .
(a) Define critical densit y .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) Explain how the futur e of the unive r s e may be pre dic t e d by comp a r i n g
the estim a t e d density of the unive r s e to the critic al density.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................

.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(c) Explain why the existe n c e of dark matt e r make s it difficult to me a s u r e
the density of the univer s e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
32 5 . This ques tion is abou t stellar evolution.
(a) Descri b e how a larg e cloud of hydro g e n gas can lead to conditions
that initiat e a fusion reac tio n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(b) Stat e the prop e r t y of a main sequ e n c e sta r that det e r m i n e s for how
long hydro g e n in its cor e fuse s into helium.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(c) Stat e the end prod u c t of nucle a r fusion proc e s s e s in the core of

(i) a red giant.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) the large s t red supe r giant s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
32 6 . This ques tion is abou t galactic motion.
(a) The wavele n g t h of the Lyma n- alph a line in the hydrog e n spec t r u m is
mea s u r e d in the labor a t o r y to be 122 nm. In the hydro g e n spec t r u m of
a galaxy, the Lyman- alph a line is me a s u r e d to be 147 nm. Dete r m i n e
the dista n c e of this galaxy from the Eart h.
Assum e that the Hubbl e const a n t H 0 is 75km s –1 M pc –1 .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(b) Sugg e s t on e reas o n why the r e is unc e r t a i n t y in the value of the

Hubbl e const a n t .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 4 mark s )

(a) A car rie r wave may be amplit u d e modula t e d or frequ e n c y modul a t e d .
Stat e
(i) what is mean t by modula tio n .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) why car rie r waves are modula t e d .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b) A sinusoid al car ri e r wave has a frequ e n c y of 500 kHz and an

amplit u d e of 8.0 V.
The carri e r wave is frequ e n c y modula t e d by a sinusoi d al infor m a t io n
signal of frequ e n cy 2.5 kHz and amplit u d e 1.2 V. The frequ e n c y
deviation of the carri e r wave is 15 kHz V –1 . Describ e qua n tit a tiv ely the
variation with time of the car ri e r wave.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

(4)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

32 8 . This ques tion is abou t optic fibre tra n s m i s sio n.
The variation with time t of the input powe r to an optic fibre is show n in
Diagr a m 1.
The variation with time t of the outp u t powe r from the optic fibre is show n
in Diagr a m 2.
The scales are the sam e on both diag r a m s .
(a) Stat e and explain the feat u r e of the gra p h s tha t shows tha t the r e is
(i) att e n u a t i o n of the signal.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) signal noise.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) The dur a tio n (time width) of the signal incre a s e s as it travels along
the optic fibre.
(i) Stat e two reas o n s for this incr e a s e d time dur a tio n.
1:......................................................................................................
..................
2:......................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Sugg e s t why this incre a s e in the width of the pulse sets a limit on
the frequ e n cy of pulse s that can be tran s m i t t e d along an
unint e r r u p t e d lengt h of optic fibre.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
32 9 . This ques tion is abou t the use of sat ellite s for com m u ni c a ti o n.
(a) (i) Stat e what is me a n t by a geost a t io n a r y sat ellite.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Explain the advan t a g e s of the use of geos t a tio n a r y satellite s for
com m u ni c a ti o n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) Explain the adva n t a g e s of the use of pola r- orbitin g satellite s for
com m u ni c a t io n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
A pas s e n g e r in a car is using a mobile phon e.

Stat e and explain the role of the base stations and the cellula r excha n g e as
the car moves from one cell to anot h e r .
.........................................................................................................................
........................
.........................................................................................................................
........................
.........................................................................................................................
........................
.........................................................................................................................
........................
.........................................................................................................................
........................
.........................................................................................................................
........................
.........................................................................................................................
........................
.........................................................................................................................
........................
.........................................................................................................................

........................
.........................................................................................................................
........................
(Tota l 5 mark s )

33 1 . This ques tion is abou t an amplifier circuit.
The diagr a m below show s an amplifie r circuit incor p o r a t i n g an ideal

oper a tio n al amplifier (op- amp).
The oper a ti o n al amplifier uses a +9 V / 0 / –9 V supply.
(a) Calcula t e the gain of the amplifier circuit.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) Deter m i n e the outp u t pote n ti al V out for value s of input pote n ti al V in
equal to
(i) –0.9 V.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) +2. 0 V.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
33 2 . This ques tion is abou t a compo u n d microsc o p e , sphe ri c al abe r r a t i o n and

chro m a t i c aber r a t i o n.
(a) An object O is place d in front of the objective lens of a compo u n d

micros c o p e as shown below.
The focal point s of the objective lens are at F. The micros c o p e is in

nor m al adjus t m e n t . Withou t dra wi n g a ray diag r a m , label the
appr oxi m a t e positions , on the princip al axis, of
(i) the image prod u c e d by the objec tive lens (label this position X).
(1)
(ii) the focal points of the eye lens (label thes e points E).
(1)

(iii) the final imag e (label this image Y).
(1)

(b) An object is viewed throu g h a convex lens that has bee n corr e c t e d for
sphe ric al aber r a t i o n.
For a partic ul a r object dista n c e , the image of the objec t is as show n
below.
Anothe r convex lens of the sam e focal lengt h, but not corr e c t e d for
sphe ric al aber r a t i o n, is now used to view the object. The object
dista n c e is unch a n g e d .
In the spac e below, draw the imag e as it would be see n throu g h this
secon d lens.
The imag e as seen thro u g h the cor r e c t e d lens is show n as a broke n
line.
(2)
(c) Explain how chro m a t i c abe r r a t i o n arise s whe n an objec t is viewe d

throu g h a single lens.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

33 3 . This ques tion is abou t the scatt e r i n g of light.
(a) Stat e an appr oxi m a t e wavele n g t h for
(i) red light.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) blue light.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b) With refer e n c e to your answ e r s in (a), explain why the settin g Sun
appe a r s reddis h in colour.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
33 4 . This ques tion is abou t two- sour c e inte rfe r e n c e .
A doubl e slit is arr a n g e d so that its plan e is nor m al to a bea m of lase r light,
as show n below.

The wavelen g t h of the light is 640 nm. The slit sepa r a t i o n in the doubl e slit
arr a n g e m e n t is 0.85 mm. Cohe r e n t light eme r g e s from the slits and an
interf e r e n c e patt e r n is observ e d on a scre e n. The scre e n is par allel to the
plane of the double slits. The dist a n c e betw e e n the slits and the scre e n is
2.4 m.

(a) (i) Stat e what is me a n t by cohe r e n t light.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Explain how an interfe r e n c e patt e r n is form e d on the scre e n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(b) Calcula t e the sepa r a t io n of the fringe s in the inte rfe r e n c e patt e r n on
the scre e n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c) The interf e r e n c e patt e r n in (b) consis t s of a serie s of alter n a t e light

and dark fringe s. The inte n sity of the light from one slit is now
red uc e d . Sugg e s t the effect on the app e a r a n c e of the fringe s.

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
(a) In an X-ray tube having a tungs t e n tar g e t , elect r o n s are accele r a t e d

from rest throu g h a pote n ti al differ e n c e of 45 kV.
Calcula t e the ran g e of wavele n g t h s tha t will be obse rv e d in the X-ray
spect r u m produ c e d by this bom b a r d m e n t .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(b) Explain the origins of the feat u r e s of a cha r a c t e r i s ti c X-ray spec t r u m .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................

.....................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

33 6 . This ques tion is abou t thin film inte rf e r e n c e .
(a) The diagr a m below shows a ray of monoc h r o m a t i c light incide n t on a

thin film in air.
On the diag r a m , draw the pat hs of rays tha t would give rise to
interfe r e n c e as seen by an eye in the region nea r E.
(2)
(b) White light is incide n t on a soap bubbl e. Explain why the soap film
appe a r s colour e d.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )
(a) Define inertial fram e of refer e n c e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) Ann and Sue are twins. Sue rem ai n s on Eart h. Ann travels to the sta r
Sirius in a spac es hi p moving at a spe e d of 0.80c, as mea s u r e d by Sue.
The dist an c e betw e e n Eart h and Sirius is 8.8 ly, as mea s u r e d by Sue.
(i) Calculat e the time elaps e d , as mea s u r e d by Sue, betw e e n Ann

leaving Ear t h and rea c hi n g Sirius.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Stat e and explain whet h e r Ann or Sue mea s u r e s the prope r time
betw e e n Ann leaving Eart h and arriving at Sirius.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Calculat e the time take n for the spa c e s hi p to reac h Sirius, as
meas u r e d by Ann.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iv) As Ann appr o a c h e s Sirius, she sends a radio mess a g e back to

Sue. The dista n c e betw e e n Sirius and Eart h, as mea s u r e d by
Ann, is 5.28 ly. Deter m i n e the time, as mea s u r e d by Ann, that it
takes for the signal to reac h Sue.
.........................................................................................................

..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(c) As soon as Ann arrives at Sirius, she imme di a t e ly turn s arou n d and
ret u r n s to Eart h at a spee d of 0.80c, as mea s u r e d by Sue. The ret u r n
journ ey gives rise to the twin par a d ox.
(i) Stat e what is mean t by the twin par a d ox.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Outline how the twin par a d ox is resolve d.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 13 mark s )
33 8 . This ques tion is abou t relativistic mass and ene r gy.
(a) Define rest mas s.

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) Explain why par ticle s canno t be accel e r a t e d to the spe e d c.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) Two proto n s are travelling towa r d s one anot h e r along the sam e
str aig h t line. The spee d of eac h proton is 0.70c as me a s u r e d by a
labor a t o r y observ e r . Calcul a t e the rela tive velocity of app ro a c h , as
mea s u r e d in the fram e of refe r e n c e of one of the proto n s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(d) Deter m i n e the pote n ti al differ e n c e throu g h which a proton mus t be

accel e r a t e d in orde r to rea c h a spe e d of 0.70c.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 9 mark s )
33 9 . This ques tion is abou t black holes.
(a) Define the Sch w a r z s c hil d radius .
.................................................................................................................

.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) Calcula t e the Schw a r z s c hil d radius for an objec t of mas s 2.0 × 10 31
kg.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c) A star s hi p is station a r y just outsid e the event horizon of a black hole.
A space station is also station a r y and is locat e d far away from the
black hole and any othe r mas sive objec t.
(i) The star s hi p tran s m i t s a radio signal to the spac e station. Explain
why the signal receive d at the spac e station is shifte d to a lower
frequ e n c y than the tra n s m i t t e d frequ e n c y.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) The star s hi p rem ai n s sta tion a r y just outsid e the event horizon for
one hour as meas u r e d by an obse rv e r in the star s hi p. The time
elaps e d , as meas u r e d by an obse rv e r in the spac e station, is ten
hour s. Deter m i n e , in ter m s of the Schw a r z s c hil d radius R s of the
black hole, the dist an c e of the sta r s hi p from the event horizon of
the black hole.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
A stud e n t listen s to music using a pers o n a l ear p h o n e . The powe r of the

soun d produ c e d by the ear p h o n e is 0.19 μW. The powe r i s evenly
distrib u t e d over the tymp a ni c me m b r a n e of are a 54 mm 2 .
(a) Calcula t e, for the surfac e of the tymp a ni c me m b r a n e ,
(i) the sound inten sity.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) the sound inten sity level (IL ).
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b) Comm e n t , with resp e c t to the effect on the hea ri n g of the stud e n t , on
the intensi ty level calcul at e d in (a)(ii).
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
(a) Define acous tic impe d a n c e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) The table gives values of the acous tic impe d a n c e for air and soft
tissue.
acous tic
impe d a n c e
/ kg m –2 s –1
air 430
soft tissue 1.63 × 10 6
The inten sity reflectio n coefficie n t for two medi a of impe d a n c e s Z 1

and Z 2 is
2
 Z1  Z 2 
 
Z Z 2
IR =  1 
(i) Dete r mi n e the intensi ty reflectio n coefficie nt betw e e n air and

soft tissue.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Explain why air betw e e n an ultra s o u n d prob e and the skin (soft
tissu e) of a pers o n preve n t s ultr a s o u n d diag no sis taking plac e.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(iii) Stat e and explain how the proble m you have explain e d in (b)(ii) is
overco m e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
34 2 . This ques tion is abou t nuclea r ma gn e t i c reson a n c e (NMR).
Outline the basic principles of nucle a r mag n e t i c reso n a n c e (NMR) imagin g.
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(Tota l 6 mark s )

34 3 . This ques tion is abou t radiation.
(a) Stat e, in the cont ext of radia tio n mea s u r e m e n t , wha t is me a n t by
(i) expos u r e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) abso r b e d dose.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) equivale n t dose.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b) The ene r gy requir e d to prod u c e one ion pair in air is 34 eV.
The expos u r e in a workpla c e is found to be 2.5 × 10 –3 C kg –1 .

Deter m i n e the ener gy given to 1.0 g of air as a res ult of this expos u r e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................

.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)

(c) The expos u r e to X-ray radia tio n during a comp u t e d tomog r a p h y (CT)
scan impos e s a finite risk for the patie n t.
(i) Sugg e s t the nat u r e of this risk.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Explain why such a risk is thou g h t to be acce p t a bl e by both the

patien t and the medic al profes sion.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
(a) Stat e an excha n g e par ticle for
(i) the weak inter a c ti o n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) the elect r o m a g n e t i c inter a c tio n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) Comm e n t , with refer e n c e to the mass of the excha n g e particle s , on
the rang e of the weak and elect r o m a g n e t i c inte r a c ti o n s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c) Descri b e the proce s s repr e s e n t e d by the Feyn m a n diagr a m below.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(d) Stat e what is mea n t by a virtual par ticle.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(e) Explain how the Heise n b e r g unce r t a i n t y princi ple for ene r gy and time
applies to the inter a c t io n in (c).
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(f) The unce r t ai n t y in the time for the elect r o m a g n e t i c inte r a c tio n
betw e e n two elect r o n s is 1.6 × 10 –16 s. Dete r mi n e the unc e r t a i n t y in
the ene r gy of the virtu al photon.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
34 5 . This ques tion is abou t particle dete c tio n.
(a) Outline how particle s prod u c e visible trac ks in a bubble cha m b e r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(b) Stat e two reas o n s why wire cha m b e r s are now use d rat h e r tha n
bubbl e cha m b e r s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c) Below is a sketc h of the track s in a bubble cha m b e r of an elect r o n and

a positr o n, prod u c e d by the anni hila tion of a photon.
Ther e is a mag n e t i c field dire c t e d nor m al to the plane of the pape r.
Explain why the tracks of the particle s are spirals.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

34 6 . This ques tion is abou t meso n s and baryon s.
(a) Stat e the qua r k cont e n t of meson s and baryon s .
Meson s: ...................................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Baryons: ..................................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) Explain why both meso n s and baryon s can be desc ri b e d as colourle s s .
Meson s: ...................................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Baryons: ..................................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c) A neg a tive pion, π –, collide s with a station a r y proton, produ ci n g a

neut r o n and an unknow n par ticle, X.
π– + p → n + X
(i) Stat e the char g e on par ticle X.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Deduc e whet h e r particle X is a meson or a baryo n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
34 7 . This ques tion is abou t pair prod u c tio n.
(a) Estim a t e the tem p e r a t u r e below which spont a n e o u s pair prod u c tio n of
elect r o n s and positr o n s cannot occur.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(b) It is sugg e s t e d that, in the early unive r s e , ther e was slightly mor e
mat t e r than anti- matt e r .
Using your ans w e r to (a), stat e why the r e is cur r e n tly only sta bl e
mat t e r in the univer s e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................

.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

34 8 . The cur r e n t in a resisto r is mea s u r e d as 2.00 A ± 0.02 A. Which of the
following corr e c tly identifies the absolut e unc e r t a i n t y and the perc e n t a g e
unce r t ai n t y in the curr e n t ?
Abso l u t e Per c e n t a g e
unc e r t a i n t y un c e r t a i n t y
A. ± 0.02 A ±1 %
B. ± 0.01 A ± 0.5 %
C. ± 0.02 A ± 0.01 %
D. ± 0.01 A ± 0.005 %
(Tot al 1 mar k )
34 9 . Which of the following lists only two vector qua n ti ti e s ?
A. mas s, ener gy, work
B. mom e n t u m , work, spee d
C. weight, force, accele r a ti o n
D. mom e n t u m , ener gy, displa c e m e n t

(Tot al 1 mar k )
35 0 . Sam a n t h a walks along a horizont a l path in the direc tio n shown. The curve d
par t of the pat h is a semi- circle.
The mag ni t u d e of her displ ac e m e n t from point P to point Q is

app r oxi m a t ely
A. 2 m.
B. 4 m.
C. 6 m.
D. 8 m.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

35 1 . Which of the following may be dete r m i n e d from a spe e d- time gra p h ?
A. Displac e m e n t
B. Dista nc e
C. Power
D. Forc e
(Tot al 1 mar k )
35 2 . Step h e n pus h e s two boxes P and Q, tha t stay in cont a c t, along a roug h
table, with a force F of 30 N.
Box P has a mas s of 2.0 kg and box Q has a mas s of 4.0 kg. Both boxes
move with cons t a n t spee d.
The res ult a n t force on box Q is
A. 0 N.
B. 5.0 N.
C. 15 N.
D. 30 N.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

35 3 . A ball moves along the inside of a horizont a l semi- circ ula r ring as show n.
The diagr a m is a view from above.
Which arrow repr e s e n t s the dire c tion of the aver a g e force on the ball?
(Tot al 1 mar k )

35 4 . A ball is throw n vertically upwa r d s and come s down again. Air resist a n c e is
negligible. Which of the following gra p h s shows how the gravit a tion a l
poten ti al ene r gy E P varies with time t ?
(Tot al 1 mar k )
35 5 . A pum p extr ac t s wate r from a well of dept h h at a const a n t rat e of R kg s –1 .

What is the powe r requir e d to raise the wat e r ?
R
A. gh
B. Rgh
Rg
C. h
hg
D. R
(Tot al 1 mar k )

35 6 . A box that is at rest with resp e c t to horizon t a l grou n d cont ain s a fixed
quan ti ty of an ideal gas. The inte r n a l ene r gy of the gas is U and its
tem p e r a t u r e is T . The box is now ma d e to move at cons t a n t spe e d with
res p e c t to the grou n d . Which of the following gives the cha n g e , if any, in
the inter n al ene r gy and the tem p e r a t u r e of the gas afte r the box has bee n
moving for some time?
Int er n a l en e r g y Te m p e r a t u r e
A. no chan g e no cha n g e
B. no chan g e incr e a s e
C. incr e a s e no cha n g e
D. incr e a s e incr e a s e
(Tot al 1 mar k )
35 7 . Object P has a mas s m P and specific hea t capa city c P . Object Q has a mas s
m Q and specific heat capacity c Q . The tem p e r a t u r e of eac h objec t incr e a s e s
by the sam e amou n t . Which of the following gives the ratio
t h e r m aeln e r g y tnr safe r r e tdoo b je c P

t
t h e r m aeln e r g y tnr safe r r e tdoo b je c Q
t ?
mP cQ
mQ c P
A.
mP cP
mQ c Q
B.
mQ c Q
C. mP cP
mQ c P
mP cQ
D.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

35 8 . For two object s to be in ther m a l equilibri u m they mus t
A. be in cont a c t with each othe r.
B. radiat e equ al amou n t s of powe r.
C. have the sam e ther m a l capa city.
D. be at the sam e tem p e r a t u r e .

(Tot al 1 mar k )
35 9 . The shock abso r b e r s of a car, in good working condition, ens u r e that the
vertical oscillations of the car are
A. und a m p e d .
B. lightly dam p e d .
C. moder a t e ly dam p e d .
D. critically dam p e d .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

36 0 . The gra p h s show how the accele r a ti o n a of four differe n t par ticle s varies
with their displace m e n t x.
Which of the par ticles is executi n g simple har m o ni c motion?
(Tot al 1 mar k )

36 1 . The diagr a m below is a snap s h o t of wave fronts of circul a r wave s emitt e d
by a point sour c e S at the surfac e of wate r . The sour c e vibra t e s at a
frequ e n c y f = 10.0 Hz.
The spee d of the wave front is
A. 0.15 cm s –1 .
B. 1.5 cm s –1 .
C. 15 cm s –1 .
D. 30 cm s –1 .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

36 2 . Two coher e n t point sour c e s S 1 and S 2 emit sphe ri c a l waves.
Which of the following bes t desc ri b e s the inte n si ty of the wave s at P and Q?
P Q
A. maxim u m minim u m
B. minim u m maxim u m
C. maxim u m maxim u m
D. minim u m minim u m
(Tot al 1 mar k )
36 3 . An alph a particle is accel e r a t e d thro u g h a pote n ti al differ e n c e of 10 kV. Its

gain in kinetic ene r gy is
A. 10 eV.
B. 20 eV.
C. 10 keV.
D. 20 keV.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

36 4 . A copp e r wire, of elect ric resis t a n c e R , has a lengt h L and a cross- section
S
are a S . Anothe r copp e r wire has a lengt h 2 L and a cross- section are a of 2 .
Which of the following is the resist a n c e of this wire?
R
A. 4
R
B. 2
C. 2R
D. 4R
(Tot al 1 mar k )
36 5 . The circuit shows a light- depe n d e n t resisto r (LDR) in serie s with a resisto r
and a cell. The emf of the cell is ε. The inte r n a l resist a n c e of the cell is
negligible.
When light shines on the LDR, the pote n ti al differ e n c e acros s the resis to r
will
A. stay the sam e.
B. decr e a s e .
C. incr e a s e but always be less tha n ε.
D. incr e a s e and exce e d ε.

(Tot al 1 mar k )

36 6 . The radius of a char g e d sphe ri c a l condu c t o r is R. Which of the following
grap h s best show s how the mag nit u d e of the elect ric al field str e n g t h E
varies with dista n c e r from the cent r e of the sphe r e ?
(Tot al 1 mar k )
36 7 . Which of the following gives the acc ele r a t io n of an elect r o n of elect ric
char g e e and mas s m in a unifor m elect ric field of stre n g t h E ?
A. E
B. Ee
Ee
C. m
m
D. Ee
(Tot al 1 mar k )

36 8 . A particle, of mas s m and char g e q , moves with velocity v perp e n d i c ul a r ly
to a mag n e ti c field. The mag nit u d e of the mag n e ti c forc e acting on the
par ticl e at a par tic ul a r point is F. Which of the following gives the
mag ni t u d e of the mag n e ti c field str e n g t h at that point?
F
A. q
F
B. m
F
C. ν
F
D. qν
(Tot al 1 mar k )
36 9 . Which of the following decay sequ e n c e s would result in the daug h t e r

nucle u s having the sam e proto n num b e r as the par e n t nucle u s ?
A. Alpha followed by gam m a
B. Beta (β – ) followe d by gam m a
C. Alpha followed by bet a (β –) followe d by beta (β –)
D. Beta (β –) followed by gam m a followe d by gam m a

(Tot al 1 mar k )
12
37 0 . The differe n c e betw e e n the mas s of a 6 C nucle u s and the sum of the
mas s e s of the individu al nucleo n s is 0.1 u. Which of the following is
app r oxi m a t ely the bindin g ener gy of the nucle u s ?
A. 90 MeV
B. 90 MeV c –2
C. 8 MeV
D. 8 MeV c –2
(Tot al 1 mar k )

37 1 . The proc es s by which a heavy nucle u s splits into two light e r nuclei is
known as
A. fission.
B. fusion.
C. radioac tive decay.
D. artificial (induc e d) tran s m u t a t i o n .

(Tot al 1 mar k )
37 2 . Which of the following cor r e c tly shows a rene w a bl e and a non- ren e w a bl e
sour c e of ener gy?
Ren e w a b l e No n- ren e w a b l e
A. oil geot h e r m a l
B. wind biofuels
C. ocea n waves nucle a r
D. nat u r al gas coal
(Tot al 1 mar k )
37 3 . Critical mas s refer s to the amou n t of fissile mat e ri a l that
A. will allow fission to be sust ai n e d .
B. is equivale n t to 235 g of ura ni u m .
C. will produ c e a growin g chain rea c tion.
D. is the minim u m mass nece s s a r y for fission to take plac e.

(Tot al 1 mar k )

37 4 . The annu al variation s of solar powe r incide n t per unit are a at a partic ul a r
point on the Eart h’s surfac e is mainly due to the cha n g e in the
A. dista n c e betw e e n the Ear t h and the Sun.
B. angle at which the solar rays hit the surfa c e of the Eart h.
C. aver a g e albedo of the Eart h.
D. aver a g e cloud cover of the Eart h.

(Tot al 1 mar k )

37 5 . The wate r in a res er voir behind a da m drops from an initial height H 0
above a turbin e to prod u c e hydro el e c t r i city. At time t = T , h = 0.
The gra p h shows the variation with time t of the height h of the wat e r
above the tur bi n e.
Which of the following is a mea s u r e of the maxim u m theor e t i c a l elect ric

powe r availabl e?
A. H 0 and the slope of the gra p h
B. T and the slope of the grap h
C. T and the are a unde r the gra p h
D. H 0 and the are a und e r the gra p h

(Tot al 1 mar k )

37 6 . Each squa r e met r e of the Sun’s surfac e emits S joules per secon d. The
radi us of the Sun is r, and the Sun is at a mea n dista n c e R from the Eart h.
Which of the following gives the solar powe r incide n t per unit are a of the
top layer of the Eart h’s atmo s p h e r e ?
r
 S
A.  R
2
r
  S
B. R
 R
 S
C. r
2
R
  S
D. r
(Tot al 1 mar k )

37 7 . The diagr a m shows a simple clima t e model for Ear t h. The tem p e r a t u r e of
the grou n d is T g and is ass u m e d to radia t e as a black body. The
tem p e r a t u r e of the atmos p h e r e is T a and has an emis sivity ε.
In the model, the intensi ty radia t e d from the groun d equ als the inte nsity
Tg
radi at e d from the atm os p h e r e towa r d s the grou n d. What is the ratio Ta ?
A. ε4
B. ε
C. ε4
D. 1
(Tot al 1 mar k )

Gillian carrie d out an experi m e n t to inves tig a t e the crat e r s form e d whe n
steel balls are dropp e d into sand. To try and find the relation s hi p betw e e n
the diam e t e r of the crat e r and the ene r gy of impac t of ste el balls of the
sam e diam e t e r , she dropp e d a ste el ball from differ e n t heigh t s h into sand
and mea s u r e d the res ultin g diam e t e r d of the crat e r . The data are show n
plott e d below.
(a) The unce r t ai n t y in the mea s u r e m e n t of d is ±0. 4 0 cm; the unce r t a i n t y

in h is too small to be show n. Draw erro r bars for the data point (0.2,
0.047) and the dat a point (2.0, 0.10).
(2)
(b) Draw a best- fit line for the data points.

(2)
(c) The origin al hypot h e si s, ma d e by Gillian, was that the diam e t e r of the
crat e r is directly propo r tio n a l to the ene r gy of impa c t of the ste el
balls. Explain why the data does not suppo r t this hypot h e si s.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................

.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(d) Since Gillian’s data did not suppo r t her hypot h e s i s, she res e a r c h e d to
find alter n a t iv e hypot h e s e s . She found that the r e are two theo ri e s
used to predict a relation s hi p betw e e n d and h . In orde r to find which
theor y is bes t suppo r t e d by the dat a, she proc e s s e d the data in two
sepa r a t e ways. The proce s s e d dat a are shown below.
(i) Draw a line of best- fit on each gra p h.

(2)

(ii) Stat e and explain which theo ry is best suppo r t e d by the stud e n t’s
data.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 11 mark s )
37 9 . This ques tion is abou t circula r motion and global war mi n g.
(a) A car is travelling at const a n t spe e d of 18 m s –1 arou n d a horizon t a l

bend in the road.
The mas s of the car is 1.5 × 10 3 kg and the bend forms part of a circle
of radius
2.0 × 10 3 m.
(i) Stat e why the car is accele r a ti n g .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Dete r mi n e the friction al forc e betw e e n the tyres of the car and
the surfac e of the roa d that prod u c e s the acc el e r a t io n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

(2)

(b) It is sugg e s t e d that the use of fossil fuels to powe r car s has led to an
enha n c e m e n t of the gree n h o u s e effect.
(i) Stat e the reas o n for this sugg e s t io n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Outline on e mech a ni s m by which the enha n c e d gre e n h o u s e

effect may lead to an incr e a s e in global war mi n g .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
38 0 . This ques tion is abou t chan g e of pha s e of a liquid and late nt heat of
vaporiza tion.
(a) Stat e the differ e n c e betw e e n evapo r a t i o n and boiling with refe r e n c e
to
(i) tem p e r a t u r e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) surfac e area of a liquid.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b) A liquid in a calori m e t e r is hea t e d at its boiling point for a mea s u r e d

period of time.
Power rating of heat e r = 15 W

Time for which liquid is hea t e d at boiling point = 4.5 ×
10 2 s
Mass of liquid boiled away = 1.8 ×
10 –2 kg
Use the data to det e r m i n e the specific late nt hea t of vaporiz a tio n of
the liquid.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c) Stat e and explain on e rea s o n why the calcula tio n in (b) will give a
value of the specific laten t hea t of vaporiz a tion of the liquid tha t is
grea t e r than the true value.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
38 1 . This ques tion is abou t fossil fuels and the gre e n h o u s e effect.
(a) Stat e two reas o n s why most of the world’s ene r gy cons u m p t i o n is
provide d by fossil fuels.
1. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) A powe r station has an outpu t powe r of 500 MW and an over all
efficiency of 27 %.
It uses nat u r al gas as a fuel tha t has an ene r gy density of 56 MJ kg –1 .
(i) Define ener g y densit y .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Dete r mi n e the rat e of cons u m p t i o n of nat u r a l gas in the powe r

station.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(c) Outline why the enha n c e d gre e n h o u s e effect may res ult in an incr e a s e
in the tem p e r a t u r e of the Ear t h’s surfa c e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(d) (i) The solar inte nsity at the position of the Eart h is 1380
–2
W m . The aver a g e albe do of Eart h is 0.300. Sta t e why an
aver a g e value of albe d o is quot e d.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Show that the aver a g e reflec t e d inte n sity from the Eart h is about
100 W m –2 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(e) One of the expect e d res ult s of global war mi n g is an incre a s e d sea
level. The incre a s e in volum e ΔV for a tem p e r a t u r e incr e a s e ΔT is
given by ΔV = γV ΔT. Show, using the following dat a, that the res ultin g
rise in sea level is about 0.5 m.
Temp e r a t u r e incr e a s e = 2.0 °C

Surfa c e are a of ocea n s on Eart h =
8 2
3.6 × 10 km
Avera g e ocea n dept h = 3.0 km
γ = 8.8 × 10 –5 K–1
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 16 mark s )

38 2 . This ques tion is abou t radioa ctive dec ay and bindin g ene r gy.
(a) Descri b e what is mean t by radioa c tive decay.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) A nucleu s of thallium- 206 (Tl-206) unde r g o e s radioa c tive dec ay to a

nucleu s of lead- 206 (Pb- 206). In the reac tio n equa tio n below, identify
the proton num b e r Z of lead and the par ticle x .
206
8 2T  206
Z P b β  x
Z : .............................................................................................................
....................
x : .............................................................................................................
....................
(2)
(c) The mas s of a Tl-206 nucle u s is 191 870 MeV c –2 . Dete r mi n e the
binding ener gy per nucleo n of Tl-206.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

(4)

(d) Stat e why the bindin g ene r gy of Pb- 206 is gre a t e r tha n tha t of Tl-206.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 9 mark s )
38 3 . This ques tion is abou t oscillation s and waves.
(a) A rect a n g u l a r piece of wood of lengt h l floats in wate r with its axis
vertical as show n in diagr a m 1.
The lengt h of wood below the surfa c e is d . The wood is pus h e d

vertically down w a r d s a dista n c e A such that a lengt h of wood is still
above the wate r surfac e as show n in diag r a m 2. The wood is the n
relea s e d and oscillat e s vertic ally. At the insta n t show n in diag r a m 3,
the wood is moving down w a r d s and the lengt h of wood bene a t h the
surfac e is d + x .
(i) On diag r a m 3, draw an arrow to show the direc tion of the

accele r a ti o n of the wood.
(1)

(ii) The accel e r a t io n a of the wood (in m s –2 ) is relat e d to x (in m) by
the following equ atio n.
14
 x
a = l
Explain why this equ a tio n show s that the wood is exec u ti n g
simpl e har m o ni c motion.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) The period of oscillation of the wood is 1.4 s. Show tha t the
lengt h l of the wood is 0.70 m.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(b) The wood in (a), as show n in diagr a m 2, is rele a s e d at time t = 0. On
the axes below, sketc h a gra p h to show how the velocity v of the wood
varies with time over one period of oscillation.
(1)
(c) The dist an c e A that the wood is initially pus h e d down is 0.12 m.
(i) Calculat e the magni t u d e of the maxim u m accele r a ti o n of the

wood.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) On your sketc h gra p h in (b) label with the lette r P one point
wher e the mag nit u d e of the accel e r a ti o n is a maxim u m .
(1)

(d) The oscillations of the wood gen e r a t e waves in the wat e r of
wavelen g t h 0.45 m.
The grap h shows how the displa c e m e n t D, of the wate r surfa c e at a
particul a r dista n c e from the wood varies with time t .
Using the grap h, calcula t e the
(i) spee d of the waves.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) ratio of the displac e m e n t at t = 1.75 s to the displa c e m e n t at t =

0.35 s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) ratio of the ener gy of the wave at t = 1.75 s to the ene r gy at t =
0.35 s
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 15 mark s )
38 4 . This ques tion is abou t elect ri ca l resist a n c e and elect ric circ uit s.
(a) Define resista n c e and stat e Ohm’s law.
Resist a n c e: ..............................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Ohm’s
law: .................................................................................................
.................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) A resis to r mad e from a met al oxide has a resist a n c e of 1.5 Ω. The
resisto r is in the form of a cylinde r of lengt h 2.2 × 10 –2 m and radius
1.2 × 10 –3 m. Calcula t e the resistivity of the met al oxide.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c) The man uf a c t u r e r of the resisto r in (b) gua r a n t e e s its resis t a n c e to be

within ±1 0 % of 1.5 Ω provide d the powe r dissip a tio n in the resis to r
does not excee d 1.0 W. Calcula t e th e maxim u m curr e n t in the resis to r
for the power dissipa tion to be equal to 1.0 W.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(d) The resi stan c e of each of the resis to r s in the circ uit below is mea s u r e d
to be 1.5 Ω with an accu r a c y of ±1 0 %.
The cell has an emf of 2.0 V and negligible inte r n a l resist a n c e .
(i) Define emf .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Dete r mi n e the minim u m and the maxim u m powe r that could be
dissipa t e d in this circuit.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

38 5 . This ques tion is abou t mom e n t u m , ene r gy and powe r.
(a) In his Principia Math e m a t i c a Newt o n expr e s s e d his third law of

motion as “to every action the r e is always oppos e d an equ al rea c tion”.
Stat e what New to n mean t by this law.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) A book is relea s e d from rest and falls towa r d s the surfa c e of Eart h.
Discus s how the cons e rv a t io n of mom e n t u m applies to the Eart h- book
syste m .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(c) A larg e swingin g ball is use d to drive a horizon t al iron spike into a
vertical wall. The cent r e of the ball falls thro u g h a vertic al height of
1.6 m befor e striking the spike in the position show n.
The mas s of the ball is 3.5 kg and the mas s of the spike is 0.80 kg.
Imm e di a t ely after striking the spike, the ball and spike move toge t h e r .
Show that the
(i) spee d of the ball on striking the spike is 5.6 m s –1 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) ene r gy dissip at e d as a res ult of the collision is abou t 10 J.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(d) As a result of the ball striking the spike, the spike is drive n a dista n c e
7.3 × 10 –2 m into the wall. Calcula t e , ass u m i n g it to be const a n t , the
friction force F betw e e n the spike and wall.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(e) The machin e that is used to rais e the ball has a useful powe r outp u t of
18 W. Calculat e how long it take s for the mac hi n e to raise the ball
throu g h a height of 1.6 m.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 15 mark s )
38 6 . This ques tion is abou t elect ri c and gravit a tio n a l fields
(a) Stat e, in ter m s of elect r o n s , the differ e n c e betw e e n a cond u c t o r and

an insulat o r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) Sugg e s t why ther e mus t be an elect ric field inside a cur r e n t- carryin g
cond u c t o r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c) The mag ni t u d e of the elec t ric field str e n g t h inside a condu c t o r is 55 N
C –1 . Calculat e the force on a free elect r o n in the cond uc t o r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(d) The elect ric force betw e e n two point cha r g e s is a funda m e n t a l forc e
as is the gravit ation al forc e betw e e n two point mas s e s . Sta t e on e
similarity betw e e n thes e two force s and on e differ e n c e (othe r than
the fact that one applies to cha r g e and the othe r to mas s).
Similari ty: ...............................................................................................

....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Differ e n c e: ..............................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(e) The force on a mas s of 1.0 kg falling freely nea r the surfa c e of Jupite r

is 25 N. The radius of Jupite r is 7.0 × 10 7 m.
(i) Stat e the value of the ma gni t u d e of the gravit a tion a l field
str e n g t h at the surfac e of Jupite r.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Calculat e that the mas s of Jupite r is about 1.8 × 10 27 kg.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
38 7 . This ques tion is abou t vision and the eye.
(a) Stat e on e function of
(i) cone cells.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) rod cells.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b) Descri b e the distri b u tio n of cone and rod cells on the retin a.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................

.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) An object is to be viewed in very dim light. With refe r e n c e to your
ans w e r to (b) explain why the objec t is most clea rly see n whe n looke d
at sidew ay s rat h e r than direc tly.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
38 8 . This ques tion is abou t stan di n g wave s.
A string that is fixed at both ends is mad e to vibra t e in the funda m e n t a l

(first har m o nic) mode.
The fixed ends of the string are at x = 0 and x = L .
Each point on the string oscillat e s in simple har m o ni c motion. The

displac e m e n t y of the string at a point x at time t is given by the equ a tio n
y = A cos(50 0 π t )
 πx 
 
wher e A = 12sin  2  .
In thes e form ul a e x is in met r e s and t is in secon d s . Using this equ a tio n,
(a) explain why the amplitu d e of the sta n di n g wave is not cons t a n t .
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) calculat e the frequ e n c y of the stan di n g wave.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c) show that L = 2.0 m.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 4 mark s )
38 9 . This ques tion is abou t diffrac tio n and resolution.
(a) Light from a monoc h r o m a t i c point sour c e S 1 is incide n t on a nar r o w

rect a n g ul a r slit.

After pas sin g thro u g h the slit, the light is incide n t on a scre e n som e
dista n c e away from the slit. The gra p h shows how the inte nsi ty
distrib u tio n on the scre e n varies with the angle θ show n in the
diagr a m .
(i) The width of the slit is 4.0 × 10 –4 m. Use dat a from the gra p h to
calcula t e the wavel en g t h of the light.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) An identical sour c e S 2 is plac e d close to S 1 as show n.
The imag e s of the two sourc e s on the scre e n are just resolve d
accor di n g to the Rayleigh crit e rio n. On the gra p h above, dra w
the inten sity distri b u tio n of the secon d sour c e .
(1)
(b) The Very Larg e Array (VLA) is use d to analys e radio signals from
dista n t galaxies.
The combi n e d diam e t e r of the VLA is 36 km. A region of linea r size L
inside the radio galaxy M87 emits radio wave s with a frequ e n c y of 43
GHz. The galaxy is a dista n c e
4.7 × 10 23 m from Ear t h. The VLA can just resolve the radio emittin g
region.
Estim a t e the value of L .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

(a) A bea m of unpola riz e d light of inte nsity I 0 is incide n t on a polariz e r .

The polarizatio n axis of the pola riz e r is initially vertic al as show n.
The polarizer is then rota t e d by 180° in the direc tio n show n. On the
axes below, sketc h a grap h to show the varia tio n with the rotatio n
angle θ, of the tran s mi t t e d light inte n sity I, as θ varies from 0° to
180°. Label your sketc h- gra p h with the lette r U.
(2)

(b) The bea m in (a) is now repla c e d with a polariz e d bea m of light of the
sam e inten si ty.
The plane of polarizatio n of the light is initially par allel to the
polariza tio n axis of the pola riz e r.
The polarizer is then rota t e d by 180° in the direc tio n show n. On the
sam e axes in (a), sketc h a gra p h to show the variatio n with the
rotation angle θ, of the tra n s mi t t e d light inte n sity I, as θ varies from
0° to 180°. Label your sketc h- gra p h with the lette r P.
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )
(a) In the photo el ec t r i c effect, elect r o n s are emitt e d from a met al surfa c e
almost imm edi at ely after light is incide n t on the surfa c e, i.e. withou t
any time delay. Explain this obse r v a tio n with refe r e n c e to Einst ei n’s
theor y of the photoel e c t r i c effect.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) The grap h shows the variatio n with incide n t light freq u e n c y f of the
maxim u m kinetic ene r gy E K of the emitt e d elect r o n s .
Use the grap h to
(i) estim a t e the work function of the met al surfa c e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) calcula t e the maxim u m spe e d of the emitt e d elect r o n s for

incide n t light of frequ e n c y 5.0 × 10 15 Hz.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

39 2 . This ques tion is abou t qua n t u m aspe c t s of the elect r o n .
(a) The ene r gy of elect r o n s in atom s is said to be qua n tiz e d. Stat e wha t is
mea n t by qua n tize d ener gy.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) An elect r o n that is confine d to move in a region of lengt h L can only

have ener gi e s given by the equ a tio n
h2n2
2
E n = 8πm L
whe r e n is a positive integ e r .
For L = 1.0 × 10 –10 m, use the equa tio n above to
(i) calcula t e that the smalle s t differ e n c e betw e e n the allowe d

ene r gi e s of the elect r o n is 5.8 × 10 –18 J.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) det e r m i n e the wavele n g t h of the photon whos e ene r gy is 5.8 ×

10 –18 J.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(c) Part of the emission spect r u m of hydro g e n is show n in the diag r a m .
Sugg e s t whet h e r this spec t r u m can be explain e d by the model in (b).
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
(a) The decay const a n t for a par tic ul a r isotop e is λ = 0.048 s –1 . A sam pl e
of the isotop e initially cont ai n s 2.0 × 10 12 nuclei of this isotop e.
(i) Define decay cons ta n t .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Estim a t e the num b e r of nuclei that will dec ay in the first secon d.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) The grap h shows the variatio n with time t of the activity A of a sam pl e
cont ai nin g radioac tive mat e ri al that consis t s of two differe n t isotop e s .
Each isotop e decays into a stabl e daug h t e r isotop e .
(i) Use the grap h to explain how it may be dedu c e d that the sa m pl e
cont ai n s mor e than one isotop e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) One of the isotop e s in the sam pl e has a half- life tha t is shor t e r
than 0.20 s. Use the gra p h to estim a t e the half- life of the othe r
isotop e. Explain your workin g.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
39 4 . This ques tion is abou t char g e- couple d device s (CCDs).
(a) Light from an object that is incide n t on the pixels of a CCD gives rise
to pote n ti al differ e n c e s acros s the pixels. Outline how the s e pote n ti al
differ e n c e s are used to prod u c e an imag e of the object.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) The CCD of a partic ul a r digital cam e r a has 5.0 × 10 6 pixels and a
collectin g are a of 22 mm 2 . Light of inte n si ty 1.4 W m –2 is incide n t on
the collectin g are a of the CCD for a time of 85 ms. The aver a g e ene r gy
of the photon s of the incide n t light is 3.6 × 10 –19 J.
The quan t u m efficiency of the CCD is 75 %.
(i) Stat e what is mean t by qua n t u m efficiency.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Show that the num b e r of photon s incide n t on on e pixel of the
CCD in the time interv al of 85 ms is appr oxi m a t e ly 1.5 × 10 6 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(iii) The capa cit a n c e of a pixel of the CCD is 12 pF. Show tha t the
poten ti al differ e n c e est a blis h e d acros s the pixel is appr oxi m a t e ly
15 mV.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iv) The voltag e in (b)(iii) is digitize d into a four bit bina ry num b e r .
Dete r mi n e the bina ry equivale n t of this volta g e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(c) CCDs dete c ti n g X-rays are now use d in medic al diagno si s. Stat e the
adva n t a g e to the patien t of an X-ray CCD det e c t o r with high qua n t u m
efficiency.

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

39 5 . This ques tion is abou t the mobile phone syste m .
In the mobile phon e syste m , a partic ul a r geog r a p h i c are a is divide d into a

num b e r of cells with a base station in eac h cell, eac h conn e c t e d to a
cellula r exch a n g e .
Describ e the function of the bas e sta tion s and the cellula r excha n g e .
Base
stations : ...................................................................................................
......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
Cellula r
exch a n g e : ................................................................................................
.................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(Tota l 4 mark s )
39 6 . This ques tion is abou t the oper a tio n al amplifie r.
(a) On the axes below draw a sketc h gra p h to show the variatio n with
input voltag e V in of the outpu t volta g e V out of a non- inverti n g
oper a ti o n al amplifier.

(2)

(b) A tem p e r a t u r e war nin g devic e make s use of a buzze r tha t sound s
whe n the poten ti al differe n c e acros s it is 24 V. The circ uit in the
war ni n g device is show n.
It is requi r e d that the buzze r should sound whe n the tem p e r a t u r e of

the ther m i s t o r rises above 50 °C.
(i) Stat e the voltag e at point Q.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) At a tem p e r a t u r e of 50 °C the resist a n c e of the the r m i s t o r is R .

Explain why the buzze r will sound whe n the tem p e r a t u r e rise s
above 50 °C.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

(a) Stat e what is mea n t by prope r lengt h and prop e r time inte rv al.
Prope r
lengt h: .............................................................................................
.................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Prope r time
interv al: ...........................................................................................
........
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) A space s hi p moves with spe e d v = 0.600 c relative to a spa c e sta tion.
Two laser s , A and B, on the spac e station are 5.00 m apa r t as
mea s u r e d by the space station obse rv e r s . The ga m m a factor for a
spee d of v = 0.600 c is γ =1. 2 5.
(i) A radio signal is sent to the spac e s hi p from the spac e sta tion. The
tran s mi s s io n lasts for 6.00 s accor di n g to spa c e station clocks.
Calculat e the dur atio n of the tra n s m i s sio n accor di n g to the
spac e s hi p obse rv e r s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................

..................
(2)

(ii) Calculat e the dista n c e betw e e n the laser s A and B accor di n g to
the space s hi p obse rv e r s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c) The laser s in (b) are fired si m u l t a n e o u s l y accor di n g to the spa c e

stat i o n obse rv e r s .
Light from each laser make s a ma rk on the spac e s hi p. The spac e s hi p
obse rv e r s mea s u r e the dista n c e betw e e n the two ma rk s to be 6.25 m.
Accordi n g to the space s hi p obse rv e r s
(i) stat e which laser was fired first.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) det e r m i n e the differ e n c e in time betw e e n the firings of the two
laser s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 9 mark s )
The table below gives the elect ric cha r g e of the thr e e light e s t qua r k s in
ter m s of e , the char g e of the proton.

up down str a n g e
Quark flavo u r
u d s
Elec t r i c 2 1 1
 
ch ar g e / e 3 3 3

(a) Using the dat a in the table, dete r m i n e the
(i) quar k conte n t of a meson with cha r g e +1 and str a n g e n e s s 0 and

that of a baryon with cha r g e –1 and str a n g e n e s s –3.
Meso n: ............................................................................................
..................
Baryon: ............................................................................................
.................
(2)
(ii) possible spin values of the meson in (a)(i).
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b) Stat e the Pauli exclusion principle.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
3
(c) Explain how the baryon with qua r k cont e n t uuu and spin 2 does not
violate the Pauli exclusion principle.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(d) In the Feyn m a n diagr a m show n a blue down qua r k emits a gluon and
prod u c e s a red qua r k.

Deduc e the
(i) quar k flavour (type) of the prod u c e d qua r k.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) colour quan t u m num b e r s of the emitt e d gluon.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(e) The positive kaon K + (qua r k cont e n t u s ) dec ays into an anti- muon and
a neut ri no accor di n g to the rea c tion below.
K+ → µ + + ν
Explain how it may be dedu c e d that this dec ay is a weak inter a c ti o n

proce s s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(f) The diagr a m shows thre e of the inter a c ti o n vertic e s for the wea k
inter a c ti o n.
Using the app r o p r i a t e vert ex, dra w a Feyn m a n diag r a m for the dec ay
K + → µ + + ν labelling all particl e s involve d.
(3)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

39 9 . This ques tion is abou t the luminosity, size and dista n c e of star s.
The Her tzs p r u n g–R u s s ell (HR) diag r a m shows the varia tion with spec t r a l
class of the absolut e mag ni t u d e of sta r s .
The star Capella and the Sun are in the sa m e spec t r a l class (G). Using the
HR diag r a m ,
(a) (i) sugg e s t why Capella has a gre a t e r surfa c e are a than
the Sun.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) estim a t e the luminosity of Capella in ter m s of that of the Sun.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) calcula t e the radius of Capella in ter m s of that of the Sun.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b) The spect r o s c o pi c par allax meth o d can be use d to me a s u r e the

dista n c e of star Vega.
(i) Using the HR diagr a m , sta t e the absolut e mag nit u d e of Vega.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) The app a r e n t mag nit u d e of Vega is 0.0. Dete r mi n e (in pars e c ) the
dist a n c e of Vega from Eart h.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................

..................
(3)

(iii) Light from Vega is abso r b e d by a dust cloud betw e e n Vega and
Eart h. Sugg e s t the effect, if any, this will have on dete r m i ni n g
the dista n c e of Vega from Eart h.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c) Vega is a very massive sta r. Sta t e why Vega does not und e r g o
gravit atio n al collaps e.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tot al 12 mark s )
40 0 . This ques tion is abou t cosmic microw a v e backg r o u n d radia tio n (CMB) and
the density of the univer s e.
The gra p h shows the relative inte nsity of the CMB as a function of
wavele n g t h .

(a) Explain how this grap h is consist e n t with the Big Bang model of the
univer s e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(b) The density of the univer s e will det e r m i n e its ultim a t e fate. Outline
the proble m s associa t e d with dete r m i ni n g the density of the unive r s e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

40 1 . A cart of mas s M is on a horizont a l frictionle s s table.
The cart is conn ec t e d to an object of weigh t W via a pulley. Which of the

following is the accel er a ti o n of the cart?
W
M
g
A. W
W
W
M
B. g
Mg
C. W
D. 0
(Tot al 1 mar k )
40 2 . An ideal gas has pres s u r e p 0 and volum e V 0 . The num b e r of molec ul e s of

the gas is doubl ed withou t chan gi n g the tem p e r a t u r e . What is the new
value of pres s u r e times volum e ?
p 0V 0
A. 4
p 0V 0
B. 2
C. p 0V0
D. 2 p 0V0
(Tot al 1 mar k )

40 3 . The diagr a m shows the pres s u r e–vol u m e (PV ) rela tion s hi p for a gas.
Which of the following area(s) is/ar e equal to the work done by the gas as it
expa n d s ?
A. are a I
B. are a II
C. are a I + are a II
D. are a I – are a II
(Tot al 1 mar k )
40 4 . The shock abso r b e r s of a car, in good working condition, ens u r e that the
vertical oscillations of the car are
A. und a m p e d .
B. lightly dam p e d .
C. moder a t e ly dam p e d .
D. critically dam p e d .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

40 5 . An orga n pipe of lengt h L is ope n at one end and close d at the othe r . Which
of the following gives the wavele n g t h of the secon d har m o nic sta n di n g
wave in the pipe?
L
A. 2
B. L
C. 4L
4L
D. 3
(Tot al 1 mar k )
40 6 . A man stan di n g by the shor e obs e rv e s sea wave s appr o a c h i n g at a

frequ e n c y of 0.20 Hz. A man on a boat obse r v e s tha t wave s are
app r o a c hi n g the boat at a frequ e n c y of 0.50 Hz. The spe e d of the wave s is
2.0 m s –1 . Which of the following gives a possible value for the spe e d of the
boat and its directio n?
Sp e e d / m s –1 Dire c t i o n
A. 3.0 away from the
shor e
B. 3.0 towa r d s the shor e
C. 1.2 away from the
shor e
D. 1.2 towa r d s the shor e
(Tot al 1 mar k )
40 7 . In a monoch r o m a t i c liquid cryst al display (LCD), suc h as thos e use d in

calcula t o r s , the pur po s e of the liquid cryst al is to
A. chan g e colour from white to black whe n a seg m e n t is to be displaye d.
B. lubrica t e the small gap betw e e n the plat e s to preve n t over h e a ti n g .
C. rotat e the plan e of polariz a tio n of the light pas si ng throu g h it.
D. act as a cond u c ti n g pat h w a y betw e e n the segm e n t elect r o d e s .

(Tot al 1 mar k )

40 8 . A par allel bea m of light with a wavele n g t h 600 nm pass e s throu g h a single
nar r o w slit and forms a diffraction patt e r n on a scre e n. The angle at which
the first diffractio n minim u m is form e d is 2.0 × 10 –3 rad.
What would be the angle of the first diffrac tion minim u m for light of
wavele n g t h 400 nm?
A. 3.0 × 10 –3 rad
B. 2.0 × 10 –3 rad
C. 1.3 × 10 –3 rad
D. 1.2 × 10 –3 rad
(Tot al 1 mar k )
40 9 . The gra p h shows how the cur r e n t I in a resis to r varies with the volta g e V
applied acros s it.
Which of the following gives the resist a n c e of the resis to r, whe n I = I 1 ?
V1
A. I1
B. The slope of the curve at the point (V 1 , I 1 )
I1
C. V1
D. The inver s e of the slope of the curve at the point ( V 1 , I 1 )

(Tot al 1 mar k )

41 0 . Two 10 Ω resis to r s are conn e c t e d as show n.
What is the resist a n c e acros s PQ?
A. 0 Ω
B. 5 Ω
C. 10 Ω
D. 20 Ω
(Tot al 1 mar k )
41 1 . A unifor m mag n e t i c field is per p e n di c ul a r to the plane of a loop of

condu c ti n g wire.
The field is direct e d out of the plan e of pape r. The ma g nit u d e of the
mag n e ti c field is decr e a s i n g at a cons t a n t rat e. Which of the following gives
the corr e c t stat e and corr e c t dire c tio n of the cur r e n t in the wire?
Curre n t Dire c t i o n
A. varying clockwis e
B. const a n t clockwis e
C. varying count e r-
clockwis e
D. const a n t count e r-
clockwis e
(Tot al 1 mar k )

41 2 . The gra p h shows th e variation of the induc e d emf ε of a gene r a t o r as a
function of time.

The frequ e n cy of rotation of the gene r a t o r is halve d. Which of the following
grap h s corr e c tly shows the variation of the new induc e d emf ε as a function
of time?
(Tot al 1 mar k )

41 3 . Which of the following is true about gravit a tion a l field lines?
A. They are always tang e n t i al to equipo t e n ti a l surfa c e s .
B. They are always perp e n di c ul a r to equipo t e n t i al surfa c e s .
C. They can be both tang e n ti al or per p e n d i c ul a r to equipot e n t i al

surfac e s .
D. They can have any angle to the equipot e n t i al surfa c e s .

(Tot al 1 mar k )
41 4 . Which of the following is true about the gravit a tion a l pote n ti al V due to a
point mass at a dista n c e r from the point mas s?
1

A. V r and always positive
1

B. V r and always neg ative
1

C. V r 2 and always positive
1

D. V r 2 and always positive
(Tot al 1 mar k )
41 5 . An astro n a u t in orbit arou n d Eart h is said to be “weightl e s s ”. This is due to

the fact that the
A. gravit atio n al force on the astr o n a u t is zero.
B. ast ro n a u t and the spac e c r a f t expe ri e n c e the sa m e accel e r a t io n.
C. ast ro n a u t and the spac e c r a f t expe ri e n c e the sa m e gravit a tio n a l force.
D. gravit atio n al field at the position of the spa c e c r a f t is zero.

(Tot al 1 mar k )

41 6 . Which of the following decay sequ e n c e s would result in the daug h t e r
nucle u s having the sam e proto n num b e r as the par e n t nucle u s ?
A. Alpha followed by gam m a
B. Beta (β –) followed by gam m a
C. Alpha followed by bet a (β –) followe d by beta (β –)
D. Beta (β –) followed by gam m a followe d by gam m a

(Tot al 1 mar k )
41 7 . A radioac tive sour c e emits alpha par ticle s that the n travel throu g h air.
With refer e n c e to the rang e of the alpha par ticle s consid e r the following
thre e qua n ti ti es .
I. The char g e of the alph a par ticl e
II. The kinetic ener gy of the alpha par ticle
III. The density of the air
Which of the above dete r m i n e s the rang e of the alpha par ticle s?
A. I only
B. II only
C. I and II only
D. I, II and III
(Tot al 1 mar k )
41 8 . Photoel e ct r o n emission only occur s if the light incide n t on a met al surfa c e

is
A. coher e n t .
B. above a cert ai n minim u m inte nsi ty.
C. below a cert ai n minim u m frequ e n c y.
D. below a cert ai n minim u m wavel e n g t h .

(Tot al 1 mar k )

41 9 . Elect r o n s are accel e r a ti n g from rest thro u g h a pot e n ti al differ e n c e of V .
The de Broglie wavelen g t h λ of the elect r o n s is propo r tio n a l to which of the
following?
A. V
1
B. V
C. V
1
D. V
(Tot al 1 mar k )
42 0 . The diagr a m shows som e of the ene r gy levels of a hypot h e t ic al atom.
The atom is excite d to the ene r gy level n = 4. Which of the following

tran si tion s will prod u c e a photo n of the longe s t and the short e s t
wavele n g t h ?
Lon g e s t Sh or t e s t
wav el e n g t h wave l e n g t h
A. 4 →3 4 →1
B. 4 →1 4 →3
C. 2 →1 4 →3
D. 4 →3 2 →1
(Tot al 1 mar k )

42 1 . In the Schr ö di n g e r model of the hydro g e n atom, it is ass u m e d tha t
elect r o n s
A. are mas sl es s par ticles.
B. are waves.
C. oscillat e.
D. can be descri b e d by wave functions .

(Tot al 1 mar k )
42 2 . The ener gy of α-par ticles in α-dec ay and the ene r gy of γ-rays in γ-dec ay are
discr e t e . This provide s evide n c e for the existe n c e of
A. nuclea r ener gy levels.
B. neut ri n o s.
C. atomic ene r gy levels.
D. isotop e s .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

42 3 . The gra p h below shows the num b e r of nuclei N of a radioa c tive isotop e as a
function of time t .
The slope of the curve at any given time is
A. indep e n d e n t of the decay const a n t .
B. propo r tio n al to the half- life of the isotop e.
C. propo r tio n al to the num b e r of radioa c tive nuclei re m ai ni n g at that

time.
D. propo r tio n al to the num b e r of radioa c tive nuclei dec ay e d.

(Tot al 1 mar k )

42 4 . Worldwi d e, the use of gas powe r e d tur bi n e s is beco mi n g more com m o n
than the use of oil powe r e d turbi n e s . A stud e n t mak e s the following thr e e
stat e m e n t s about gas powe r e d turbin e s as comp a r e d to oil powe r e d
turbin e s .
I. They are mor e efficient.
II. They prod u c e mor e the r m a l ene r gy per unit of mass.
III. They prod u c e less CO 2 per unit of outp u t ene r gy.
Which stat e m e n t ( s ) could be a possible reas o n for favourin g gas powe r e d

turbin e s ?
A. I only
B. II only
C. I and II only
D. I, II and III
(Tot al 1 mar k )
42 5 . To ret riev e infor m a ti o n stor e d on a CD, light of wavele n g t h 800 nm is use d.

To ret riev e infor m a ti o n stor e d on a DVD, light of wavele n g t h 400 nm is
used.
p it h e ig hoft t h eCD
Which of the following gives the ratio p it h e ig hot f t h eDVD ?
A. 8
B. 2
C. 1
D. 0.5
(Tot al 1 mar k )

426. N photo n s are incide n t on a pixel of a CCD. Each photon caus e s one
elect r o n of char g e e to be emitt e d . The capa ci t a n c e of the pixel is C. What
is the res ultin g poten ti al differ e n c e acros s the pixel?
A. NeC
C
B. Ne
Ne
C. C
Ce
D. N
(Tot al 1 mar k )
42 7 . The linear mag nificatio n of a digital cam e r a is M . The lengt h of one side of
a pixel is l. A pictur e of two points of an object sepa r a t e d by a dista n c e D is
take n.
MD
The imag e s of the points will be resolve d on the CCD if the ratio l is
A. smaller than 1.
B. equal to 1.
C. equal to 2 or mor e.
D. at least 10 or more.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

Gillian carrie d out an experi m e n t to inves tig a t e the crat e r s form e d whe n
steel balls are dropp e d into sand. To try and find the relation s hi p betw e e n
the diam e t e r of the crat e r and the ene r gy of impac t of ste el balls of the
sam e diam e t e r , she dropp e d a ste el ball from differ e n t heigh t s h into sand
and mea s u r e d the res ultin g diam e t e r d of the crat e r . The data are show n
plott e d below.
(a) The unce r t ai n t y in the mea s u r e m e n t of d is ±0. 4 0 cm; the unce r t a i n t y

in h is too small to be show n. Draw erro r bars for the data point (0.2,
0.047) and the dat a point (2.0, 0.10).
(2)
(b) Draw a best- fit line for the data points.

(2)
(c) The origin al hypot h e si s, ma d e by Gillian, was that the diam e t e r of the
crat e r is directly propo r tio n a l to the ene r gy of impa c t of the ste el
balls. Explain why the data does not suppo r t this hypot h e si s.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................

.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(d) Since Gillian’s data did not suppo r t her hypot h e s i s, she res e a r c h e d to
find alter n a t iv e hypot h e s e s . She found that the r e are two theo ri e s
used to predict a relation s hi p betw e e n d and h .
1
3
Theory 1 predict s that d = cons t (h) and theory 2 pre dic t s that d =
1
4
const (h) .
In orde r to test which theo ry her dat a suppo r t s , she plott e d a gra p h of
lg( d ) again s t lg( h ).
The plot produ c e d a straig h t line tha t could be dra w n throu g h all the
erro r bar s.

The grap h includ es the lines of maxim u m and minim u m gra di e n t s
bas e d on the first erro r bar for the first non- zero dat a point and the
last error bar. The last error bar is too small to be show n. Sta t e and
explain if the original data suppo r t theory 1 or theor y 2.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 11 mark s )
42 9 . This ques tion is abou t radioa ctive dec ay and bindin g ene r gy.
(a) Descri b e what is mean t by radioa c tive decay.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) A nucleu s of potas si u m- 40 (K-40) unde r g o e s radioa c tive dec ay to a

nucleu s of argon- 40 (Ar- 40). In the reac tio n equa tio n below, identify
the proton num b e r Z of argon and the particle x .
40
19K  4Z0 Ar β  x
Z : .............................................................................................................
....................
x : .............................................................................................................
....................
(2)

(c) The mas s of a K-40 nucleu s is 37 216 MeV c –2 . Dete r m i n e the bindin g
ener gy per nucleon of K-40.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(d) Stat e why the bindin g ene r gy of Ar-40 is gre a t e r tha n that of K-40.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 9 mark s )
43 0 . This ques tion is abou t chan g e of pha s e of a liquid and late nt heat of
vaporiza tion.
(a) Stat e the differ e n c e betw e e n evapo r a t i o n and boiling with refe r e n c e
to
(i) tem p e r a t u r e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) surfac e area of a liquid.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b) A liquid in a calori m e t e r is hea t e d at its boiling point for a mea s u r e d

period of time.
Power rating of heat e r = 15 W

Time for which liquid is hea t e d at boiling point = 4.5 ×
10 2 s
Mass of liquid boiled away = 1.8 ×
10 –2 kg
Use the data to det e r m i n e the specific late nt hea t of vaporiz a tio n of
the liquid.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c) Stat e and explain on e rea s o n why the calcula tio n in (b) will give a
value of the specific laten t hea t of vaporiz a tion of the liquid tha t is
grea t e r than the true value.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

43 1 . This ques tion is abou t induc e d emf and tra nsfo r m e r s .
(a) One of the coils of a par tic ul a r tra n sfor m e r is conn e c t e d in serie s with
a switch and a batt e r y. The coil has low resis t a n c e . On closing the
switch it is obs erv e d that the curr e n t take s a cert ai n amou n t of time to
reac h its final const a n t value. Explain this obs e rv a ti o n with refe r e n c e
to Far a d ay’s law and Lenz’s law.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(b) In a particul a r powe r station the volta g e gen e r a t e d is step p e d up by a

tran sfo r m e r .
The root mea n squa r e volta g e is incr e a s e d by a factor of 2 × 10 3 . The
outpu t power of the tran sfor m e r is tra n s m i t t e d to a town by cable s.
(i) Outline what is mea n t by the root me a n squa r e value of a time-

varying voltag e.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Stat e the best estim a t e for the factor by which the powe r loss in
the cables is redu c e d as a res ult of step pi n g up the volta g e.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

(a) Stat e two prop e r t i e s of a sta n di n g (station a r y) wave.
1. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) The diagr a m shows an orga n pipe that is open at one end.
The lengt h of the pipe is l. The frequ e n c y of the funda m e n t a l (first

har m o ni c) note emitt e d by the pipe is 16 Hz.
(i) On the diagr a m , label with the lette r P the position along the
pipe whe r e the amplitu d e of oscillation of the air molec ul e s is the
large s t .
(1)
(ii) The spee d of sound in the air in the pipe is 330 m s –1 . Calcula t e
the lengt h l.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(c) Use your answ e r to (b)(ii) to sugg e s t why it is bett e r to use orga n
pipes that are closed at one end for produ ci n g low frequ e n c y note s
rat h e r than pipes that are open at both ends.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
43 3 . This ques tion is abou t polarized light.
(a) Disting ui s h betw e e n polariz e d and unpol a riz e d light.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) A bea m of plan e polarized light of inte n sity I 0 is incide n t on an
analys e r . The directio n of the bea m is at right angle s to the plan e of
the analys e r .
The angle betw e e n the tra n s m i s sio n axis of the analys e r and the plan e
of polarizatio n of the light is θ. In the position show n the tra ns m i s sio n
axis of the analys e r is par allel to the plane of polariz a tion of the light
(θ = 0).
On the axes, sketc h a grap h to show how the inte nsity I of the
tran s m i t t e d light varies with θ as the analys e r is rotat e d throu g h 180°.
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )
43 4 . This ques tion is abou t elect ri c fields and elect ri c a l resist a n c e .
(a) Stat e, in ter m s of elect r o n s , the differ e n c e betw e e n a cond u c t o r and

an insulat o r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) Sugg e s t why ther e mus t be an elect ric field inside a cur r e n t- carryin g
cond u c t o r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c) The mag ni t u d e of the elec t ric field str e n g t h inside a condu c t o r is 55 N
C –1 . Calculat e the force on a free elect r o n in the cond uc t o r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(d) Define resista n c e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(e) A resis to r mad e from a met al oxide has a resis t a n c e of 1.5 Ω. The
resisto r is in the form of a cylinde r of lengt h 2.2 × 10 –2 m and radius
1.2 × 10 –3 m. Calcula t e the resistivity of the met al oxide.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(f) The man uf a c t u r e r of the resisto r in (e) gua r a n t e e s its resist a n c e to be
within ±1 0 % of 1.5 Ω provide d the powe r dissip a tio n in the resis to r
does not excee d 1.0 W. Calcula t e th e maxim u m curr e n t in the resis to r
for the power dissipa tion to be equal to 1.0 W.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(g) Thre e of the resisto r s in (f) are conn e c t e d in the circuit below.
The cell has an emf of 2.0 V and negligible inte r n a l resist a n c e .
(i) Define emf .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Dete r mi n e the minim u m and the maxim u m powe r that could be
dissipa t e d in this circuit.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 14 mark s )
(a) The alpha particle s prod u c e d in alpha dec ay have discr e t e ene r gi e s .
Sugg e s t how this obs erv a ti o n provide s evide n c e for the existe n c e of
nuclea r ener gy levels.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) A nucleu s of the isotop e fluorin e- 18 decays into a nucle u s of oxyge n-

18 by the emission of a positro n and neut ri n o. Outline how the natu r e
of the β-decay ener gy spect r u m o f fluorine- 18 sugg e s t s the exist e n c e
of the neut ri n o involved in the decay.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................

.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(c) A freshly prep a r e d sam pl e of fluorine- 18 has an activity of 1.12 MBq.
Its activity four hour s late r is 0.246 MBq.
(i) Show that the decay const a n t for fluorin e- 18 is 0.379 hr –1 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) Calculat e the half- life of fluorine- 18.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(d) The ene r gy of a beta par ticle in the dec ay of the sa m pl e in (c) is 8.4 ×
10 –15 J. Show that the de Broglie wavele n g t h of this particle is 5.3 ×
10 –12 m.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

43 6 . This ques tion is abou t oscillation s and waves.
(a) A rect a n g u l a r piece of wood of lengt h l floats in wate r with its axis
vertical as show n in diagr a m 1.
The lengt h of wood below the surfa c e is d . The wood is pus h e d

vertically down w a r d s a dista n c e A such that a lengt h of wood is still
above the wate r surfac e as show n in diag r a m 2. The wood is the n
relea s e d and oscillat e s vertic ally. At the insta n t show n in diag r a m 3,
the wood is moving down w a r d s and the lengt h of wood bene a t h the
surfac e is d + x .
(i) On diag r a m 3, draw an arrow to show the direc tion of the

accele r a ti o n of the wood.
(1)
(ii) The accel e r a t io n a of the wood (in m s –2 ) is relat e d to x (in m) by

the following equ atio n.
14
 x
a = l
Explain why this equ a tio n show s that the wood is exec u ti n g
simpl e har m o ni c motion.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) The period of oscillation of the wood is 1.4 s. Show tha t the
lengt h l of the wood is 0.70 m.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(b) The wood in (a), as show n in diagr a m 2, is rele a s e d at time t = 0. On

the axes below, sketc h a gra p h to show how the velocity v of the wood
varies with time over one period of oscillation.
(1)
(c) The dist an c e A that the wood is initially pus h e d down is 0.12 m.
(i) Calculat e the magni t u d e of the maxim u m accele r a ti o n of the

wood.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) On your sketc h grap h in (b) label with the lette r P one point whe r e the
magni t u d e of the accele r a t i o n is a maxim u m .
(1)
(d) The oscillations of the wood gen e r a t e waves in the wat e r of

wavelen g t h 0.45 m.
The grap h shows how the displa c e m e n t D, of the wate r surfa c e at a
particul a r dista n c e from the wood varies with time t .
Using the grap h, calcula t e the
(i) spee d of the waves.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) ratio of the displac e m e n t at t = 1.75 s to the displa c e m e n t at t =
0.35 s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) ratio of the ener gy of the wave at t = 1.75 s to the ene r gy at t =
0.35 s
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 15 mark s )
43 7 . This ques tion is abou t gase s and the r m o d y n a m i c proc e s s e s .
(a) Stat e on e way in which a real gas differs from an ideal gas.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) The diagr a m shows how the pre s s u r e p varies with volum e V of an
ideal gas that und e r g o e s a cyclic cha n g e of stat e.
AB and CD are adiab a t ic cha n g e s of stat e. The pres s u r e at point B is

1.8 × 10 5 Pa and the chan g e in volum e of the gas betw e e n B and C is
4.8 ×1 0 –4 m 3 .

(i) Stat e what is mean t by an adia b a ti c cha n g e of stat e.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) The chan g e in volum e of the gas betw e e n B and C take s 0.020 s.
Dete r mi n e the powe r develop e d durin g this cha n g e of stat e.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) Stat e durin g which par t of the cycle the r m a l ene r gy is
tran sf e r r e d from the gas to the sur ro u n di n g s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(c) The ene r gy tran sf e r r e d is degr a d e d . Explain wha t is me a n t by
deg r a d e d ener gy.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(d) Discus s how your answ e r to (c) relat e s to the secon d law of
ther m o d y n a m i c s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

43 8 . This ques tion is abou t fossil fuels and the gre e n h o u s e effect.
(a) Stat e two reas o n s why most of the world’s ene r gy cons u m p t i o n is
provide d by fossil fuels.
1. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) A powe r station has an outpu t powe r of 500 MW and an over all
efficiency of 27 %.
It uses nat u r al gas as a fuel tha t has an ene r gy density of 56 MJ kg –1 .
(i) Define ener g y densit y .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Dete r mi n e the rat e of cons u m p t i o n of nat u r a l gas in the powe r
station.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(c) Outline why the enha n c e d gre e n h o u s e effect may res ult in an incr e a s e
in the tem p e r a t u r e of the Ear t h’s surfa c e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(d) (i) The solar inte nsity at the position of the Eart h is 1380
–2
W m . The aver a g e albe do of Eart h is 0.300. Sta t e why an
aver a g e value of albe d o is quot e d.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Show that the aver a g e reflec t e d inte n sity from the Eart h is about
100 W m –2 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(e) One of the expect e d res ult s of global war mi n g is an incre a s e d sea
level. The incre a s e in volum e ΔV for a tem p e r a t u r e incr e a s e ΔT is
given by ΔV = γV ΔT. Show, using the following dat a, that the res ultin g
rise in sea level is about 0.5 m.
Temp e r a t u r e incr e a s e = 2.0 °C

Surfa c e are a of ocea n s on Eart h =
8 2
3.6 × 10 km
Avera g e ocea n dept h = 3.0 km
γ = 8.8 × 10 –5 K–1
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 16 mark s )

43 9 . This ques tion is abou t elect ri c pote n ti al.
(a) Define electric pote n tial at a point in an elect ric field.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(b) The elect ric field inside a cha r g e d condu c ti n g sphe r e is zero. Stat e
and explain why the value of the pote n ti al inside the sphe r e is
const a n t .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) In 1914 Niels Bohr propos e d a simple model of the hydrog e n atom in
which the elect r o n is assu m e d to be in an orbit of radius r about the
proto n. Both the elect r o n and the proton are reg a r d e d to be point
char g e s .
(i) It can be shown that the kinetic ene r gy E K of the elect r o n is

given by the equ a tio n
k e2
E K = 2r
wher e k is the Coulom b const a n t and e is the elect r o n cha r g e .

Deduc e an equa tio n for the total ene r gy E of the elect r o n .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) In the Bohr model, the mag nit u d e of the minim u m ene r gy of the
elect r o n is
2.2 × 10 –18 J. Estim a t e the radius of the orbit, in which the
elect r o n has minim u m ene r gy.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

44 0 . This ques tion is abou t mom e n t u m , ene r gy and powe r.
(a) In his Principia Math e m a t i c a Newt o n expr e s s e d his third law of

motion as “to every action the r e is always oppos e d an equ al rea c tion”.
Stat e what New to n mean t by this law.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) A book is relea s e d from rest and falls towa r d s the surfa c e of Eart h.
Discus s how the cons e rv a t io n of mom e n t u m applies to the Eart h- book
syste m .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(c) A larg e swingin g ball is use d to drive a horizon t al iron spike into a
vertical wall.
The cent r e of the ball falls throu g h a vertic al height of 1.6 m befor e
striking the spike in the position show n.

The mas s of the ball is 3.5 kg and the mas s of the spike is 0.80 kg.
Imm e di a t ely after striking the spike, the ball and spike move toge t h e r .
Show that the
(i) spee d of the ball on striking the spike is 5.6 m s –1 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) ene r gy dissip at e d as a res ult of the collision is abou t 10 J.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(d) As a result of the ball striking the spike, the spike is drive n a dista n c e
7.3 × 10 –2 m into the wall. Calcula t e , ass u m i n g it to be const a n t , the
friction force F betw e e n the spike and wall.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(e) The machin e that is used to rais e the ball has a useful powe r outp u t of
18 W. Calculat e how long it take s for the mac hi n e to raise the ball
throu g h a height of 1.6 m.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 15 mark s )

44 1 . This ques tion is abou t CCDs and digital dat a stor a g e .
(a) An object is to be photo g r a p h e d using a digital cam e r a .
(i) Stat e the nam e of the phe no m e n o n in which light caus e s

elect r o n s to be emitt e d from a pixel of a CCD.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Outline how the image of the object on the CCD is form e d.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) Photo n s are inciden t on one of the pixels of the CCD at a rat e of 3.6 ×
10 6 s –1 . The pixel has capa cit a n c e 34 pF and qua n t u m efficiency of 80
%. Dete r m i n e the poten ti al differ e n c e acros s the pixel after an
expos u r e time of 15 ms.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)

(c) Outline, with refer e n c e to the ret riev al of stor e d data, why it is bett e r
to stor e dat a in digital form rath e r tha n analog u e form.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

44 2 . This ques tion is abou t the relative popul a tion density of sta r s and galaxie s.
The num b e r of star s arou n d the Sun, within a dista n c e of 17 ly, is 75. The
num b e r of galaxies in the local group, within a dist a n c e of 4.0 × 10 6 ly from
the Sun, is 26.
(a) Calcula t e the aver a g e popula tion density, per ly 3 , of star s and
galaxies.
Star s: .......................................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Galaxies: ..................................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) Use your answ e r to (a) to dete r m i n e the ratio
a ve r a gpeo p u la t ion
d e n s it oy f s t a r s
a ve r a gpeo p u la t ion
d e n s it oy f g a la xie s
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 3 mark s )

44 3 . This ques tion is abou t the luminosity, size and dista n c e of star s.
The Her tzs p r u n g–R u s s ell (HR) diag r a m shows the varia tion with spec t r a l
class of the absolut e mag ni t u d e of sta r s .

The star Capella and the Sun are in the sa m e spec t r a l class (G). Using the
HR diag r a m ,
(a) (i) sugg e s t why Capella has a gre a t e r surfa c e are a than
the Sun.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) estim a t e the luminosity of Capella in ter m s of that of the Sun.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) calcula t e the radius of Capella in ter m s of that of the Sun.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) The spect r o s c o pi c par allax meth o d can be use d to me a s u r e the
dista n c e of star Vega.
(i) Using the HR diagr a m , sta t e the absolut e mag nit u d e of Vega.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) The app a r e n t mag nit u d e of Vega is 0.0. Dete r mi n e (in pars e c ) the
dist a n c e of Vega from Eart h.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(iii) Light from Vega is abso r b e d by a dust cloud betw e e n Vega and
Eart h. Sugg e s t the effect, if any, this will have on dete r m i ni n g
the dista n c e of Vega from Eart h.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

44 4 . This ques tion is abou t cosmic microw a v e backg r o u n d radia tio n (CMB) and
the density of the univer s e.
The gra p h shows the relative inte nsity of the CMB as a function of
wavele n g t h .

(a) Explain how this grap h is consist e n t with the Big Bang model of the
univer s e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(b) The density of the univer s e will det e r m i n e its ultim a t e fate. Outline
the proble m s associa t e d with dete r m i ni n g the density of the unive r s e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) Outline how the expan sio n of the univer s e ultim a t e ly mad e it possible
for stabl e nuclei and atom s to exist.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

44 5 . This ques tion is abou t the mass–lumi no si ty rela tion and also the evolution
of star s .
The mas s–lu mi n o sity relation for main sequ e n c e sta r s is assu m e d to be L 
M 3.5 , wher e L is the luminosity and M is the mas s. Star X is 8 × 10 4 time s
mor e lumino u s than the Sun and 25 time s mor e mas sive tha n the Sun.
(a) Deduc e that star X is a main sequ e n c e sta r.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) Outline with refer e n c e to the Oppe n h e i m e r–Volkoff limit, the
evolution a r y steps and the fate of sta r X afte r it leave s the main
sequ e n c e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

44 6 . This ques tion is abou t Hubbl e’s law and the expa n sio n of the unive r s e .
(a) The spect r u m of the clust e r of galaxies Pega s u s I shows a shift of 5.04
nm in the wavele n g t h of the K-line. The wavel e n g t h of this line from a
labor a t o r y sour ce is mea s u r e d as 396.8 nm. Calcul a t e the velocity of
rece s s io n of the clust e r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) The grap h shows the reces sio n velocitie s of a num b e r of clust e r s of
galaxies as a function of their app roxi m a t e dista n c e s .

(i) Stat e on e met ho d by which the dista n c e s show n on the gra p h
could have bee n dete r m i n e d .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Use the grap h to show that the age of the unive r s e is about 10 17
s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

(a) The diagr a m shows how the volta g e signal of a frequ e n c y modul a t e d
(FM) car ri e r wave varies with time.
The carri e r wave is modul a t e d by a single frequ e n c y signal.
On the above axes sketc h the infor m a ti o n signal.

(1)

(b) Stat e and explain on e adva n t a g e of using FM modul a tio n rath e r tha n
amplit u d e modul a tio n (AM).
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 3 mark s )

44 8 . This ques tion is abou t sam pling.
A telep h o n e call is sam pl e d with a sam pling frequ e n c y of 8.0 kHz. Eac h
sam pl e is stor e d as a four bit bina ry num b e r . The dur a tio n of eac h bit in
the sam pl e is 4.0 µ s.
(a) Calcula t e the time interv al betw e e n the end of one sam pl e and the
beginni n g of the next.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(b) Outline, with refer e n c e to your ans w e r in (a), what is me a n t by time-
division multiplexing.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

In the mobile phon e syste m , a partic ul a r geog r a p h i c are a is divide d into a

num b e r of cells with a base station in eac h cell, eac h conn e c t e d to a
cellula r exch a n g e .
Describ e the function of the bas e sta tion s and the cellula r excha n g e .
Base
stations : ...................................................................................................
......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
Cellula r
exch a n g e : ................................................................................................
.................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(Tota l 4 mark s )

45 0 . This ques tion is abou t the tran s m i s s io n of signals along an optic fibre.
(a) A ray of light ente r s an optic fibre from air. The ray make s an angle θ
with the nor m al.
The ray und e r g o e s total inte r n a l reflectio n at point P.
The refra ctive index of the core is 1.56 and that of the claddin g is
1.38.
(i) Calculat e the critical angle of the claddi n g- cor e bound a r y.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Show that the large s t angle of incide n c e θ in air, at which total
inter n al reflection at the claddi n g- core boun d a r y take s plac e, is
46.7°.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) Disting ui s h betw e e n modal dispe r sio n and mat e ri a l dispe r si o n in an
optic fibre.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c) The signal show n is fed into a mono m o d e optic fibre.
(i) Stat e what the shad e d are a repr e s e n t s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Use the axes above to dra w the sha p e of the signal afte r it has
travelled a large dist a n c e in the fibre.
(2)

(iii) The input signal powe r in a mono m o d e fibre is 15.0 mW. The
att e n u a t i o n per unit lengt h for this fibre is 1.24 dB km –1 .
Dete r mi n e the powe r of the outp u t signal afte r the signal has
travelled a dista n c e of 3.40 km in the fibre.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 12 mark s )
(a) On the axes below draw a sketc h gra p h to show the variatio n with
input voltag e V in of the outpu t volta g e V out of a non- inverti n g
oper a ti o n al amplifier.
(2)

(b) A tem p e r a t u r e war nin g devic e make s use of a buzze r tha t sound s
whe n the poten ti al differe n c e acros s it is 24 V. The circ uit in the
war ni n g device is show n.
It is requi r e d that the buzze r should sound whe n the tem p e r a t u r e of

the ther m i s t o r rises above 50 °C.
(i) Stat e the voltag e at point Q.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) At a tem p e r a t u r e of 50 °C the resist a n c e of the the r m i s t o r is R .

Explain why the buzze r will sound whe n the tem p e r a t u r e rise s
above 50 °C.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

45 2 . This ques tion is abou t laser light.
(a) Outline how laser light is prod u c e d .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(b) Stat e two ways in which light emitt e d by a lase r differ s from light
emitt e d from an ordin a r y filam e n t lamp.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

45 3 . This ques tion is abou t a compo u n d microsc o p e .
The diagr a m (not to scale) is of a compo u n d micros c o p e .
The focal lengt h of the objective lens is 20 mm and that of the eyepiec e
lens is 60 mm. A small object is plac e d at a dist a n c e of 24 mm from the
objective lens. The micros c o p e prod u c e s a final virtu al imag e of the object
at a dista n c e of 240 mm from the eyepi ec e lens.
(a) (i) Dete r mi n e , by calcula tion, the dista n c e from the

objective lens of the imag e form e d by the objective lens.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Explain why the imag e in (a)(i)is real.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) Dete r mi n e the dista n c e of the image form e d by the objective lens
from the eyepiec e lens.
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b) Deter m i n e the over all mag nifica tion of the micros c o p e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
45 4 . This ques tion is abou t interf e r e n c e .
(a) Light from a laser is incide n t on two very nar r o w slits A and B.
(diagr a m not to scale)
Point C on the scre e n is direc tly opposit e the midpoint of the slits.

(i) On the axes below, sketc h the varia tion with angle θ of the
inten si ty of the light on the scre e n.
(2)
(ii) The sepa r a t i o n of the slits is 0.120 mm and the wavele n g t h of the
light is
6.80 × 10 –7 m. The dist a n c e bet w e e n the slits and the scre e n is
1.40 m. Calculat e the sepa r a t i o n of the bright fringe s on the
scre e n .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b) Slit A is cover e d with a tra n s p a r e n t piec e of glass. The effect of the
glas s is to incr e a s e the path lengt h of the light from the slit to the
scre e n by half a wavelen g t h . It may be assu m e d tha t the amou n t of
light absor b e d by the glass is negligible. Stat e and explain the
effect(s), if any, of the glass on the
(i) inten si ty patt e r n you have dra w n in (a)(i).
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) sepa r a t i o n of the brigh t fringe s calcul a t e d in (a)(ii).
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
In an X-ray tube elect r o n s are accele r a t e d from rest throu g h a pote n ti al

differ e n c e and strike a met al tar g e t .
(a) On the axes below draw and annot a t e a typical X-ray spec t r u m .
(2)
(b) Identify the mech a ni s m by which the differ e n t regions of the X-ray
spect r u m are produ c e d .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

(3)

(c) In a particul a r X-ray tube the elect r o n s are accel e r a t e d from res t
throu g h a poten ti al differ e n c e of 24 kV. The minim u m wavele n g t h of
the X-rays produ c e d is 4.8 × 10 –11 m.
Deter m i n e a value for the Planck cons t a n t .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(d) X-rays of wavele n g t h 2.25 × 10 –10 m are direc t e d towa r d s the surfa c e
of a cryst al. A stron g first orde r reflect e d X-ray bea m is obse rv e d
whe n the X-rays make an angle of 28.1° with the cryst al surfa c e .
Deter m i n e the sepa r a t i o n of the atomic plan e s in the cryst al.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
45 6 . This ques tion is abou t fram e s of refe r e n c e and the spe e d of light.
(a) Descri b e what is mean t by an inerti al fram e of refe r e n c e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................

.....................
(2)

(b) The diagr a m shows two iner ti al fram e s of refe r e n c e . Fra m e S ′ moves
with velocity v = 2.0 × 10 8 m s –1 relative to fra m e S along the x -x ′-
directio n. When the origins of the two fram e s coincid e d, the clocks in
both fram e s wer e set to show zero.
An event takes place at x = 5.0 × 10 3 m whe n the clocks in fram e S

show t = 3.0 × 10 –5 s.
(i) By using Galilean tra nsfor m a t i o n equa tio n s , dete r m i n e the

position and time of this event in the S ′ fram e of refe r e n c e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) A laser, at res t in the fram e S ′, emits a ray of light along the
neg a tive x ′-direction ( i.e. towa r d s the left). The spe e d of the ray
of light is meas u r e d to be c in the fram e S ′. Show, using the
relativistic velocity addition form ul a, tha t the spe e d of the ray of
light in the fram e S is also me a s u r e d to be c .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................

..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) Outline an experi m e n t (othe r tha n the Michelso n–Mo rl ey expe ri m e n t )
which provides eviden c e that the spe e d of light is inde p e n d e n t of the
spee d of its sourc e.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
(a) Stat e what is mea n t by prope r lengt h and prop e r time inte rv al.
Prope r
lengt h: .............................................................................................
.................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Prope r time
interv al: ...........................................................................................
.........
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) A space s hi p moves with spe e d v = 0.600 c relative to a spa c e sta tion.
Two laser s , A and B, on the spac e station are 5.00 m apa r t as
mea s u r e d by the space station obse rv e r s . The ga m m a factor for a
spee d of v = 0.600 c is γ =1. 2 5.

(i) A radio signal is sent to the spac e s hi p from the spac e sta tion. The
tran s mi s s io n lasts for 6.00 s accor di n g to spa c e station clocks.
Calculat e the dur atio n of the tra n s m i s sio n accor di n g to the
spac e s hi p obse rv e r s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Calculat e the dista n c e betw e e n the laser s A and B accor di n g to

the space s hi p obse rv e r s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c) The laser s in (b) are fired si m u l t a n e o u s l y accor di n g to the spa c e

stat i o n obse rv e r s .
Light from each laser make s a ma rk on the spac e s hi p. The spac e s hi p
obse rv e r s mea s u r e the dista n c e betw e e n the two ma rk s to be 6.25 m.
Accordi n g to the space s hi p obse rv e r s
(i) stat e which laser was fired first.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) det e r m i n e the differ e n c e in time betw e e n the firings of the two
laser s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

The upsilon (Y0 ) is an uns t a bl e particle that dec ays into a tau (τ –) and an
antit a u (τ + ) accor di n g to the reac tio n
Y0 → τ – + τ +
The Y0 is at rest relative to the labor a t o r y whe n it dec a ys. The mom e n t u m
of the τ – relative to the labor a t o r y is 4.40 GeV c –1 . The rest mas s of the τ –
and of the τ + is 1.78 GeV c –2 .
Dete r mi n e the rest mass of the Y0 .
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(Tota l 3 mark s )
45 9 . This ques tion is abou t gene r a l relativity.
(a) Stat e Einst ei n’s principle of equivale n c e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) A rocket is accel er a t i n g in the direc tio n show n far from any mass e s .
A monoch r o m a t i c bea m of light is emitt e d from the floor F of the

rocke t. The bea m is receive d at the ceiling C of the rocke t. Sugg e s t
why the freq u e n cy of the light bea m me a s u r e d at C is less tha n the
frequ e n c y mea s u r e d at F.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) The diagr a m shows thre e identic al rocke t s A, B and C.
Rocket A is accel e r a t i n g in oute r spa c e with accele r a t io n a.
Rocket B is at rest on the surf ac e of a plane t. The gravit a tio n al field

str en g t h at the surfac e of the plane t is a .
Rocket C is falling freely above a plane t. The gravit a tion a l field

str en g t h of the plane t in the region of the rocke t is a.
Light is emitt e d from a sour c e X on the left wall of eac h rocke t. The
receive r Y is directly opposit e X.
The initial directio n of the light is par allel to the floor of the rocke t.
Draw, for each rocket, the pat h of the light ray emitt e d from X
accor di n g to an obse rv e r in eac h rocke t.
(3)

(d) Einst ei n’s theo ry of gen e r a l rela tivity pre dic t s that a mas sive body
caus e s a curvat u r e (bendin g) of spa c e.
(i) Describ e what is mea n t by the curva t u r e of spa c e.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Describ e how Edding t o n’s expe ri m e n t provide s evide n c e for the
curvat u r e of space caus e d by the Sun.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
46 0 . This ques tion is abou t the ear and hea ri n g.
(a) Stat e the physical prop e r t y of a sound wave tha t is relat e d to the
intensity of the sound.
.................................................................................................................

.....................
(1)

(b) The grap h shows the variatio n with freq u e n c y of the thr e s h ol d of
heari n g for a pers o n with nor m al hea ri n g.
Calcula t e the inten sity of sound of freq u e n c y 600 Hz that can just be
hear d by this pers o n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c) As a result of long- ter m expos u r e to noise a pers o n suffer s from a

heari n g loss of 20 dB.
(i) On the axes in (b) dra w a sketc h gra p h to show the variation with
frequ e n c y of the thr e s h ol d of hea ri n g for this pers o n.
(1)
(ii) Explain why this loss is likely to lead to difficulties with spee c h
recog ni tion.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................

..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
(a) Define acous tic impe d a n c e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) Ultra s o u n d of intensi ty I 0 is travelling in a mediu m of impe d a n c e Z 1

and is incide n t on a mediu m of impe d a n c e Z 2 . The reflect e d
ultra s o u n d has intensity I R given by the following equ a tio n.
2
I R  Z1  Z 2 
 
I 0  Z 1 Z 2 
Explain why when using ultr a s o u n d a gel is plac e d betw e e n the

tran s d u c e r and the skin of the patie n t .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

(a) Define half- value thickn e s s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) The half- value thickn e s s in met r e s of air at pres s u r e p and
tem p e r a t u r e T is given by the equ a tio n
T
x 1 1.8 1 05 
2
p
X-rays from the Sun reach the oute r layers of the atmo s p h e r e of Eart h.
Avera g e pres s u r e of the atmos p h e r e = 2.0 × 10 4 Pa

Avera g e tem p e r a t u r e of the atmos p h e r e = 240 K
Effective heigh t of the atmos p h e r e = 25 km
Using the dat a, calcul at e the
(i) half- value thickn e s s for the atmo s p h e r e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) fraction of the incide n t X-ray inte n si ty that is tra n s m i t t e d to the

surfac e of the Eart h.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(c) Comm e n t , using your ans w e r to (b)(ii), on whet h e r the atmo s p h e r e

provides any significan t prot e c t io n from incomi n g X-rays.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(d) X-ray photon s of aver a g e ene r gy 20 keV are incide n t at a height of 10

km above the Eart h’s surfa c e at a rate of 2.8 × 10 8 m –2 s –1 . A
pas s e n g e r is in a plan e flying at a height of 10 km above the surfa c e of
the Ear t h. The pass e n g e r has a mas s of 60 kg and body surfa c e are a
1.6 m 2 .
The quality factor for X-rays is 1.
(i) Calculat e the dose equivale n t rec eive d by this pass e n g e r durin g
a thr e e hour flight at a height of 10 km.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(ii) Stat e on e reas o n why the dose equivale n t rec eive d will be muc h
less than your ans w e r in (d)(i).
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 12 mark s )

46 3 . This ques tion is abou t radioisot o p e s .
(a) Stat e what is mea n t by the effective half- life of a radioisot o p e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) The function of the lungs may be monitor e d using the radioisoto p e s
133 81
5 4 X and 3 6 Kr .
Infor m a t io n on thes e two radioisot o p e s is given in the table.
Radi oi s o t o p e s Effe c t i v e half- De c a y prod u c t s

life
133
54X 5.2 days β– and γ
81
3 6 Kr 12 secon d s γ
133
Stat e and explain on e adva n t a g e and on e disa dva n t a g e of using 54X
81
rat h e r than 3 6 Kr .
Advant a g e : ..............................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Disadv a n t a g e : ..........................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
The table below gives the elect ric cha r g e of the thr e e light e s t qua r k s in
ter m s of e , the char g e of the proton.
up down str a n g e
Quark flavo u r
u d s

Elec t r i c 2 1 1
 
ch ar g e / e 3 3 3

(a) Using the dat a in the table, dete r m i n e the
(i) quar k conte n t of a meson with cha r g e +1 and str a n g e n e s s 0 and

that of a baryon with cha r g e –1 and str a n g e n e s s –3.
Meso n: ............................................................................................
..................
Baryon: ............................................................................................
.................
(2)
(ii) possible spin values of the meson in (a)(i).
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b) Stat e the Pauli exclusion principle.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
3
(c) Explain how the baryon with qua r k cont e n t uuu and spin 2 does not
violate the Pauli exclusion principle.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(d) In the Feyn m a n diagr a m show n a blue down qua r k emits a gluon and
prod u c e s a red qua r k.

Deduc e the
(i) quar k flavour (type) of the prod u c e d qua r k.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) colour quan t u m num b e r s of the emitt e d gluon.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(e) The positive kaon K + (qua r k cont e n t u s ) dec ays into an anti- muon and
a neut ri no accor di n g to the rea c tion below.
K+ → µ + + ν
Explain how it may be dedu c e d that this dec ay is a weak inter a c ti o n

proce s s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(f) The diagr a m shows thre e of the inter a c ti o n vertic e s for the wea k
inter a c ti o n.

Using the app r o p r i a t e vert ex, dra w a Feyn m a n diag r a m for the dec ay
K + → µ + + ν labelling all particl e s involve d.
(3)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

46 5 . This ques tion is abou t the bubbl e cha m b e r .
The diagr a m is a copy of a bubbl e cha m b e r photog r a p h of the dec ay of a

neut r al pion (π 0 ) into two photon s , π 0 → 2 γ. Each of the photon s prod u c e d
mat e ri alizes into an elect r o n–po sit r o n pair. The path s show n belong to the
two elect r o n–posi t r o n pairs.
(a) Stat e why the track s of the photo n s do not show up in the photog r a p h .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) On the diag r a m above,
(i) draw lines to indicat e the path of eac h of the photo n s .

(1)
(ii) label with the lette r P the point whe r e the pion dec ay e d .
(1)

(c) Outline whet h e r the pion was moving or whe t h e r it was at rest whe n
it decaye d.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(d) The path of one of the elect r o n s produ c e d is a spir al. Sugg e s t a rea so n
for the shap e of this pat h.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
46 6 . This ques tion is abou t Feyn m a n diag r a m s and neut r a l cur r e n t s .
(a) The diagr a m shows the inter a c t io n vert ex of the elect r o m a g n e t i c

inter a c ti o n.
Had r o n s may be prod u c e d via the elec t r o m a g n e t i c inte r a c ti o n in

elect r o n–posi t r o n collisions thro u g h the rea c tion
e– + e+ → q + q
whe r e q stan d s for a quar k and q for an antiqu a r k .

(i) Draw a Feyn m a n diagr a m for the proc e s s e – + e + → u + u whe r e
u stan d s for the up qua r k.
(1)
(ii) Outline why the reac tion in (a)(i) event u a lly leads to the
produ c t io n of had ro n s rat h e r tha n individu al qua r k s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b) The diagr a m shows two vertic e s for the weak inter a c t io n.
The solid lines repr e s e n t qua r k s or lepto n s.
(i) Stat e what is mean t by a neut r a l curr e n t .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Draw a Feyn m a n diagr a m for the proc e s s e – + e + → u + u , whe r e
u stan d s for an up qua r k, that is media t e d by a neut r al curr e n t .
(1)
(c) By refer e n c e to the weak inte r a c ti o n vertic e s in (b) sugg e s t how the
Z 0 may be det ec t e d .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(d) The W – decays accor di n g to W – → e – + ν . Stat e and explain, whet h e r

the antine u t r i n o in this dec ay is an elect r o n , muon or tau
antine u t r i n o.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

46 7 . Which of the following is equivale n t to the joule?
A. N m2
B. N m –2
C. kg m s –2
D. kg m 2 s –2
(Tot al 1 mar k )
46 8 . An object falls for a time of 0.25 s. The accele r a t io n of free fall is 9.81 m s –
2
. The displac e m e n t is calcul at e d . Which of the following gives the corr e c t
num b e r of significa n t digits for the calcula t e d value of the displ ac e m e n t of
the object?
A. 1
B. 2
C. 3
D. 4
(Tot al 1 mar k )

46 9 . A raind r o p falling from rest at time t = 0 rea c h e s ter mi n a l velocity. Which
grap h bes t repr e s e n t s how the spe e d v varies with time t ?
(Tot al 1 mar k )

47 0 . The gra p h shows how the displa c e m e n t d of an objec t varies with time t .
The tang e n t to the curve at time t 1 is also show n.
Which of the following gives the spe e d of the objec t at point P?
A. the gradi e n t at P
B. the shad e d area
1
C. g r a d ie natt P
d1
D. t1
(Tot al 1 mar k )

47 1 . A ball falls vertically and bounc e s off the groun d. Imme di a t e ly befor e
impact with the groun d the spe e d of the ball is u . Imme di a t ely after leaving
the grou n d the speed is v .
Which of the following expr e s si o n s is the ratio of

k in e t ice n e r g lo
y s to n c o llis io n
k in e t ice n e r g im
y m e d ia tyebl e fo r ec o llis ion?
v
A. u
v
1
B. u
2
v
 
C. u
2
v
1  
D. u
(Tot al 1 mar k )

47 2 . A railway engin e of mas s m moves along a horizont al trac k with unifor m
spee d v . The total resis tive force acting on the engin e is F.
Which of the following is the powe r of the engine ?
F
A. mv
B. Fv
mv
C. F
v
D. F
(Tot al 1 mar k )
47 3 . A ball is tied to a string and rota t e d at a unifor m spe e d in a vertic al plan e.

The diagr a m shows the ball at its lowest position. Which arrow shows the
direction of the net force acting on the ball?
(Tot al 1 mar k )

47 4 . A gas atom strikes a wall with spe e d v at an angle θ to the nor m a l to the
wall. The atom rebo u n d s at the sam e spe e d v and angle θ.
Which of the following gives the mag ni t u d e of the mom e n t u m cha n g e of the
gas atom?
A. zero
B. 2 mv sin θ
C. 2 mv
D. 2 mv cos θ
(Tot al 1 mar k )

47 5 . A syste m consist s of an ice cube plac e d in a cup of wate r . The syste m is
ther m ally insulat e d from its sur r o u n di n g s . The wate r is origin ally at 20 °C.
Which gra p h best show s the variation of total inte r n a l ene r gy U of the
syste m with time t ?
(Tot al 1 mar k )

47 6 . Ther m al ener gy is adde d at a const a n t rate to a subst a n c e which is solid at
time t = 0. The gra p h shows the variation with t of the tem p e r a t u r e T .
Which of the stat e m e n t s are corr e c t ?
I. The specific latent hea t of fusion is gre a t e r tha n the specific

laten t heat of vaporiz a tio n.
II. The specific heat capa city of the solid is less tha n the specific
heat capacity of the liquid.
A. I only
B. I and II
C. II only
D. Neith e r I nor II
(Tot al 1 mar k )
47 7 . Which of the following is an assu m p t i o n mad e in the kinetic model of ideal

gas es ?
A. Molecul e s have zero mas s.
B. Forc es betw e e n molec ul e s are attr a c tive.
C. Collisions betw e e n molec ul e s are elastic.
D. Molecul e s move at high spe e d.

(Tot al 1 mar k )

47 8 . An object at the end of a spring oscillat e s vertic ally with simple har m o ni c
motion. The grap h shows the varia tion with time t of the displa c e m e n t x .
The amplitu d e is x 0 and the period of oscillation is T .
Which of the following is the corr e c t expr e s sio n for the displa c e m e n t x ?
2π
 x0 c o s t
A. T
2π
x0 c o s t
B. T
2π
 x 0 s in t
C. T
2π
x 0 s in t
D. T
(Tot al 1 mar k )

47 9 . An object at the end of a spring oscillat e s vertic ally with simple har m o ni c
motion. The grap h shows the varia tion with time t of the displa c e m e n t x .
The amplitu d e is x 0 and the period of oscillation is T .
Which of the following is the corr e c t expr e s sio n for the maxim u m
accele r a ti o n of the object?
2π
x0
A. T
2π
x0
B. T2
4π 2
x0
C. T2
4π 2
x0
D. T
(Tot al 1 mar k )

48 0 . One end of a horizont al string is fixed to a wall. A tran s v e r s e pulse moves
along the string as show n.
Which of the following stat e m e n t s are corr e c t for the reflect e d pulse
comp a r e d to the forwa r d puls e?
I. It moves mor e slowly.
II. It has less ene r gy.
III. It is invert e d .
A. I and II only
B. I and III only
C. II and III only
D. I, II and III
(Tot al 1 mar k )
48 1 . Monoc h r o m a t i c light travels from air into wat e r . Which of the following
descri b e s the chan g e s in wavele n g t h and spe e d ?
Wavel e n g t h Spe e d
A. incr e a s e s decr e a s e s
B. incr e a s e s incr e a s e s
C. decr e a s e s incr e a s e s
D. decr e a s e s decr e a s e s
(Tot al 1 mar k )

48 2 . Two resis to r s , mad e of the sam e mat e ri al, are conne c t e d in serie s to a
batt e r y. The lengt h of resis to r X is twice that of resisto r Y, and X has twice
the cross- section al area of Y.
r e s is t a n cofe X
Which of the following gives r e s is t a n cofe Y ?
1
A. 4
1
B. 2
C. 1
D. 4
(Tot al 1 mar k )
48 3 . The circuit shows a resis to r R conn e c t e d in serie s with a batt e r y and a

resis to r of resis tanc e 10 Ω. The e mf of the batt e r y is 20 V and it has
negligible inter n al resist a n c e . The cur r e n t in the circ uit is 1.0 A.
Which of the following is the resist a n c e of R?
A. 1.0 Ω
B. 2.0 Ω
C. 10 Ω
D. 20 Ω
(Tot al 1 mar k )

48 4 . Three identic al resist o r s are conn e c t e d to a batt e r y as show n.
Which of the following is a corr e c t stat e m e n t ?
A. The cur r e n t throu g h X is gre a t e r tha n that throu g h Z.
B. The poten t i al differ e n c e acros s Z is gre a t e r tha n tha t acros s Y.
C. The poten t i al differ e n c e acros s resist o r X and Y toge t h e r is the sa m e

as that acros s Z.
D. The cur r e n t throu g h Z is less tha n the total cur r e n t throu g h X and Y.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
48 5 . A cur r e n t is est a blis h e d in a coil of wire in the dire c tion show n.
The direction of the mag n e t i c field at point P is
A. out of the plane of the pap e r .
C. to the left.
D. to the right.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

48 6 . Which arr a n g e m e n t of thr e e point cha r g e s at the corn e r of an equila t e r a l
trian gl e will res ul t in a zero elect ric field stre n g t h at the cent r e of the
trian gl e, point P?
(Tot al 1 mar k )
48 7 . The mas s of a plan e t is twice that of Eart h. Its radius is half tha t of the
radi us of Eart h. The gravit a tio n a l field stre n g t h at the surfa c e of Eart h is g.
The gravit a tion al field str e n g t h at the surfac e of the plane t is
1
g
A. 2 .
B. g.
C. 2g.
D. 8g.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

48 8 . An elect r o n ente r s the vacuu m betw e e n two opposit ely cha r g e d plat e s with
velocity v . The elect r o n is followe d by an alpha particle moving with the
sam e initial velocity as the elect r o n . A unifor m ma gn e t i c field is direc t e d
out of the plan e of the pape r.
The elect r o n’s pat h is undeflec t e d . The path of the alph a particle will be
A. deflect e d out of the plan e of the pape r .
B. und eflect e d .
C. deflect e d upw a r d .
D. deflect e d down w a r d .
(Tot al 1 mar k )
48 9 . The Geige r–M a r s d e n experi m e n t provide s evide n c e for
A. the existe n c e of discr e t e atomic ene r gy levels.
B. the existe n c e of the neut r o n .
C. a dens e positively char g e d nucle u s .
D. the stability of some nuclei.

(Tot al 1 mar k )

49 0 . A radioac tive isotop e has a half- life of two minut e s . A sam pl e cont ain s
sixtee n gra m s of the isotop e. How muc h time elaps e s until one gra m of the
isotop e rem ai n s ?
A. 6 minut e s
B. 8 minut e s
C. 10 minut e s
D. 12 minut e s
(Tot al 1 mar k )
49 1 . Data conce r ni n g nuclide s are plotte d using the axes below.
What are the axis labels for this gra p h ?
Y X
A. bindin g ener gy per num b e r of nucleo n s
nucleon
B. bindin g ener gy num b e r of proto n s
C. num b e r of proto n s bindin g ene r gy per
nucle on
D. num b e r of nucleo n s bindin g ene r gy
(Tot al 1 mar k )

49 2 . Which of the following is true about beta minus ( β–) dec ay?
A. An antin e u t r i n o is abso r b e d .
B. The char g e of the daug h t e r nuclide is less tha n that of the par e n t
nuclide.
C. An antin e u t r i n o is emitt e d .
D. The mas s num b e r of the daug h t e r nuclide is less tha n that of the
par e n t nuclide.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
49 3 . A wave gene r a t o r produ c e s a powe r per unit lengt h of 4.0 kW m –1 for

waves of amplit u d e A and spee d v . The efficiency of the gen e r a t o r is
cons t a n t . The power per unit lengt h obtain e d from waves of amplit u d e 2 A
and spee d 2 v would be
A. 8.0 kW m –1 .
B. 16 kW m –1 .
C. 32 kW m –1 .
D. 64 kW m –1 .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

49 4 . The diagr a m shows the variation with wavele n g t h of the powe r per unit
wavele n g t h I radi at e d from an are a of 1 m 2 of two differ e n t bodies.
Which of the following is a corr e c t comp a r i s o n of the tem p e r a t u r e and of

the emissivity of the two bodies?
Te m p e r a t u Emi s s i v i t y
re
A. sam e sam e
B. sam e differ e n t
C. differ e n t sam e
D. differ e n t differ e n t
(Tot al 1 mar k )
49 5 . Which of the following is the most likely expla n a ti o n for a rise in global sea
level?
A. Ther m al expan s io n of wate r
B. Melting of sea ice
C. Incr e a s e in rainfall
D. Ther m al expan s io n of ice

(Tot al 1 mar k )

49 6 . The diagr a m shows an ener gy balan c e clima t e model for a plane t.
The intensiti es of the reflect e d and radia t e d radia tio n are given in ter m s of
the incide n t intensity I. Which of the following is the albe d o of this plane t ?
A. 0.15
B. 0.25
C. 0.40
D. 0.60
(Tot al 1 mar k )

A stud e n t perfor m s an expe ri m e n t with a pap e r toy tha t rota t e s as it falls

slowly throu g h the air. After rele a s e , the pape r toy quickly att ain s a
cons t a n t vertic al spee d as meas u r e d over a fixed vertic al dista n c e .
The aim of the expe ri m e n t was to find how the ter mi n al spe e d of the pape r
toy varies with its weigh t. The weigh t of the pape r toy was chan g e d by
using differ e n t num b e r s of pap e r she e t s in its const r u c t i o n.

The gra p h shows a plot of the ter mi n a l spe e d v of the pap e r toy (calcula t e d
from the raw dat a) and the num b e r of pap e r she e t s n use d to const r u c t the
toy. The unce r t ai n t y in v for n = 1 is show n by the erro r bar.
(a) The fixed dist a n c e is 0.75 m and has an absolut e unce r t a i n t y of 0.01
m. The perc e n t a g e unce r t a i n t y in the time take n to fall throu g h the
fixed dist an c e is 5 %.
(i) Calculat e the absolut e unce r t a i n t y in the ter mi n al spe e d of the

pap e r toy for n = 6.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) On the grap h, draw an error bar on the point corr e s p o n di n g to n
= 6.
(1)

(b) On the gra p h, draw a line of best- fit for the data points.
(1)
(c) The stud e n t hypot h e s iz e s tha t v is propo r tio n a l to n . Use the data
points for n = 2 and n = 4 from the gra p h opposit e to show tha t this
hypot h e s i s is incor r e c t .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(d) Anothe r stud e n t hypot h e s iz e d tha t v might be propo r tio n a l to n . To
verify this hypot h e si s he plott e d a gra p h of v 2 agains t n as show n
below.
Explain how the gra p h verifies the hypot h e s i s tha t v is propo r tio n a l to
n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

49 8 . In 1997 a high- spee d car of mas s 1.1 × 10 4 kg achieve d the world land
spee d recor d. The car accel e r a t e d unifor mly in two sta g e s as show n in the
table. The car star t e d from res t.
Tim e / s Spe e d attai n e d at en d of

sta g e / m s –1
Sta g e 1 0.0 – 4.0 44
Sta g e 2 4.0 – 12 280
Use the dat a to calculat e the
(a) aver a g e accel e r a t io n of the car in sta g e 1.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) aver a g e net force req ui r e d to accel e r a t e the car in sta g e 2.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c) total dist an c e travelled by the car in 12 s.
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
49 9 . (a) Draw the compl et e diagr a m of the circuit that uses a pote n ti al
divider, am m e t e r , voltm e t e r and cell to mea s u r e the curr e n t- volta g e
char a c t e r i s ti c s for compo n e n t X.
(3)

(b) The grap h shows the curr e n t- volta g e cha r a c t e r i s ti c s for the
compo n e n t X.
Compo n e n t X is now conne c t e d acros s the ter mi n al s of a cell of emf

2.0 V and negligible inter n a l resist a n c e . Use the gra p h to show that
the resist a n c e of X is 0.83 Ω.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c) A resis to r of cons t a n t resis tanc e 1.0 Ω i s conn e c t e d in series with the
cell in (b) and with X. Use the gra p h to ded uc e that the curr e n t in the
circuit is 1.3 A.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................

.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
50 0 . This ques tion is abou t a simple pend ul u m .
(a) A pend ul u m consist s of a bob susp e n d e d by a light inexte n si bl e string

from a rigid suppo r t . The pend ul u m bob is move d to one side and the n
relea s e d . The sketc h grap h show s how the displa c e m e n t of the
pend ul u m bob und e r g oi n g simple har m o ni c motion varie s with time
over one time period.
On the sketc h grap h above,
(i) label with the lette r A a point at which the accele r a t io n of the
pend ul u m bob is a maxim u m .
(1)
(ii) label with the lette r V a point at which the spe e d of the pend ul u m
bob is a maxim u m .
(1)
(b) Explain why the mag ni t u d e of the tension in the string at the midpoint
of the oscillation is grea t e r tha n the weight of the pend ul u m bob.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(c) The pend ul u m bob is moved to one side until its cent r e is 25 mm
above its rest position and the n rele a s e d .
(i) Show that the spee d of the pend ul u m bob at the midpoint of the
oscillation is 0.70 m s –1 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) The mas s of the pend ul u m bob is 0.057 kg. The cent r e of the
pend ul u m bob is 0.80 m below the suppo r t . Calcula t e the
mag ni t u d e of the tension in the string whe n the pend ul u m bob is
vertically below the point of sus p e n s i o n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(d) The point of susp e n s i o n of the pend ul u m bob is move d from side to
side with a small amplitu d e and at a variabl e driving frequ e n c y f.
For each value of the driving frequ e n c y a ste a dy cons t a n t amplitu d e A

is reac h e d . The oscillations of the pend ul u m bob are lightly dam p e d .
(i) On the axes below, sketc h a gra p h to show the variation of A with
f.
(2)
(ii) Explain, with refer e n c e to the gra p h in (d)(i), wha t is me a n t by

reson a n c e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(e) The pend ul u m bob is now imm e r s e d in wate r and the varia bl e
frequ e n c y driving force in (d) is again applie d. Sugg e s t the effect this
imme r s io n of the pend ul u m bob will have on the sha p e of your gra p h
in (d)(i).
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 16 mark s )

50 1 . This ques tion is abou t the Ruthe r fo r d model of the atom.
(a) Most alpha par ticles used to bomb a r d a thin gold foil pass thro u g h the
foil witho u t a significa n t cha n g e in direc tion. A few alpha par ticle s are
deviat e d from their original direc tion thro u g h angl es gre a t e r than 90°.
Use thes e observ a tio n s to desc ri b e the Ruthe r fo r d atomic model.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................

.....................
(5)

197 199
(b) The isotop e gold- 197 ( 7 9 Au ) is sta ble but the isotop e gold- 199 ( 7 9 Au )
is not.
(i) Outline, in ter m s of the force s acting betw e e n nucleo n s , why, for
large stabl e nuclei such as gold- 197, the num b e r of neut r o n s
excee d s the num b e r of proton s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
199 199
(ii) A nucle u s of 7 9 Au dec ays to a nucle u s of 8 0 H g with the emission
of an elect r o n and anot h e r particle. Stat e the na m e of this othe r
par ticl e.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 9 mark s )
50 2 . This ques tion is abou t a light ni n g disch a r g e .
(a) Define electric field stren g t h .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) A thun d e r cl o u d can be modelle d as a neg a tively cha r g e d plat e that is
par allel to the grou n d .
The mag ni t u d e of the char g e on the plat e incre a s e s due to proc e s s e s

in the atmo s p h e r e . Event u a lly a cur r e n t disc h a r g e s from the
thun d e r cl o u d to the grou n d .
On the diag r a m , draw the elect ric field patt e r n betw e e n the
thun d e r cl o u d bas e and the grou n d .
(3)

(c) The mag ni t u d e of the elec t ric field str e n g t h E betw e e n two infinite
char g e d par allel plat es is given by the expr e s si o n
σ
E = ε0
whe r e σ is the char g e per unit are a on one of the plate s .
A thun d e r cl o u d car rie s a cha r g e of ma g nit u d e 35 C spre a d over its

bas e. The are a of the bas e is 1.2 × 10 7 m 2 .
(i) Dete r mi n e the mag nit u d e of the elect ric field betw e e n the bas e
of the thun d e r cl o u d and the grou n d .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) Stat e two ass u m p t io n s mad e in (c)(i).
1. .....................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
2. .....................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) When the thun d e r cl o u d disc h a r g e s , the aver a g e disch a r g e
curr e n t is 1.8 kA. Estim a t e the disch a r g e time.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(iv) The poten ti al differ e n c e betw e e n the thun d e r c lo u d and the

grou n d befor e disch a r g e is 2.5 × 10 8 V. Dete r m i n e the ene r gy
relea s e d in the disch a r g e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(Tot al 17 mark s )
50 3 . This ques tion is abou t fuel for hea tin g.
(a) Define the ener gy densi ty of a fuel.

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) A room heat e r bur n s liquid fuel and the following dat a are availabl e.
Density of liquid fuel =

8.0 × 10 2 kg m –3
Ener gy produ c e d by 1 m 3 of liquid fuel =
2.7 × 10 10 J
Rate at which fuel is cons u m e d =
0.13 g s –1
Latent heat of vaporiz a tion of the fuel =
290 kJ kg –1
(i) Use the dat a to calcula t e the powe r outp u t of the room hea t e r ,
ignorin g the power requi r e d to conve r t the liquid fuel into a gas.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) Show why, in your calcula tio n in (b)(i), the powe r req ui r e d to
conver t the liquid fuel into a gas at its boiling point can be
ignor e d.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c) Stat e, in ter m s of molecul a r str uc t u r e and their motion, two

differ e n c e s betw e e n a liquid and a gas.
1. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
50 4 . This ques tion is abou t the produ c tio n of ene r gy in nucle a r fission.
(a) A possible fission reac tio n is
235
92 U 01n 93 26 Kr 15461Ba x 10 n .
(i) Stat e the value of x .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Show that the ener gy rele a s e d whe n one ura ni u m nucle u s
unde r g o e s fission in the rea c tion in (a) is about 2.8 × 10 –11 J.
Mass of neut r o n = 1.008 6 7 u

Mass of U-235 nucle u s = 234.99 3 3 3 u
Mass of Kr- 92 nucle u s = 91.90 6 4 5 u
Mass of Ba- 141 nucle u s = 140.88 3 5 4 u
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(iii) Stat e how the ene r gy of the neut r o n s produ c e d in the reac tion in
(a) is likely to com p a r e with the ene r gy of the neut r o n that
initiat e d the reac tion.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) Outline the role of the mode r a t o r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c) A nuclea r powe r plant that use s U-235 as fuel has a useful powe r
outpu t of 16 MW and an efficiency of 40 %. Assumi n g tha t eac h fission
of U-235 gives rise to 2.8 × 10 –11 J of ene r gy, det e r m i n e the mas s of
U-235 fuel used per day.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 12 mark s )
50 5 . This ques tion is abou t collisions.
(a) Stat e the principl e of cons e r v a ti o n of mom e n t u m .

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) In an expe ri m e n t , an air- rifle pellet is fired into a block of modelling
clay that res ts on a table.
(not to scale)
The air- rifle pellet rem ai n s inside the clay block afte r the impa c t.
As a result of the collision, the clay block slides along the table in a
str aig h t line and comes to res t. Furt h e r dat a relatin g to the
expe ri m e n t are given below.
Mass of air- rifle pellet = 2.0 g

Mass of clay block = 56 g
Velocity of impa c t of air- rifle pellet = 140 m s –1
Stoppi n g dista n c e of clay block = 2.8 m
(i) Show that the initial spee d of the clay block afte r the air- rifle
pellet strikes it is
4.8 m s –1 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Calculat e the aver a g e friction al force tha t the surfa c e of the table
exert s on the clay block whilst the clay block is moving.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(c) Discus s the ener gy tran sfor m a t i o n s tha t occur in the clay block and
the air- rifle pellet from the mom e n t the air- rifle pellet strike s the
block until the clay block come s to rest.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(d) The clay block is dropp e d from rest from the edg e of the table and
falls vertically to the grou n d . The tabl e is 0.85 m above the groun d.
Calcula t e the spee d with which the clay block strike s the grou n d.

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 13 mark s )
50 6 . This ques tion is abou t the eye.
(a) Stat e, with refer e n c e to the definition s of nea r point and far point,
what is mea n t by accom m o d a t i o n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(b) Explain how accom m o d a t i o n is achieve d by the eye.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(Tota l 5 mark s )
(a) A par allel beam of monoc h r o m a t i c light is incide n t on a nar r o w

rect a n g ul a r slit. After passin g throu g h the slit, the light is incide n t on
a dista n t scre e n.
Point X is the midpoint of the slit.
(i) On the axes below, sketc h a gra p h to show how the inte n si ty of
the light on the scre e n varies with the angle θ show n in the
diagr a m .
(3)
(ii) The wavelen g t h of the light is 520 nm, the width of the slit is
0.04 mm and the scre e n is 1.2 m from the slit. Show tha t the
width of the cent r al maxim u m of inte nsi ty on the scre e n is about
3 cm.
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) Points P and Q are on the circ u mf e r e n c e of a plan e t as show n.
By consid e ri n g the two points, outline why diffrac tio n limits the ability
of an astr o n o m i c al telesco p e to resolve the imag e of the plane t as a
disc.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
50 8 . This ques tion is abou t stan di n g wave s and orga n pipes.
(a) Stat e on e way in which a sta n di n g wave differs from a travelling

wave.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) An organ pipe of lengt h L is close d at one end. On the diag r a m s , dra w
a repr e s e n t a t i o n of the displa c e m e n t of the air in the pipe whe n the
frequ e n c y of the note emitt e d by the pipe is the
(i) fund a m e n t a l (first har m o ni c) freq u e n c y f 1 .
(1)
(ii) secon d har m o ni c frequ e n c y f 2 .
(1)
f1
(c) Use your answ e r to (b) to dedu c e an expr e s sio n for the ratio f2 .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(d) Stat e, in ter m s of the boun d a r y conditions of the sta n di n g wave s that
can be form e d in the pipe, the reas o n why the ratio of the highe r
frequ e n ci e s of the har m o ni c s to tha t of the funda m e n t a l mus t always
be an integ e r num b e r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
50 9 . This ques tion is abou t wave–pa r ti cl e duality.
(a) In the photo el ec t r i c effect, elect r o n s are not emitt e d from the surf ac e
of a met al if the frequ e n c y of the incide n t light is below a cert ai n
value called the thr es h ol d frequ e n c y.
(i) Explain, with refer e n c e to the Einst ei n model of the photo el e c t ri c

effect, the exist en c e of the thre s h ol d frequ e n c y.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(ii) Stat e, with refer e n c e to your answ e r in (a)(i), the rea s o n why the
thre s h ol d frequ e n c y is differ e n t for differ e n t met als.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) Light of frequ e n cy 1.0 × 10 15 Hz is incide n t on the surfa c e of a met al.
The work function of the met al is 3.2 × 10 –19 J.
(i) Show that the maxim u m kine tic ene r gy of the emitt e d elect r o n s
is 3.4 × 10 –19 J.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Dete r mi n e the de Broglie wavele n g t h of the elect r o n s in (b)(i).
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

51 0 . This ques tion is abou t the spec t r u m of atomic hydrog e n .
(a) The diagr a m repr e s e n t s the princi p al lines in the visible spec t r u m of
atomic hydro g e n .
Outline how the spect r u m can be produ c e d and obse r v e d in the

labor a t o r y.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(b) Calcula t e the differe n c e in ene r gy in eV betw e e n the ene r gy levels in
the hydro g e n atom that give rise to the red line in the spec t r u m .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
(a) A nucleu s of a radioac tive isotop e of gold (Au- 189) emits a neut ri n o in
the decay to a nucle u s of an isotop e of platin u m (Pt).
In the nucle a r reaction equa tio n below, stat e the na m e of the par ticle
X and identify the nucleon num b e r A and proto n num b e r Z of the
nucleu s of the isotop e of platin u m .
189 A
7 9 Au  Z P t  X v
X : .............................................................................................................
...................
A : .............................................................................................................
...................
Z : .............................................................................................................
...................
(2)
(b) The half- life of Au-189 is 8.84 minut e s . A fres hly pre p a r e d sam pl e of
the isotop e has an activity of 124 Bq.
(i) Calculat e the decay const a n t of Au-189.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Dete r mi n e the activity of the sam pl e afte r 12.0 min.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
51 2 . This ques tion is abou t CDs and CCDs.
(a) Analogu e signals are stor e d on a CD as a digital, bina ry signal. For an

analog u e signal of str e n g t h 11 V,
(i) stat e the magni t u d e of the signal stre n g t h as a bina ry num b e r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) descri b e how a digit al signal, such as that in (a)(i), is stor e d on

the CD.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) outline how the stor e d digit one (1) in a digital signal is rea d
from the CD using laser light reflect e d from the surfa c e of the
CD.

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) Unlike a CD, a CCD stor es light incide n t on its surfa c e in a digital
form by dividing the surf ac e into a larg e num b e r of pixels. Eac h pixel
has a fixed value of capaci t a n c e .
(i) Define what is mea n t by the capacitan c e of a pixel.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Pixels of a particul a r CCD have an are a of 2.8 × 10 –10 m 2 and a

capacit a n c e of 20 pF. A bea m of monoc h r o m a t i c light is incide n t
on the CCD. The num b e r of photo n s per squa r e met r e arriving at
the CCD is 4.0 × 10 13 . The qua n t u m efficiency of a pixel is 74 %.
Dete r mi n e the incre a s e in pote n ti al differ e n c e acros s a pixel as a

res ult of the incide n t light.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

51 3 . This ques tion is abou t an oper a tio n a l amplifier use d in a Sch mit t trigg e r
circuit.
(a) An oper a tio n al amplifier use s a ±6. 0 V supply. The oper a ti o n a l

amplifier oper a t e s in the non- inver ti n g mode.
(i) On the axes below, sketc h a gra p h to show how the outp u t
voltag e V OUT of the amplifier varie s with the pote n ti al differ e n c e
V betw e e n the two input s of the amplifie r.
(2)
(ii) With refer e n c e to the gra p h sketc h e d in (a)(i), explain why the
oper a tio n al amplifier is said to act as a comp a r a t o r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b) The diagr a m shows an oper a ti o n a l amplifier conn e c t e d as a Schmit t

trigg e r . The outp u t of the amplifie r is ±6. 0 V.

(i) Show that the upp e r switc hi n g volta g e of the trigg e r , i.e. the
input voltag e V IN for which the outp u t volta g e V OUT switc h e s
from –6.0 V to +6. 0 V, is 2.0 V.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) The input signal V IN to the trigg e r is show n in the gra p h.
The switchin g voltag e s of the trigg e r are ±2. 0 V.
On the axes above, sketc h a gra p h to show how the outpu t

voltag e V OUT varies with time t .
(2)

(c) Explain the use of a Sch mit t trigg e r in the tra ns m i s sio n of digital
signals.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
51 4 . This ques tion is abou t a Galilea n tra n sfor m a t i o n and time dilation.
Ben is in a spac e s hi p that is travelling in a str ai g h t- line with const a n t spe e d

v as meas u r e d by Jill who is in a spa c e station.
Ben switch e s on a light puls e that bounc e s vertic ally (as obse rv e d by Ben)
betw e e n two horizon t al mirror s M 1 and M 2 sepa r a t e d by a dista n c e d . At
the insta n t that the mir ro r s are opposit e Jill, the pulse is just leaving the
mirro r M 2 . The spee d of light in air is c .
(a) On the diag r a m , sketc h the pat h of the light pulse betw e e n M 1 and M 2
as obse rv e d by Jill.

(1)
(b) The time for the light pulse to travel from M 2 to M 1 as me a s u r e d by Jill
is Δt .
(i) Stat e, accor di n g to Jill, the dista n c e move d by the spac e s hi p in

time Δt .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Using a Galilean tran sfo r m a t i o n, derive an expr e s s io n for the

lengt h of the pat h of the light betw e e n M 2 and M 1 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c) Stat e, accor di n g to speci al rela tivity, the lengt h of the pat h of the light
betw e e n M 2 and M 1 as me a s u r e d by Jill in ter m s of c and ∆t .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(d) The time for the puls e to travel from M 2 to M 1 as mea s u r e d by Ben is
∆t ′. Use your answ e r s to (b)(i) and (c) to derive a rela tion s hi p betw e e n
∆t and ∆t ′.
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(e) Accordi n g to a clock at res t with res p e c t to Jill, a clock in the
space s hi p runs slow by a factor of 2.3. Show that the spe e d v of the
space s hi p is 0.90c.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
51 5 . This ques tion is abou t lepton s and meson s .
(a) Lepto n s are a class of elem e n t a r y particle s and eac h lepton has its
own antip a r ti cl e. Stat e wha t is mea n t by an
(i) elem e n t a r y particle.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) antip a r t i cl e of a lepton.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) The elect r o n is a lepton and its antip a r t i cl e is the positro n. The
following reaction can take plac e betw e e n an elect r o n and positro n.
e– + e+ → γ + γ
Sket ch the Feyn m a n diagr a m for this reac tion and identify on your
diagr a m any virtual particl e s.
(3)
(c) Unlike lepton s , the π + meso n is not an elem e n t a r y particle. Sta t e the
(i) quar k s truct u r e of the π + meso n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) reas o n why the following rea c tio n does not occur.
p + + p+ → p + + π+
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(d) Stat e the Pauli exclusion principle.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(e) Explain, with refer e n c e to your ans w e r to (d), why qua r k s are
assig n e d the prope r t y of colour.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
51 6 . This ques tion is abou t the char a c t e r i s ti c s of the sta r s Procyon A and
Procyon B.
(a) The star s Procyon A and Procyon B are both locat e d in the sa m e
stellar clust e r in the const ell a tion Canis Minor. Disting uis h betw e e n a
const ell ation and a stellar clust e r .
Cons t ella tio n: ..........................................................................................

....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Stellar
clust e r : ............................................................................................
.................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) The table shows som e dat a for Procyon A and Procyon B.
Appar e n t Abso l u t e Appar e n t

ma g n i t u d e ma g n i t u d e bri g h t n e s s
/ W m –2
Procy o n A +0. 4 0 0 +2. 6 8 2.06 × 10 –8
(P A )
Procy o n B +1 0. 7 +1 3. 0 1.46 × 10 –12
(P B )

Explain, using dat a from the table, why
(i) as viewed from Eart h, P A is muc h bright e r tha n P B .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) the luminosity of P A is muc h gre a t e r tha n that of P B .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(c) Deduc e, using dat a from the table in (b), that P A and P B are
appr oxi m a t ely the sam e dista n c e from Eart h.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(d) Stat e, using your ans w e r s to (a) and (c), why P A and P B might be
binar y star s.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
LA
(e) Calcula t e, using dat a from the table in (b), the ratio LB whe r e L A is
the luminosi ty of P A and L B is the luminosity of P B .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(f) The surf ac e tem p e r a t u r e of both P A and P B is of the orde r of 10 4 K.

The luminosity of P A is of the orde r of 10 L S , whe r e L S is the luminosity
of the Sun. The diag r a m shows the grid of a Her tz s p r u n g–R u s s e ll
diagr a m .

Label, on the grid above, the app r oxi m a t e position of
(i) star P A with the lette r A.

(1)
(ii) star P B with the lette r B.

(1)

(g) Identify the natu r e of star P B .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tot al 15 mark s )
51 7 . This ques tion is abou t the Big Bang model and red- shift.
(a) Descri b e what is mean t by the Big Bang model.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) In the 1960s, Penzias and Wilson discove r e d a unifor m cosmic

backg r o u n d radiation (CMB) in the microw a v e region of the
elect r o m a g n e t i c spect r u m .
(i) Explain how the CMB is consist e n t with the Big Bang model.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) Stat e why the red- shift of light from galaxies suppo r t s the Big

Bang model.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

(a) Stat e what is mea n t by the modula tio n of a car ri e r wave.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) The grap h shows how the volta g e signal stre n g t h V of an amplitu d e
modul a t e d (AM) carri e r wave varies with time t .
Use the grap h to det e r m i n e the
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) frequ e n c y of the signal wave.
.........................................................................................................

..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) amplitu d e of the signal wave.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iv) ban d wi d t h.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(c) A car rie r wave may also be frequ e n c y modul a t e d (FM). Stat e and
explain on e adva n t a g e of FM comp a r e d to AM.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
51 9 . This ques tion is abou t optical fibre s.
(a) Stat e what is mea n t by mat e ri al dispe r s io n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

(2)
(b) Sugg e s t why mat e ri al dispe r si o n sets a limit on the bit- rat e of
tran s m i s sio n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(c) (i) The signal show n below is fed into a mono m o d e optical
fibre.
On the diagr a m above, show the effects of mat e ri a l dispe r s io n on

the input signal by drawi n g the sha p e of the sign al afte r it has
travelled a long dista n c e in the optical fibre.
(1)
(ii) Stat e and explain how the effect s on the signal draw n in (c)(i)
may be red uc e d .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(d) Digital dat a are tran s m i t t e d in an optic al fibre with a glass core which
has a refr ac tive index of 1.5. The dur a tio n of one bit in the
tran s m i s sio n is 0.50 ns and eac h sam pl e in the signal consist s of 32
bits.
(i) Calculat e the time requi r e d for the signal to travel a dista n c e of

500 km.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Dete r mi n e the sam pling frequ e n c y.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(e) The data in (d) are confide n ti al and mus t be prot e c t e d . Without taking
financi al costs into accou n t , outline whet h e r a direc t optical fibre
conn e c tio n or a tran s m i s sio n thro u g h a geosync h r o n o u s satellite
would be mor e suita bl e for the tra n sf e r of the s e dat a.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 12 mark s )
52 0 . This ques tion is abou t laser s.
(a) With refer e n c e to the light waves emitt e d by a lase r, stat e wha t is
mea n t by the ter m s
(i) monoch r o m a t i c.
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) cohe r e n t .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b) The diagr a m (not to scale) shows thr e e of the ene r gy levels of a
subs t a n c e used to produ c e lase r light.
The ene r gy of the grou n d stat e is E 0 .
(i) Stat e what is mean t by popula tion inver sion.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Draw an arro w on the diagr a m to indic at e the tran si tion that
res ults in a popula tion inver sion. Label the arro w P.
(1)
(iii) Draw an arro w on the diagr a m to indic at e the tran si tion that

res ults in a pulse of lase r light. Label the arro w L.
(1)
(iv) Deduc e that the wavel e n g t h of the emitt e d lase r light is 690 nm.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
52 1 . This ques tion is abou t an astr o n o m i c a l telesc o p e .
The diagr a m (not to scale) show s the arr a n g e m e n t of the two convex lense s
in an astro n o m i c al teles co p e in nor m a l adjus t m e n t .
The teles co p e is used to observ e a dista n t star. One of the focal points of
the eyepiec e lens is labelled F E .
(a) On the diag r a m above,
(i) label, with the symbol F E , the position of the othe r focal point of
the eyepiec e lens.
(1)
(ii) label, with the symbol F O , the position of the focal point of the
objective lens that is in betw e e n the two lens e s .
(1)

(iii) cons t r u c t rays to locat e the final image of the star.
(3)

(b) In a particul a r astr o n o m i c a l tele sc o p e , the eyepie c e lens has a powe r
of 40 diopt r e s and the objec tive lens a powe r of 0.80 diopt r e s .
Deter m i n e the angul a r mag nifica tion of the telesc o p e in nor m al
adjus t m e n t .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c) In an astr o n o m i c al telesco p e the objective is ofte n mad e up from a

diver gi n g and a conver gi n g lens, whe r e a s the ape r t u r e of the eyepie c e
is usually rest rict e d such that only rays close to the princip al axis are
viewe d. Stat e the reas o n s for this.
Objective
lens: ................................................................................................
.............
Eyepiec e
lens: ................................................................................................
..............
(2)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

52 2 . This ques tion is abou t a diffraction gra ti n g.
(a) A par allel beam of monoc h r o m a t i c light is incide n t nor m ally on a

diffraction grati n g. After passin g thro u g h the gra tin g it is broug h t to a
focus on a scre e n by a lens. The diagr a m shows a few of the slits of
the diffraction gratin g and the pat h of the light that is diffra c t e d at an
angle θ to each slit.
The dist an c e betw e e n the slits is d and the wavele n g t h of the light is
λ.
(i) On the diagr a m , const r u c t a line tha t ena bl e s the path differ e n c e
betw e e n the rays from two adjac e n t slits to be show n. Label the
path dist a n c e L .
(1)
(ii) Use your answ e r to (a)(i) to derive the condition, in ter m s of d

and θ, for ther e to be a maxim u m of inte n si ty at the point P on
the scre e n .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) For a partic ul a r gratin g, the dista n c e betw e e n adjac e n t slits is 2.0 ×
10 –6 m. Dete r mi n e, for light of wavele n g t h 520 nm, the maxim u m
theor e t i c al orde r of diffrac tio n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
52 3 . Two lengt h s, a and b , are mea s u r e d to be 51 ± 1 cm and 49 ± 1 cm

res p e c tiv ely. In which of the following qua n ti tie s is the perc e n t a g e
unce r t ai n t y the large s t ?
A. a + b
B. a –b
C. a × b
a
D. b
(Tot al 1 mar k )
52 4 . A net force of mag nit u d e 4.0 N acts on a body of mas s 3.0 kg for 6.0 s. The
body is initially at rest. Which of the following is the spe e d of the body afte r
the 6.0 s interv al?
A. 0.50 m s –1
B. 2.0 m s –1
C. 4.5 m s –1
D. 8.0 m s –1
(Tot al 1 mar k )

52 5 . A car moves from X to Y along a semicir c ul a r path. The radius of the path is
250 m and the time taken to compl e t e the trip is 50 s.
Which of the following cor r e c tly shows the mag nit u d e of the aver a g e
velocity and the mag nit u d e of the ave r a g e spe e d ?
Avera g e Avera g e
velo c i t y sp e e d
A. 10 m s –1 10 m s –1
B. 10 m s –1 16 m s –1
C. 16 m s –1 10 m s –1
D. 16 m s –1 16 m s –1
(Tot al 1 mar k )
52 6 . A ball is tied to a string and rota t e d at a unifor m spe e d in a vertic al plan e.

The diagr a m shows the ball at its lowest position. Which arrow shows the
direction of the net force acting on the ball?
(Tot al 1 mar k )

52 7 . Two steel balls, of mas s M and 2 M , fall at const a n t spe e d s in a tube filled
with oil.
Which of the following cor r e c tly comp a r e s the magni t u d e s of the net force
and of the drag (resist a n c e ) force on the two balls?
Ne t forc e Dra g forc e

A. sam e sam e
C. differ e n t sam e
(Tot al 1 mar k )
52 8 . An ice cube and an icebe r g are both at a tem p e r a t u r e of 0 °C. Which of the
following is a corr ec t comp a ri s o n of the aver a g e ran do m kine tic ene r gy and
the total kinetic ener gy of the molec ul e s of the ice cube and the icebe r g ?
Avera g e rand o m kin e t i c Tot al kin e t i c

en e r g y en e r g y
A. sam e sa m e
C. differ e n t sa m e
(Tot al 1 mar k )

52 9 . An ideal gas expa n d s isoth e r m a lly from a stat e X to a new stat e of volum e
V . The work done by the gas is W . Which of the following is corr e c t for an
adiab a ti c expa n sio n of the gas from stat e X to a new sta t e of volum e V ?
Cha n g e in int e r n a l Work don e

en e r g y
A. ∆U > 0 gre a t e r tha n W
B. ∆U < 0 gre a t e r tha n W
C. ∆U > 0 less tha n W
D. ∆U < 0 less tha n W
(Tot al 1 mar k )
53 0 . The gra p h shows the variation with absolut e tem p e r a t u r e T of the pre s s u r e
p of a fixed mas s of an ideal gas.
Which of the following is corr ec t conc e r ni n g the volum e and the density of
the gas?
Volu m e De n s i t y
A. const a n t cons t a n t
B. const a n t incr e a s i n g
C. incr e a si n g cons t a n t
D. incr e a si n g incr e a s i n g
(Tot al 1 mar k )

53 1 . Which of the following grap h s shows the varia tion with displa c e m e n t x of
the spee d v of a particle perfor mi n g simple har m o nic motion.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
53 2 . A particle perfor m s simple har m o ni c oscillations. Which of the following

quan ti tie s will be unaffect e d by a redu c tio n in the amplitu d e of oscillations ?
A. The total ene r gy
B. The maxim u m spee d
C. The maxim u m accele r a t i o n
D. The period
(Tot al 1 mar k )

53 3 . Monoc h r o m a t i c light travels from air into wat e r . Which of the following
descri b e s the chan g e s in wavele n g t h and spe e d ?
Wavel e n g t h Sp e e d
A. incr e a s e s decr e a s e s
B. incr e a s e s incr e a s e s
C. decr e a s e s incr e a s e s
(Tot al 1 mar k )
53 4 . A stan di n g wave is esta blis h e d in air in a pipe with one close d and one
open end.
The air molecul e s near X are
A. always at the cent r e of a comp r e s si o n.
B. always at the cent r e of a rar ef a c tio n.
C. som eti m e s at the cent r e of a comp r e s s io n and som e ti m e s at the cent r e

of a rar ef a c tio n.
D. neve r at the cent r e of a comp r e s si o n or a rar ef a c tio n.

(Tot al 1 mar k )

53 5 . In two sepa r a t e expe ri m e n t s monoc h r o m a t i c light is incide n t on a single
slit. The diagr a m s show the diffra c tion patt e r n s obtain e d on a scre e n far
from the slit. In the top diag r a m the wavele n g t h of light is λ 1 and the slit
width is b 1 . In the botto m diag r a m the wavele n g t h of light is λ 2 and the slit
width is b 2 .
In each expe ri m e n t the dista n c e betw e e n the slit and the scre e n is the
sam e. Which of the following may be ded uc e d ?
λ1 λ 2

A. b1 b2
λ1 λ 2

B. b1 b2
C. b1 < b2
D. λ1 > λ2
(Tot al 1 mar k )

53 6 . Horizont ally polarize d light is tra n s m i t t e d throu g h a polarize r whos e
tran s mi s s io n axis is horizont al. The light ent e r s a cont ai n e r with a suga r
solution and is then incide n t on a secon d pola riz e r whos e tra n s m i s sio n axis
is vertical.
When the secon d polarizer is rotat e d by a small angle, no light is

tran s mi t t e d thro u g h the secon d polariz e r . The expla n a t io n for this
obse rv a tio n is that the suga r solution
A. caus e s dest r u c t iv e interf e r e n c e .
B. rotat e s the plane of polariz a tion of light.
C. can only tran s m i t vertically pola riz e d light.
D. refr ac t s light so no light is incide n t on the secon d pola riz e r.

(Tot al 1 mar k )
53 7 . A sour c e of soun d app ro a c h e s a station a r y obse rv e r . The spe e d of the

emitt e d sound and its wavele n g t h , me a s u r e d at the sourc e , are v and λ
res p e c tiv ely. Which of the following is the wave spe e d and the wavele n g t h ,
as meas u r e d by the station a r y obse rv e r ?
Wave sp e e d Wavel e n g t h
A. larg e r than larg e r tha n
v λ
B. equal to v larg e r tha n
λ
C. equal to v less tha n λ
D. larg e r than less tha n λ

v
(Tot al 1 mar k )
53 8 . The diagr a m shows the pat h of a projec tile tha t is launc h e d with velocity v .
Air resis t a n c e is negligible.
A secon d projectile has doubl e the mas s of the first proje ctile and is
launc h e d with the sam e velocity. Air resist a n c e is still negligible. Which of
the following pat hs best repr e s e n t s the pat h of the projec tile? ( The original
path is sho w n as a dott ed line )
(Tot al 1 mar k )

53 9 . The diagr a m shows equipot e n t i al lines due to two object s.
The two object s could be
A. elect ric char g e s of the sam e sign only.
B. mas s e s only.
C. elect ric char g e s of opposit e sign only.
D. mas s e s or elect ric char g e s of any sign.

(Tot al 1 mar k )

54 0 . Two positive and two neg a tive point char g e s of equal mag ni t u d e are plac e d
at the vertice s of a squa r e as show n. The origin of the axes is at the cent r e
of the squa r e .
The elect ric poten ti al is zero
A. at the origin of the axes only.
B. along both the x -axis and the y -axis.
C. along the y -axis only.
D. along the x -axis only.

(Tot al 1 mar k )

54 1 . A rect a n g ul a r loop of condu c ti n g wire rota t e s in a region of mag n e ti c field.
The gra p h shows the variation with time t of the induc e d emf in the loop
durin g one cycle.
Which of the following gives the corr e c t time s at which the ma gni t u d e of
the mag n e t i c flux linkag e and the mag nit u d e of the curr e n t in the loop are
maxim u m ?
Flux Curre n t
link a g e
A. Y Y
B. Y X
C. X Y
D. X X
(Tot al 1 mar k )

54 2 . A rect a n g ul a r loop of condu c ti n g wire rota t e s in a region of mag n e ti c field.
The gra p h shows the variation with time t of the induc e d emf in the loop
durin g one cycle.
The resist a n c e of the coil is 5.0 Ω. Which of the following i s the aver a g e
powe r dissipa t e d in the loop?
45
A. 2 W
45
B. 2W
C. 45 W
D. 45 2 W
(Tot al 1 mar k )
54 3 . The radii of nuclei may be dete r m i n e d by
A. scat t e r i n g char g e d particle s off the nuclei.
B. injectin g the nuclei in a mass spec t r o m e t e r .
C. mea s u ri n g the de Broglie wavele n g t h of the nuclei.
D. obse rvin g the spect r u m of the nuclei.

(Tot al 1 mar k )

54 4 . In the photo el ec t ri c effect, the following obse rv a tio n s may be ma de .
I. The kinetic ener gy of the emitt e d elect r o n s incr e a s e s with

incr e a s i n g light frequ e n c y.
II. The elect r o n s are emitt e d withou t time delay.
Which of thes e obs erv a tio n s , if any, can be explain e d in ter m s of the wave
theo ry of light?
A. Neith e r I nor II
B. I and II
C. I only
D. II only
(Tot al 1 mar k )
54 5 . A proton and an alpha par ticle have the sam e de Broglie wavele n g t h .
s p e e dof a lp h ap a r t ic le
Which of the following is appr oxi m a t e ly the ratio s p e e do f p r o t o n ?
1
A. 4
1
B. 2
C. 2
D. 4
(Tot al 1 mar k )

54 6 . The ener gi e s of alpha particl es and of gam m a- rays emitt e d in radioa c tive
decay are discr e t e . This observ a tio n is evide n c e for
A. atomic ene r gy levels.
B. nuclea r ener gy levels.
C. nuclei having mor e neut r o n s tha n proton s .
D. the existe n c e of isotop e s.

(Tot al 1 mar k )
54 7 . The diagr a m s show the variation with dista n c e x of the wave function ψ of
four differ e n t elect r o n s . The scale on the horizont al axis in all four
diagr a m s is the sam e. For which elect r o n is the unc e r t a i n t y in the
mom e n t u m the large s t ?
(Tot al 1 mar k )

54 8 . A wave gene r a t o r produ c e s a powe r per unit lengt h of 4.0 kW m –1 for
waves of amplit u d e A and spee d v . The efficiency of the gen e r a t o r is
cons t a n t . The power per unit lengt h obtain e d from waves of amplit u d e 2 A
and spee d 2 v would be
A. 8.0 kW m –1 .
B. 16 kW m –1 .
C. 32 kW m –1 .
D. 64 kW m –1 .
(Tot al 1 mar k )
54 9 . Which of the following stat e m e n t s , relatin g to the prod u c tio n of nucle a r

powe r , is corr e c t ?
A. The fuel has high ener gy density.
B. Supplies of nuclea r fuels are unlimit e d.
C. Gree n h o u s e gas emissions are significa n t.
D. Wast e produ c t s are not signific a n t .

(Tot al 1 mar k )
55 0 . Data are stor e d on an audio comp a c t disc (CD) at a rat e of f sam pl e s per
secon d. Each sam pl e cont ai ns b bits. A total of N bits are stor e d on the CD.
Which of the following is the playing time of the CD in secon d s ?
Nf
A. b
N
B. bf
bN
C. f
bf
D. N
(Tot al 1 mar k )

55 1 . Light incide n t on the pixel of a CCD caus e s elect ric char g e to collec t in the
pixel. The amou n t of char g e collect e d in a given time is propo r t io n al to
which char a c t e r i s tic of the incide n t light?
A. The degr e e of polariza tion
B. The inten sity
C. The wavele n g t h
D. The frequ e n c y
(Tot al 1 mar k )
A stud e n t perfor m s an expe ri m e n t with a pap e r toy tha t rota t e s as it falls

slowly throu g h the air. After rele a s e , the pape r toy quickly att ain s a
cons t a n t vertic al spee d as meas u r e d over a fixed vertic al dista n c e .
The aim of the expe ri m e n t was to find how the ter mi n al spe e d of the pape r
toy varies with its weigh t. The weigh t of the pape r toy was chan g e d by
using differ e n t num b e r s of pap e r she e t s in its const r u c t i o n.

The gra p h shows a plot of the ter mi n a l spe e d v of the pap e r toy (calcula t e d
from the raw dat a) and the num b e r of pap e r she e t s n use d to const r u c t the
toy. The unce r t ai n t y in v for n = 1 is show n by the erro r bar.
(a) The fixed dist a n c e is 0.75 m and has an absolut e unce r t a i n t y of 0.01
m. The perc e n t a g e unce r t a i n t y in the time take n to fall throu g h the
fixed dist an c e is 5 %.
(i) Calculat e the absolut e unce r t a i n t y in the ter mi n al spe e d of the

pap e r toy for n = 6.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) On the grap h, draw an error bar on the point corr e s p o n di n g to n
= 6.
(1)

(b) On the gra p h, draw a line of best- fit for the data points.
(1)
(c) The stud e n t hypot h e s iz e s tha t v is propo r tio n a l to n . Use the data
points for n = 2 and
n = 4 from the gra p h above to show that this hypot h e s i s is incor r e c t .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(d) Anothe r stud e n t hypot h e s iz e d tha t v might be propo r tio n a l to n . To
verify this hypot h e si s he plott e d a gra p h of lg v agains t lg n as show n
below.
Show that the grap h verifies the hypot h e si s that v is propo r tio n a l to
n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 12 mark s )
55 3 . This ques tion is abou t fuel for hea tin g.

(a) Define the ener gy densi ty of a fuel.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) A room heat e r bur n s liquid fuel and the following dat a are availabl e.
Density of liquid fuel =

8.0 × 10 2 kg m –3
Ener gy produ c e d by 1 m 3 of liquid fuel =
2.7 × 10 10 J
Rate at which fuel is cons u m e d =
0.13 g s –1
Temp e r a t u r e at which air ent e r s hea t e r = 12
°C
Temp e r a t u r e at which air leave s hea t e r = 32
°C
Specific heat capa ci ty of air =
990 J kg –1 K–1
(i) Use the dat a to calcula t e the powe r outp u t of the room hea t e r ,
ignorin g the power requi r e d to conve r t the liquid fuel into a gas.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) All the ene r gy outp u t of the room heat e r raise s the tem p e r a t u r e
of the air moving throu g h it. Use the dat a to calcul a t e the mas s
of air that moves throu g h the room hea t e r in on e secon d.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

55 4 . This ques tion is abou t digital data stor a g e .
(a) Descri b e, with refer e n c e to the stru c t u r e of a DVD, how stor e d digital
dat a are read.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(b) The Blu- ray stor a g e syste m uses a lase r diode tha t emits a wavele n g t h
of 405 nm, wher e a s the olde r DVD syste m uses radia tion of
wavelen g t h 650 nm. Explain the adva n t a g e s of using a smalle r
wavelen g t h .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
55 5 . This ques tion is abou t elect r o m a g n e t i c induc tio n.
(a) In orde r to mea s u r e the rms value of an alte r n a t i n g cur r e n t in a cable,

a small coil of wire is plac e d close to the cable.
The plane of the small coil is par allel to the direc tio n of the cable. The
ends of the small coil are conn e c t e d to a high resist a n c e ac voltm e t e r .
Use Far a d a y’s law to explain why an emf is induc e d in the small coil.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(b) The grap h below show s the variatio n with time t of the cur r e n t in the
cable.
On the axes below, draw a sketc h gra p h to show the variatio n with
time of the emf induc e d in the small coil.
(2)
(c) Explain how readi n g s on the high resist a n c e ac voltm e t e r can be use d
to com p a r e the rms values of alte r n a t i n g curr e n t s in differ e n t cable s.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

55 6 . This ques tion is abou t the Ruthe r fo r d model of the atom.
(a) Most alpha par ticles used to bomb a r d a thin gold foil pass thro u g h the
foil witho u t a significa n t cha n g e in direc tion. A few alpha par ticle s are
deviat e d from their original direc tion thro u g h angl es gre a t e r than 90°.
Use thes e observ a tio n s to desc ri b e the Ruthe r fo r d atomic model.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(5)

197 199
(b) The isotop e gold- 197 ( 7 9 Au ) is sta ble but the isotop e gold- 199 ( 7 9 Au )
is not.
(i) Outline, in ter m s of the force s acting betw e e n nucleo n s , why, for
large stabl e nuclei such as gold- 197, the num b e r of neut r o n s
excee d s the num b e r of proton s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
199 199
(ii) A nucle u s of 7 9 Au dec ays to a nucle u s of 8 0 H g . Sta t e the two
par ticl es , othe r than γ-photon, e mitte d in this dec ay.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
55 7 . This ques tion is abou t the simple pend ul u m .
(a) A pend ul u m consist s of a bob susp e n d e d by a light inexte n si bl e string

from a rigid suppo r t . The pend ul u m bob is move d to one side and the n
relea s e d . The sketc h grap h show s how the displa c e m e n t of the
pend ul u m bob und e r g oi n g simple har m o ni c motion varie s with time
over one time period.

On the sketc h grap h above,
(i) label with the lette r A a point at which the accele r a t io n of the
pend ul u m bob is a maxim u m .
(1)
(ii) label with the lette r V a point at which the spe e d of the pend ul u m
bob is a maxim u m .
(1)
(b) Explain why the mag ni t u d e of the tension in the string at the midpoint
of the oscillation is grea t e r tha n the weight of the pend ul u m bob.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c) The pend ul u m bob is moved to one side until its cent r e is 25 mm
above its rest position and the n rele a s e d .

(i) Show that the spee d of the pend ul u m bob at the midpoint of the
oscillation is
0.70 m s –1 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) The mas s of the pend ul u m bob is 0.057 kg. The cent r e of the
pend ul u m bob is 0.80 m below the suppo r t . Calcula t e the
mag ni t u d e of the tension in the string whe n the pend ul u m bob is
vertically below the point of sus p e n s i o n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(d) The point of susp e n s i o n of the pend ul u m bob is move d from side to
side with a small amplitu d e and at a variabl e driving frequ e n c y f.

For each value of the driving frequ e n c y a ste a dy cons t a n t amplitu d e A
is reac h e d . The oscillations of the pend ul u m bob are lightly dam p e d .

(i) On the axes below, sketc h a gra p h to show the variation of A with
f.
(2)
(ii) Explain, with refer e n c e to the gra p h in (d)(i), wha t is me a n t by

reson a n c e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(e) The pend ul u m bob is now imm e r s e d in wate r and the varia bl e
frequ e n c y driving force in (d) is again applie d. Sugg e s t the effect this
imme r s io n of the pend ul u m bob will have on the sha p e of your gra p h
in (d)(i).
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 16 mark s )

55 8 . This ques tion is abou t the de Broglie hypot h e si s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) A bea m of elect r o n s is acc ele r a t e d from res t thro u g h a pote n ti al

differ e n c e of 85 V.
Show that the de Broglie wavel e n g t h associa t e d with the elect r o n s in

the bea m is 0.13 nm.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c) Elect r o n s with the sam e kinetic ene r gy as thos e in (b) are incide n t on
a circula r aper t u r e of diam e t e r 1.1 nm.

The elect r o n s are dete c t e d beyond the ape r t u r e .

The grap h shows the variatio n with angle θ of the num b e r n of
elect r o n s det ec t e d per secon d after diffrac tion by the ape r t u r e .
Use your answ e r to (b) above to explain how dat a from the gra p h
suppo r t the de Broglie hypot h e s i s.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tota l 9 mark s )
55 9 . This ques tion is abou t a light ni n g disch a r g e .
(a) Define electric field stren g t h .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................

.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) A thun d e r cl o u d can be modelle d as a neg a tively cha r g e d plat e that is
par allel to the grou n d .
The mag ni t u d e of the char g e on the plat e incre a s e s due to proc e s s e s

in the atmo s p h e r e . Event u a lly a cur r e n t disc h a r g e s from the
thun d e r cl o u d to the grou n d .
On the diag r a m , draw the elect ric field patt e r n betw e e n the
thun d e r cl o u d bas e and the grou n d .
(3)
(c) The cur r e n t disch a r g e s whe n the mag ni t u d e of the elect ric field
betw e e n the groun d and the thun d e r c l o u d base is 0.33 MN C –1 . The
thun d e r cl o u d bas e is 750 m above the groun d.
(i) Calculat e, just befor e disch a r g e , the pote n ti al differ e n c e betw e e n

the thun d e r cl o u d bas e and the grou n d.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) The poten ti al differ e n c e V , betw e e n the thun d e r c l o u d bas e and
the grou n d , is given by
Qd
V = Aε 0
wher e Q is the char g e on the thun d e r c l o u d bas e, A is the are a of

the bas e, and d is the dista n c e betw e e n the bas e and the groun d.
The area of the bas e is 1.2 × 10 7 m 2 .
Calculat e, just befor e disch a r g e , the cha r g e on the bas e of the

thun d e r cl o u d .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Dete r mi n e the ener gy rele a s e d in the disch a r g e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(Tot al 14 mark s )

56 0 . This ques tion is abou t microw a v e radia tio n.
A microw a v e tran s m i t t e r emits radia tio n of a single wavele n g t h towa r d s a

met al plat e along a line nor m al to the plat e. The radia tio n is reflec t e d back
towa r d s the tran s m i t t e r .
A microw a v e det ec t o r is moved along a line nor m a l to the microw a v e

tran s mi t t e r and the met al plat e. The det e c t o r recor d s a sequ e n c e of equ ally
spac e d maxim a and minim a of inten sity.
(a) Explain how thes e maxim a and minim a are form e d.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(b) The microw av e det ec t o r is move d thro u g h 130 mm from one point of
minim u m intensi ty to anot h e r point of minim u m inte n si ty. On the way
it pass es thro u g h nine point s of maxim u m inte n sity. Calcula t e the
(i) wavele n g t h of the microw a v e s .
.........................................................................................................

..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) frequ e n c y of the microw a v e s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c) Descri b e and explain how it could be demo n s t r a t e d that the

microw av e s are polarize d.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

56 1 . This ques tion is abou t nuclea r fission.
(a) A possible fission reac tio n is
235
92 U 01 n  93 26 Kr 15461Ba x 10 n .
(i) Stat e the value of x .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Show that the ener gy rele a s e d whe n one ura ni u m nucle u s
unde r g o e s fission in the rea c tion in (a) is about 2.8 × 10 –11 J.
Mass of neut r o n = 1.008 6 7 u

Mass of U-235 nucle u s = 234.99 3 3 3 u
Mass of Kr- 92 nucle u s = 91.90 6 4 5 u
Mass of Ba- 141 nucle u s = 140.88 3 5 4 u
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(iii) Stat e how the ene r gy of the neut r o n s produ c e d in the reac tion in
(a) is likely to com p a r e with the ene r gy of the neut r o n that
initiat e d the reac tion.
.........................................................................................................

..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) Outline the role of the mode r a t o r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c) (i) A nucle a r powe r plant that uses U-235 as fuel has a
useful powe r outpu t of 16 MW and an efficiency of 40 %.
Assumi n g that each fission of U-235 gives rise to
2.8 × 10 –11 J of ener gy, dete r m i n e the mas s of U-235 fuel used
per day.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(ii) Describ e how some reac t o r s are use d to prod u c e pluto ni u m- 239.
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) Stat e the impor t a n c e of plutoniu m- 239.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(d) Some nuclea r react o r s have a hea t exch a n g e r tha t uses a gas that is
kept at const a n t volum e. The first law of the r m o d y n a m i c s can be
repr e s e n t e d as Q = ∆U + W .
(i) Stat e the mea ni n g s of Q and W .
Q: ....................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
W : ....................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Describ e how the first law of the r m o dy n a m i c s applie s in the

oper a tio n of the heat excha n g e r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(iii) Discus s the ent r o py chan g e s that take plac e in the gas and in the
sur r o u n di n g s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(Tot al 25 mark s )
56 2 . This ques tion is abou t collisions.
(a) Stat e the principl e of cons e r v a ti o n of mom e n t u m .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) In an expe ri m e n t , an air- rifle pellet is fired into a block of modelling
clay that res ts on a table.
(not to scale)
The air- rifle pellet rem ai n s inside the clay block afte r the impa c t.
As a result of the collision, the clay block slides along the table in a
str aig h t line and comes to res t. Furt h e r dat a relatin g to the
expe ri m e n t are given below.
Mass of air- rifle pellet = 2.0 g

Mass of clay block = 56 g
Velocity of impa c t of air- rifle pellet = 140 m s –1
Stoppi n g dista n c e of clay block = 2.8 m
(i) Show that the initial spee d of the clay block afte r the air- rifle
pellet strikes it is 4.8 m s –1 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Calculat e the aver a g e friction al force tha t the surfa c e of the table
exert s on the clay block whilst the clay block is moving.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(c) The experi m e n t is repe a t e d with the clay block plac e d at the edg e of
the table so that it is fired away from the table. The initial spee d of the
clay block is 4.3 m s –1 horizon t ally. The table surfa c e is 0.85 m above
the groun d.
(not to scale)

(i) Ignorin g air resist a n c e , calcula t e the horizon t al dista n c e
travelled by the clay block befor e it strike s the groun d.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(ii) The diagr a m in (c) shows the pat h of the clay block negle c ti n g air
resis t a n c e . On the diagr a m , dra w the app roxi m a t e shap e of the
path that the clay block will take assu mi n g that air resist a n c e
acts on the clay block.
(3)
(Tot al 15 mark s )
56 3 . This ques tion is abou t the gravit a tio n a l field of Mar s.
(a) Define gravitational poten tial ener g y of a mas s at a point.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................

.....................
(1)

(b) The grap h shows the variatio n with dist a n c e r from the cent r e of Mars
of the gravit a tio n al poten ti al V . R is the radius of Mar s which is 3.3
Mm. (Values of V for r < R are not show n.)
A rocket of mas s 1.2 × 10 4 kg lifts off from the surfa c e of Mar s. Use
the grap h to
(i) calcula t e the chan g e in gravit a tion a l pote n ti al ene r gy of the

rocket at a dist an c e 4 R from the cent r e of Mars.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................

..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) show that the magni t u d e of the gravit a tion a l field stre n g t h at a
dist a n c e 4 R from the cent r e of Mars is 0.23 N kg –1 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c) Use the answ e r to (b)(ii) to show that the mag nit u d e of the
gravit atio n al field stre n g t h at the surfa c e of Mars is 3.7 N kg –1 .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(d) The gravit a tio n al poten ti al at the surfa c e of Eart h is –63 MJ kg –1 .

Without any furth e r calcula tio n, comp a r e the esca p e spee d requir e d
to leave the surfac e of Eart h with that of the esca p e spe e d requi r e d to
leave the surf ac e of Mars.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................

.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

56 4 . This ques tion is abou t the char a c t e r i s ti c s of the sta r s Procyon A and
Procyon B.
(a) The star s Procyon A and Procyon B are both locat e d in the sa m e
stellar clust e r in the const ell a tion Canis Minor. Disting uis h betw e e n a
const ell ation and a stellar clust e r .
Cons t ella tio n: ..........................................................................................

....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Stellar
clust e r : ............................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) The table shows som e dat a for Procyon A and Procyon B.
Appar e n t Abs ol u t e Appar e n t

ma g n i t u d e ma g n i t u d e bri g h t n e s s
/ W m –2
Pro cy o n A +2. 6 8 2.06 × 10 –8
(P A ) +0. 4 0 0
Pro cy o n B +1 0. 7 +1 3. 0 1.46 × 10 –12
(P B )
Explain, using dat a from the table, why
(i) as viewed from Eart h, P A is muc h bright e r tha n P B .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) the luminosity of P A is muc h gre a t e r tha n that of P B .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(c) Deduc e, using dat a from the table in (b), that P A and P B are
appr oxi m a t ely the sam e dista n c e from Eart h.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(d) Stat e, using your ans w e r s to (a) and (c), why P A and P B might be
binar y star s.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

LA
(e) Calcula t e, using dat a from the table in (b), the ratio LB whe r e L A is
the luminosi ty of P A and L B is the luminosity of P B .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(f) The surf ac e tem p e r a t u r e of both P A and P B is of the orde r of 10 4 K.

The luminosity of P A is of the orde r of 10 L S , whe r e L S is the luminosity
of the Sun. The diag r a m shows the grid of a Her tz s p r u n g–R u s s e ll
diagr a m .
Label, on the grid above, the app r oxi m a t e position of
(i) star P A with the lette r A.

(1)
(ii) star P B with the lette r B.

(1)

(g) Identify the natu r e of star P B .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(h) On the grid provide d in (f), dra w the evolution a r y pat h of the sta r P A.
(2)

(i) The luminosity of the main sequ e n c e sta r Regul us is 150 L S . Assumin g
that, in the mas s–lu mi n o sity relation s hi p, n = 3.5 show tha t the mass
of Regulus is 4.2 M S wher e M S is the mas s of the Sun.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(j) The star Betelg e u s e is about five times the mass of Regulus. One
possible outco m e of the final sta g e of the evolution of Betelg e u s e is
for it to beco m e a black hole. Sta t e the
(i) othe r possible outco m e of the final sta g e of the evolution of

Betelg e u s e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) reas o n why the final sta g e in (j)(i) is stabl e.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 21 mark s )
56 5 . This ques tion is abou t the Big Bang model and red- shift.
(a) Descri b e what is mean t by the Big Bang model.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) In the 1960s, Penzias and Wilson discove r e d a unifor m cosmic
backg r o u n d radiation (CMB) in the microw a v e region of the
elect r o m a g n e t i c spect r u m .
(i) Explain how the CMB is consist e n t with the Big Bang model.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) Stat e why the red- shift of light from galaxies suppo r t s the Big
Bang model.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(c) Many galaxies are a grea t dista n c e from Eart h. Explain, with
refer e n c e to Hubbl e’s law, how the mea s u r e m e n t of the red- shift of
light from such galaxies ena bl e s their dist a n c e from Eart h to be
dete r m i n e d .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(d) Stat e on e proble m associ a t e d with using Hubbl e’s law to det e r m i n e
the dista n c e of a galaxy a gre a t dista n c e from Eart h.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 9 mark s )
(a) Stat e what is mea n t by the modula tio n of a car ri e r wave.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) The grap h shows how the volta g e signal stre n g t h V of an amplitu d e
modul a t e d (AM) carri e r wave varies with time t .

Use the grap h to det e r m i n e the
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) amplitu d e of the signal wave.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iv) ban d wi d t h.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(c) A car rie r wave may also be frequ e n c y modul a t e d (FM). Stat e and
explain on e adva n t a g e of FM comp a r e d to AM.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

(a) Outline what is mean t by mat e r i al dispe r s io n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) Sugg e s t why mat e ri al dispe r si o n sets a limit on the bit- rat e of
tran s m i s sio n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(c) (i) The signal show n below is fed into a mono m o d e optical
fibre.
On the diagr a m above, show the effects of mat e ri a l dispe r s io n on

the input signal by drawi n g the sha p e of the sign al afte r it has
travelled a long dista n c e in the optical fibre.
(1)
(ii) Stat e and explain how the effect s on the signal draw n in (c)(i)
may be red uc e d .
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(d) Digital dat a are tran s m i t t e d in an optic al fibre with a glass core which
has a refr ac tive index of 1.5. The dur a tio n of one bit in the
tran s m i s sio n is 0.50 ns and eac h sam pl e in the signal consist s of 32
bits.
(i) Calculat e the time requi r e d for the signal to travel a dista n c e of
500 km.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Dete r mi n e the sam pling frequ e n c y.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(e) The data in (d) are confide n ti al and mus t be prot e c t e d . Without taking
financi al costs into accou n t , outline whet h e r a direc t optical fibre
conn e c tio n or a trans m i s si o n throu g h a geosync h r o n o u s satellite
would be mor e suita bl e for the tra n sf e r of the s e dat a.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................

.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 12 mark s )

56 8 . This ques tion is abou t an oper a tio n a l amplifier use d in a Sch mit t trigg e r
circuit.
(a) An oper a tio n al amplifier use s a ±6. 0 V supply. The oper a ti o n a l

amplifier oper a t e s in the non- inver ti n g mode.
(i) On the axes below, sketc h a gra p h to show how the outp u t
voltag e V OUT of the amplifier varie s with the pote n ti al differ e n c e
V betw e e n the two input s of the amplifier.
(2)
(ii) With refer e n c e to the gra p h sketc h e d in (a)(i), explain why the
oper a tio n al amplifier is said to act as a comp a r a t o r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b) The diagr a m shows an oper a ti o n a l amplifier conn e c t e d as a Schmit t

trigg e r . The outp u t of the amplifie r is ±6. 0 V.

(i) Show that the upp e r switc hi n g volta g e of the trigg e r , i.e. the
input voltag e V IN for which the outp u t volta g e V OUT switc h e s
from –6.0 V to +6. 0 V, is 2.0 V.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) The input signal V IN to the trigg e r is show n in the gra p h.
The switchin g voltag e s of the trigg e r are ±2. 0 V.
On the axes above, sketc h a gra p h to show how the outpu t

voltag e V OUT varies with time t .
(2)

(c) Explain the use of a Sch mit t trigg e r in the tra ns m i s sio n of digital
signals.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
56 9 . This ques tion is abou t laser s.
(a) With refer e n c e to the light waves emitt e d by a lase r, stat e wha t is
mea n t by the ter m s
(i) monoch r o m a t i c.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) cohe r e n t .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) The diagr a m (not to scale) shows thr e e of the ene r gy levels of a
subs t a n c e used to produ c e lase r light.
The ene r gy of the grou n d stat e is E 0 .
(i) Stat e what is mean t by popula tion inver sion.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Draw an arro w on the diagr a m to indic at e the tran si tion that
res ults in a popula tion inver sion. Label the arro w P.
(1)
(iii) Draw an arro w on the diagr a m to indic at e the tran si tion that
res ults in a pulse of lase r light. Label the arro w L.
(1)

(iv) Deduc e that the wavel e n g t h of the emitt e d lase r light is 690 nm.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
The diagr a m (not to scale) show s the arr a n g e m e n t of the two convex lense s
in an astro n o m i c al teles co p e in nor m a l adjus t m e n t .
The teles co p e is used to observ e a dista n t star. One of the focal points of
the eyepiec e lens is labelled F E .
(a) On the diag r a m above,
(i) label, with the symbol F E , the position of the othe r focal point of
the eyepiec e lens.
(1)
(ii) label, with the symbol F O , the position of the focal point of the
objective lens that is in betw e e n the two lens e s .
(1)

(iii) cons t r u c t rays to locat e the final image of the star.
(3)
(b) In a particul a r astr o n o m i c a l tele sc o p e , the eyepie c e lens has a powe r

of 40 diopt r e s and the objec tive lens a powe r of 0.80 diopt r e s .
Deter m i n e the angul a r mag nifica tion of the telesc o p e in nor m al
adjus t m e n t .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c) In an astr o n o m i c al telesco p e the objective is ofte n mad e up from a

diver gi n g and a conver gi n g lens, whe r e a s the ape r t u r e of the eyepie c e
lens is usually res t ric t e d suc h tha t only rays close to the princip al axis
are viewed. Stat e the reas o n s for this.
Objective
lens: ................................................................................................
............
Eyepiec e
lens: ................................................................................................
.............
(2)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

57 1 . This ques tion is abou t a diffraction gra ti n g.
(a) A par allel beam of monoc h r o m a t i c light is incide n t nor m ally on a

diffraction grati n g. After passin g thro u g h the gra tin g it is broug h t to a
focus on a scre e n by a lens. The diagr a m shows a few of the slits of
the diffraction gratin g and the pat h of the light that is diffra c t e d at an
angle θ to each slit.
The dist an c e betw e e n the slits is d and the wavele n g t h of the light is
λ.
(i) On the diagr a m , const r u c t a line tha t ena bl e s the path differ e n c e
betw e e n the rays from two adjac e n t slits to be show n. Label the
path dist a n c e L .
(1)
(ii) Use your answ e r to (a)(i) to derive the condition, in ter m s of d

and θ, for ther e to be a maxim u m of inte n si ty at the point P on
the scre e n .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) For a partic ul a r gratin g, the dista n c e betw e e n adjac e n t slits is 2.0 ×
10 –6 m. Dete r mi n e, for light of wavele n g t h 520 nm, the maxim u m
theor e t i c al orde r of diffrac tio n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
57 2 . This ques tion is abou t X-ray diffrac tion.
(a) The diagr a m repr e s e n t s som e of the atom s in two layer s of a cubic
cryst al lattice.
Use the diagr a m to outline how diffra c tio n arise s from the scat t e ri n g
of X-rays by a cryst al.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................

.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(b) X-rays of wavele n g t h 87 pm are scat t e r e d by a cryst al whos e atom s

are arr a n g e d in a cubic lattic e. The smalles t scat t e ri n g angle for
which a maxim u m of the scat t e r e d X-ray is obs e rv e d is 18°. Calcula t e
the spacin g betw e e n adjac e n t atom s in the cryst al.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
57 3 . This ques tion is abou t thin- film inte rf e r e n c e .
The diagr a m (not to scale) repr e s e n t s an expe ri m e n t a l set- up desig n e d to

meas u r e the diam e t e r of a hum a n hair.
A hair is used to sepa r a t e two micros c o p e slide s. A monoc h r o m a t i c bea m of

light is reflect e d onto the two slides by the glass plate. The light is the n
reflect e d from the two slides and tra n s m i t t e d throu g h the glass plat e and is
viewed by the travelling micros c o p e .

(a) Stat e why the light reflect e d from the two micros c o p e slide s prod u c e s
a syst e m of interfe r e n c e fringe s.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) The condition that a brigh t fringe is obs e rv e d in the field of view of
the travelling micros co p e is given by the relation s hi p
 1
 m  λ
2t =  2
whe r e t is the thickn e s s of the air film form e d by the wedg e at the
point wher e the brigh t fringe is obse rv e d , m is an inte g e r and λ is the
wavelen g t h of the incide n t light.
1
Stat e the reas o n for the factor 2 in the relation s hi p.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(c) In the diagr a m , the lengt h of the slides is 5.00 cm. The wavele n g t h of
the monoc h r o m a t i c light is 5.92 × 10 –7 m. Using the travelling
micros c o p e it is observ e d tha t 50 fringe s occupy a lengt h of 0.940 cm.
Show that the diam e t e r of the hair use d to sepa r a t e the slide s is about
80 µm.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

57 4 . This ques tion is abou t a Galilea n tra n sfor m a t i o n and time dilation.
Ben is in a spac e s hi p that is travelling in a str ai g h t- line with const a n t spe e d

v as meas u r e d by Jill who is in a spa c e station.
Ben switch e s on a light puls e that bounc e s vertic ally (as obse rv e d by Ben)
betw e e n two horizon t al mirror s M 1 and M 2 sepa r a t e d by a dista n c e d . At
the insta n t that the mir ro r s are opposit e Jill, the pulse is just leaving the
mirro r M 2 . The spee d of light in air is c .
(a) On the diag r a m , sketc h the pat h of the light pulse betw e e n M 1 and M 2
as obse rv e d by Jill.
(1)
(b) The time for the puls e to travel from M 2 to M 1 as mea s u r e d by Jill is
∆t .
(i) Stat e, accor di n g to Jill, the dista n c e move d by the spac e s hi p in

time ∆t .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Using a Galilean tran sfo r m a t i o n, derive an expr e s s io n for the
lengt h of the pat h of the light betw e e n M 2 and M 1 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c) Stat e, accor di n g to speci al rela tivity, the lengt h of the pat h of the light
betw e e n M 2 and M 1 as me a s u r e d by Jill in ter m s of c and ∆t .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(d) The time for the puls e to travel from M 2 to M 1 as mea s u r e d by Ben is
∆t ′. Use your answ e r s to (b)(i) and (c) to derive a rela tion s hi p betw e e n
∆t and ∆t ′.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(e) Accordi n g to a clock at res t with res p e c t to Jill, a clock in the

space s hi p runs slow by a factor of 2.3. Show that the spe e d v of the
space s hi p is 0.90c.
.................................................................................................................

.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(f) The lengt h of a table in the spac e s hi p is mea s u r e d by Ben to be 1.8 m.
Calcula t e the lengt h of the table as mea s u r e d by Jill.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(g) The ques tion s (e) and (f) introd u c e the conc e p t s of time dilation and
lengt h cont r a c t io n. Discus s how muon dec ay in the atmo s p h e r e
provides expe ri m e n t a l evide n c e for the s e conc e p t s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(5)
(Tot al 16 mark s )

57 5 . This ques tion is abou t pair prod u c tio n and rela tivistic mech a ni c s .
A γ-photon of ener gy 2.46 MeV i s travelling close to the nucle u s of a gold

atom. It conver t s into an elect r o n (e –)–positro n (e + ) pair. Each particle
travels at 45° to the original direc tion of the photo n.
Imme di a t ely after the conve r sio n, the kinetic ene r gi e s of the elect r o n and
positr o n are equ al. The mag nit u d e of the recoil mom e n t u m of the gold
nucle u s is 0.880 MeV c –1 and is in the direc tion of the photo n.
(a) Calcula t e, imme di a t ely afte r the dec ay, the ma g nit u d e of the
mom e n t u m of the elect r o n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)

(b) Calcula t e the value V of the pote n ti al differ e n c e thro u g h which an
elect r o n at rest must be accele r a t e d in orde r to have the sam e
magni t u d e of mom e n t u m as tha t in (a).
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
57 6 . This ques tion is abou t gene r a l relativity.
Bob is stan di n g on the floor of a spac e s hi p and he throw s a ball in a

direction par allel to the floor.
Betw e e n leaving Bob’s hand and landin g on the floor, the ball follows the
path show n.
(a) Stat e and explain whet h e r , from the path followe d by the ball, Bob can
ded uc e that the space s hi p is at res t on the surfa c e of a plane t.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(b) Outline how the concep t of spac e ti m e can be use d to explain the
(i) traject o r y of the ball if the spa c e s hi p is at rest on the surfa c e of a

plane t.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) natu r e of a black hole.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c) Calcula t e the radius that Eart h would have to have in orde r for it to
behave as a black hole. The mass of Eart h is 6.0 × 10 24 kg.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

57 7 . This ques tion is abou t soun d inte nsi ty.
(a) Define
(i) inten si t y of sound .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) soun d inten sit y level .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b) Stat e two ways by which the soun d pre s s u r e at the ear dru m is
amplified befor e reac hi n g the cochle a r fluid.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c) A stud e n t with a hea ri n g proble m can hea r sound s clea rly whe n the
sound intensity level is 65 dB or high e r . In a large lectu r e hall, at a
dista n c e of 25 m from the lectu r e r , the sound inte n si ty level is 55 dB.
Deter m i n e the maxim u m dista n c e from the lectu r e r at which the

stud e n t can hea r clearly. The inte n si ty of sound a dista n c e d from a
P
2
sourc e of powe r P is given by I = 4πd .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................

.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

(a) Define half- value thickn e s s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) The half- value thickn e s s in tiss ue for X-rays of a specific ene r gy is
3.50 mm. Deter m i n e the fraction of the incide n t inten sity of X-rays
that has bee n tran s m i t t e d throu g h tiss ue of thickn e s s 6.00 mm.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c) For X-rays of high e r ener gy tha n thos e in (b), the half- value thickn e s s
is grea t e r than 3.50 mm. Stat e and explain the effect, if any, of this
chan g e on your answ e r in (b).
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(d) X-ray imag e s are often blur r e d des pit e the patie n t re m a i ni n g

station a r y during expos u r e .
(i) Stat e on e possible physic al mec h a ni s m for the blur rin g of an X-

ray imag e.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) For the physical mec h a ni s m stat e d in (d)(i) sugg e s t how X-ray
imag es can be mad e mor e distinc t.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(e) The expos u r e time of photo g r a p h i c film to X-rays is longe r than that
for visible light. The expos u r e time for X-rays may be red uc e d with the
use of enh a n c e m e n t tech ni q u e s , such as that of an inte nsifying scre e n.
Outline how an intensifying scr e e n redu c e s the expos u r e time.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

57 9 . This ques tion is abou t laser s in medicin e.
In a proce d u r e called pulse oxime t ry, lase r s are use d to mea s u r e the
perc e n t a g e of oxygen in the blood. Outline how laser s are use d in this
proce d u r e .
.........................................................................................................................
........................
.........................................................................................................................
........................
.........................................................................................................................
........................
.........................................................................................................................
........................
.........................................................................................................................
........................
.........................................................................................................................
........................
(Tota l 3 mark s )
58 0 . This ques tion is abou t dosim et r y.
(a) Disting ui s h betw e e n the ter m s abso r b e d dos e and dos e equivale n t.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) A bet a sour c e is inject e d into a tum ou r in a patie n t . The following dat a
are availabl e.
Mass of tumo u r = 65 g
Activity of sour c e = 4.8 × 10 8 Bq
Averag e ene r gy of emitt e d elect r o n s = 1.2
MeV

Quality factor of bet a radia tion = 1.0

(i) Dete r mi n e the dose equivale n t over a period of fiftee n minut e s
after the beta sour c e is inject e d into the tumo u r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(ii) Stat e on e reas o n why the dose equivale n t det e r m i n e d in (b)(i) is

only appr oxi m a t e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) Stat e on e reas o n why patie n t s might be willing to subjec t

them s elve s to such a conside r a b l e amou n t of radia tio n as
det e r m i n e d in (b)(i).
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

58 1 . This ques tion is abou t lepton s and meson s .
(a) Lepto n s are a class of elem e n t a r y particle s and eac h lepton has its
own antip a r ti cl e. Stat e wha t is mea n t by an
(i) elem e n t a r y particle.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) antip a r t i cl e of a lepton.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b) The elect r o n is a lepton and its antip a r t i cl e is the positro n. The
following reaction can take plac e betw e e n an elect r o n and positro n.
e– + e+ → γ + γ
Sket ch the Feyn m a n diagr a m for this reac tion and identify on your
diagr a m any virtual particl e s.
(3)
(c) Unlike lepton s , the π + meso n is not an elem e n t a r y particle. Sta t e the
(i) quar k s truct u r e of the π + meso n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) reas o n why the following rea c tio n does not occur.
ρ+ + ρ+ → ρ+ + π +
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(d) Stat e the Pauli exclusion principle.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(e) Explain, with refer e n c e to your ans w e r to (d), why qua r k s are
assig n e d the prope r t y of colour.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(f) The pion was sugg e s t e d to be the media ti n g particle of the stron g
inter a c ti o n betw e e n nucleon s . Given that the rang e of the stron g
nuclea r inter a c tio n betw e e n nucleo n s is about 10 –15 m, show tha t the
rest mas s of the pion is about 100 MeV c –2 .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 13 mark s )

58 2 . This ques tion is abou t particle acc el e r a t o r s .
(a) The diagr a m (not to scale) rep r e s e n t s a view from above of the
esse n ti al featu r e s of a cyclotr o n.
The positive par ticles emitt e d by the sour c e , travel in an anticlock wis e
directio n arou n d the Ds.
(i) Stat e the direction of the mag n e ti c field tha t is use d in this
cyclot ro n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) On the diagr a m , draw the pat h of a positive particle betw e e n the
sour c e and the det ec t o r .
(1)

(iii) Explain why an alter n a ti n g pote n ti al of a partic ul a r frequ e n c y is
applied to the Ds as show n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(b) Outline why much highe r ene r gi e s can be achieve d in a synch r o t r o n

than in a cyclotr o n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c) In a particul a r expe ri m e n t , proton s in a synch r o t r o n are accel e r a t e d

to an ene r gy of 2.0 GeV. Calcula t e the kinetic ene r gy of the proton s in
GeV.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(d) In the Large Had r o n Collider , proto n s can be accel e r a t e d to ene r gi e s
of 7 TeV. Deduc e whet h e r this value of ene r gy is sufficie nt to mimic
the tem p e r a t u r e of the unive r s e , 10 32 K, shor tly afte r the Big Bang.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 12 mark s )
58 3 . This ques tion is abou t the stan d a r d model.
(a) Stat e what is mea n t by the sta n d a r d model.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) Use the cons e r v a ti o n of lepton num b e r and cha r g e to dedu c e the
nat u r e of the par ticle x in the following rea c tion.
νe + μ– → e – + x
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(c) Stat e what is mea n t by dee p inelas tic scatt e r i n g.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(d) Outline how deep inelas tic scat t e ri n g expe ri m e n t s provide evide n c e
for asym p t o ti c freedo m .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
58 4 . A volum e is mea s u r e d to be 52 mm 3 . This volum e in m 3 is
A. 5.2 × 10 3 m 3 .
B. 5.2 × 10 1 m 3 .
C. 5.2 × 10 –1 m 3 .
D. 5.2 × 10 –8 m 3 .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

58 5 . The mas s e s and weight s of differ e n t object s are inde p e n d e n t ly me a s u r e d .
The gra p h is a plot of weight vers u s mas s that includ e s erro r bars.
These experi m e n t al res ult s sugg e s t tha t the
A. mea s u r e m e n t s show a significa n t syste m a t i c erro r but small ran do m

erro r.
B. mea s u r e m e n t s show a significa n t rand o m erro r but small syste m a t i c

erro r.
C. mea s u r e m e n t s are preci s e but not acc u r a t e .
D. weight of an object is propo r ti o n al to its mas s.

(Tot al 1 mar k )
58 6 . A skydive r jumpe d out of an airpla n e . On reac hi n g a ter mi n a l spe e d of 60 m

s –1 , she open e d her par a c h u t e . Which of the following desc ri b e s her motion
after openin g her par a c h u t e ?
A. She went upwa r d s for a shor t time, befor e falling to Eart h at a spe e d
of 60 m s –1 .
B. She contin u e d downw a r d s at 60 m s –1 , but hit the grou n d with less

force.
C. She contin u e d to fall but reac h e d a new ter mi n al spe e d of less than 60
m s –1 .
D. She went upwa r d s for a shor t time, befor e falling to Eart h at a spe e d
of less than 60 m s –1 .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

58 7 . The gra p h is a spee d vers u s time gra p h for an objec t tha t is moving in a
str ai g h t line.
The dista n c e travelled by the objec t durin g the first 4.0 secon d s is
A. 80 m.
B. 40 m.
C. 20 m.
D. 5 m.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

58 8 . The diagr a m shows a girl att e m p ti n g (but failing) to lift a heavy suitc a s e of
weigh t W. The mag ni t u d e of the vertic al upw a r d s pull of the girl on the
suitca s e is P and the mag nit u d e of the vertic al reac tio n of the floor on the
suitca s e is R .
Which equa tio n corr e c tly relat e s W , P and R ?
A. W = P+ R
B. W > P+ R
C. W < P+ R
D. W = P= R
(Tot al 1 mar k )
58 9 . Objects A and B collide toget h e r . They end up joined toge t h e r and

station a r y. During the collision, a force + F is exert e d on object A by objec t
B. Accor din g to New to n’s third law, the r e will also be a force of
A. –F acting on object B .
B. –F acting on object A .
C. + F acting on object B .
D. + F acting on object A .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

59 0 . A lift (elevato r ) is oper a t e d by an elect ric motor. It moves betw e e n the 10th
floor and the 2nd floor at a const a n t spee d. One main ene r gy
tran sfor m a t i o n during this journ e y is
A. gravit atio n al poten ti al ene r gy → kinetic ene r gy.
B. elect ric al ener gy → kinetic ene r gy.
C. kinetic ener gy → ther m a l ene r gy.
D. elect ric al ener gy → ther m a l ene r gy.

(Tot al 1 mar k )
59 1 . A com m u ni c a ti o n s satellit e is moving at a cons t a n t spee d in a circul a r orbit

arou n d Eart h. At any given insta n t in time, the res ult a n t force on the
satellite is
A. zero.
B. equal to the gravit a tion al force on the satellit e.
C. equal to the vector sum of the gravit a tio n a l force on the satellite and
the cent ri p e t a l force.
D. equal to the force exer t e d by the sat ellite’s rocke t s .

(Tot al 1 mar k )
59 2 . A tem p e r a t u r e of 23 K is equival e n t to a tem p e r a t u r e of
A. –300 °C.
B. –250 °C.
C. +2 5 0 °C.
D. +3 0 0 °C.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

59 3 . The ratio
t h e r m acla p a c itoyf a s a m p leo f c op p e r

s p e c ifich e a tc a p a c itof
y copp e r
A. does not have any unit.
B. has unit J kg –1 K–1 .
C. has unit J kg –1 .
D. has unit kg.

(Tot al 1 mar k )
59 4 . In the kinetic model of an ideal gas, it is assu m e d tha t
A. the forces betw e e n the molec ul e s of the gas and the cont ai n e r are
always zero.
B. the inter m ol e c ul a r pot en ti al ene r gy of the molec ul e s of the gas is

const a n t .
C. the kinetic ener gy of a given molec ul e of the gas is const a n t .
D. the mom e n t u m of a given molec ul e of the gas is const a n t .

(Tot al 1 mar k )

59 5 . Which gra p h corr e c tly shows how the accele r a ti o n, a of a particl e
unde r g oi n g SHM varies with its displac e m e n t , x from its equilibriu m
position?
(Tot al 1 mar k )

59 6 . A mas s on the end of a horizon t al sprin g is displa c e d from its equilibri u m
position by a dista n c e A and rele a s e d . Its subs e q u e n t oscillation s have total
ene r gy E and time period T.
An identical mas s is attac h e d to an identic al sprin g. The maxim u m

displac e m e n t is 2 A . Assumin g this sprin g obeys Hooke’s law, which of the
following gives the corr ec t time period and total ene r gy?
New ti m e
New en e r g y
peri o d
A. T 4E
B. T 2E
C. 2T 4E
D. 2T 2E
(Tot al 1 mar k )
59 7 . In which of the following regions of the elect r o m a g n e t i c spec t r u m is

radi ation of wavele n g t h 600 nm locat e d ?
A. microw av e s
B. radio waves
C. visible light
D. X-rays
(Tot al 1 mar k )

59 8 . What is the best esti m a t e for the refra c tiv e index of a mediu m in which
light travels at a spee d of 2.7 × 10 8 m s –1 ?
A. 0.9
B. 1.0
C. 1.1
D. 2.7
(Tot al 1 mar k )
59 9 . Two rect a n g ul a r blocks, X and Y, of the sa m e mat e ri al have differ e n t

dime n sio n s but the sam e over all resist a n c e . Which of the following
equ a tio n s is corr ec t ?
A. resistivity of X × lengt h of X = resistivity of Y × lengt h of Y
le n g t hof X le n g t ho f Y

B. c r os s e c t io n a lr e ao f X c r o s s e c t io n a lr e ao f Y
C. resistivity of X × cross section a l are a of X = resistivity of Y × cross

section al area of Y
le n g t hof X le n g t hof Y

D. c r os s e c t io n a lr e ao f Y c r o s ss e c t io n a lr e ao f X
(Tot al 1 mar k )

60 0 . Two 6 Ω resis to r s are conn e c t e d in serie s with a 6 V cell. A stud e n t
inc orr e c t l y conne c t s an am m e t e r and a voltm e t e r as show n below.
The readi n g s on the am m e t e r and on the voltm e t e r are
Am m e t e r Volt m e t e r
readi n g / A read i n g / V
A. 0.0 0.0
B. 0.0 6.0
C. 1.0 0.0
D. 1.0 6.0
(Tot al 1 mar k )

60 1 . The diagr a m shows a pote n ti al divide r circuit.
In orde r to incre a s e the readi n g on the voltm e t e r the
A. tem p e r a t u r e of R should be incr e a s e d .
B. tem p e r a t u r e of R should be decr e a s e d .
C. light intensity on R should be incr e a s e d .
D. light intensity on R should be decr e a s e d .

(Tot al 1 mar k )

60 2 . The mas s of Eart h is M E , its radius is R E and the mag nit u d e of the
gravit a tion al field stre n g t h at the surfa c e of Eart h is g . The univer s a l
g
gravit a tion al cons t a n t is G. The ratio G is equal to
ME
A. R E2
R E2
B. ME
C. M ER E
D. 1
(Tot al 1 mar k )
60 3 . Which diagr a m best repr e s e n t s the elect ric field due to a nega tively
char g e d cond u c ti n g sphe r e ?
(Tot al 1 mar k )

60 4 . A point mas s carrie s a positive cha r g e + Q and is at rest in a ma gn e t i c field.
The field is in the direction show n.
The mag n e t i c force acting on the cha r g e is
A. from left to right in the plan e of the page .
B. from top to botto m in the plan e of the page .
C. into the plane of the pag e.
D. zero.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
60 5 . The num b e r of neut r o n s and the num b e r of proto n s in a nucle u s of an atom

235
of the isotop e of urani u m 9 2 U are
Ne u t r o n s Prot o n s
A. 92 143
B. 143 92
C. 235 92
D. 92 235
(Tot al 1 mar k )

60 6 . A sam pl e cont ai n s an amou n t of radioa c tive mat e ri a l with a half- life of 3.5
days. After 2 weeks the fraction of the radioa c tiv e mat e ri al rem ai ni n g is
A. 94 %.
B. 25 %.
C. 6 %.
D. 0 %.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
60 7 . The rest mas s of a proto n is 938 MeV c –2 . The ene r gy of a proton at res t is
A. 9.38 J.
B. 9.38 × 10 8 × (3 ×1 0 8 ) 2 J.
C. 9.38 × 10 8 eV.
D. 9.38 × 10 8 × (3 × 10 8 ) 2 eV.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
60 8 . The efficiency of a mode r n natu r a l gas powe r station is appr oxi m a t e l y
A. 10 %.
B. 50 %.
C. 5 %.
D. 90 %.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

y @60 9 . The ene r gy sourc e that cur r e n tly provide s the gre a t e s t propo r tio n of
the world’s total ener gy dem a n d is
A. coal.
B. oil.
C. nat u r al gas.
D. urani u m .
(Tot al 1 mar k )
61 0 . In a nuclea r powe r station, ura ni u m is use d as the ene r gy sour c e and

plutoni u m- 239 is produ c e d .
Which of the following is true?
A. Plutoni u m- 239 is produ c e d by nucle a r fusion.
B. A mode r a t o r is used to abso r b plutoni u m- 239.
C. Cont r ol rods are used to slow down pluto ni u m- 239.
D. Plutoni u m- 239 can be use d as a fuel in anot h e r type of nucle a r

reac t o r .
(Tot al 1 mar k )
61 1 . One dis a d v a n t a g e of using photovolt aic cells to powe r a dom e s tic wat e r
heat e r is that
A. solar ene r gy is a ren e w a b l e sourc e of ene r gy.
B. the powe r radiat e d by the Sun varies significa n tly depe n di n g on the
weat h e r .
C. a large are a of photovolt aic cells would be nee d e d .
D. photovolt aic cells cont ai n CFCs, which cont ri b u t e to the gre e n h o u s e

effect.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

61 2 . Gree n h o u s e gas es
A. reflect infrar e d radiation but absor b ultr aviole t radia tion.
B. reflect ultr aviolet radia tio n but absor b infra r e d radia tion.
C. tran s m i t infra r e d radiation but absor b ultraviole t radia tion.
D. tran s m i t ultr aviolet radiation but absor b infra r e d radia tion.

(Tot al 1 mar k )
61 3 . The rat e of global war mi n g might be redu c e d by
A. replaci n g the use of coal and oil with nat u r a l gas.
B. a redu c tio n in the Eart h’s albe do.
C. a redu c tio n in car bo n fixation.
D. an incr e a s e in defor e s t a t io n.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

61 4 . This ques tion is abou t elect ri ca l resist a n c e of the met al mer c u r y.
The resist a n c e R of a sam pl e of me rc u r y was mea s u r e d as a function of the

tem p e r a t u r e T of the sam pl e. The sam pl e was cooled and dat a points wer e
take n at tem p e r a t u r e interval s of 0.2 K. The unc e r t a i n ti e s in R and T are
too small to be show n on the gra p h.
The hypot h e s i s is that resist a n c e is propo r tio n a l to absolut e tem p e r a t u r e

for tem p e r a t u r e s grea t e r than 4.5 K.
(a) (i) Sugg e s t whet h e r the dat a suppo r t s the hypot h e s i s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Draw a line of best fit throu g h the dat a.

(2)
(b) Stat e the value of R for which the rat e of cha n g e of resist a n c e of the
sam pl e with tem p e r a t u r e is least.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(c) At a tem p e r a t u r e T C the resist a n c e sudd e nly beco m e s zero.
(i) Use the grap h to dete r m i n e the possibl e rang e of the

tem p e r a t u r e T C .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Stat e, to the corr e c t num b e r of signific a n t figur e s , the value of T C

and its unce r t ai n t y.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Outline how the tem p e r a t u r e T C could be me a s u r e d more

precis ely.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(d) Outline two reas o n s why you could not use the dat a to det e r m i n e an
accu r a t e value for R at room tem p e r a t u r e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................

.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

61 5 . This ques tion is abou t impuls e.
(a) A net force of magni t u d e F acts on a body. Define the impuls e I of the
force.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) A ball of mas s 0.075 0 kg is travelling horizont a lly with a spe e d of 2.20
m s –1 . It strike s a vertical wall and rebo u n d s horizon t ally.
Due to the collision with the wall, 20 % of the ball’s initial kinetic
ener gy is dissip a t e d .
(i) Show that the ball rebou n d s from the wall with a spee d of 1.97 m
s –1 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Show that the impuls e given to the ball by the wall is 0.313 N s.
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) The ball strikes the wall at time t = 0 and leave s the wall at time t = T .
The sketc h gra p h shows how the forc e F that the wall exert s on the
ball is assu m e d to vary with time t .
The time T is meas u r e d elect r o ni c ally to equ al 0.089 4 s.
Use the impuls e given in (b)(ii) to estim a t e the aver a g e value of F.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tota l 9 mark s )
61 6 . This ques tion is abou t ener gy tra n sf e r s .
(a) Ener gy degr a d a t i o n takes plac e in the ene r gy tra n sfo r m a t i o n s which
occur in the gene r a t i o n of elect ric al powe r. Explain wha t is mea n t in
this context by ener gy degr a d a t i o n .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

Som e of the ene r gy tran sfo r m a t i o n s that take plac e in a coal- fired powe r
station are repr e s e n t e d by the Sank ey diag r a m below.
(b) (i) Stat e what is repr e s e n t e d by the width w .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) At the thre e places ma rk e d A, B and C on the diagr a m , ene r gy is

degr a d e d .
Identify the proce s s by which the ene r gy is degr a d e d in eac h of
the places.
A: .....................................................................................................
.................
.........................................................................................................
..................
B: .....................................................................................................
.................
.........................................................................................................
..................
C: .....................................................................................................
.................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

61 7 . This ques tion is abou t gree n h o u s e effect
(a) The grap h shows part of the absor p ti o n spec t r u m of nitrog e n oxide
(N 2 O) in which the intensity of absor b e d radia tio n A is plott e d agains t
frequ e n c y f.
(i) Stat e the region of the elect r o m a g n e t i c spec t r u m to which the

reson a n t frequ e n cy of nitrog e n oxide belong s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Using your ans w e r to (a)(i), explain why nitrog e n oxide is

classified as a gree n h o u s e gas.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................

..................
(2)

(b) Define emis si vit y and albedo .
Emissivity: ...............................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Albedo: ....................................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c) The diagr a m shows a simple ene r gy bala nc e climat e model in which
the atmo s p h e r e and the surfa c e of Eart h are two bodie s eac h at
const a n t tem p e r a t u r e . The surfa c e of the Eart h rec eive s both solar
radiatio n and radiation emitt e d from the atmo s p h e r e . Assum e tha t the
Eart h’s surfac e beh av e s as a black body.
The following data are availa ble for this model.
aver a g e tem p e r a t u r e of the atmo s p h e r e of Eart h = 242 K

emissivity, e of the atmos p h e r e of Eart h = 0.720
aver a g e albed o, α of the atm os p h e r e of Eart h = 0.280
solar inten sity at top of atmo s p h e r e = 344 W
m –2
aver a g e tem p e r a t u r e of the surfa c e of Eart h = 288 K

Use the data to show that the
(i) powe r radia t e d per unit are a of the atmo s p h e r e is 140 W m –2 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) solar powe r absor b e d per unit are a at the surfa c e of the Eart h is
248 W m –2 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(d) It is hypot h e s iz e d that, if the produ c tio n of gre e n h o u s e gas e s wer e to

stay at its pres e n t level the n the tem p e r a t u r e of the Ear t h’s
atmo s p h e r e would event u a lly rise by 6.0 K.
Calcula t e the powe r per unit are a that would then be
(i) radi at e d by the atmos p h e r e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) abso r b e d by the Eart h’s surfa c e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(e) Estim a t e , using your ans w e r to (d)(ii), the incr e a s e in tem p e r a t u r e of
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 14 mark s )
61 8 . This ques tion is abou t motion of a ball falling in oil.
(a) Disting ui s h betw e e n aver a g e spee d and insta n t a n e o u s spe e d.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) A small steel ball of mass M is dropp e d from rest into a long vertic al
tube that cont ain s oil.
The sketc h gra p h shows how the spe e d v of the ball varies with time t .
Explain how you would use the gra p h to find the aver a g e spe e d of the
ball betw e e n t = 0 and t = t 1 .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c) The gradi e n t of the grap h at t = t 1 is k . Deduc e an expr e s s io n in ter m s

of k , M and g , the accel e r a t io n of free fall, for the ma g nit u d e of the
friction al force F acting on the ball at t = t 1 .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................

.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(d) Stat e and explain the mag nit u d e of the friction al force acting on the
ball at t = t 2 .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 11 mark s )
61 9 . This ques tion is abou t simple har m o ni c motion and wave s.
(a) A particle of mas s m that is att a c h e d to a light spring is execu ti n g

simple har m o ni c motion in a hori z o n t a l dire c t i o n .
Stat e the condition relati n g to the net force acting on the particle that
is neces s a r y for it to execut e simple har m o ni c motion.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) The grap h shows how the kine tic ene r gy E K of the par ticle in (a) varies
with the displac e m e n t x of the par ticle from equilibri u m .
(i) Using the axes above, sket c h a gra p h to show how the pote n ti al
ene r gy of the particle varie s with the displa c e m e n t x .
(2)
(ii) The mas s of the par ticle is 0.30 kg. Use dat a from the gra p h to
show that the frequ e n c y f of oscillation of the par ticle is 2.0 Hz.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(c) The par ticles of a mediu m M 1 throu g h which a tra n sv e r s e wave is
travelling, oscillat e with the sam e frequ e n c y and amplit u d e as that of
the par ticle in (b).
(i) Describ e, with refer e n c e to the prop a g a t i o n of ene r gy thro u g h

the mediu m , what is me a n t by a tran s v e r s e wave.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) The spee d of the wave is 0.80 m s –1 . Calcula t e the wavele n g t h of

the wave.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(d) The diagr a m shows wavefro n t s of the waves in (c) incide n t on a

boun d a r y XY betw e e n mediu m M 1 and anot h e r mediu m M 2 .

The angle betw e e n the nor m a l, and the dire c tion of travel of the
wavefro n t s is 30°.

(i) The spee d of the wave in M 1 is 0.80 m s –1 . The spe e d of the
waves in M 2 is
1.2 m s –1 .
Calculat e the angle betw e e n the dire c tion of travel of the
wavefro n t s in M 2 and the nor m al.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) On the diagr a m , sket c h the wavefro n t s in M 2 .

(1)
(Tot al 15 mark s )
62 0 . This ques tion is abou t decay of radiu m- 226.
(a) A nucleu s of the isotop e radiu m- 226 (Ra) unde r g o e s α-dec ay with a
half- life of
1.6 × 10 3 yr to form a nucle u s of rado n (Rn).
Define the ter m s isotop e and half- life .
Isotop e: ...................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Half-
life: ..................................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................

.....................
(2)

(b) Using the grid below, sketc h a gra p h to show how the activity A of a
sam pl e of radiu m- 226 (Ra) would be expe c t e d to vary with time t over
a period of about 5.0 × 10 3 yr.
The activity of the sam pl e at time t = 0 is A 0 .
(3)
(c) The nucle a r reaction equa tio n for the dec ay of radiu m- 226 (Ra) may
be writt e n as
226
8 8 Ra Rn α
(i) Stat e the value of the proto n num b e r and neut r o n num b e r of the
isotop e of rado n (Rn).
Proto n
num b e r : ..................................................................................
...............
Neut r o n
num b e r : ..................................................................................
.............
(1)

(ii) Outline why the binding ene r gy of Ra is less tha n that of Rn.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(d) The following data are availa ble.
mas s of Ra = 226.02 5 4 u
mas s of Rn = 222.01 7 5 u
mas s of α = 4.002 6 u
Show that the ene r gy rele a s e d in the decay of a Ra nucle u s is 4.94

MeV.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
62 1 . This ques tion is abou t inter n al ene r gy, hea t and ideal gas e s .
(a) The inter n al ene r gy of a piec e of coppe r is incr e a s e d by hea tin g.
(i) Explain what is mea n t, in this cont ext, by inte r n a l ene r gy and
heati n g.
Inte r n al
ener gy: ....................................................................................
.............

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
Heatin g: ..........................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) The piece of copp e r has mass 0.25 kg. The incre a s e in inte r n a l
ene r gy of the coppe r is 1.2 × 10 3 J and its incr e a s e in
tem p e r a t u r e is 20 K. Estim a t e the specific heat capa city of
coppe r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b) An ideal gas is kept in a cylinde r by a piston tha t is free to move. The
gas is heat e d such that its inte r n a l ene r gy incr e a s e s and the pres s u r e
rem ai n s const a n t . Use the molec ul a r model of ideal gase s to explain
(i) the incr e a s e in inter n a l ene r gy.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) how the pres s u r e rem ai n s cons t a n t .
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

62 2 . This ques tion is abou t elect ri c fields and elect ri c circuits.
(a) Two par allel, char g e d met al plate s A and B are in a vacuu m .
At a par ticul a r insta n t an elect r o n is at point P.
On the diag r a m , draw
(i) the elect ric field patt e r n due to the plate s .

(3)
(ii) an arrow to repr e s e n t the dire c tion of the force on the elect r o n at
P.
(1)
(b) The accele r a ti o n of the elect r o n at P is 8.8 × 10 14 m s –2 . Dete r m i n e

the mag nit u d e of the elect ric field str e n g t h at the point P.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c) The elect ric pote n ti al ener gy of the elect r o n cha n g e s by 1.9 × 10 –17 J
as it moves from one plat e to the othe r. Show tha t the pote n ti al

differ e n c e betw e e n the plate s is 120 V.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(d) A resis to r R and a filam e n t lamp L are conne c t e d in serie s with a

batt e r y. The batt e r y has an emf of 12 V and inte r n a l resis t a n c e 4.0 Ω.
The poten t i al differ e n c e acros s the filam e n t of the lamp is 3.0 V and
the cur r e n t in the filam e n t is 0.25 A.
(i) Define emf and desc ri b e the conc e p t of inte r n a l resis t a n c e .
emf:
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
Inte r n al resist a n c e :
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Calculat e the total powe r supplie d by the batt e r y.
.........................................................................................................

..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) Calculat e the powe r dissip a t e d in the exte r n a l circuit.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iv) Dete r mi n e the resist a n c e of the resisto r R.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 16 mark s )
62 3 . This ques tion is abou t vision and resolution.
(a) Comp a r e scotopic with photopic vision.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

(2)

(b) The grap h shows the variation with wavele n g t h λ of the sensitivity I,
of the rod and the cone cells of a hum a n eye.
A red piece of pape r and a blue piece of pape r are both viewe d in very
low inten si ty light.
Each piece of pap e r reflec t s the sam e inte nsi ty of light.
With refer e n c e to the grap h, sta t e and explain which one of the two
pieces of pap e r will be mor e clearly visible.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(c) The diam e t e r of the pupil of a hum a n eye is 1.5 mm.
(i) Calculat e the minim u m angul a r sepa r a ti o n of two point s tha t can
be resolved by the hum a n eye for light of wavele n g t h 680 nm.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Two star s , the sam e dista n c e from Eart h, are sepa r a t e d by a
dist a n c e of
4.0 × 10 13 m.
Both star s emit light of wavele n g t h 680 nm.
The two star s are just resolve d by an obse rv e r on Eart h. Estim a t e

the dista n c e to the two sta r s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) A ray of light is inciden t on the surfac e of a lake. The angle of
inciden c e is φ.
The reflect e d light is comple t e ly polariz e d horizont a lly.

The refra ctive index of wate r is n .
(i) On the diagr a m above draw the refr a c t e d ray.

(1)
(ii) Use the diagr a m to deduc e the relation s hi p betw e e n φ and n .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(iii) The refr ac tive index of the wat e r is 1.3. Calcula t e the value of φ.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

(1)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

(a) Stat e what is mea n t by the Dopple r effect.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) Ultra s o u n d of frequ e n c y 5.2 MHz is direc t e d from a station a r y sourc e

towar d s red blood cells in an art e r y. A simplified diag r a m is show n
below in which the blood cells are travelling in the sam e direc tion.
The ultr a s o u n d is reflect e d from the cells and is rec eive d back at the
sourc e.
The meas u r e d frequ e n cy shift is 3.5 kHz. The spe e d of ultr a s o u n d in
blood is
Δf 2v

c = 1.5 × 10 3 m s –1 . The freq u e n c y shift is det e r m i n e d from f c .
(i) Stat e the significan c e of the factor of 2 in the form ul a for the
frequ e n c y shift.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Dete r mi n e the spee d of the red blood cells.
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) Stat e two reas o n s why, in prac tic e, the frequ e n c y shift will have
a rang e of values.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
(a) In the photo el ec t r i c effect, elect r o n s are emitt e d from a met allic
surfac e only if the wavele n g t h of the light incide n t on the surfa c e is
below a cert ai n value called the thr e s h ol d wavele n g t h .
Explain this obse rv a tio n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(b) A monoch r o m a t i c sour c e of powe r 3.0 W emits light of wavele n g t h

4.60 × 10 –7 m. All of the light is incide n t on a met al surfa c e and
caus e s elect r o n s to be emitt e d at a rat e of
4.0 × 10 10 s –1 . The thre s h ol d wavele n g t h of the met al is 5.50 × 10 –7 m.
Calcula t e the

(i) photo el e c t r i c cur r e n t .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) work function of the met al.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) the ratio of the rate of elect r o n emission to the rat e at which the
photo n s are incide n t on the met al.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(c) Light from a differ e n t sour c e is incide n t on the met al in (b). The new
sourc e has power 6.0 W and emits light of wavele n g t h 9.00 × 10 –7 m.
Stat e the effect of thes e cha n g e s , if any, on your ans w e r to (b)(i).
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

62 7 . This ques tion is abou t qua n t u m aspe c t s of the elect r o n .
The gra p h shows the variation with dist a n c e x of the wavefu n c tio n Ψ of an
elect r o n at a par tic ul a r inst a n t of time. The elect r o n is confine d within a
region of lengt h 2.0 × 10 –10 m.
(a) Stat e what is mea n t by the wavefun c tio n of an elec t r o n .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) Using data from the grap h esti m a t e , for this elect r o n ,
(i) its mom e n t u m .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

(2)

(ii) the unce r t a i n t y in its mom e n t u m .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
62 8 . This ques tion is abou t nuclea r ene r gy levels and radioa c tive dec ay.
The diagr a m shows som e of the nucle a r ene r gy levels of the boron isotop e
12 12
5 B and the car bo n isotop e 6 C . Differe n c e s in ene r gy betw e e n the levels
are indicat e d on the diagr a m . A partic ul a r bet a dec ay of boron and a

gam m a decay of car bo n are ma rk e d on the diagr a m .
(a) Calcula t e the wavel en g t h of the photon emitt e d in the gam m a dec ay.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................

.....................
(2)

(b) Calcula t e the maxim u m kinetic ene r gy of the elect r o n emitt e d in the
beta decay indicat e d.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(c) Explain why the elect r o n s emitt e d in the indic at e d beta decay of boron
do not always have the kinetic ene r gy calcul a t e d in (b).
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
62 9 . This ques tion is abou t the com p a c t disc (CD).
The diagr a m shows light from a laser tha t is incide n t on a CD.
The reflect e d light is used to rea d the dat a stor e d on the CD. The dept h of
the pits is d and the wavelen g t h of the light is λ.

(a) Explain the relation s hi p betw e e n λ and d that allows the lase r bea m to
dete c t the edge of a pit.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(b) The wavele n g t h of the lase r light is 640 nm. Calcula t e the pit dept h d .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(c) The diagr a m shows a serie s of pits on one par t of the spiral tra ck of an
audio CD.
The aver a g e lengt h of one pit and the aver a g e lengt h of one land are
both 1900 nm.
Infor m a t io n is stor e d on the CD with a sam pling frequ e n c y of 44.1

kHz. Each sam pl e consist s of two 16 bit bina ry num b e r s .
(i) The total lengt h of the spiral on the CD is appr oxi m a t e ly 5 km.
On aver a g e the num b e r of bits stor e d on a CD is equ al to four
times the num b e r of pits. Show that the stor a g e capa ci ty of this
CD is app roxi m a t e ly 5 × 10 9 bits.

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Using the answ e r to (c)(i) calcula t e the playing time of this audio
CD.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(d) Descri b e on e adva n t a g e , othe r than amou n t of dat a, of storin g music

on a CD rat h e r than on a vinyl LP recor d.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
Diagr a m 1 shows a non- inver ti n g amplifie r circuit.
Dia gr a m 1

(a) Sugg e s t why the amplifier is refe r r e d to as non- inverti n g.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) The input voltag e for the amplifier in (a) is V in = 2.0 mV.
Calcula t e
(i) the gain G of the amplifier.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) the outpu t voltag e V out .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(c) Diagr a m 2 show s a partic ul a r non- invertin g amplifier.
Dia gr a m 2
Explain, in ter m s of the prop e r ti e s of an op- amp, why the gain of this
non- inver tin g amplifier is equal to 1.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(d) Diagr a m 3 show s a circuit in which the bat t e r y has an emf of 6.0 V
and negligibl e inter n al resis t a n c e . Two 2.0 M Ω resis to r s are
conn e c t e d in series to the batt e r y.
Dia gr a m 3
(i) Stat e the value of the pote n ti al differ e n c e betw e e n points A and
B.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) A voltm e t e r of resist a n c e 100 k Ω is use d to mea s u r e the pot e n ti al

differ e n c e acros s points A and B.
Stat e why the readi n g on the voltm e t e r is not equ al to the value
stat e d in (d)(i).
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) The circuit in diagr a m 3 is modifie d to includ e the circuit show n
in diag r a m 2.
Dia g r a m 4
Explain why the voltm e t e r rea d s the value of the pote n t i al

differ e n c e as stat e d in (d)(i).
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

63 1 . This ques tion is abou t simult a n e i ty.
Albert is at rest with res p e c t to the grou n d. Her m a n n is in a car ri a g e that is

moving with spee d v relative to Albert in the dire c tion show n. Two flash e s
of light are emitt e d from the back and the front of the car ri a g e . Accordin g
to Her m a n n’ s clock they arrive at Her m a n n’ s position simult a n e o u s ly.
Explain with refer e n c e to the conc e p t of prope r time, why the arrival of the
light puls es at Her m a n n will also be simult a n e o u s to Albert.
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(Tota l 3 mark s )

A space c r af t leaves Eart h at a spe e d of 0.80c as me a s u r e d by an obse rv e r

on Eart h. It head s towar d s , and contin u e s beyond, a dista n t plan e t . The
plane t is 52 light years away from Eart h as me a s u r e d by an obs e rv e r on
Eart h.
When the spac e c r a f t leaves Eart h, Amand a , one of the astr o n a u t s in the
spac e c r a f t , is 20 year s old.
5
The Loren tz gam m a factor for a spe e d of 0.80c is γ = 3 .
(a) Calcula t e
(i) the time take n for the journ ey to the plane t as mea s u r e d by an
obse rv e r on Eart h.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) the dista n c e betw e e n the Eart h and the plan e t, as mea s u r e d by
Amand a .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) Amand a’s age as the spac e c r a f t goes past the plan e t, accor di n g
to Amand a.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) As the spac ec r af t goes pas t the plane t Amand a sends a radio signal to
Eart h.
Calcula t e, as meas u r e d by the spac e c r a f t obse rv e r s , the time it take s
for the signal to arrive at Eart h.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
The diagr a m below show s an inte r a c t io n vert ex of the weak inte r a c t io n.
(a) (i) Draw a Feyn m a n diagr a m , for the proc e s s e – + e + → µ –

+ µ + using the infor m a ti o n given in the diag r a m above.
(1)

(ii) Identify the virtu al particle in the Feyn m a n diag r a m that you
drew in (a)(i).
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b) The closes t dista n c e betw e e n the elect r o n- positr o n pair and the muon-
anti m u o n pair in the reactio n e – + e + → µ – + µ + is app r oxim a t e ly 9 ×
10 –19 m.
Use this infor m a ti o n to estim a t e the mas s of the virtual particle in (a)
(ii).
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
1
The diagr a m below show s the eight spin 2 baryo n s mad e out of the thr e e
lighte s t quar k s , the up (u), the down (d) and the stra n g e (s). In this plot
baryon s belon gi n g to the sam e horizon t a l line have the sam e str a n g e n e s s
(S ) and those along the sam e slant e d line have the sam e cha r g e ( Q).

(a) (i) On the diagr a m above draw a circle arou n d the point
repr e s e n t i n g the neut r o n .
(1)
(ii) Stat e the quar k cont e n t of the neut r o n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b) The Ξ – baryo n is uns t a bl e and decays accor di n g to the rea c tion Ξ – →
Λ0 + π –.
The quar k cont e n t of the particle s involve d is Ξ – = ssd, Λ0 = uds and

π – = du .
Stat e and explain whet h e r the inter a c ti o n involved in this dec ay is

elect r o m a g n e t i c, stron g or wea k.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
63 5 . A lift (elevato r ) is oper a t e d by an elect ric motor. It moves betw e e n the 10th
floor and the 2nd floor at a const a n t spee d. One main ene r gy
tran sfor m a t i o n during this journ e y is
A. gravit atio n al poten ti al ene r gy → kinetic ene r gy.
B. elect ric al ener gy → kinetic ene r gy.
C. kinetic ener gy → ther m a l ene r gy.

D. elect ric al ener gy → ther m a l ene r gy.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

63 6 . A com m u ni c a ti o n s satellit e is moving at a cons t a n t spee d in a circul a r orbit
arou n d Eart h. At any given insta n t in time, the res ult a n t force on the
satellite is
A. zero.
B. equal to the gravit a tion al force on the satellit e.
C. equal to the vector sum of the gravit a tio n a l force on the satellite and
the cent ri p e t a l force.
D. equal to the force exer t e d by the sat ellite’s rocke t s .

(Tot al 1 mar k )
63 7 . A stud e n t is sitting on a chair. One force that is acting on the stud e n t is the
pull of gravity. Accordin g to Newt o n’s third law, the r e must be anot h e r
force which is
A. the upw a r d pus h of the chair on the stud e n t .
B. the down w a r d force on the stud e n t .
C. the down w a r d pus h of the chair on Eart h.
D. the upw a r d force on Eart h.

(Tot al 1 mar k )

63 8 . An object moves in the x-y plan e. The gra p h s below show how the
compo n e n t of its velocity V x in the x -dire c tio n and the compo n e n t of its
velocity V y in the y -direction, vary with time t .
The particle is moving
A. in a par a b ol a.
B. with simple har m o ni c motion.
C. with cons t a n t velocity in a str ai g h t line.
D. in a circle.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

63 9 . The mas s of a plan e t is M and its radius is R . In orde r for a body of mas s m
to esca p e the gravit a tio n al attr a c tio n of the plan e t , its kinetic ene r gy at the
surfac e of the plane t must be at leas t
GM m
A. R
GM m
B. R2
GM
C. R
GM
D. R2
(Tot al 1 mar k )

64 0 . The two grap h s below rep r e s e n t the variation with dista n c e , d , for d = r to
d = 2 r of the elect ric field and the elect ri c pote n ti al arou n d an isolat e d
point char g e .
The work done by an exter n al forc e in moving a test cha r g e + q from d = 2 r

to d = r is equ al to q multiplied by the
A. shad e d area und e r grap h 1.
B. shad e d area und e r grap h 2.
C. aver a g e value of the elect ric field.
D. aver a g e value of the elect ric pote n ti al.

(Tot al 1 mar k )

64 1 . A positive amou n t of ther m al ene r gy Q is tra n sf e r r e d to an ideal gas from
its sur r o u n d i n g s . The inter n al ene r gy of the gas incr e a s e s and the gas does
a positive amou n t of work W on its sur r o u n d i n g s . The cha n g e of sta t e of the
gas is
A. isochoric (isovolum e t r i c).
B. isoba ric.
C. isoth e r m a l.
D. adiab a tic.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
64 2 . Which of the following cor r e c tly desc ri b e s the ent ro py cha n g e s of the
wate r molec ul e s and the univer s e whe n a sam pl e of wat e r freez e s ?
Wat er Univ e r s e
mol e c u l e s
A. incr e a s e s incr e a s e s
B. decr e a s e s incr e a s e s
C. incr e a s e s decr e a s e s
(Tot al 1 mar k )

64 3 . The gra p h below rep r e s e n t s the variatio n with time of the displa c e m e n t of
an oscillatin g particle.
The motion of the object is
A. over dam p e d .
B. critically dam p e d .
C. lightly dam p e d .
D. not dam p e d .
(Tot al 1 mar k )
64 4 . The wavelen g t h of a stan di n g (sta tion a r y) wave is equal to
A. the dista n c e betw e e n adjac e n t node s .
B. twice the distan c e bet w e e n adjac e n t node s.
C. half the dista n c e betw e e n adjac e n t node s.
D. the dista n c e betw e e n a node and an adjac e n t antino d e .

(Tot al 1 mar k )

64 5 . During a journ ey an obs erv e r travel s at const a n t spe e d towa r d s , and the n
goes beyond, a station a r y emitt e r of soun d.
The frequ e n cy of the soun d as me a s u r e d at the emitt e r is f. The frequ e n c y

accor di n g to the obs erv e r
A. is always grea t e r than f.
B. is always equ al to f.
C. is always less than f.
D. varies during the jour n ey.

(Tot al 1 mar k )
64 6 . A par allel bea m of monoc h r o m atic light of wavele n g t h λ pa sses thro u g h a

slit of width b . After passin g thro u g h the slit the light is incide n t on a
dist a n t scree n . The angul a r width of the cent r a l maxim u m is
λ
A. 2 b radia n s .
λ
B. b radia n s .
λ
C. 2 b deg r e e s .
λ
D. b deg r e e s .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

64 7 . Unpol arize d light is shon e thro u g h two identic al polarize r s whos e axes are
par allel.
I
The ratio I 0 is
A. 100 %.
B. 50 %.
C. 25 %.
D. 0 %.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

64 8 . A cur r e n t car ryin g wire is in the sam e plane as a unifor m magn e t i c field.
The angle betw e e n the wire and the mag n e t i c field is θ.
The mag n e t i c force on the curr e n t car ryin g wire is
A. zero.
C. out of the plane of the pap e r .
D. at an angle θ to the direction of the ma gn e ti c field.

(Tot al 1 mar k )

64 9 . A per m a n e n t bar mag n e t is move d towa r d s a coil of cond u c ti n g wire
wrap p e d arou n d a non- condu c ti n g cylinde r . The ends of the coil, P and Q
are joined by a str ai g h t piece of wire.
The induc e d cur r e n t in the strai g h t pie c e of wire is
A. alter n a t i n g.
B. zero.
C. from P to Q.
D. from Q to P.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
65 0 . In orde r to red uc e powe r losses in the tra n s m i s sio n lines betw e e n a powe r
station and a factory, two tran sfor m e r s are used. One is locat e d at the
powe r station and the othe r at the factory. Which of the following gives the
corr e c t types of transfo r m e r used?
Pow er sta ti o n Fact o r y

A. step- up ste p- up
B. step- up step- down
C. step- down ste p- up
D. step- down step- down
(Tot al 1 mar k )

65 1 . Ultr a- violet light is shon e on a zinc surfa c e and photo el e c t r o n s are emitt e d.
The sketc h grap h shows how the stoppin g pote n ti al V s varies with
frequ e n c y f.
Planck’s const a n t may be det er m i n e d from the cha r g e of an elect r o n e

multiplied by
A. the x-inter c e p t .
B. the y- inter c e p t .
C. the gradi e n t .
D. the area und e r the grap h.

(Tot al 1 mar k )
65 2 . A bea m of elect r o n s is accele r a t e d from rest throu g h a pote n ti al differ e n c e

V . The de Broglie wavele n g t h of the elect r o n s is λ. For elect r o n s
accele r a t e d thro u g h a poten ti al differ e n c e of 2 V the de Broglie wavele n g t h
is
A. 2λ
B. 2λ
λ
C. 2
λ
D. 2
(Tot al 1 mar k )

65 3 . The diagr a m shows four possible elect r o n ene r gy levels in the hydrog e n
atom.
The num b e r of differ e n t frequ e n c i e s in the emission spec t r u m of atomic

hydro g e n that arise from elect r o n tran si tion s betw e e n the s e levels is
A. 0.
B. 2.
C. 4.
D. 6.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
65 4 . A sam pl e cont ai n s an amou n t of radioa c tive mat e ri a l with a half- life of 3.5
days. After 2 weeks the fraction of the radioa c tiv e mat e ri al rem ai ni n g is
A. 94 %.
B. 25 %.
C. 6 %.
D. 0 %.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

65 5 . The rest mas s of a proto n is 938 MeV c –2 . The ene r gy of a proton at res t is
A. 9.38 J
B. 9.38 × 10 8 × (3 × 10 8 ) 2 J
C. 9.38 × 10 8 eV.
D. 9.38 × 10 8 × (3 × 10 8 ) 2 eV
(Tot al 1 mar k )
65 6 . In the Schr ö di n g e r model of the hydro g e n atom, the prob a bility of finding
an elect r o n in a small region of spac e is calcula t e d from the
A. de Broglie hypot h e s i s.
B. Heise n b e r g unce r t ai n t y principle.
C. (amplitu d e of the wavefun c tio n) 2 .
D. rms value of the wavefun c ti o n.

(Tot al 1 mar k )
65 7 . The radii of nuclei can be estim a t e d from expe ri m e n t s involving
A. the scat t e r i n g of char g e d particle s.
B. the Bainbri d g e mass spect r o m e t e r .
C. emission spect r a .
D. beta particle spect r a .

(Tot al 1 mar k )

65 8 . When a nucleu s und e r g o e s radioa c tive β+ dec ay, the cha n g e in the num b e r
of par ticles in the univer s e is
A. 0.
B. 1.
C. 2.
D. 3.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
65 9 . In bina ry, the decim al num b e r 20 is repr e s e n t e d as
A. 1110 1
B. 1100 0
C. 1010 0
D. 0001 0
(Tot al 1 mar k )
66 0 . Laser light of wavelen g t h 500 nm is use d to rea d the infor m a t io n on a CD.

The app r oxi m a t e dept h for a pit on the CD is
A. 1000 nm.
B. 500 nm.
C. 250 nm.
D. 125 nm.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

66 1 . Two CCDs are identic al in all res p e c t s exce pt the pixels of one device have
a gre a t e r qua n t u m efficiency. This device will
A. have a grea t e r magnifica tion.
B. have a grea t e r resolutio n.
C. be able to recor d imag es at lowe r light levels.
D. use less ene r gy.

(Tot al 1 mar k )
66 2 . This ques tion is abou t elect ri ca l resist a n c e of the met al mer c u r y.
The resist a n c e R of a sam pl e of me rc u r y was mea s u r e d as a function of the

tem p e r a t u r e T of the sam pl e. The sam pl e was cooled and dat a points wer e
take n at tem p e r a t u r e interval s of 0.2 K. The unc e r t a i n ti e s in R and T are
too small to be show n on the gra p h.
The hypot h e s i s is that resist a n c e is propo r tio n a l to absolut e tem p e r a t u r e

for tem p e r a t u r e s grea t e r than 4.5 K.
(a) (i) Sugg e s t whet h e r the dat a suppo r t s the hypot h e s i s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Draw a line of best fit throu g h the dat a.
(2)
(b) Stat e the value of R for which the rat e of cha n g e of resist a n c e of the
sam pl e with tem p e r a t u r e is least.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(c) At a tem p e r a t u r e T C the resist a n c e sudd e nly beco m e s zero.
(i) Use the grap h to dete r m i n e the possibl e rang e of the

tem p e r a t u r e T C .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Stat e, to the corr e c t num b e r of signific a n t figur e s , the value of T C

and its unce r t ai n t y.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Outline how the tem p e r a t u r e T C could be me a s u r e d more

precis ely.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(d) Outline two reas o n s why you could not use the dat a to det e r m i n e an
accu r a t e value for R at room tem p e r a t u r e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
66 3 . This ques tion is abou t impuls e.
(a) A net force of magni t u d e F acts on a body. Define the impuls e I of the
force.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) A ball of mas s 0.075 0 kg is travelling horizont a lly with a spe e d of 2.20
m s –1 . It strike s a vertical wall and rebo u n d s horizon t ally.
Due to the collision with the wall, 20 % of the ball’s initial kinetic
ener gy is dissip a t e d .

(i) Show that the ball rebou n d s from the wall with a spee d of 1.97 m
s –1 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Show that the impuls e given to the ball by the wall is 0.313 N s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) The ball strikes the wall at time t = 0 and leave s the wall at time t = T .
The sketc h gra p h shows how the forc e F that the wall exert s on the
ball is assu m e d to vary with time t .
The time T is meas u r e d elect r o ni c ally to equ al 0.089 4 s.
Use the impuls e given in (b)(ii) to estim a t e the aver a g e value of F.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

66 4 . This ques tion is abou t inter n al ene r gy, hea t and ideal gas e s .
(a) The inter n al ene r gy of a piec e of coppe r is incr e a s e d by hea tin g.
(i) Explain what is mea n t, in this cont ext, by inte r n a l ene r gy and
heati n g.
Inte r n al
ener gy: ....................................................................................
............
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
Heatin g: ..........................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) The piece of copp e r has mass 0.25 kg. The incre a s e in inte r n a l
ene r gy of the coppe r is 1.2 × 10 3 J and its incr e a s e in
tem p e r a t u r e is 20 K. Estim a t e the specific heat capa city of
coppe r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b) One mole of an ideal gas is hea t e d at cons t a n t pre s s u r e . The incre a s e
in tem p e r a t u r e of the gas is 30.0 K. The ene r gy tra n sf e r r e d to the gas
is 623 J and the work done is 249 J.
Deter m i n e

(i) the chan g e in inter n al ene r gy of the gas.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) the ther m al capacity of the gas.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c) Anothe r mole of the sam e gas is hea t e d at cons t a n t volum e star ti n g
from the sam e stat e as that in (b). Sugg e s t whe t h e r the ther m a l
capa city in this case is equal to, gre a t e r than or less tha n the answ e r
in b(ii).
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 13 mark s )

66 5 . This ques tion is abou t alter n a t i n g cur r e n t .
(a) The grap h shows the variatio n with time t of the outpu t volta g e V of
an ac gen e r a t o r of negligible inte r n a l resis t a n c e .
A resis to r of resist a n c e 25 Ω is conn e c t e d acros s the outp u t of the

gene r a t o r .
Calcula t e
(i) the rms value of the cur r e n t in the resist o r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) the aver a g e powe r dissip a t e d in the resisto r .
.........................................................................................................

..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) the powe r dissipa t e d in the resist o r at 0.40 ms.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b) The frequ e n c y of rotatio n of the gen e r a t o r coil is now double d. Sketc h,
using the axes in (a), the variatio n with t of the new outpu t volta g e V .
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
66 6 . This ques tion is abou t ener gy tra n sf e r s .
(a) Ener gy degr a d a t i o n takes plac e in the ene r gy tra n sfo r m a t i o n s which
occur in the gene r a t i o n of elect ric al powe r. Explain wha t is mea n t in
this context by ener gy degr a d a t i o n .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
Som e of the ene r gy tran sfo r m a t i o n s that take plac e in a coal- fired powe r
station are repr e s e n t e d by the Sank ey diag r a m below.

(b) (i) Stat e what is repr e s e n t e d by the width w .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) At the thre e places ma rk e d A, B and C on the diagr a m , ene r gy is

degr a d e d .
Identify the proce s s by which the ene r gy is degr a d e d in eac h of
the places.
A: .....................................................................................................
.................
.........................................................................................................
..................
B: .....................................................................................................
.................
.........................................................................................................
..................
C: .....................................................................................................
.................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
66 7 . This ques tion is abou t elect ri c fields and elect ri c circuits.

(a) Two par allel, char g e d met al plate s A and B are in a vacuu m .
At a par ticul a r insta n t an elect r o n is at point P.
On the diag r a m , draw
(i) the elect ric field patt e r n due to the plate s .

(3)

(ii) an arrow to repr e s e n t the dire c tion of the force on the elect r o n at
P.
(1)
(b) The accele r a ti o n of the elect r o n at P is 8.8 × 10 14 m s –2 . Dete r m i n e the

magni t u d e of the elect ric field stre n g t h at the point P.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c) The elect ric pote n ti al ener gy of the elect r o n cha n g e s by 1.9 × 10 –17 J
as it moves from one plat e to the othe r. Show tha t the pote n ti al
differ e n c e betw e e n the plate s is 120 V.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(d) A resis to r R and a filam e n t lamp L are conne c t e d in serie s with a

batt e r y. The batt e r y has an emf of 12 V and inte r n a l resis t a n c e 4.0 Ω.
The poten t i al differ e n c e acros s the filam e n t of the lamp is 3.0 V and
the cur r e n t in the filam e n t is 0.25 A.

(i) Calculat e the total powe r supplie d by the batt e r y.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Calculat e the powe r dissip a t e d in the exte r n a l circuit.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Dete r mi n e the resist a n c e of the resisto r R.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 14 mark s )

66 8 . This ques tion is abou t atomic and nucle a r spec t r a .
Atomic spect r a
(a) The diagr a m repr e s e n t s som e of the ene r gy levels of the mer c u r y
atom.
Photo n s are emitt e d by elect r o n tra n si tio n s betw e e n the levels. On the
diagr a m draw arrow s to rep r e s e n t the tra n si tion, for thos e ene r gy
levels that gives rise to,
(i) the longes t wavelen g t h photo n (label this L).

(1)
(ii) the short e s t wavele n g t h photon (label this S).

(1)
(b) Deter m i n e the wavele n g t h associa t e d with the arrow you have
labelled S.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

Nucle a r spect r a
(c) A nucleu s of the isotop e bism u t h- 212 unde r g o e s α-dec ay into a

nucleu s of an isotop e of thalliu m . A γ-ray photon i s also emitt e d.
Draw a labelled nuclea r ene r gy level diagr a m for this dec ay.
(2)
(d) The activity of a fres hly prep a r e d sam pl e of bism u t h- 212 is 2.80 ×
10 13 Bq. After 80.0 minut e s the activity is 1.13 × 10 13 Bq. Dete r mi n e
the half- life of bism u t h- 212.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

66 9 . This ques tion is abou t the gree n h o u s e effect.
(a) The grap h shows part of the absor p ti o n spec t r u m of nitrog e n oxide
(N 2 O) in which the intensity of absor b e d radia tio n A is plott e d agains t
frequ e n c y f.
(i) Stat e the region of the elect r o m a g n e t i c spec t r u m to which the

reson a n t frequ e n cy of nitrog e n oxide belong s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Using your ans w e r to (a)(i), explain why nitrog e n oxide is

classified as a gree n h o u s e gas.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................

..................
(2)

(b) Define emis si vit y and albedo .
Emissivity: ...............................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Albedo: ....................................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c) The diagr a m shows a simple ene r gy bala nc e climat e model in which
the atmo s p h e r e and the surfa c e of Eart h are two bodie s eac h at
const a n t tem p e r a t u r e . The surfa c e of the Eart h rec eive s both solar
radiatio n and radiation emitt e d from the atmo s p h e r e . Assum e tha t the
Eart h’s surfac e beh av e s as a black body.
The following data are availa ble for this model.
aver a g e tem p e r a t u r e of the atmo s p h e r e of Eart h = 242 K

emissivity, e of the atmos p h e r e of Eart h = 0.720
aver a g e albed o, α of the atm os p h e r e of Eart h = 0.280
solar inten sity at top of atmo s p h e r e = 344 W
m –2
aver a g e tem p e r a t u r e of the surfa c e of Eart h = 288 K

Use the data to show that the
(i) powe r radia t e d per unit are a of the atmo s p h e r e is 140 W m –2 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) solar powe r absor b e d per unit are a at the surfa c e of the Eart h is
248 W m –2 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(d) It is hypot h e s iz e d that, if the produ c tio n of gre e n h o u s e gas e s wer e to

stay at its pres e n t level the n the tem p e r a t u r e of the Ear t h’s
atmo s p h e r e would event u a lly rise by 6.0 K.
Calcula t e the powe r per unit are a that would then be
(i) radi at e d by the atmos p h e r e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) abso r b e d by the Eart h’s surfa c e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(e) Estim a t e , using your ans w e r to (d)(ii), the incr e a s e in tem p e r a t u r e of
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 14 mark s )
67 0 . This ques tion is abou t digital stor a g e device s.
(a) (i) Conve r t the decim al num b e r 25 to bina ry.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Outline two adva n t a g e s of storin g a text in digital form rat h e r

than in analog u e form.
1. .....................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
2. .....................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) Stat e, with refer e n c e to their struc t u r e , why more data can be stor e d
on a DVD than on a CD.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(c) Define the ter m mag nification as it applie s to a CCD.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(d) A digital cam e r a is used to photog r a p h a par tic ul a r object. Two small
mark s on the object are sepa r a t e d by a dist a n c e of 2.0 × 10 –3 m.
The cam e r a has a mag nific a tio n of 1.4 × 10 –2 and an imag e collection
are a of
4.0 × 10 –4 m 2 . Dete r mi n e the minim u m num b e r of pixels that the CCD
of a digital cam e r a mus t have, in orde r that the image s of the two
mark s on the object are just resolve d.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 11 mark s )
(a) A particle of mas s m that is att a c h e d to a light spring is execu ti n g

simple har m o ni c motion in a hori z o n t a l dire c t i o n .
Stat e the condition relati n g to the net force acting on the particle that
is neces s a r y for it to execut e simple har m o ni c motion.
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) The grap h shows how the kine tic ene r gy E K of the par ticle in (a) varies
with the displac e m e n t x of the par ticle from equilibri u m .
(i) Using the axes above, sket c h a gra p h to show how the pote n ti al
ene r gy of the particle varie s with the displa c e m e n t x .
(2)
(ii) The mas s of the par ticle is 0.30 kg. Use dat a from the gra p h to
show that the frequ e n c y f of oscillation of the par ticle is 2.0 Hz.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(c) The par ticles of a mediu m M 1 throu g h which a tra n sv e r s e wave is
travelling, oscillat e with the sam e frequ e n c y and amplit u d e as that of
the par ticle in (b).
(i) Describ e, with refer e n c e to the prop a g a t i o n of ene r gy thro u g h

the mediu m , what is me a n t by a tran s v e r s e wave.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) The spee d of the wave is 0.80 m s –1 . Calcula t e the wavele n g t h of

the wave.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(d) The diagr a m shows wavefro n t s of the waves in (c) incide n t on a

boun d a r y XY betw e e n mediu m M 1 and anot h e r mediu m M 2 .

The angle betw e e n the nor m a l, and the dire c tion of travel of the
wavefro n t s is 30°.

(i) The spee d of the wave in M 1 is 0.80 m s –1 . The spe e d of the
waves in M 2 is
1.2 m s –1 .
Calculat e the angle betw e e n the dire c tion of travel of the
wavefro n t s in M 2 and the nor m al.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) On the diagr a m , sket c h the wavefro n t s in M 2 .

(1)
(Tot al 15 mark s )
67 2 . This ques tion is abou t gravit a tio n a l fields and pote n ti al.
(a) Define gravitational field stre n g t h and stat e how it is rela t e d to

gravit atio n al poten ti al.
Definition: ...............................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Relation s hi p: ...........................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(b) A binary star syste m consist s of two sta r s with mas s e s M 1 and M 2
rotati n g abou t a com m o n cent r e . The cent r e s of the two sta r s are
sepa r a t e d by a dista n c e R = 1.2 × 10 10 m.
The diagr a m is not to scale.
The total gravit a tion al pote n ti al due to the sta r s at any point along a
line joining their cent r e s is V . The gra p h shows how V varies with the
dista n c e x from the cent r e of sta r M 1 . (Value s of the pote n ti al inside
each star are not known.)

A particle is launch e d with kine tic ene r gy E K from the surfa c e of sta r
with mass M 2 .
The par ticle arrives at the surfac e of the star of mas s M 1 . Use the
grap h to
(i) explain whet h e r the kinetic ene r gy of the particle at the surfac e
of M 1 is less than, equal to, or larg e r tha n E K.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) det e r m i n e the dista n c e x at which the gravit a tion a l field stre n g t h
due to the two star s is zero.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
M1
(iii) det e r m i n e the ratio M 2 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................

..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

67 3 . This ques tion is abou t the decay of radiu m- 226.
(a) The nucle a r reaction equa tio n for the dec ay of radiu m- 226 (Ra) may
be writt e n as
226
8 8 Ra = Rn + α
(i) Stat e the value of the proto n num b e r and neut r o n num b e r of the
isotop e of rado n (Rn).
Proto n
num b e r : ..................................................................................
...............
Neut r o n
num b e r : ..................................................................................
.............
(1)
(ii) Comp a r e , with refer e n c e to the nucle a r reac tion in (a), the
bindin g ener gy of Ra with that of Rn.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b) The following data are availa ble.
mas s of Ra = 226.02 5 4 u
mas s of Rn = 222.01 7 5 u
mas s of α = 4.002 6 u
Show that the ene r gy rele a s e d in the decay of a Ra nucle u s is 4.94

MeV.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................

.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) An α-par ticle of ene r gy 4.94 MeV e mitt e d in the dec ay of a Ra nucle u s ,
travels a dista n c e d in air befor e coming to rest.
(i) Show that the initial s pee d of the α-par ticle i s 1.54 × 10 7 m s –1 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) Stat e the relations hi p betw e e n the mag nit u d e of the aver a g e
force F acting on the α-particle, the cha n g e in kinetic ene r gy ∆E K
and the dista n c e d .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) Use your answ e r to (c)(ii) to calcul a t e F given that d = 4.20 × 10 –

2
m.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iv) Estim a t e the time that it takes the α-par ticl e to co me to rest.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(Tot al 15 mark s )

(a) Plane wavefro n t s of monoc h r o m a t i c light of wavele n g t h λ are incide n t

on a nar r o w slit.
After pas sin g thro u g h the slit they are incide n t on a scr e e n place d a
larg e dista n c e from the slit.
The width of the slit is b and the point X is at the cent r e of the slit.
The point M on the scre e n is the position of the first minim u m of the
diffraction patt e r n form e d on the scre e n.
The path differ e n c e betw e e n light from the top edg e of the slit and
light from the botto m edge of the slit is l.
Use the diagr a m to explain why the dista n c e l is equal to λ.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

The wavefro n t s in (a) are from a monoc h r o m a t i c point sour c e S 1 . Diagr a m
1 is a sketc h of how the intensity of the diffrac tio n patt e r n form e d by the
single slit varies with angl e θ. The units on the vertical axis are arbit a r y.
Dia gr a m 1
Anoth e r identical point sourc e S 2 is plac e d close to S 1 as show n in diag r a m

2.
Dia gr a m 2
(b) The diffrac tio n patt e r n s form e d by eac h sour c e are just resolve d.
On dia gr a m 1 sketc h the inten sity distrib u tio n of the light from
sourc e S 2 .
(2)

(c) Outline how the Rayleigh crite rio n affect s the design of radio
teles co p e s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(d) The dish of the Arecibo radio telesc o p e has a diam e t e r of 300 m. Two
dista n t radio sour c e s are 2.0 × 10 12 m apa r t. The sour c e s are 3.0 ×
10 16 m from Ear t h and they emit radio wave s of wavele n g t h 21 cm.
Deter m i n e whet h e r the radio teles c o p e can resolve thes e sour c e s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
67 5 . This ques tion is abou t star s.
(a) Disting ui s h betw e e n app a r e n t mag nit u d e and absolut e mag nit u d e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) The table gives infor m a ti o n on thr e e sta r s, Ache r n a r , EG 129 and
Mira.
Abso l u t e
Appar e n t ma g n i t u d e Spe c t r a l cla s s
ma g n i t u d e
Acher n
–3.0 +0. 5 0 B
ar
EG 129 +1 3. 0 +1 4. 0 B
Mira –3.0 +5. 0 M
(i) Stat e which on e of the thr e e sta r s appe a r s bright e s t from Ear t h.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
LA
(ii) Estim a t e the ratio LE whe r e L A is the luminosity of Ache r n a r
and L E is the luminosity of EG 129.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(iii) Show that the dista n c e of the sta r Acher n a r from Eart h is
app r oxi m a t ely 50 pc.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) The surf ac e tem p e r a t u r e of Mira is 5 time s lowe r tha n that of
RM
Acher n a r . Estim a t e the ratio R A whe r e R M is the radius of Mira and
R A is the radius of Acher n a r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(d) Stat e and explain which of the sta r s in the table in (b) is a white
dwa rf.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 14 mark s )

67 6 . This ques tion is abou t cosmic microw a v e backg r o u n d radia tio n.
The gra p h shows the spect r u m of the cosmic microw a v e backg r o u n d

radi ation.
The shap e of the gra p h sugg e s t s a black body spec t r u m i.e. a spec t r u m to
which the Wien displac e m e n t law applie s.
(a) Use the grap h to estim a t e the black body tem p e r a t u r e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) Explain how your answ e r to (a) is evide n c e in suppo r t of the Big Bang
model.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................

.....................
(2)

(c) Stat e and explain anot h e r piece of expe ri m e n t a l evide nc e in suppo r t
of the Big Bang model.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
67 7 . This ques tion is abou t stellar evolution.
(a) Outline what is mean t by the Oppe n h e i m e r - Volkoff limit.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) Eta Carina e is a main sequ e n c e sta r whos e mas s is about 100 time s
larg e r than that of the Sun. The sta r will evolve to beco m e a neut r o n
sta r.
(i) By refer e n c e to the Oppe n h e i m e r - Volkoff limit, outline the

evolution of Eta Carina e from whe n it leaves the main sequ e n c e
until the neut r o n star sta g e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Stat e the reas o n why Eta Carina e will not und e r g o furt h e r

collaps e when it beco m e s a neut r o n sta r.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(c) The mas s- luminosity relation s hi p for sta r s such as Eta Carina e and the
Sun is given by the expr e s si o n L = kM 3.5 whe r e k is a const a n t and M
is the mas s of the star. The mass of Eta Carina e is 100 time s larg e r
than that of the Sun.
l E t aC a r in a e L
(i) Calculat e the ratio l Sun , whe r e l = M is the luminosity per
unit mass.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) A star will leave the main sequ e n c e after it has conve r t e d 12 % of
its mas s into ene r gy. By refe r e n c e to your answ e r to (i) sugg e s t
why Eta Carina e will spe n d less time on the main sequ e n c e tha n
the Sun.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
67 8 . This ques tion is abou t Hubbl e’s law.
(a) Stat e Hubbl e’s law.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) Sugg e s t why, in verifying Hubbl e’s law, data from nea r by galaxies
canno t be used.

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 3 mark s )

67 9 . This ques tion is abou t amplit u d e modula tio n (AM).
The gra p h shows the powe r spec t r u m of an AM car rie r wave.
(a) Use the grap h to det e r m i n e the
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) ban d wi d t h of the tran s m i t t e d signal.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b) A broa d c a s t i n g comp a ny has bee n given per mi s sion to broa d c a s t in a

frequ e n c y ran g e of 320 kHz. The tra n s mi s s io n s have the band wi d t h
found in (a)(iii).
Deter m i n e how many radio stations the comp a ny can oper a t e in this
frequ e n c y ran g e.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 4 mark s )

68 0 . This ques tion is abou t tran s m i s sio n and sam pling of signals.
(a) The block diagr a m illust r a t e s the principle s of the tra n s m i s sio n and
rece p tio n of digital signals.
Descri b e the function of eac h of the blocks labelle d P, Q, R and S.
P: .............................................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Q: .............................................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
R: .............................................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
S: .............................................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)

(b) The grap h shows thirt e e n sa m pl e d values of an analog u e signal as a
function of the time at which the sam plin g took plac e.
Each sam pl e is conve r t e d into a 4- bit bina ry num b e r , accor di n g to the

encodin g sche m e :
4- bit binar y
Sig n a l / mV Sa m p l e / mV
nu m b e r
  
2.000–2.9 9 9 2 0010
3.000–3.9 9 9 3 0011
4.000–4.9 9 9 4 0100
  
Deter m i n e the
(i) 4- bit binary num b e r corr e s p o n di n g to the sam pl e at t = 0.07 ms.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) bit- rate of the digital tra n s m i s sio n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c) Stat e on e adva n t a g e and on e disa dva n t a g e of incre a si n g the

sam pling frequ e n cy used to sam pl e an analog u e signal.
Advant a g e : ..............................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Disadv a n t a g e : .........................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 9 mark s )
(a) Stat e on e caus e of atte n u a t i o n and on e caus e of dispe r s io n in an

optical fibre.
Atten u a ti o n: ............................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Dispe r s io n: ..............................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) An optical fibre of lengt h 5.4 km has an atte n u a t i o n per unit lengt h of
2.8 dB km –1 .
The signal powe r input is 80 mW.
(i) Calculat e the outpu t powe r of the signal.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) In orde r for the powe r of the outpu t signal to be equal to the
input powe r an amplifier is installe d at the end of the fibre.
Stat e the gain, in decibels (dB), of the amplifie r at the end of the
fibre.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
Ps ig n a l
(c) The signal to noise ratio (SNR), in dB, is define d as SNR = 10log Pn ois e
whe r e P signal and P noise are the powe r s of the signal and noise
res p e c t ively.
The SNR of the signal in (b) befor e am plifica tio n was 20 dB. Calcula t e
the SNR after amplificatio n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

Diagr a m 1 shows a non- inver ti n g amplifie r circuit.
Dia gr a m 1

(a) Sugg e s t why the amplifier is refe r r e d to as non- inverti n g.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) The input voltag e for the amplifier in (a) is V in = 2.0 mV.
Calcula t e the
(i) gain G of the amplifier.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) outp u t voltag e V out .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(c) Diagr a m 2 show s a partic ul a r non- invertin g amplifier.
Dia g r a m 2
Explain, in ter m s of the prop e r ti e s of an op- amp, why the gain of this
non- inver tin g amplifier is equal to 1.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(d) Diagr a m 3 show s a circuit in which the bat t e r y has an emf of 6.0 V
and negligibl e inter n al resis t a n c e . Two 2.0 M Ω resis to r s are
conn e c t e d in series to the batt e r y.
Dia g r a m 3
(i) Stat e the value of the pote n ti al differ e n c e betw e e n points A and
B.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) A voltm e t e r of resist a n c e 100 k Ω is use d to mea s u r e the pot e n ti al

differ e n c e acros s points A and B.
Stat e why the readi n g on the voltm e t e r is not equal to the value
stat e d in (d)(i).
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) The circuit in diagr a m 3 is modifie d to includ e the circuit show n
in diag r a m 2.
Dia gr a m 4
Explain why the voltm e t e r rea d s the value of the pote n t i al

differ e n c e as stat e d in (d)(i).
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
68 3 . This ques tion is abou t the colour of the sky.
Outline why the sky app e a r s blue during the day and red durin g a suns e t .
Blue
sky: ..........................................................................................................
.....................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(2)
Red
sky: ..........................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )

68 4 . This ques tion is abou t image form a tio n in a convex lens.
(a) Define near point .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) A small object is place d in front of a conve r gi n g lens that will act as a
magnifier.
The focal point s of the lens are labelle d with the lette r F.
On the diag r a m const r u c t rays to locat e the imag e of the objec t.

(2)
(c) A particul a r lens has a focal lengt h of 9.0 cm and the image is form e d
at the nea r point which is 25 cm from the lens.
Assumin g that the eye is very close to the lens det e r m i n e the
(i) dist a n c e of the object from the lens.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) ang ul a r mag nifica tion of the lens.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(d) The ang ul a r mag nificatio n of the lens incr e a s e s with decr e a s i n g focal
lengt h.
Stat e on e disadva n t a g e of using very short focal lengt h lens e s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
68 5 . This ques tion is abou t interf e r e n c e .
Monoc h r o m a t i c, coher e n t light is incide n t on two nar r o w par allel slits

whos e widths are small com p a r e d to their sepa r a t i o n. After passin g
thro u g h the slits the light is brou g h t to a focus on a scre e n prod u ci n g
interf e r e n c e fringe s. Point X is the midpoint of the slits.
The angul a r position of a point on the scre e n is det e r m i n e d by the angl e θ.

(a) (i) Explain why the inte n sity of light at θ = 0 will be a
maxim u m .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) The wavelen g t h of light is 6.80 × 10 –7 m and the sepa r a t i o n of

the slits is
1.13 × 10 –4 m. Show that for the first orde r maxim u m θ = 6.02 ×
10 –3 rad.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) On the axes below dra w a gra p h to show how the inten sity of
light obs erv e d on the scre e n varies with angle θ. (You do not
have to put num b e r s on the vertic al axis.)
(3)

(b) The two slits are replac e d by a large num b e r of slits whos e widths and
sepa r a t i o n are the sam e as in (a).
Stat e the chan g e s , if any, in the inte nsity patt e r n you dre w in (a)(iii)
with refer e n c e to

(i) the value of the inten sity at θ = 0.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) the angul a r position of the points of maxim u m inte nsi ty.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) the angul a r width of the fringe s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 9 mark s )
68 6 . This ques tion is abou t X-ray spec t r a and X-ray diffrac tio n.
(a) Elect r o n s are accele r a t e d from res t by a pote n ti al differe n c e . They

strike a met al targ e t and the res ultin g X-ray spec t r u m is show n below.
(i) Stat e and explain what may be deduc e d abou t the ene r gy levels
of the atom s of the met al from the fact that this spect r u m does
not cont ai n any char a c t e r i s ti c lines.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Outline the mech a ni s m by which the photo n s of wavele n g t h 2.0 ×

10 –10 m are produ c e d .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Calculat e the poten ti al differ e n c e throu g h which the elect r o n s

have been accel e r a t e d .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b) X-rays are incide n t on a cryst al surfa c e makin g an angle θ 1 with the
surfac e. The scat t e r e d X-rays make an angle θ 2 with the surf ac e . In
the diagr a m below, the circles, tha t are sepa r a t e d by a dista n c e d ,
repr e s e n t lattice ions of the cryst al.
The path differ e n c e betw e e n the two scat t e r e d rays is d (cos θ 1 – cos

θ 2 ).

(i) Stat e and explain the condition for cons t r u c tive inte rfe r e n c e
betw e e n the two scat t e r e d rays show n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) The wavelen g t h of the X-rays is 4.20 × 10 –10 m. A maxim u m in

the inten sity of the scatt e r e d X-rays is first obse r v e d at an angle
θ = 34.5°. Deter m i n e the sepa r a t i o n of the atomic plan e s that
give rise to this maxim u m .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

68 7 . This ques tion is abou t the Michels o n- Morley expe ri m e n t .
The diagr a m shows the type of arr a n g e m e n t tha t was used in the
Michelso n- Morley expe ri m e n t .
The spee d of light in free space is c and the orbit al spe e d of Eart h is v .
(a) Stat e
(i) the pur po s e of the Michels o n- Morley expe ri m e n t .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) using a Galilean tran sfor m a t i o n , the spe e d of light along the path
fro m the mirro r M 1 to the semi- tran s p a r e n t mirro r S in ter m s of
c and v .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) With the app a r a t u s in the position show n, an inte rf e r e n c e patt e r n was
obse rv e d in the field of view of the telesc o p e . The appa r a t u s was the n
rotat e d by 90º.
Stat e
(i) what was expect e d to be obs e rv e d.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) what was actu ally obse rv e d .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) how the res ult of the Michelso n- Morley expe ri m e n t is explaine d
in the theo ry of special relativity.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
68 8 . This ques tion is abou t simult a n e i ty.
(a) Define what is mea n t by a prope r tim e interval .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) Albert is at res t with res p e c t to the grou n d . Her m a n n is in a carri a g e
that is moving with spee d v relative to Albert in the dire c tion show n.
Two flashe s of light are emitt e d from the back and the front of the
car ri a g e . Accor di n g to Her m a n n’ s clock they arrive at Her m a n n’ s
position simult a n e o u s ly.
Explain with refer e n c e to the conc e p t of prop e r time, why the arrival
of the light pulses at Her m a n n will also be simult a n e o u s to Albert.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 4 mark s )

A space c r af t leaves Eart h at a spe e d of 0.80c as me a s u r e d by an obse rv e r

on Eart h. It head s towar d s , and contin u e s beyond, a dista n t plan e t . The
plane t is 52 light years away from Eart h as me a s u r e d by an obs e rv e r on
Eart h.
When the spac e c r a f t leaves Eart h, Amand a , one of the astr o n a u t s in the
spac e c r a f t , is 20 year s old.
5
The Loren tz gam m a factor for a spe e d of 0.80c is γ = 3 .
(a) Calcula t e
(i) the time take n for the journ ey to the plane t as mea s u r e d by an
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) the dista n c e betw e e n the Eart h and the plan e t, as mea s u r e d by
Amand a .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) Amand a’s age as the spac e c r a f t goes past the plan e t, accor di n g
to Amand a.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) As the spac ec r af t goes pas t the plane t Amand a sends a radio signal to
Eart h.
Calcula t e, as meas u r e d by the spac e c r a f t obse rv e r s , the time it take s
for the signal to arrive at Eart h.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
The gra p h shows the variation with spe e d v of the total ene r gy E of a
par ticl e called the kaon,
K–. The rest mas s of the K – is 490 MeV c –2 and its elect ric cha r g e is the
sam e as that of the elect r o n .

(a) Sugg e s t how the gra p h may be use d in orde r to obtain the rest mass
of the K –.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) Use the grap h to det e r m i n e the pote n ti al differ e n c e requir e d to

accel e r a t e a K – from res t to a spe e d of 0.95c.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c) The K– is uns t a bl e and dec ays into a muon and an antine u t r i n o
accor di n g to the reaction
K– →µ – + v
The rest mas s of the muon is 105 MeV c –2 . The rest mas s of the
antine u t r i n o may be assu m e d to be zero.
The K– is at rest when it dec ays.
(i) Show that total ener gy is cons e r v e d if the mom e n t u m of the

muon is 234 MeV c –1 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Dete r mi n e the kinetic ene r gy of the muon.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
69 1 . This ques tion is abou t black holes
(a) Define what is mea n t by the Sch w a r z s c hil d radius of a black hole.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) A prob e is at rest a small dista n c e from a black hole of Schw a r z s c hil d
radius 6.7 × 10 4 m.
The probe emits monoc h r o m a t i c light pulse s tha t are rec eive d by a
space c r af t very far from the black hole.
Accordi n g to a clock in the prob e the puls e s have a frequ e n c y of 4.5 ×

10 14 Hz, with one puls e being emitt e d every two secon d s. The
frequ e n c y of the light as me a s u r e d by a clock in the spac e c r a f t is 3.0
× 10 14 Hz.
(i) Stat e the nam e of the phe no m e n o n res po n si bl e for the obse rv e d

chan g e in the frequ e n c y of the light.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Dete r mi n e , accor di n g to the spa c e c r a f t clock, how often the
pulse s are received by the spac e c r a f t.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Dete r mi n e the dista n c e of the probe from the cent r e of the black
hole.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
69 2 . This ques tion is abou t the ear and hea ri n g.
Sound waves are incide n t on the ear d r u m of a per so n. The gra p h show s the
variation with time t of the differ e n c e ∆P betw e e n the pres s u r e at the
ear d r u m and atmos p h e r i c pres s u r e .

(a) The grap h below show s the variatio n with time t of the velocity v of
the cent r e of the ear d r u m .
The aver a g e powe r car rie d by the soun d wave is given by P av =

Fm a xv m a x
2 wher e F max is the maxim u m force exer t e d on the ear d r u m .
Use dat a from the gra p h s above to
(i) show that the aver a g e inte n si ty of the soun d at the ear d r u m is
app r oxi m a t ely 1.8 × 10 –6 W m –2 . The are a of the ear d r u m , A , is
42 mm 2 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) estim a t e the maxim u m soun d inte nsity level, in dB, at the
ear d r u m .
.........................................................................................................
..................

(1)

(b) The area of the oval window whe r e the stirr u p is att a c h e d is 3.2 mm 2 .
The ossicles amplify the force by a factor of 1.5.
Estim a t e the maxim u m pre s s u r e at the inne r ear.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c) Outline the role of the ossicles and the oval window in the
tran s m i s sio n of soun d to the inne r ear.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
69 3 . This ques tion is abou t ultr as o u n d imagin g.
(a) Descri b e
(i) what is mean t by ultr a s o u n d .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) how ultra s o u n d may be produ c e d .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) The table gives infor m a ti o n on the spe e d of soun d, the density and the
acous tic imped a n c e for various mat e ri al s.
Mat e ri a l Sp e e d of so u n d / De n s i t y / kg Aco u s t i c
m s –1 m –3 imp e d a n c e
/ kg m –2 s –1
Air 330 1.3 430
Bone 2800 1.5 × 10 3
Tissue 1600 1.0 × 10 3 1.6 × 10 6
Calcula t e the acous tic impe d a n c e of bone and ent e r your answ e r in
the table above.
(1)
(c) Ultra s o u n d of intensi ty I 0 is travelling in a mediu m of impe d a n c e Z 1

and is incide n t on a mediu m of impe d a n c e Z 2 . The refl e c t e d
ultra s o u n d has intensity I R given by
2
 Z1  Z 2 
 
Z Z 2
IR = I0  1 
(i) With refer e n c e to the equa tio n above explain why ultr a s o u n d
would not be an effective met ho d for a brain sca n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IR
(ii) Using dat a from the table in (b) det e r m i n e the ratio I 0 of
ultr a s o u n d ente ri n g tiss u e from air.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) Using your ans w e r to (c)(ii), explain the pur po s e of the gel that is
applied to the skin befor e an ultra s o u n d scan.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(d) A pulse of ultr as o u n d is emitt e d from a tra n s d u c e r plac e d on a

patien t’s skin. The pulse is reflec t e d by the stom a c h and is receive d
back at the tran s d u c e r . The gra p h (an A sca n) shows how the volta g e
due to the tran s m i t t e d and the reflect e d puls e varies with time.
The spee d of soun d in tissu e is 1600 m s –1 .
(i) Using dat a from the gra p h dete r m i n e the dist a n c e betw e e n the
stom a c h and the trans d u c e r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................

..................
(2)

(ii) Outline two differ e n c e s betw e e n an A scan and a B scan.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 14 mark s )
69 4 . This ques tion is abou t radiation the r a p y.
(a) To trea t thyroid cance r , radioa c tive iodine- 131 is adminis t e r e d to a

patien t.
(i) Stat e how the radioac tive iodine may be adminis t e r e d to the
patien t .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Stat e the reas o n why iodine is use d.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) Stat e two differ e n c e s , comp a r e d with nor m al cells, in the

res po n s e of canc e r o u s cells to expos u r e to radia tion.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................

..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) The physical half- life of iodine- 131 is 8 days and its biologic al half- life
is 12 days.
(i) Disting ui s h betw e e n physic al and biological half- lives.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Calculat e the effective half- life of iodine- 131.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) A patie n t who has rec eive d tre a t m e n t with iodine- 131 mus t
rem ai n in isolation until the activity of the iodine in the body
redu c e s to about one fourt h of its initial activity.
Estim a t e the num b e r of days a patie n t must rem ai n in isolation.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
The diagr a m below show s two fund a m e n t a l inte r a c ti o n vertic e s, one for the
elect r o m a g n e t i c and the othe r for the weak inte r a c t io n s .

(a) Explain why in both vertic e s the incomi n g and the outgoin g cha r g e d
fermion s above must have the sam e elect ric cha r g e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) The proce s s e – + e + → µ – + µ + occur s mostly via the elect r o m a g n e t i c

inter a c ti o n and less frequ e n t ly via the weak inte r a c ti o n.
Draw a Feyn m a n diagr a m for the proc e s s e – + e + → µ – + µ + accor di n g

to
(i) the elect r o m a g n e t i c inter a c tio n.
(1)
(ii) the weak inter a c ti o n.
(1)
(iii) Identify the virtu al particle s in eac h of the Feyn m a n diagr a m s

that you drew in (i) and (ii).
Virtual par ticle in

(i): ........................................................................................
Virtual par ticle in

(ii): .......................................................................................
(1)
(c) Stat e one reas o n why the proc e s s e – + e + → µ – + µ + is mor e likely to

involve the elect r o m a g n e t i c inte r a c ti o n rat h e r tha n the weak
inter a c ti o n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(d) Elect r o n s are accele r a t e d to a total ene r gy E and the n collide with
station a r y positro n s .
Deter m i n e the minim u m total ene r gy E of the elect r o n for the reac tio n
e – + e + → µ – + µ + to take plac e.
Elect r o n rest mas s = 0.511 MeV c –2 .

Muon res t mas s = 105 MeV c –2 .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 9 mark s )
69 6 . This ques tion is abou t particle decto r s .
(a) (i) Describ e the oper a ti n g principl e of the bubbl e

cha m b e r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Outline how two particl e prop e r t i e s or cha r a c t e r i s ti c s are

meas u r e d using a bubble cha m b e r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................

..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) The propo r tio n al wire spar k cha m b e r has now repla c e d the bubble
cha m b e r .
Outline two advan t a g e s of this det e c t o r com p a r e d to the bubbl e

cha m b e r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
1
The diagr a m below show s the eight spin 2 baryo n s mad e out of the thr e e
lighte s t quar k s , the up (u), the down (d) and the stra n g e (s). In this plot
baryon s belon gi n g to the sam e horizon t a l line have the sam e str a n g e n e s s
(S ) and those along the sam e slant e d line have the sam e cha r g e ( Q).
(a) (i) On the diagr a m above draw a circle arou n d the point
repr e s e n t i n g the neut r o n .
(1)

(ii) Stat e the quar k cont e n t of the neut r o n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b) The Ξ – baryo n is uns t a bl e and decays accor di n g to the reac tio n Ξ – →
Λ0 + π –.
The quar k cont e n t of the particle s involve d is Ξ – = ssd, Λ0 = uds and

π – = du .
Stat e and explain whet h e r the inter a c ti o n involved in this dec ay is

elect r o m a g n e t i c, stron g or wea k.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
69 8 . This ques tion is abou t cosmology and string s .
(a) It is ass u m e d that in the first 10 –2 s afte r the Big Bang qua r k s beha v e d
as free par ticles that could not bind into nucleon s .
Sugg e s t a reas o n for this.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) At a time of 10 –2 s after the Big Bang the aver a g e the r m a l ene r gy per
particl e in the univer s e was appr oxi m a t e ly 50 MeV.
Estim a t e the tem p e r a t u r e of the unive r s e 10 –2 s afte r the Big Bang.

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) In the very early univer s e it is thou g h t that the total num b e r of
particl es was only very slightly larg e r tha n the num b e r of
antip a r ti cl es .
Explain why the mat t e r in the pre s e n t unive r s e is ma d e pre do m i n a n t ly

by par ticles and not antipa r t i cl e s.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(d) Outline why physicis t s wer e led to consid e r string theori e s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(e) Many string theo ri e s sugg e s t that spac e is 10 dime n sio n a l rat h e r tha n
the usual 3+ 1 dimen si o n s (3 for spac e and 1 for time).
Assumin g that string theo ry is corr e c t , explain why we are not awa r e
of the extr a dimen sio n s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
69 9 . The mag ni t u d e of the mas s of the unive r s e is of the orde r of
A. 10 20 kg.
B. 10 30 kg.

C. 10 40 kg.
D. 10 50 kg.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
70 0 . Which of the following is a valid sta t e m e n t ?
A. A mea s u r e m e n t that is not precis e can be accu r a t e .
B. A mea s u r e m e n t that is pre cis e is always accu r a t e .
C. A mea s u r e m e n t that is not precis e will always be inacc u r a t e .
D. Repe a t e d mea s u r e m e n t s will always incre a s e accu r a c y and pre cision.

(Tot al 1 mar k )
70 1 . A ball, initially at rest, is dropp e d in the air from a gre a t heigh t. Air
resis t a n c e is not negligible.
Which of the following grap h s best shows the variation with time t of the
accele r a ti o n a of the ball?
(Tot al 1 mar k )

70 2 . The gra p h below shows the varia tion with time t of the velocity v of an
object moving along a str ai g h t line.
The displac e m e n t of the object betw e e n t = 0 s and t = 6.0 s is
A. 2.0 m.
B. 12 m.
C. 20 m.
D. 24 m.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

70 3 . A const a n t force of magni t u d e F is applie d to a mass m for a time inte rval
∆t . The mag ni t u d e of the impuls e given to the mas s equal s
F
A. m.
F
B. Δt .
C. F∆t .
FΔt
D. m .
(Tot al 1 mar k )
70 4 . Two cart s of differ e n t mass m and M are conn e c t e d by a spring. They are
pus h e d toget h e r such that the sprin g is comp r e s s e d .
After the cart s are relea s e d , the car t of mas s m moves with velocity v . The
chan g e in the mom e n t u m of mas s M is
A. m v.
B. –m v .
C. M v.
D. –M v .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

70 5 . A lamp of weigh t W is susp e n d e d by a wire fixed to the ceiling. With
refer e n c e to Newt o n’s third law of motion, the force tha t is equ al and
opposit e to W is the
A. tension in the wire.
B. force applied by the ceiling.
C. force exer t e d by the lamp on the Eart h.
D. force exer t e d by the Eart h on the lamp.

(Tot al 1 mar k )
70 6 . A const a n t force acts on a mas s tha t is initially at rest. Which of the

following grap h s best shows how the kine tic ene r gy E K of the mas s cha n g e s
with the work W done on the mass ? Friction is negligibl e.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

70 7 . Two object s near each othe r are at the sam e tem p e r a t u r e . Which of the
following stat e m e n t s has to be true ?
A. The object s have the sam e inte r n a l ene r gy.
B. The object s have the sam e the r m a l capa city.
C. No ther m al ene r gy is exch a n g e d betw e e n the object s.
D. The net ther m al ener gy exch a n g e d betw e e n the object s is zero.

(Tot al 1 mar k )
70 8 . The tem p e r a t u r e of an ideal gas is a mea s u r e of the molec ul e s’ aver a g e
A. velocity.
B. mom e n t u m .
C. kinetic ener gy.
D. frequ e n c y of collisions.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
70 9 . For a syste m execu ti n g simple har m o ni c motion, the resto ri n g forc e acting
on the syste m is propo r tio n al to the
A. displac e m e n t of the syste m from equilibri u m .
B. amplit u d e of oscillation.
C. elastic poten t i al ener gy.
D. frequ e n c y of oscillation.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

71 0 . A cart, conn e c t e d to two identic al spring s , is oscillating with simple
har m o ni c motion betw e e n two points X and Y tha t are equidis t a n t from
point O.
The cart is in equilibriu m at
A. all points betw e e n X and Y.
B. point O only.
C. points X and Y only.
D. points O, X and Y only.

(Tot al 1 mar k )
71 1 . During one comple t e oscillation, the amplitu d e of a da m p e d har m o ni c

motion chan g e s from 1.5 cm to 0.30 cm. The total ene r gy at the end of the
oscillation is E 2 and the total ene r gy at the begin ni n g of the oscillation is
E2
E . The ratio E1 is
1
1
A. 5.
1
B. 25.
C. 5.
D. 25.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

71 2 . Plane wavefro n t s are incide n t on a bound a r y betw e e n two medi a labelle d 1
and 2 in the diag r a m .
The diagr a m of the wavefro n t s is dra w n to scale.
The ratio of the refra c tive index of mediu m 2 to that of mediu m 1 is
A. 0.50.
B. 0.67.
C. 1.5.
D. 2.0.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

71 3 . A wave pulse is travelling to the right along a string.
Which of the following bes t repr e s e n t s the direc tion of the velocity of the
point P?
A. ↑
B. ↓
C. →
D. ←
(Tot al 1 mar k )
71 4 . The tung s t e n filam e n t of a lamp has a cros s- section a l are a A and lengt h L .
For a poten ti al differ e n c e V acros s the filam e n t , the cur r e n t in the filam e n t
is I. The resis tivity of the tungs t e n equals
VA
A. IL.
IL
B. V A.
VL
C. IA.
IA
D. VL
(Tot al 1 mar k )

71 5 . Which of the following is a corr e c t unit of elect r o m o tiv e force (emf)?
A. A Ω–1
B. Ω A–1
C. C J–1
D. J C –1
(Tot al 1 mar k )
71 6 . Which of the following cor r e c tly gives the resist a n c e of an ideal am m e t e r

and resist a n c e of an ideal voltm e t e r ?
Am m e t e r Volt m e t e r
A. infinite infinite
B. zero zero
C. zero infinite
D. infinite zero
(Tot al 1 mar k )
71 7 . The gravit a tion al force betw e e n two unit mass e s sepa r a t e d by a dist a n c e r
is F g . The elect ric force betw e e n two unit cha r g e s sepa r a t e d by a dista n c e
r is F e . The Coulom b const a n t is k and the unive r s al gravit a tion a l cons t a n t
is G. The ratio F g / F e is
A. one.
k
B. G.
G
C. k .
D. Gk .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

71 8 . A hollow met allic sphe r e is nega tively cha r g e d . Which of the following
corr e c tly repr e s e n t s the elect ric field?
(Tot al 1 mar k )
71 9 . In the diagr a m , a long cur r e n t- car ryin g wire is nor m al to the plan e of the
pap e r . The cur r e n t in the wire is direc t e d into the plane of the pap e r .
Which of the arrow s gives the direc tion of the mag n e ti c field at point P?
A. W
B. X
C. Y
D. Z
(Tot al 1 mar k )

72 0 . The Geige r- Mars d e n expe ri m e n t (scat t e r i n g of alpha particle s) provide d
evide nc e for
A. the natu r e of alph a particle s.
B. orbital elect r o n s in the atom.
C. very small and relatively mas sive nucle u s .
D. the existe n c e of atomic ene r gy levels.

(Tot al 1 mar k )
72 1 . A nucle a r reactio n is repr e s e n t e d by the following equa tio n.
1
0n  18908H g 197
7 9 Au  21 H
This reac tion is an exam pl e of
A. fission.
B. fusion.
C. nat u r al tran s m u t a t i o n.
D. artificial (induc e d) tran s m u t a t i o n .

(Tot al 1 mar k )

72 2 . Which of the following grap h s best shows the variation with nucleo n
num b e r N of the binding ener gy per nucleo n E ?
(Tot al 1 mar k )
72 3 . The unit of ener gy density of a fuel is
A. J m –2 .
B. J m –3 .
C. J kg –1 .
D. kg J–1 .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

72 4 . Which of the following is the best estim a t e for the over all efficiency of a
typical coal power station?
A. 5 %
B. 30 %
C. 60 %
D. 90 %
(Tot al 1 mar k )
72 5 . When sunlight is incide n t on a sola r cell an elect ric cur r e n t is prod u c e d .

This is due to
A. a tem p e r a t u r e gradi e n t within the cell.
B. very long wavele n g t h infra r e d radia tio n.
C. very shor t ultr aviolet radia tion.
D. the photo el e c t ri c effect.

(Tot al 1 mar k )
72 6 . The powe r per unit lengt h P of an oscillating wate r colum n (OWC) is due to
the action of a surface wave of amplitu d e A . Which of the following
corr e c tly relat e s P and A , and corr e c tly identifies the nat u r e of the ene r gy
of the wate r colum n?
Rela t i o n bet w e e n P Nat ur e of en e r g y

and A
A. P  A kinetic
B. P  A kinetic and pote n ti al
C. P  A2 kinetic
D. P  A2 kinetic and pote n ti al
(Tot al 1 mar k )

72 7 . The aver a g e tem p e r a t u r e of the surfac e of the Sun is about 20 time s mor e
than the aver a g e surfac e tem p e r a t u r e of the Eart h. The ave r a g e powe r per
unit are a radiat e d by the Eart h is P. The aver a g e powe r per unit are a
radi at e d by the Sun is
A. 20 P.
B. 400 P.
C. 8000 P.
D. 160 000 P.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
72 8 . Global war mi n g red uc e s the ice and snow cover on Eart h. Which of the
following corr e c tly describ e s the cha n g e s in albe d o and rat e of ene r gy
abso r p ti o n by Ear t h?
Albe d o Rat e of en e r g y
abs o r p t i o n
A. incr e a s e incr e a s e
B. decr e a s e incr e a s e
C. incr e a s e decr e a s e
D. decr e a s e decr e a s e
(Tot al 1 mar k )

72 9 . This ques tion is abou t liquid flow.
The diagr a m shows a stor a g e cont ai n e r for liquids.
The cont ai n e r is filled from above. The dista n c e betw e e n the bas e of the
cont ai n e r and the grou n d is h 0 .

The cont ai n e r , which is initially empty, is the n filled at a co n s t a n t rat e.
The heigh t h of the liquid surfa c e above the groun d is mea s u r e d as a
function of time t . The results of the mea s u r e m e n t s are show n plott e d
below.

(1)
(b) It is hypot h e s iz e d that h is direc tly propo r tio n a l to t . Sta t e and explain
whet h e r this hypot h e si s is corr e c t for the period s
(i) t = 0 to t = 120 s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) t > 120 s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(c) Use dat a from the gra p h to det e r m i n e the value of h 0 .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(d) The area of the base of the cont ai n e r is 1.8 m 2 . Deduc e that the
volum e of liquid ent e ri n g the stor a g e cont ai n e r eac h secon d is
appr oxi m a t ely 0.02 m 3 s –1 .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................

.....................
(3)
(e) The cont ain e r is compl et ely filled afte r 850 s. Calcula t e the total
volum e of the cont ai n e r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(f) The empty cont ai n e r is now filled at half the rate in (d). Using the
axes, sketc h a grap h to show the variatio n of h with t in the rang e t =
0 to t = 900 s.
(2)
(Tot al 11 mark s )
(a) A heatin g coil is to be mad e of wire of diam e t e r 3.5 × 10 –4 m. The

heat e r is to dissipa t e 980 W whe n conn e c t e d to a 230 V d.c. supply.
The mat e ri al of the wire has resistivity
1.3 × 10 –6 Ω m at the working tem p e r a t u r e of the hea t e r .
(i) Define electrical resista n c e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Calculat e the resist a n c e of the hea ti n g coil at its nor m al workin g
tem p e r a t u r e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Show that the lengt h of wire nee d e d to make the hea tin g coil is
app r oxi m a t ely 4 m.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b) Thre e identical elect ric al hea t e r s eac h provide powe r P whe n
conn e c t e d sepa r a t e ly to a supply S which has zero inte r n a l resist a n c e .
On the diag r a m below, com ple t e the circ uit by drawi n g two switc h e s
so that the power provide d by the hea t e r s may be eit h e r P or 2 P or
3 P.
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

73 1 . This ques tion is abou t force fields.
(a) Outline what is mean t by a field of forc e.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) Five particles A to E are eac h plac e d in a differe n t type of field.

Complet e the table to identify the nat u r e of the field in which eac h
particl e is situat e d .
Initi a l dire c t i o n
Char g e Dire c t i o n of
Parti c l of
on forc e on Type of fiel d
e mo t i o n of
parti c l e parti c l e
parti c l e
unch a r g e in dire ctio n of ...............................
A station a r y
d field ......
opposit e to
along direc tio n of
B nega tive direc tio n of ...............................
field
field ......
nor m a l to nor m a l to
C positive dire c tion direc tio n of ...............................
of field field ......
nor m a l to
in dire ctio n of
D positive dire c tion ...............................
field
of field ......
opposit e to
unch a r g e in dire ctio n of
E dire c tion ...............................
d field
of field ......
(5)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

73 2 . This ques tion is abou t dyna mic s and ene r gy.
A bullet of mas s 32 g is fired from a gun. The gra p h show s the variatio n of
the force F on the bullet with time t as it travels along the bar r el of the
gun.
The bullet is fired at time t = 0 and the lengt h of the bar r e l is 0.70 m.
(a) Stat e and explain why it is inapp r o p r i a t e to use the equ a tio n s = ut +
1
at 2
2 to calculat e the accele r a t io n of the bullet.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) Use the grap h to
(i) det e r m i n e the aver a g e acc ele r a t io n of the bullet durin g the final
2.0 ms of the grap h.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) show that the chan g e in mom e n t u m of the bullet, as the bullet
travels along the lengt h of the bar r el, is appr oxi m a t e ly 9 N s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(c) Use the answ e r in (b)(ii) to calcul a t e the
(i) spee d of the bullet as it leave s the bar r e l.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................

..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) aver a g e powe r delive r e d to the bullet.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(d) Use New to n’s thir d law to explain why a gun will recoil whe n a bullet
is fired.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 15 mark s )

73 3 . This ques tion is abou t fossil fuels.
(a) A Sankey diag r a m for the gen e r a t i o n of elect ric al ene r gy using fossil
fuel as the prim a r y ener gy sour c e is show n.
(i) Stat e what is mean t by a fuel.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Stat e two exam pl e s of fossil fuels.
1. .....................................................................................................
..................
2. .....................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) Explain why fossil fuels are said to be non- ren e w a b l e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iv) Use the Sank ey diag r a m to estim a t e the efficiency of prod u c tio n
of elect ri cal ener gy and explain your ans w e r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b) Despit e the fact that fossil fuels are non- ren e w a b l e and cont rib u t e to
atmo s p h e r i c pollution ther e is wides p r e a d use of suc h fuels. Sugg e s t
thr e e reas o n s for this wides p r e a d use.
1. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
3. .............................................................................................................

.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

An object is vibrati n g in air. The variation with displa c e m e n t x of the

accele r a ti o n a of the object is show n below.

(a) Stat e and explain two rea s o n s why the gra p h opposit e indica t e s that
the object is executi n g simple har m o ni c motion.
1. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(b) Use dat a from the gra p h to show tha t the frequ e n c y of oscillation is
350 Hz.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(c) Stat e the amplitu d e of the vibra tion s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(d) The motion of the object gives rise to a longitu di n a l progr e s s iv e

(travelling) soun d wave.

(i) Stat e what is mean t by a longitu di n a l progr e s sive wave.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) The spee d of the wave is 330 m s –1 . Using the answ e r in (b),
calcula t e the wavel en g t h of the wave.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 13 mark s )
73 5 . This ques tion is abou t α-particle scat t e r i n g and nucle a r proc e s s e s .
α-particle scat t e r i n g
Radiu m- 226 decays with the emiss ion of α-particle s to rado n (Rn).
(a) Complet e the nuclea r reac tion equ a tio n.
226
8 8 Ra  Rn +
(2)
(b) Expe ri m e n t a l evidenc e tha t suppo r t s a nucle a r model of the atom was
provide d by α-par ticle scat t e r i n g . The diag r a m repr e s e n t s the path of
an α-particle a s it appr o a c h e s and then rec e d e s from a sta tion a r y gold
nucleu s .
(i) On the diagr a m , draw lines to show the angle of devia tion of the
α-particle.
Label this angle D.
(1)

(ii) The gold nucleu s is repla c e d by anot h e r gold nucle u s tha t has a
large r nucleo n num b e r . Sugg e s t and explain the cha n g e , if any,
in the angle D of an α-particle with the sa m e ene r gy and
following the sam e initial path as in (b)(i).
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c) The diagr a m shows the initial pat h of an α-particle that appr o a c h e s
the gold nucle u s along a line joining their cent r e s . On the diagr a m
draw the subs e q u e n t pat h of the α-particle.
(1)
Nucle a r proce s s e s
(d) The main nucle a r proc e s s that gives rise to ene r gy emission from the
Sun may be simplified to
4H → He + ener gy.
(i) Stat e the nam e of this nucle a r proc e s s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) The total mas s of four hydro g e n (H) nuclei is 6.693 × 10 –27 kg
and the mass of a helium (He) nucle u s is 6.645 × 10 –27 kg. Show
that the ener gy relea s e d in this rea c tion is 4.3 × 10 –12 J.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) The Sun has a radius R of 7.0 × 10 8 m and emit s ene r gy at a rat e
of 3.9 × 10 26 W.
The nuclea r reactio n s take plac e in the sphe ri c al core of the Sun
of radius 0.25 R . Use thes e dat a and the ans w e r in (d)(ii) to
det e r m i n e the num b e r of nucle a r rea c tion s occur ri n g per cubic
met r e per secon d in the core of the Sun.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 12 mark s )
73 6 . This ques tion is abou t wave powe r.
(a) Outline how the ener gy of a wave can be conve r t e d to elect ric al
ener gy.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

(2)

(b) A wave on the surfac e of wate r is assu m e d to be a squa r e- wave of
heigh t 2 A , as show n.
The wave has wavelen g t h λ, spe e d v and has a wavefro n t of lengt h L .

For this wave,
(i) show that the gravita tion a l pote n ti al ene r gy E P stor e d in one
wavele n g t h of the wave is given by
1
A 2 λgρL
EP = 2
wher e ρ is the density of the wat e r and g is the acc ele r a t io n of

free fall.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) dedu c e that the gravit a tion a l wave powe r P per unit lengt h of the
wavefro n t is given by
1
P= 2 A 2 vg ρ
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

(2)

(c) The density of sea- wate r is 1.2 × 10 3 kg m –3 . Using the expr e s si o n in
(b)(ii), estim a t e the gravit a tio n a l powe r per met r e lengt h availa ble in a
wave of height 0.60 m.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(d) In practice a wat e r wave is appr oxi m a t e ly sinus oid al in cross- section.
Outline whet h e r a sine wave of the sam e heigh t as in (b) tra n sf e r s a
grea t e r or a smaller amou n t of powe r tha n tha t derive d in (b)(ii).
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(e) List two adva n t a g e s of the utiliza tion of wave powe r rath e r tha n
photovolt aic cells for the gene r a t i o n of elect ric powe r.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 13 mark s )
73 7 . This ques tio n is about the albe d o of the Ear t h.
(a) Outline the mech a ni s m by which a gas, such as carbo n dioxide,

absor b s infra- red radiation.

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) Stat e, with refer e n c e to your ans w e r in (a), why car bo n dioxide is
know n as a gree n h o u s e gas.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(c) Stat e the na m e of anot h e r gre e n h o u s e gas.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(d) In the last fifty year s the amou n t of car bo n dioxide in the Eart h’s
atmo s p h e r e has incr e a s e d signific a n tly. Explain
(i) why this incr e a s e could accou n t for global war mi n g .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) what effect this has had on the ave r a g e albe do of the Eart h.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................

..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(e) It has bee n estim a t e d that doubling the amou n t of car bo n dioxide in
the Ear t h’s atmo s p h e r e chan g e s the albe do of the Eart h by 0.01. Use
the data to show that this doubling will lead to a cha n g e of abou t 3 W
m –2 in the inten si ty being reflec t e d by the Eart h into spac e .
Averag e inten sity rec eive d at Eart h from the Sun = 340 W
m –2
Averag e albedo = 0.30
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(f) Stat e on e reas o n why the answ e r to (e) is an estim a t e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tot al 12 mark s )
73 8 . This ques tion is abou t the eye and sight.
(a) A whit e object is illumin a t e d with red light and gre e n light at the sam e
time. Stat e the colour that the objec t will appe a r to an obse rv e r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................

(1)

(b) The aver a g e wavelen g t h of red light is 650 nm and that of blue light is
488 nm. The refra c tive index of wate r is 1.3. Jim argu e s tha t since
wavelen g t h s in wat e r comp a r e d with thos e in air are redu c e d by a
factor of 1.3, a red cricket ball plac e d und e r wate r shoul d appe a r to
be blue to a pers o n with nor m al sight. Sugg e s t why Jim’s rea s o ni n g is
incor r e c t .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 3 mark s )
A string is att ac h e d betw e e n two rigid suppo r t s and is mad e to vibra t e at

its fund a m e n t a l frequ e n c y (first har m o ni c) f.
The diagr a m shows the displac e m e n t of the string at t = 0.
(a) Draw the displace m e n t of the string at time
1
(i) t = 4f
(1)
1
(ii) t = 2f

(1)

(b) The dist an c e betw e e n the suppo r t s is 1.0 m. A wave in the strin g
travels at a spee d of
240 m s –1 . Calculat e the frequ e n c y of the vibra tion of the string.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c) An organ pipe that is open at one end has the sa m e fund a m e n t a l
frequ e n c y as the string in part (b). The spee d of sound in air is 330 m
s –1 . Dete r mi n e the lengt h of the pipe.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
A station a r y louds p e a k e r emits soun d of frequ e n c y of 1000 Hz. Nadin e

att ac h e s the louds p e a k e r to a string. She move s the louds p e a k e r in a
horizont al circle above her hea d at a spe e d of
30 m s –1 . The spee d of sound in air is 330 m s –1 .
An observ e r is stan di n g well away from Nadin e .
(a) Explain why the sound hea r d by the obse rv e r cha n g e s reg ul a rly.
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(b) Deter m i n e the maxim u m freq u e n c y of the sound hea r d by the
obse rv e r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
(a) Stat e what is mea n t by unpola riz e d light.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) A bea m of unpola riz e d light of inte nsity 1.0 W m –2 is incide n t on an

ideal polarizin g filter.
Stat e the value of the inte n sity of the tra n s m i t t e d light. Explain your
ans w e r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................

.....................
(2)

(c) Outline how polarize d light may be use d to mea s u r e the conc e n t r a t i o n
of a suga r solution.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

(a) A clean met al surfac e in a vacuu m is illumin a t e d with monoc h r o m a t i c

light, res ultin g in the emission of elec t r o n s from the surfa c e .

(i) On the axes, sket ch a gra p h to show how the maxim u m kinetic
ene r gy K of the elect r o n varies with the inte nsity I of the light.
(1)

(ii) Explain the shap e of the gra p h you have dra w n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(b) The wavele n g t h of the incide n t light in (a) is 400 nm. The maxim u m
kinetic ener gy of the emitt e d elect r o n s is 2.1 eV. Dete r mi n e the work
function of the met al.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

74 3 . This ques tion is abou t the wave nat u r e of matt e r and qua n t u m ene r gy
stat e s.
(a) Descri b e what is mean t by the de Broglie hypot h e si s.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) An elect r o n is confined to one dime n s io n in a “box” of lengt h L . The de
Broglie waves associa t e d with the particl e form sta n di n g wave s in the
2L
box with wavelen g t h s given by n whe r e n is = 1, 2, 3, etc .
Show that the ene r gy levels E n for the par ticle are given by E n =
n2h2
(8m L2 ) wher e h is Planck’s const a n t .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(c) The elect r o n make s a tran sitio n from the ene r gy sta t e given by n = 4
to n = 2. The lengt h L = 1.3 × 10 –9 m. Calcula t e the
(i) ene r gy of the photon emitt e d .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) wavele n g t h of the photon emitt e d.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

74 4 . This ques tion is abou t nuclea r physics and radioa c tive dec ay.
(a) Define the decay consta n t of a radioa c tive nuclide.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) (i) Plutoniu m- 239 (Pu- 239) has a half- life of 2.4 × 10 4
year s. Show that the dec ay cons t a n t of Pu- 239 is appr oxi m a t e l y 3
× 10 –5 year –1 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Calculat e the time take n for the activity of a fres hly- pre p a r e d
sam pl e of Pu- 239 to fall to 0.1 % of its initial value.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )

74 5 . This ques tion is abou t data stor a g e .
(a) With refer e n c e to binary num b e r s , define the ter m bit and explain
what is mea n t by least significa n t bit.
Bit:
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Leas t significa n t bit:
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(b) An acous ti c signal is conve r t e d into an analog u e volta g e signal. The
analog u e signal is then conve r t e d to a digital signal. The maxim u m
value of the voltag e signal is 20 V.
(i) Stat e the value of the least significa n t bit of the bina ry num b e r
that repr e s e n t s the num b e r 20.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Outline how the analog u e signal afte r conve r sio n to a digital
signal may be stor e d on a comp a c t disc (CD).
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) Sugg e s t on e implication tha t the stor a g e of inform a t io n in digital form
on a CD may have in conn e c tio n with environ m e n t a l issue s.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

74 6 . This ques tion is abou t capacit a n c e and cha r g e- couple d device s (CCD).
(a) Define capacita nc e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) Outline how light that is incide n t on a pixel on the surfa c e of a CCD
can prod u c e a pote n ti al differ e n c e acros s the pixel.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) The num b e r of photo n s incide n t on one pixel of a CCD for a cert ai n
period of time is
1.2 × 10 4 . The capacit a n c e of the pixel is 22 pF and the qua n t u m
efficiency is 75 %.
Deter m i n e the chan g e in pote n ti al differ e n c e acros s the pixel.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

74 7 . This ques tion is abou t oper a t io n a l amplifie r s.
(a) The diagr a m shows a circuit tha t uses an oper a t io n a l amplifie r as an

inver ti n g amplifier.
The point P is a virtual ear t h, tha t is at the sam e pote n ti al (0 V) as the

eart h line.

(i) Stat e the two prop e r ti e s of the ope r a tio n a l amplifier which make
P a virtual ear t h.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) In the circuit R f = 100 k Ω and R in = 10 k Ω. Calcula t e the gain of
the a mplifier.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) The diagr a m shows a circuit tha t uses an oper a t io n a l amplifie r as a
non- inver tin g Sch mit t trigg e r .
In the situatio n show n, the pote n ti al at point X is 2.0 V and the outpu t
poten ti al V out is at its minim u m value of –10 V. Show that for the
outpu t pote n ti al to switch to its maxim u m value of +1 0 V

(i) the curr e n t in the resis to r s R 1 and R 2 is 0.08 mA.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) V in mus t rise to 5.8 V.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

74 8 . This ques tion is abou t simult a n e i ty and lengt h mea s u r e m e n t .
(a) One of the two post ul a t e s of special rela tivity sta t e s that “the laws of
physics are the sam e for all iner tial obse rv e r s ”. Sta t e the othe r
post ul a t e.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) Tom and Barb a r a are two obse rv e r s eac h in a sepa r a t e refe r e n c e
fram e. The refer e n c e fram e s are moving rela tive to eac h othe r in the
sam e str ai g h t line with cons t a n t velocity.
Two lamps L 1 and L 2 are ope r a t e d by the sam e switc h. Tom is at the
midpoint betw e e n the lamps as me a s u r e d in his fram e of refer e n c e .
The lam ps and the switch are at rest rela tive to Tom.
Tom switch e s on the lamps and to him they light simult a n e o u s ly.
Explain, bas e d on your answ e r to (a), why the lamps will not light
simult a n e o u s ly, accor di n g to Barb a r a .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(c) Tom meas u r e s the sepa r a t io n of L 1 and L 2 to be 1.5 m whe r e a s
Barb a r a meas u r e s the sepa r a t i o n to be 0.5 m.
(i) Stat e and explain which obse rv e r me a s u r e s the prop e r lengt h

betw e e n L 1 and L 2 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Calculat e, in ter m s of the free spac e spee d of light c , the relative
spee d betw e e n Tom and Barb a r a .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(iii) Sketc h a gra p h to show how the relative spee d v betw e e n Tom
and Barb a r a varies with the lengt h L betw e e n L 1 and L 2 as
meas u r e d by Barb a r a . The dat a point (1.5,0) is shown. On the v
axis, label the point v = c .
(3)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

74 9 . This ques tion is abou t funda m e n t a l inte r a c ti o n s and elem e n t a r y particle s.
(a) In the table identify the excha n g e par ticle(s) associa t e d with the two
funda m e n t a l inter a c tio n s given.
Int er a c t i o n Exc h a n g e parti c l e ( s )

Elect r o- weak
Stron g
(2)

(b) Stat e why the exch a n g e par ticle s are known as elem e n t a r y particl e s.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(c) An exch a n g e particle associ a t e d with the weak inte r a c ti o n has a mas s
of about 90 GeVc –2 . Estim a t e the life- time of the particle.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(d) The diagr a m is a Feyn m a n diagr a m tha t repr e s e n t s the stron g
inter a c ti o n betw e e n qua r k s.

(i) Identify the excha n g e par ticl e X.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Explain why the quar k s have a colour associa t e d with the m .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

75 0 . This ques tion is abou t the star Anta r e s .
The star Antar e s is a red supe r gi a n t sta r in the const ell a tio n Scor pi u s.
(a) Descri b e thre e char a c t e r i s ti c s of a red supe r gi a n t sta r and stat e what
is mea n t by a const ella tion.
Red supe r gi a n t star:
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Cons t ella tio n:
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)

(b) The appa r e n t magni t u d e of Antar e s is + 1.1 and its absolut e
magni t u d e is –5.3.
(i) Disting ui s h betw e e n appa r e n t mag ni t u d e and absolut e

mag ni t u d e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Show that the dista n c e of Antar e s from Eart h is 3.9 × 10 7 AU.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(iii) Stat e the nam e of the met ho d tha t is use d to mea s u r e the
dist a n c e of Antar e s from Eart h.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(c) The appa r e n t bright n e s s of Antar e s is 4.3 × 10 –11 time s the app a r e n t
bright n e s s of the Sun.
(i) Define appar e n t bright n e s s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Using the answ e r to (b)(ii), show that Anta r e s is 6.5 × 10 4 time s
mor e lumino u s than the Sun.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 14 mark s )

75 1 . The Moon orbits the Ear t h.
Which of the following diag r a m s corr e c tly rep r e s e n t s the force(s) acting on
the Moon?
(Tot al 1 mar k )

75 2 . A stone is throw n horizon t ally from the top of a cliff with an initial spe e d v.
The time of flight of the ston e is t and its rang e R . Air resis t a n c e is
negligible.
For a ston e that is throw n horizon t a lly from the top of the cliff with an
initial spee d 3 v , which of the following is corr e c t ?
Tim e of Ran g e
flig h t
A. t R
B. 3t 3R
C. t 3R
D. 3t R
(Tot al 1 mar k )

75 3 . A char g e d par ticle is moved at const a n t spe e d betw e e n two points in an
elect ric field. The work done betw e e n the two points is det e r m i n e d by the
A. value of the char g e and the pat h take n.
B. value of the char g e .
C. pat h take n.
D. spee d.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

75 4 . The diagr a m below rep r e s e n t s equipot e n t i al lines of a gravit a tio n al field.
Which of the following is the direc tion and str e n g t h of the field at point P?
Dire c t i o n Stre n g t h
A. ← 5.0 N kg –1
B. → 5.0 N kg –1
C. ← 13 N kg –1
D. → 13 N kg –1
(Tot al 1 mar k )

75 5 . The tem p e r a t u r e of an ideal gas is a mea s u r e of the molec ul e s’ aver a g e
A. velocity.
B. mom e n t u m .
C. kinetic ener gy.
D. frequ e n c y of collisions.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

75 6 . For an ideal gas of const a n t mas s the pres s u r e is always propo r ti o n al to
A. density and volum e.
B. density and tem p e r a t u r e .
C. volum e and tem p e r a t u r e .
D. volum e only.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

75 7 . Which of the following stat e m e n t s is in agr e e m e n t with the secon d law of
ther m o d y n a m i c s ?
A. It is possible to continu o u s ly conve r t the r m a l ene r gy fully into work.
B. In nat u r al proc es s e s , local ent r o py must incr e a s e .
C. Ther m al ener gy will not flow by itself from cold to hot bodie s.
D. The entr o py in a closed syste m tend s to dec r e a s e .

(Tot al 1 mar k )

75 8 . For a syste m execu ti n g simple har m o ni c motion, the resto ri n g forc e acting
on the syste m is propo r tio n al to the
A. displac e m e n t of the syste m from equilibri u m .
B. amplit u d e of oscillation.
C. elastic poten t i al ener gy.
D. frequ e n c y of oscillation.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

75 9 . Which of the following stat e m e n t s is true for a sta n di n g wave on a string?
A. No ener gy is tran sf e r r e d along the string.
B. The maxim u m kinetic ene r gy of eac h seg m e n t of the strin g is

propo r tio n al to the amplit u d e of the seg m e n t .
C. Each seg m e n t of the string oscillat e s with differ e n t pha s e and

frequ e n c y.
D. The amplit u d e along the string varies with time.

(Tot al 1 mar k )

76 0 . A siren at rest emits a sound of frequ e n c y f 0 . The spe e d of soun d in air is v .
The siren moves away from an obse rv e r at rest rela tive to the sire n in a
str ai g h t line with cons t a n t spee d v s .
The observ e r mea s u r e s a frequ e n c y lowe r tha n f 0 bec a u s e the
A. spee d at which the sound moves relative to the obse rv e r is v – v s .
B. spee d at which the sound moves relative to the obse rv e r is v s – v .
vs
C. wavelen g t h meas u r e d by the obse rv e r is smalle r by a factor v .
vs
D. wavelen g t h meas u r e d by the obse rv e r is gre a t e r by a factor v .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

76 1 . In an elect r o n micros co p e, high ene r gy elect r o n s are use d in orde r to
incr e a s e the
A. interfe r e n c e effect s.
B. diffraction effects.
C. resolving powe r of the micros c o p e .
D. magnifying power of the micros c o p e .

(Tot al 1 mar k )

76 2 . The diagr a m repr e s e n t s a beam of unpola riz e d light incide n t on a diam o n d.
The refr ac tive index of the diamo n d is n .
At an angle θ p , the bea m reflect e d from the dia mo n d is plane pola riz e d
nor m al to the pag e. The angle θ p is
A. tan –1 n .
1
 
B. tan –1  n  .
1
 
C. sin –1  n  .
1
 
D. cos –1  n  .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

76 3 . Two polarizin g shee t s have plane s of polariza tion tha t are initially par allel.
The incomin g light on sheet 1 is unpola riz e d. The inte nsity of the light
I
tran s mi t t e d is I. To red uc e the inte n sity to 2 , which shee t must be rota t e d
and thro u g h what angle?
Sh e e t to be Rot a t i o n an gl e
rota t e d
 1 
A. 1 only  
–1  2 
θ = cos
1
B. 2 only  
θ = cos –1  2 
 1 
C. 1 or 2  
–1  2 
θ = cos
1
D. 1 or 2  
θ = cos –1  2 
(Tot al 1 mar k )
76 4 . The elect r o nv olt is a unit of
A. force.
B. poten ti al differe n c e .
C. ener gy.
D. elect ric field str e n g t h .

(Tot al 1 mar k )

76 5 . A disc of radius r is place d in a unifor m ma g n e ti c field. The ma g nit u d e of
the field str e n g t h is B and it make s an angle θ to the plane of the disc.
The mag n e t i c flux linking the disc is
A. π r2B .
B. π r 2 B sin θ.
C. π r 2 B cos θ.
D. π r 2 B tan θ.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
76 6 . A magn e t i c flux linking a wire loop cha n g e s sinusoid ally with time. The emf
induce d in the loop chan g e s sinusoi d ally
A. in phas e with the chan gi n g flux.
B. out of phas e with the chan gi n g flux by a qua r t e r period.
C. out of phas e with the chan gi n g flux by a third of a period.
D. out of phas e with the chan gi n g flux by half a period.

(Tot al 1 mar k )

76 7 . The maxim u m outp u t voltag e of a gen e r a t o r is V 0 . The freq u e n c y of
rota tio n of the gen e r a t o r coil is doubl e d. What is the new maxim u m outp u t
voltag e?
A. V0
B. 2 V0
C. 2 V0
D. 4 V0
(Tot al 1 mar k )
76 8 . A photon has
A. ener gy and mom e n t u m .
B. no ener gy.
C. ener gy only.
D. no mom e n t u m .
(Tot al 1 mar k )
76 9 . The de Broglie hypot h e s i s applies to
A. nucleo n s only.
B. elect r o n s only.
C. photon s only.
D. all particles .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

77 0 . In the Schr ö di n g e r model of the hydro g e n atom a wavefu n c tio n of
amplitu d e A is assign e d to the elect r o n. The prob a bility of locating the
elect r o n at a region of space within the atom is propo r tio n a l to
A. A –1 .
B. A.
C. A.
D. A2.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
77 1 . Which of the following lists the particle s associa t e d with radioa c tive dec ay
in orde r of incr e a s i n g ionizing powe r ?
A. α, β, γ
B. γ, α, β
C. β, α, γ
D. γ, β, α
(Tot al 1 mar k )

77 2 . The diagr a m is a sche m a t i c rep r e s e n t a t i o n of the Bainbri d g e mass
spect r o m e t e r . Positive ions are inject e d betw e e n the plat e s of the spee d
select o r .
Which of the following cor r e c tly shows the dire c tion of the magn e t i c fields
B 1 and B 2 ?
B1 B2
A. out of the pag e out of the page
B. into the page into the pag e
C. out of the pag e into the pag e
D. into the page out of the page
(Tot al 1 mar k )

77 3 . The desig n of a ther m al fission rea c t o r includ e s the following.
I. Fuel rods
II. Contr ol rods
III. Mode r a t o r
Which par t(s) help maint ai n a const a n t rate of fission in the cor e of a
react o r ?
A. I, II and III
B. I and II only
C. II only
D. III only
(Tot al 1 mar k )
77 4 . The binding ener gy of a nucle u s is define d to be the
A. ener gy relea s e d when a nucle u s is form e d from its individu al

constit u e n t s .
B. ener gy relea s e d when the nucle u s is sepa r a t e d into its individu al

constit u e n t s .
C. total ene r gy of the nucle u s.
D. total ene r gy of the proto n s inside the nucle u s .

(Tot al 1 mar k )
77 5 . Most climat e scientis t s agr e e that the enh a n c e d gre e n h o u s e effect is due to
A. cyclical chan g e s of the Eart h’s orbit.
B. volcanic activity.
C. the bur ni n g of fossil fuels.
D. incr e a s e d solar activity.

(Tot al 1 mar k )

77 6 . A comp a c t disc playe r uses lase r light to rea d a disc. The heigh t of one pit
1
on the CD is about 4 of the wavele n g t h of the lase r light. The light
illumin a t e s the edge of a pit. Which of the following is corr e c t with
refer e n c e to the interf e r e n c e of the light and the bina ry infor m a t io n
regist e r e d ?
Int erf e r e n c e Bin ary

infor m a t i o n
A. cons t r u c tive 0
B. des t r u c tive 1
C. cons t r u c tive 1
D. des t r u c tive 0
(Tot al 1 mar k )
77 7 . Light incide n t on a pixel elem e n t in a cha r g e- coupl e d devic e (CCD)

produ c e s elect r o n- hole pair s.
This is due to
A. the photo el e c t ri c effect.
B. a tem p e r a t u r e gradi e n t in the semicon d u c t o r lattic e.
C. elect r o d e s acros s the surfa c e of the pixel ele m e n t .
D. a chemic al reac tio n on the oxide insul at o r .

(Tot al 1 mar k )
77 8 . A CCD cam e r a is used to take the pictu r e of an object of lengt h 30 m. The

imag e of the object on the chip mea s u r e s 0.03 mm. The ma gnific a tio n is
A. 10 6 .
B. 10 3 .
C. 10 –3 .
D. 10 –6 .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

77 9 . This ques tion is abou t liquid flow.
The diagr a m shows a stor a g e cont ai n e r for liquids.
The cont ai n e r is filled from above. The dista n c e betw e e n the bas e of the
cont ai n e r and the grou n d is h 0 .

The cont ai n e r , which is initially empty, is the n filled at a co n s t a n t rat e.
The heigh t h of the liquid surfa c e above the groun d is mea s u r e d as a
function of time t . The results of the mea s u r e m e n t s are show n plott e d
below.

(1)
(b) Stat e and explain whet h e r h is direc tly propo r tio n a l to t for the
period s
(i) t = 0 to t = 120 s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) t > 120 s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(c) Use dat a from the gra p h to det e r m i n e the value of h 0 .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(d) The area of the base of the cont ai n e r is 1.8 m 2 . Deduc e that the
volum e of liquid ent e ri n g the stor a g e cont ai n e r eac h secon d is
appr oxi m a t ely 0.02 m 3 s –1 .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................

.....................
(3)
(e) The cont ain e r is compl et ely filled afte r 850 s. Calcula t e the total
volum e of the cont ai n e r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(f) It is hypot h e s iz e d that for t > 400 s the relation betw e e n t and h is of
the form
h = kt n
whe r e k and n are const a n t s .
(i) Outline how, using a gra p hi c al tec h ni q u e , you would verify this
hypot h e s i s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Explain how you would det e r m i n e the value of n .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(g) The empty cont ai n e r is now filled at half the rate in (d). Using the
axes, sketc h a grap h to show the variatio n of h with t in the rang e t =
0 to t = 900 s.
(2)
(Tot al 14 mark s )
(a) A heatin g coil is to be mad e of wire of diam e t e r 3.5 × 10 –4 m. The

heat e r is to dissipa t e 980 W whe n conn e c t e d to a 230 V d.c. supply.
The mat e ri al of the wire has resistivity
1.3 × 10 –6 Ω m at the working tem p e r a t u r e of the hea t e r .
(i) Define electrical resista n c e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Calculat e the resist a n c e of the hea ti n g coil at its nor m al workin g
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Show that the lengt h of wire nee d e d to make the hea tin g coil is
app r oxi m a t ely 4 m.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b) Thre e identical elect ric al hea t e r s eac h provide powe r P whe n
conn e c t e d sepa r a t e ly to a supply S which has zero inte r n a l resist a n c e .
On the diag r a m below, com ple t e the circ uit by drawi n g two switc h e s
so that the power provide d by the hea t e r s may be eit h e r P or 2 P or
3 P.
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

78 1 . This ques tion is abou t force fields.
(a) Outline what is mean t by a field of forc e.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) Thre e particles A, B, and C are eac h plac e d in a differ e n t type of field.
Complet e the table to identify the nat u r e of the field in which eac h
particl e is situat e d .
Initi a l dire c t i o n
Char g e Dire c t i o n of
Parti c l of
on forc e on Type of fiel d
e mo t i o n of
parti c l e parti c l e
parti c l e
unch a r g e in dire ctio n of ...............................
A station a r y
d field ......
opposit e to
along direc tio n of
B nega tive direc tio n of ...............................
field
field ......
nor m a l to nor m a l to
C positive dire c tion direc tio n of ...............................
of field field ......
(3)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
78 2 . This ques tion is abou t wave powe r.
(a) Outline how the ener gy of a wave can be conve r t e d to elect ric al
ener gy.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................

.....................
(2)

(b) A wave on the surfac e of wate r is assu m e d to be a squa r e- wave of
heigh t 2 A , as show n.
The wave has wavelen g t h λ, spe e d v and has a wavefro n t of lengt h L .

For this wave,
(i) show that the gravita tion a l pote n ti al ene r gy E P stor e d in one
wavele n g t h of the wave is given by
1
E P = 2 A 2 λg ρL
wher e ρ is the density of the wat e r and g is the acc ele r a t io n of

free fall.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) dedu c e that the gravit a tion a l wave powe r P per unit lengt h of the
wavefro n t is given by
1
P = 2 A 2 vg ρ
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) The density of sea- wate r is 1.2 × 10 3 kg m –3 . Using the expr e s si o n in
(b)(ii), estim a t e the gravit a tio n a l powe r per met r e lengt h availa ble in a
wave of height 0.60 m.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(d) In practice a wat e r wave is appr oxi m a t e ly sinus oid al in cross- section.
Outline whet h e r a sine wave of the sam e heigh t as in (b) tra n sf e r s a
grea t e r or a smaller amou n t of powe r tha n tha t derive d in (b)(ii).
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 11 mark s )
78 3 . This ques tion is abou t char g e- couple d device s (CCD).
(a) With refer e n c e to a CCD, stat e what is mea n t by a pixel.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) Outline how light falling on a CCD leads to an elect ric al signal being
prod u c e d by a pixel.
.................................................................................................................

.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c) Stat e on e other piece of infor m a t io n tha t nee d s to be collec t e d, in

addition to the elect ric al signal in (b), in orde r that an image may be
form e d.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(d) Sugg e s t two advan t a g e s of a CCD in comp a ri s o n with a photog r a p h i c

film for imag e prod u c tio n.
1 ..............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
2 ..............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

78 4 . This ques tion is abou t dyna mic s and ene r gy.
A bullet of mas s 32 g is fired from a gun. The gra p h show s the variatio n of
the force F on the bullet with time t as it travels along the bar r el of the
gun.
The bullet is fired at time t = 0 and the lengt h of the bar r e l is 0.70 m.
(a) Stat e and explain why it is inapp r o p r i a t e to use the equ a tio n s = ut +
1
2 at 2 to calculat e the accele r a t io n of the bullet.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) Use the grap h to
(i) det e r m i n e the aver a g e acc ele r a t io n of the bullet durin g the final
2.0 ms of the grap h.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) show that the chan g e in mom e n t u m of the bullet, as the bullet
travels along the lengt h of the bar r el, is appr oxi m a t e ly 9 N s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(c) Use the answ e r in (b)(ii) to calcul a t e the
(i) spee d of the bullet as it leave s the bar r e l.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................

..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) aver a g e powe r delive r e d to the bullet.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(d) Use New to n’s thir d law to explain why a gun will recoil whe n a bullet
is fired.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 15 mark s )
78 5 . This ques tion is abou t motion of a cha r g e d particl e in an elect ric field.
(a) An α-par ticle of mas s 4 u and cha r g e +2 e is accele r a t e d from rest in a

vacuu m thro u g h a poten ti al differ e n c e of 2.4 kV. Show that the final
s peed of the α-par ticl e is
4.8 × 10 5 m s –1 .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................

.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) The α-particle i s travelling in a direc tion par allel to and mid- way
betw e e n two par allel met al plat e s.
(not to scale)
The met al plat es are of lengt h 2.4 cm and their sepa r a ti o n is 0.80 cm.
The poten t i al differ e n c e betw e e n the plate s is 600 V. The elect ric field
is unifor m in the region betw e e n the plat e s and is zero outside this
region.
(i) Calculat e the magni t u d e of the elect ric field betw e e n the plat e s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Show that the m agnit u d e of the accele r a ti o n of the α-particl e by

the elect ric fiel d is 3.6 × 10 12 m s –2 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c) (i) Calculat e the tim e take n for the α-par ticle to travel a
horizont al di stanc e of 2.4 cm par allel to the plat e s.
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Use your answ e r s in (b)(ii) and (c)(i) to dedu c e whet h e r , as the α-
par ticl e pa sses betw e e n the plat e s, it will hit one of the plate s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
78 6 . This ques tion is abou t ideal gas e s.
(a) The atom s or molecul e s of an ideal gas are assu m e d to be identic al

har d elas tic sphe r e s that have negligible volum e com p a r e d with the
volum e of the cont ai nin g vess el.
(i) Stat e two furth e r ass u m p ti o n s of the kinetic theory of an ideal

gas.
1. .....................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
2. .....................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Sugg e s t why only the aver a g e kine tic ene r gy of the molec ul e s of
an ideal gas is relat e d to the inte r n a l ene r gy of the gas.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................

..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(b) An ideal gas is cont ai n e d in a cylinde r by me a n s of a frictionle s s
piston.
At tem p e r a t u r e 290 K and pre s s u r e 4.8 × 10 5 Pa, the gas has volum e
9.2 ×1 0 –4 m 3 .
(i) Calculat e the num b e r of mole s of the gas.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) The gas is comp r e s s e d isoth e r m a lly to a volum e of 2.3 × 10 –4 m 3 .

Dete r mi n e the pres s u r e p of the gas.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) The gas is now heat e d at const a n t volum e to a tem p e r a t u r e of

420 K. Show that the pres s u r e of the gas is now 2.8 × 10 6 Pa.
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(c) The gas in (b)(iii) is now expa n d e d adia b a ti c ally so that its
tem p e r a t u r e and pres s u r e ret u r n to 290 K and 4.8 × 10 5 Pa
res p e c t ively. This stat e is show n below as point A.
(i) Using the axes above sket c h a pre s s u r e - volum e ( p -V ) diag r a m for
the chan g e s in (b)(ii), (b)(iii) and (c).
(3)
(ii) On your diagr a m in (c)(i), identify with the lette r H any cha n g e
or chan g e s wher e the gas does exte r n al work on its
sur r o u n di n g s .
(1)
(iii) Describ e how a p- V diagr a m may be use d to estim a t e a value for

the useful work done in one cycle of ope r a tio n of an engine .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(Tot al 16 mark s )
78 7 . This ques tion is abou t fossil fuels.
(a) Stat e two exam pl e s of fossil fuels.
1. .............................................................................................................
.....................
2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) Explain why fossil fuels are said to be non- rene w a bl e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) A Sankey diag r a m for the gen e r a t i o n of elect ric al ene r gy using fossil
fuel as the prim a r y ener gy sour c e is show n.
Use the Sankey diagr a m to estim a t e the efficiency of produ c tio n of

elect ric al ener gy and explain your answ e r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(d) Despit e the fact that fossil fuels are non- ren e w a b l e and cont rib u t e to
atmo s p h e r i c pollution ther e is wides p r e a d use of suc h fuels. Sugg e s t
thr e e reas o n s for this wides p r e a d use.
1. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
3. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

An object is vibrati n g in air. The variation with displa c e m e n t x of the

accele r a ti o n a of the object is show n below.

(a) Stat e and explain two rea s o n s why the gra p h opposit e indica t e s that
the object is executi n g simple har m o ni c motion.
1. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(b) Use dat a from the gra p h to show tha t the frequ e n c y of oscillation is
350 Hz.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(c) The motion of the object gives rise to a longitu di n a l progr e s s iv e

(travelling) soun d wave.
(i) Stat e what is mean t by a longitu di n a l progr e s sive wave.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) The spee d of the wave is 330 m s –1 . Using the answ e r in (b),
calcula t e the wavel en g t h of the wave.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 12 mark s )
78 9 . This ques tion is abou t the diffrac tio n of light.
(a) (i) Describ e wha t is mea n t by the diffrac tion of light.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) A par allel bea m of monoc h r o m a t i c light from a lase r is incide n t
on a nar r o w slit.
The diffract e d light eme r gi n g from the slit is incide n t on a
scre e n .
(not to scale)
The cent r e of the diffrac tion pat t e r n produ c e d on the scre e n is at

C. On the axes sketc h a gra p h to show how the inte n si ty I of the
light on the scre e n varies with the dista n c e d from C.
(3)
(iii) The slit width is 0.40 mm and it is 1.9 m from the scre e n . The
wavele n g t h of the light is 620 nm. Dete r m i n e the width of the
cent r al maxim u m on the scre e n .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(b) (i) When two sepa r a t e lase r s are use d as sour c e s , the
imag es of the slit form e d by the light from each laser are
resolve d. Stat e what is mea n t by the ter m resolve d in this
cont ext.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) A car, with its two hea dlig h t s switc h e d on, is appr o a c h i n g an
obse rv e r who has good eyesigh t . Outline why, at a long dista n c e
from the obs erv e r , the imag e s of the hea dligh t s of the car are not
resolve d by the obse rv e r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(Tot al 13 mark s )
79 0 . This ques tion is abou t α-par ticle scat t e r i n g and nucle a r proc e s s e s .
Radiu m- 226 decays with the emiss ion of α-particle s to rado n (Rn).

(a) Complet e the nuclea r reac tion equ a tio n.
226
8 8 Ra → Rn +
(2)

(b) The decay const a n t of radiu m- 226 is 1.4 × 10 –11 s –1 and eac h em itte d
α-par ticle ha s an ene r gy of 7.6 × 10 –13 J.
(i) Calculat e the half- life of radiu m- 226.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Dete r mi n e the rat e, in watts, of emission of ene r gy from 1.0 g of

radi u m- 226.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(c) Expe ri m e n t a l evidenc e tha t suppo r t s a nucle a r model of the atom was
provide d by α-par ticle scat t e r i n g . The diag r a m repr e s e n t s the path of
an α-particle a s it appr o a c h e s and then rec e d e s from a sta tion a r y gold
nucleu s .
(i) On the diagr a m , draw lines to s how the angle of deviation of the

α-particle.
Label this angle D.
(1)

(ii) The gold nucleu s is repla c e d by anot h e r gold nucle u s tha t has a
large r nucleo n num b e r . Sugg e s t and explain the cha n g e , if any,
in the angle D of an α-particle with the sa m e ene r gy and
following the sam e initial path as in (c)(i).
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(d) Estim a t e the dista n c e of close s t app r o a c h to a gold nucle u s ( Z = 79) of

an α-particle wit h an initial kine tic ene r gy of 4.0 MeV.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 13 mark s )
79 1 . This ques tion is abou t the albedo of the Eart h.
(a) Outline the mech a ni s m by which a gas, such as carbo n dioxide,

absor b s infra- red radiation.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) Stat e, with refer e n c e to your ans w e r in (a), why car bo n dioxide is
know n as a gree n h o u s e gas.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(c) Stat e the na m e of anot h e r gre e n h o u s e gas.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(d) In the last fifty year s the amou n t of car bo n dioxide in the Eart h’s
atmo s p h e r e has incr e a s e d signific a n tly. Explain
(i) why this incr e a s e could accou n t for global war mi n g .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) what effect this has had on the ave r a g e albe do of the Eart h.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

(3)

(e) It has bee n estim a t e d that doubling the amou n t of car bo n dioxide in
the Ear t h’s atmo s p h e r e chan g e s the albe do of the Eart h by 0.01. Use
the data to show that this doubling will lead to a cha n g e of abou t 3 W
m –2 in the inten si ty being reflec t e d by the Eart h into spac e .
Averag e inten sity rec eive d at Eart h from the Sun = 340 W
m –2
Averag e albedo = 0.30
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(f) Stat e on e reas o n why the answ e r to (e) is an estim a t e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tot al 12 mark s )

79 2 . This ques tion is abou t the star Anta r e s .
The star Antar e s is a red supe r gi a n t sta r in the const ell a tio n Scor pi u s.
(a) Descri b e thre e char a c t e r i s ti c s of a red supe r gi a n t sta r and stat e what
is mea n t by a const ella tion.
Red supe r gi a n t star:
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Cons t ella tio n:
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(b) The appa r e n t magni t u d e of Antar e s is + 1.1 and its absolut e

magni t u d e is –5.3.
(i) Disting ui s h betw e e n appa r e n t mag ni t u d e and absolut e

mag ni t u d e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Show that the dista n c e of Antar e s from Eart h is 3.9 × 10 7 AU.
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(iii) Stat e the nam e of the met ho d tha t is use d to mea s u r e the
dist a n c e of Antar e s from Eart h.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(c) The appa r e n t bright n e s s of Antar e s is 4.3 × 10 –11 time s the app a r e n t
bright n e s s of the Sun.
(i) Define appar e n t bright n e s s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Using the answ e r to (b)(ii), show that Anta r e s is 6.5 × 10 4 time s
mor e lumino u s than the Sun.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................

..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(d) Alnitak is a main sequ e n c e sta r with a luminosity simila r to that of

Antar e s . Use the value quot e d in (c)(ii) to deduc e that the mas s of
Alnitak is in the ran g e 16 M S to 40 M S , whe r e M S is the mas s of the
Sun.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(e) Explain, in ter m s of the Cha n d r a s e k h a r limit, why it unlikely tha t
Alnitak will develop into a whit e dwa rf.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(f) Stat e the prob a bl e final evolution a r y sta t e of Alnitak
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tot al 20 mark s )
79 3 . This ques tion is abou t models of the univer s e .
Obse rv a ti o n s of the night sky indica t e that the r e are many regions of the
univer s e that do not cont ai n any sta r s.
(a) Explain why this obse rv a ti o n cont r a di c t s Newt o n’s model of the
univer s e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(b) Outline how the Big Bang model of the unive r s e is consis t e n t with this
obse rv a tio n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
79 4 . This ques tion is abou t Hubbl e’s law.
Hubbl e’s law stat e s that
v = H 0d
wher e v is the relative rece s sio n a l spe e d betw e e n galaxie s, d is their

sepa r a t i o n and H 0 is the Hubbl e const a n t . Rece n t mea s u r e m e n t s plac e the
value of H 0 in the rang e 60 to
90 km s –1 Mpc –1 .
(a) Sugg e s t why a precis e value of H 0 is not known.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) Estim a t e , in secon d s , the maxim u m know n age of the univer s e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )
79 5 . This ques tion is abou t radio com m u ni c a t i o n.
(a) Stat e the differ e n c e betw e e n
(i) a signal wave and a carri e r wave.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) amplitu d e modula tion and frequ e n c y modul a tion.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) Grap h A shows a sketc h of how the signal str e n g t h of a cert ai n radio
car ri e r wave varies with time at a partic ul a r point in spac e .
Grap h B shows how the signal str e n g t h of the wave is amplit u d e

modul a t e d by a signal wave.
The time scale for both gra p h s is the sam e.
The frequ e n c y of the car rie r wave is f c and that of the signal wave f s .
fc
Use both gra p h s to estim a t e the ratio f s and explain how you arrive d
at your answ e r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) On grap h B sketc h the wave form of the signal wave.
(1)

(d) Descri b e on e adva n t a g e and stat e on e disa dv a n t a g e of using
amplit u d e modul a tio n in radio tra n s m i s sio n as com p a r e d to the use of
frequ e n c y modula tio n.
Advant a g e : ..............................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Disadv a n t a g e : .........................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
79 6 . This ques tion is abou t tran s m i s sio n of signals.
In a particul a r tran s m i s sio n syste m a single piec e of analog u e infor m a t i o n

is conve r t e d into a 4- bit bina ry “word” rep r e s e n t e d by the lette r s ABCD.
The wor d is tran s m i t t e d along an optic fibre to the rec eive r . The block
diagr a m shows the princi ple compo n e n t s for the tra n s m i s sio n and
rece p tio n of this word.
(a) On the diag r a m label the com po n e n t s X and Y and outline the function
of each compo n e n t .
X: .............................................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

Y: .............................................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(b) The diagr a m is a repr e s e n t a t i o n of a two- input time division
multiplexe r.
Outline, with refer e n c e to the diagr a m , how this device ena bl e s two
sets of digital data to be tra n s m i t t e d appa r e n t ly simult a n e o u s ly along
the sam e optic fibre.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c) As a signal is trans m i t t e d along an optic fibre its signal str e n g t h is

att en u a t e d . For this reas o n amplifie r s have to be plac e d at points
along the fibre.
(i) Explain what is mea n t by atte n u a t i o n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) In a particul a r fibre, the signal nee d s to be amplified whe n the
signal powe r is
8.2 × 10 –19 W. The fibre has an att e n u a t i o n loss of 2.0 dB km –1 .
Dete r mi n e , for an input signal of powe r 5.0 mW, the sepa r a ti o n
of the amplifier s along the fibre.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
79 7 . This ques tion is abou t oper a t io n a l amplifie r s.
(a) The diagr a m shows a circuit tha t uses an oper a t io n a l amplifie r as an

inver ti n g amplifier.
The point P is a virtual ear t h, tha t is at the sam e pote n ti al (0 V) as the

eart h line.
(i) Stat e the two prop e r ti e s of the ope r a tio n a l amplifier which make
P a virtual ear t h.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................

..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) In the circuit R f = 100 k Ω and R in = 10 k Ω. Calcula t e the gain of
the a mplifier.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b) The diagr a m shows a circuit tha t uses an oper a t io n a l amplifie r as a

non- inver tin g Sch mit t trigg e r .
In the situatio n show n, the pote n ti al at point X is 2.0 V and the outpu t
poten ti al V out is at its minim u m value of –10 V. Show that for the
outpu t pote n ti al to switch to its maxim u m value of +1 0 V
(i) the curr e n t in the resis to r s R 1 and R 2 is 0.08 mA.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) V in mus t rise to 5.8 V.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

(a) Sugg e s t why mobile phon e s are some ti m e s refe r r e d to as cell phon e s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) Explain, bas e d on your answ e r to (a), why mobile phon e s can be ma d e
small in size.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c) Stat e a mor al or ethical issue tha t you consid e r to arise from the use
of mobile phon e s.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 4 mark s )
79 9 . This ques tion is abou t the nat u r e of elect r o m a g n e t i c waves.
Explain why the dayti m e sky of the Eart h is blue but the daytim e sky of the
Moon is black.
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................

.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(Tota l 3 mark s )

80 0 . This ques tion is abou t interf e r e n c e and lase r s .
(a) Two overla p pi n g bea m s of light from two flashligh t s (torc h e s ) fall on a
scre e n.
Explain why no interfe r e n c e patt e r n is obse rv e d.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(b) Light from a laser that pass e s throu g h a double slit is incide n t on a
scre e n and produ c e s obse rv a bl e inte rf e r e n c e .
(i) Outline how the laser prod u c e s light.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Stat e the nam e of the prop e r t y that ena bl e s the lase r light to
produ c e obser v a bl e inte rf e r e n c e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(c) Outline how a laser can be use d to rea d a bar- code.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(d) A plane is flying at 100 m s –1 in a direc tio n par allel to the line joining
two identic al radio towe r s as shown in the diagr a m .
(not to scale)
The two tower s each emit a cohe r e n t radio signal of wavele n g t h of 5.0
m. The sepa r a t i o n of the towe r s is 200 m. To an obse rv e r on the plan e
the intensi ty of the receive d signal goes thro u g h a maxim u m every 5.0
s. Deter m i n e the dista n c e from the plan e to the line joining the radio
tower s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

80 1 . This ques tion is abou t optical inst r u m e n t s .
(a) Define linear mag nification .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) An object is place d a dist a n c e x from a conve r gi n g (convex) lens of

focal lengt h 10 cm.
An image of the object is form e d on a scre e n at a dista n c e 45 cm from
the lens.
Calcula t e the
(i) dist a n c e x .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) mag ni t u d e of the linea r magnific a tion.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(c) Stat e what is mea n t by sphe ric al abe r r a t i o n for a lens and sugg e s t
how this may be redu c e d .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

80 2 . This ques tion is abou t thin- film inte rf e r e n c e .
The diagr a m shows a soap film susp e n d e d on a wire fra m e which is align e d
vertically.
The film is viewed in reflect e d white light. The lower part of the film
exhibits a num b e r of colour s. The section ma rk e d B is 260 nm thick. The
refra ctiv e index of wat e r is n = 1.33.
The table gives the wavele n g t h rang e for the colour s of the visible
spect r u m . Deduc e the colour of the section B of the film.
Colo ur Wave l e n g t h Ran g e

Violet 380 to 450 nm
Blue 450 to 495 nm
Gree n 495 to 570 nm
Yellow 570 to 590 nm
Ora n g
590 to 620 nm
e
Red 620 to 750 nm
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(Tota l 4 mark s )
X-rays may be used to analys e the str uc t u r e and prop e r t i e s of mat e ri al s.
(a) Draw a labelled diag r a m showing a typic al appa r a t u s for the

prod u c tio n of X-rays.
(3)
(b) The X-ray spect r u m for eac h elem e n t show s both a cha r a c t e r i s tic and
continu o u s spect r u m .
Descri b e the origin of the char a c t e r i s tic spec t r u m .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
80 4 . This ques tion is abou t simult a n e i ty and lengt h mea s u r e m e n t .
(a) One of the two post ul a t e s of special rela tivity sta t e s that “the laws of
physics are the sam e for all iner tial obse rv e r s ”. Sta t e the othe r
post ul a t e.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) Tom and Barb a r a are two obse rv e r s eac h in a sepa r a t e refe r e n c e
fram e. The refer e n c e fram e s are moving rela tive to eac h othe r in the
sam e str ai g h t line with cons t a n t velocity.
Two lamps L 1 and L 2 are ope r a t e d by the sam e switc h. Tom is at the
midpoint betw e e n the lamps as me a s u r e d in his fram e of refer e n c e .
The lam ps and the switch are at rest rela tive to Tom.
Tom switch e s on the lamps and to him they light simult a n e o u s ly.
Explain, bas e d on your answ e r to (a), why the lamps will not light
simult a n e o u s ly, accor di n g to Barb a r a .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c) Tom meas u r e s the sepa r a t io n of L 1 and L 2 to be 1.5 m whe r e a s

Barb a r a meas u r e s the sepa r a t i o n to be 0.5 m.
(i) Stat e and explain which obse rv e r me a s u r e s the prop e r lengt h

betw e e n L 1 and L 2 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Calculat e, in ter m s of the free spac e spee d of light c , the relative
spee d betw e e n Tom and Barb a r a .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(iii) Sketc h a gra p h to show how the relative spee d v betw e e n Tom
and Barb a r a varies with the lengt h L betw e e n L 1 and L 2 as
meas u r e d by Barb a r a . The dat a point (1.5, 0) is shown. On the v
axis, label the point v = c .
(3)

(d) In anot h e r situatio n, Tom is at rest on the surfa c e of Eart h. Barb a r a is
in a space s hi p travelling at cons t a n t velocity, with res p e c t to Ear t h,
towar d s a dist an t plan e t a r y syste m . After reac hi n g the syste m she
ret u r n s to Eart h. Outline how this situa tio n leads to the so- calle d twin
par a d ox.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 14 mark s )
80 5 . This ques tion is abou t som e cons e q u e n c e s of special relativity.
A proton is accel e r a t e d from rest thro u g h a pote n ti al differe n c e V . After

accele r a ti o n its spee d is close to tha t of the spe e d of light in free spac e c .
(a) On the axes sketc h a grap h to show the varia tio n with spe e d v of the
mas s m of the proto n.
(3)

8
(b) The poten t i al differ e n c e V is 8.50 ×1 0 V. As mea s u r e d in the
labor a t o r y fram e of refer e n c e ,
(i) calcula t e the total ene r gy of the proton afte r acc el e r a t io n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) show that the final spe e d of the proto n is 0.852c .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c) After accel e r a t i o n the proto n appr o a c h e s an antip r o t o n (proto n with a

nega tive char g e ) that is moving along the sam e str aig h t line but in the
opposit e direction. The rela tive spe e d of appr o a c h of the par ticle s, as
mea s u r e d in the labor a t o r y fra m e of refe r e n c e , is 0.987 c.
Deduc e that the spee d of the antip r o t o n is about the sam e as the
spee d of the proton in (b)(ii).
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

80 6 . This ques tion is abou t gravit a tio n a l red- shift and black holes.
The conce p t of gravit a tion al red- shift indic at e s that clocks run slowe r as
they appr o a c h a black hole.
(a) Descri b e what is mean t by
(i) gravit a tion al red- shift.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) spac e ti m e.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) a black hole with refe r e n c e to the conc e p t of spa c e ti m e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) A particul a r black hole has a Schw a r z s c hil d radius R . A pers o n at a
dista n c e of 2 R from the event horizon of the black hole mea s u r e s the
time betw e e n two event s to be 10 s.
Deduc e that for a per s o n a very long way from the black hole the time
betw e e n the event s will be mea s u r e d as 12 s.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
80 7 . This ques tion is abou t the mech a ni s m of hea rin g.
Sound that is incide n t on the ear d r u m (tymp a ni c me m b r a n e ) in the middle

ear, sets the mem b r a n e oscillatin g. Thes e oscillation s pass, via thre e small
bones that act as a lever syste m , to the oval window. The pre s s u r e
res ulti ng from the vibra tio n s at the oval window is gre a t e r tha n that
crea t e d at the ear d r u m .
(a) Stat e the nam e of the thre e small bone s tha t form the lever syste m .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) Explain how the pres s u r e at the oval window is incre a s e d by
(i) the lever syste m .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) a par ticul a r physical differ e n c e betw e e n the ear d r u m and oval
window.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(c) Stat e how reflection of soun d at the inne r ear is minimiz e d.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(d) A pers o n can just hear a soun d of a partic ul a r freq u e n c y that is

inciden t on an area of their ear d r u m equ al to 2.0 mm 2 . The inte nsity
level of the sound is 20 dB. Calcula t e the powe r tha t the sound cre a t e s
at the ear d r u m .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

80 8 . This ques tion is abou t X-rays and ultr a s o u n d imagin g tech ni q u e s .
(a) Define the ter m atten u a tio n coefficie n t as use d in X-ray imagin g.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) An X-ray bea m that consis t s of photo n s of the sam e ene r gy is used to
imag e a possible bone fract u r e in the leg of a patie n t. At this photon
ener gy
att en u a t i o n coefficie nt of bone = 0.62 cm –1

att en u a t i o n coefficie nt of tissu e = 0.12 cm –1 .
In pas sin g thro u g h the leg, the X-rays effectively encou n t e r a

thickn e s s of tissu e equal to 14 cm and thickn e s s of bone equal to 8.0
cm.
Use the above dat a to explain why X-rays of this ene r gy are suita bl e
for imagin g a possible leg fract u r e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(c) Stat e two reas o n s why it is prefe r a b l e to use ultr a s o u n d rath e r tha n
X-rays for imagin g a fetus.
1. .............................................................................................................

.....................
2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(d) The table gives som e dat a about air and hum a n soft tissu e.
Spe e d of sou n d / De n s i t y / kg m –3
m s –1
Air 330 1.3
Tissue 1.5 × 10 3 1.1 × 10 3
With refer e n c e to the conc e p t of acous tic impe d a n c e , use the dat a to
explain why a layer of gel is plac e d betw e e n the skin and the end of
the ultr a s o u n d gene r a t o r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 12 mark s )
80 9 . This ques tion is abou t radio- isotop e s.
(a) Disting ui s h betw e e n physic al half- life and biologic al half- life.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) A pers o n is involved in an accide n t that caus e s seve r e blood loss.
Befor e a blood tran sf u sio n can be given it is nec e s s a r y to me a s u r e
how much blood has been lost. This can be done by me a s u ri n g the
total volum e of blood rem a i ni n g using an isotop e of iodine.
Data for two differe n t isotop e s of iodine are given in the table.
Iodi n e - 13 1 Iodi n e - 12 3
Phys i c a l half-
8 days 13 hour s
life
Biol o g i c a l
12 days 12 days
half- life
Radi a t i o n
beta gam m a
emi t t e d
Sugg e s t , bas ed on the dat a given in the table, why iodine- 123 is a
bett e r choice for use in mea s u ri n g the total volum e of blood in the
body.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c) The per so n in (b) is given an injection of 5.0 ml of a solution

cont ai nin g iodine- 123.
The initial activity of the solution is 2.5 ×1 0 5 Bq. After 0.50 hour s it is
ass u m e d that the 5.0 ml sam pl e will be dist rib u t e d evenly throu g h o u t
the blood syste m .
The activity of a 5.0 ml sam pl e of the blood afte r 0.50 hour s has an
activity of 2.1 × 10 2 Bq. Deduc e tha t the total blood volum e is about 6
litres.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

81 0 . This ques tion is abou t funda m e n t a l inte r a c ti o n s and elem e n t a r y particle s.
(a) In the table identify the excha n g e par ticle(s) associa t e d with the two
funda m e n t a l inter a c tio n s given.
Int er a c t i o Exc h a n g e parti c l e ( s )

n
Elect r o-
weak
Stron g
(2)
(b) Stat e why the exch a n g e par ticle s are known as elem e n t a r y particl e s.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(c) An exch a n g e particle associ a t e d with the weak inte r a c ti o n has a mas s
of about 90 GeVc –2 .
Estim a t e
(i) the life- time of the particle.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) its rang e.
.........................................................................................................

..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(d) The diagr a m is a Feyn m a n diagr a m tha t repr e s e n t s the stron g
inter a c ti o n betw e e n qua r k s.
(i) Identify the excha n g e par ticl e X.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Explain why the quar k s have a colour associa t e d with the m .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 11 mark s )
Particle accel e r a t o r s may be use d to accel e r a t e proto n s. If the ene r gy of

the accel e r a t e d proton s is high enou g h the n, whe n thes e proto n s collide
with station a r y proto n s, differe n t type s of particle s of large mas s may be
produ c e d .
(a) Explain why high ener gi es are req ui r e d to produ c e particle s of large
mas s.
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) The diagr a m shows the basic struc t u r e of a cyclot ro n in which proto n s
are accel e r a t e d .
Add labels to the diag r a m above to show the
(i) mag n e t s and their polarity.

(1)
(ii) point s wher e the alter n a t i n g elec t ric pote n ti al differ e n c e is

applied.
(1)
(c) Outline why the frequ e n c y of the alte r n a t i n g elect ric pote n ti al
differ e n c e is mad e equal to the frequ e n c y of orbit of the proton s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................

.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(d) Explain the effect of the incr e a si n g ene r gy of the proto n s on their
frequ e n c y of orbit and stat e how this effect is dealt with in the
cyclotr o n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(e) Proton s of much highe r ene r gy than thos e produ c e d in a cyclot ro n can
be produ c e d in a synch r o t r o n . In a partic ul a r expe ri m e n t proto n s
leave a synch r o t r o n with ene r gy 28 GeV. They ente r a bubbl e cha m b e r
whe r e som e of the m collide with sta tion a r y proto n s. Deduc e that the
ener gy availabl e to produ c e othe r particle s from thes e collisions is
abou t 7 GeV.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(f) Sugg e s t , bas ed on the answ e r to (e) and cons e r v a ti o n of mom e n t u m ,

why it is bett e r to arr a n g e for two proto n s of total ene r gy 28 GeV,
moving in opposit e directio n s, to collide.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................

.....................
(2)
(Tot al 12 mark s )

81 2 . This ques tion is abou t elect r o n s and positr o n s .
The Feyn m a n diagr a m repr e s e n t s the elect r o m a g n e t i c inte r a c tio n betw e e n

two elect r o n s .
Anoth e r possible inter a c ti o n betw e e n the elect r o n s involves a neut r a l

curr e n t .
(a) Descri b e
(i) with refer e n c e to the inte r a c t i o n bet w e e n the elect r o n s , what is

mea n t by a neut r al cur r e n t .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) with refer e n c e to your ans w e r in (a)(i), how expe ri m e n t a l

evide nc e suppo r t s the stan d a r d model.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) Draw a Feyn m a n diagr a m to show the produ c tio n of an elect r o n
positr o n pair.
(1)
(c) Accordi n g to the Big Bang theo ry, the prod u c tio n of elect r o n positr o n
pairs beca m e possible whe n the univer s e had coole d to a tem p e r a t u r e
T . Dete r mi n e , to the near e s t powe r of ten, the value of T .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
81 3 . The time elaps e d since the beginni n g of the unive r s e is of the orde r of
A. 10 8 s.
B. 10 18 s.
C. 10 28 s.
D. 10 38 s.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

81 4 . In an experi m e n t to mea s u r e the accel e r a ti o n of free fall at the surfa c e of
the Eart h the following res ults wer e obtain e d .
Acc el e r a t i o n of fre e fall / m

s –2
7.69
7.70
7.69
7.68
7.70
The res ult s are
A. accu r a t e and precis e.
B. inacc u r a t e but precis e.
C. accu r a t e but impr e ci s e.
D. inacc u r a t e and impr e cis e.

(Tot al 1 mar k )
81 5 . Two balls of differ e n t mas s are drop p e d from the top of a tall building one
after the other. The dista n c e betw e e n the balls
A. incr e a s e s with time.
B. dep e n d s on the initial velocity only.
C. rem ai n s const a n t .
D. dep e n d s on the mas s of the balls.

(Tot al 1 mar k )

81 6 . The gra p h shows how the velocity of a particle varies with time.
Which of the following grap h s corr e c tly shows how the accel e r a ti o n of the
par ticl e varies with time?
(Tot al 1 mar k )

81 7 . An aircr aft is flying at cons t a n t spe e d in a horizont a l circle. Which of the
following diagr a m s best illust r a t e s the forc es acting on the airc r aft in the
vertical plan e?
(Tot al 1 mar k )
81 8 . For a par ticle moving at const a n t spee d in a horizon t al circle, the work
done by the cent ri p e t al force is
A. zero.
B. directly propo r tio n al to the particle mass.
C. directly propo r tio n al to the particle spe e d.
D. directly propo r tio n al to the (par ticl e spe e d) 2 .

(Tot al 1 mar k )

81 9 . A vehicle is driven up a hill at const a n t spe e d. Which of the following best
descri b e s the ener gy chan g e s involved?
A. Chemic al ener gy is conver t e d into gravit a tio n a l pote n ti al ene r gy.
B. Chemic al ener gy is conver t e d into gravit a tio n a l pote n ti al ene r gy,

sound and ther m al ener gy.
C. Gravit ation al poten ti al ene r gy is conve r t e d into che mic al ene r gy.
D. Gravit ation al poten ti al ene r gy is conve r t e d into che mic al ene r gy,
(Tot al 1 mar k )
82 0 . A rubb e r ball, travelling in a horizon t a l dire c tion, strike s a vertic al wall. It

rebou n d s at right angles to the wall. The gra p h below illust r a t e s the
variation of the ball’s mom e n t u m p with time t whe n the ball is in cont a c t
with the wall.
Which of the following stat e m e n t s is true ?
A. The shad e d are a is equ al to the force exer t e d by the wall on the ball.
B. The shad e d are a is equ al to the force exer t e d by the ball on the wall.
C. The gradi e n t is equal to the force exert e d by the wall on the ball.
D. The gradi e n t is equal to the force exert e d by the ball on the wall.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

82 1 . In the tabl e below, which row shows the corr e c t conve r sio n betw e e n the
Kelvin and Celsius tem p e r a t u r e scales ?
Kelvi n te m p e r a t u r e / K Cel s i u s te m p e r a t u r e /
°C
A. 0 373
B. 100 –173
C. 173 100
D. 373 –100
(Tot al 1 mar k )
82 2 . Carbo n has a relative atomic mas s of 12 and oxyge n has a rela tive atomic
mas s of 16. A sam pl e of 6 g of carbo n has twice as many atom s as
A. 32 g of oxygen.
B. 8 g of oxygen.
C. 4 g of oxygen.
D. 3 g of oxygen.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
82 3 . Tanya heat s 100 g of a liquid with an elect ric heat e r which has a const a n t
powe r outpu t of 60 W. After 100 s the rise in tem p e r a t u r e is 40 K. The
specific heat capacity of the liquid in J kg –1 K–1 is calcul a t e d from which of
the following?
6 01 0 0
A. 0.14 0
6 00.1
B. 40
0.14 0
C. 60
60
D. 40
(Tot al 1 mar k )

82 4 . A ray of light is incide n t on a boun d a r y betw e e n glass and air.
Which of the following is the refr a c tive index of glass?
s inθ 1
A. s inθ 3
s inθ 1
B. s inθ 4
s inθ 3
C. s inθ 2
s inθ 4
D. s inθ 1
(Tot al 1 mar k )

82 5 . The gra p h below shows how the displac e m e n t x of a particl e und e r g oi n g
simpl e har m o ni c motion varies with time t . The motion is unda m p e d .
Which of the following grap h s corr e c tly shows how the velocity v of the
par ticl e varies with t?
(Tot al 1 mar k )

82 6 . The gra p h below shows how the displac e m e n t x of a particl e und e r g oi n g
simpl e har m o ni c motion varies with time t . The motion is unda m p e d .
Which of the following grap h s shows how the total ene r gy E of the par ticle
varies with time t?
(Tot al 1 mar k )

82 7 . An orch e s t r a playing on boat X can be hea r d by touris t s on boat Y, which is
situat e d out of sight of boat X arou n d a hea dl a n d .
The sound from X can be hea r d on Y due to
A. refr ac ti o n.
B. reflection.
C. diffraction.
D. tran s m i s sio n.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
82 8 . A cell of em f ε and inter n al re sista n c e r deliver s cur r e n t to a small elect ric

motor.
450 C of char g e flows thro u g h the motor and 9000 J of ene r gy are
conver t e d in the motor. 1800 J are dissipa t e d in the cell. The emf of the cell
is
A. 4.0 V.
B. 16 V.
C. 20 V.
D. 24 V.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

82 9 . A cylindrical condu c t o r of lengt h l, diam e t e r D and resis tivity ρ ha s
resis t a n c e R . A differe n t cylindric al cond u c t o r of resis tivity 2 ρ, lengt h 2 l
and diam e t e r 2 D has a resist a n c e
A. 2R.
B. R.
R
C. 2.
R
D. 4.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
83 0 . In the circuits below the cells have the sam e emf and zero inte r n a l
resis t a n c e . The resist o r s all have the sam e resist a n c e .
p o w e rd is s ip a t eind X
Which of the following gives the ratio p o w e rd is s ip a t eind Y ?
1
A. 4
1
B. 2
C. 2
D. 4
(Tot al 1 mar k )

83 1 . A small sphe r e X of mas s M is plac e d a dista n c e d from a point mas s. The
gravit a tion al force on sphe r e X is 90 N. Sphe r e X is re move d and a secon d
sphe r e Y of mass 4 M is place d a dista n c e 3 d from the sam e point mas s. The
gravit a tion al force on sphe r e Y is
A. 480 N.
B. 160 N.
C. 120 N.
D. 40 N.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
83 2 . Which of the following diag r a m s illustr a t e s the elect ric field patt e r n of a
neg a tively char g e d sphe r e ?
(Tot al 1 mar k )

83 3 . A positively char g e d par ticle ente r s the spac e betw e e n two cha r g e d
condu c ti n g plat es, with a cons t a n t velocity direc t e d par allel to the plat e s,
as show n.
The top plat e is positively char g e d and the botto m plat e is neg a tively
char g e d . Ther e is a magn e t i c field in the shad e d region PQRS. The particl e
contin u e s to move in a horizont a l str ai g h t line betw e e n the plat e s . Which of
the following corr e c t ly describ e s the ma g n e ti c field dire c tion?
A. Into plane of pap e r
B. Out of plan e of pape r
C. Up
D. Down
(Tot al 1 mar k )
83 4 . The relation s hi p betw e e n proton num b e r Z , neut r o n num b e r N and nucleon

num b e r A is
A. A = Z – N.
B. Z = A + N.
C. N = A – Z.
D. N = A + Z.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

83 5 . In the Geige r–M a r s d e n experi m ent α-par ticl e s are scatt e r e d by gold nuclei.
The expe ri m e n t a l res ults provide evide n c e that
A. α-par ticle s have discr e t e amou n t s of kinetic ene r gy.
B. most of the mas s and positive cha r g e of an atom is conc e n t r a t e d in a

small volum e.
C. the nucleu s cont ai n s proto n s and neut r o n s .
D. gold atom s have a high bindin g ene r gy per nucle on.

(Tot al 1 mar k )
83 6 . A radio- isotop e has an activity of 400 Bq and a half- life of 8 days. After 32
days the activity of the sam pl e is
A. 200 Bq.
B. 100 Bq.
C. 50 Bq.
D. 25 Bq.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
83 7 . Which of the following ene r gy sourc e s res ults from the solar ene r gy
incide n t on Ear t h?
A. Nucle a r fission
B. Wind ener gy
C. Nucle a r fusion
D. Geoth e r m a l ener gy
(Tot al 1 mar k )

83 8 . Which of the following is a ren e w a b l e and non- ren e w a b l e ene r gy sour c e ?
Ren e w a b l e No n- ren e w a b l e
A. urani u m coal
B. tidal ura ni u m
C. urani u m bioga s
D. natu r al gas bioga s
(Tot al 1 mar k )
83 9 . A ther m al powe r station is 20 % efficien t and gene r a t e s useful elect ric al

powe r at 1000 MW. The fossil fuel use d has an ene r gy density of 50 MJ kg –
1
. The mas s of fuel in kg cons u m e d every secon d is given by which of the
following?
A. 0.01
B. 0.25
C. 4
D. 100
(Tot al 1 mar k )
84 0 . Which of the following is likely to incr e a s e gre e n h o u s e gas conc e n t r a t i o n s

in the atm os p h e r e ?
A. Using nat u r al gas inste a d of coal to gene r a t e elec t ric a l ene r gy
B. Inciner a t i o n of wast e to gene r a t e elect ric al ene r gy
C. Incr e a s e d use of wind tur bi n e s to gen e r a t e elect ric al ene r gy
D. Carbo n dioxide capt u r e and stor a g e at the powe r station

(Tot al 1 mar k )

84 1 . Venus and Ear t h may be reg a r d e d as beha vin g as black bodies. The me a n
tem p e r a t u r e at the surfac e of Venus is about 600 K and at the surfa c e of
Eart h is about 300 K. Which of the following is the best estim a t e for the
ratio
p o w e r a d ia t epde ru n ita r e ao n E a r t h
p o w e r a d ia t epde ru n ita r e ao n Ve n u s?
1
A. 2
1
B. 4
1
C. 8
1
D. 16
(Tot al 1 mar k )
84 2 . In a nuclea r powe r station, a mode r a t o r is requir e d to
A. contr ol the rat e of fission.
B. red uc e heat losses to the sur r o u n di n g s .
C. red uc e the ene r gy of high ene r gy neut r o n s .
D. incr e a s e the ener gy of low ene r gy neut r o n s .

(Tot al 1 mar k )

The frequ e n cy f of the funda m e n t a l vibra tion of a sta n di n g wave of fixed

lengt h is mea s u r e d for differ e n t value s of the tension T in the string, using
the app a r a t u s show n.
In orde r to find the relation s hi p betw e e n the spee d v of the wave and the
tension T in the string, the spee d v is calcul a t e d from the relation
v = 2 f L
wher e L is the lengt h of the string.
The dat a points are show n plott e d on the axes below. The unce r t a i n t y in v
is ±5 m s –1 and the uncer t ai n t y in T is negligible.
(a) Draw error bar s on the first and last dat a points to show the
unce r t a i n t y in speed v .
(1)

(b) The origin al hypot h e si s is tha t the spe e d is dire c tly propo r tio n a l to the
tension T .
Explain why the dat a do not suppo r t this hypot h e s i s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c) It is sugg e s t e d that the rela tion s hi p betw e e n spee d and tension is of
the form
v = k T
whe r e k is a const a n t .
To test whet h e r the data suppo r t this rela tion s hi p, a gra p h of v 2

agains t T is plott e d as show n below.
The bes t- fit line show n take s into accou n t the unce r t a i n t i e s for eac h
dat a point.
The unce r t ai n t y in v 2 for T = 3.5 N is show n as an error bar on the
grap h.
(i) Stat e the value of the unc e r t ai n t y in v 2 for T = 3.5 N.
.........................................................................................................

..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) At T = 1.0 N the spee d v = 27 ± 5 m s –1 . Calcula t e the
unce r t ai n t y in v 2 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(d) Use the grap h in (c) to dete r m i n e k withou t its unc e r t a i n t y.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 11 mark s )
84 4 . This ques tion is abou t ther m al ene r gy tra n sf e r .
(a) A piece of coppe r is held in a flame until it reac h e s the r m a l

equilibri u m . The time it takes to reac h the r m a l equilibri u m will

dep e n d on the ther m al capa city of the piece of coppe r .
(i) Define ther m al capacity .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Outline what is mea n t by the r m a l equilibriu m in this cont ext.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b) The piece of coppe r is tran sf e r r e d quickly to a plas tic cup cont ai nin g
wat e r. The ther m a l capacity of the cup is negligible. The following
dat a are availabl e.
Mass of copp e r = 0.12 kg

Mass of wat e r = 0.45 kg
Rise in tem p e r a t u r e of wate r = 30 K
Final tem p e r a t u r e of copp e r = 308 K
Specific heat capa ci ty of copp e r = 390 J kg
K–1
Specific heat capa ci ty of wat e r = 4200 J kg
K–1
(i) Use the dat a to calcula t e the tem p e r a t u r e of the flame.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) Explain whet h e r the tem p e r a t u r e of the flame is likely to be

grea t e r or less than your ans w e r to (b)(i).
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

84 5 . This ques tion is abou t gravit a tio n a l and elect ric fields.
(a) The equa tio n for the mag ni t u d e of the gravit a tio n a l field stre n g t h due
to a point mas s may be writt e n as below.
KX
Y = s2
The equa tio n for the mag ni t u d e of the elec t ric field str e n g t h can also
be writt e n in the sam e form.
In the table identify the symbols used in the equ a tio n.
Sy m b o l Gravit a t i o n a l fiel d Ele c t r i c a l fiel d

qua n t i t y qua n t i t y
Y
K
X
s
(4)
(b) The mag ni t u d e of the elec t r o s t a t i c forc e betw e e n the proto n and
elect r o n in a hydro g e n atom is F E . The mag nit u d e of the gravit a tio n al
force betw e e n them is F G .
FE
Deter m i n e the ratio FG .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

84 6 . This ques tion is abou t a pum p e d- stor a g e powe r sta tion.
(a) The diagr a m , not to scale, shows a pum p e d- stor a g e powe r sta tion
used for the gen e r a t io n of elect ric a l ene r gy.
Water stor e d in the tank is allowe d to fall thro u g h a pipe to a lake via
a tur bi n e. The tur bi n e is conne c t e d to an elect ric al gene r a t o r . The
pum p e d- stor a g e ac gene r a t o r syste m is reve r si bl e so that wate r can
be pum p e d from the lake to the tank.
The tank is 50 m deep and has a unifor m are a of 5.0 × 10 4 m 2 . The

heigh t from the botto m of the tank to the turbi n e is 310 m. The
density of wate r is 1.0 × 10 3 kg m –3 .
(i) Show that the maxim u m ene r gy that can be deliver e d to the
turbin e by the falling wate r is about 8 × 10 12 J.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) The flow rat e of wat e r in the pipe is 400 m 3 s –1 . Calcula t e the
powe r deliver e d by the falling wat e r.
.........................................................................................................

..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b) The ene r gy losses in the powe r station are shown in the following
tabl e.
Per c e n t a g e los s of
So ur c e of en er g y los s
en e r g y
friction and turb ul e n c e of wat e r
27
in pipe
friction in tur bin e and ac
15
gene r a t o r
elect ric al heatin g losses 5
(i) Calculat e the overall efficiency of the conve r sio n of the

gravit a tion al poten t i al ene r gy of wate r in the tank into elect ric al
ene r gy.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Sketc h a Sank ey diag r a m to rep r e s e n t the ene r gy conve r sio n in

the powe r station.
(2)
(c) The elect ric al power prod u c e d at the powe r station is tra n s m i t t e d by

cables to the cons u m e r .
(i) Outline how the ene r gy losse s in tra n s m i s sio n are minimize d.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) Stat e on e advan t a g e and on e disa dv a n t a g e that a pum p e d-
stor a g e syste m has comp a r e d to a tidal wat e r stor a g e syste m .
Advant a g e : ......................................................................................
.................
.........................................................................................................
..................
Disadva n t a g e : .................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 13 mark s )
84 7 . This ques tion is abou t force and ene r gi e s .
(a) A syste m consis t s of a bicycle and cyclist travelling at a const a n t

velocity along a horizont al road.
(i) Stat e the value of the net force acting on the cyclist.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) On the diagr a m draw labelled arro w s to repr e s e n t the vertic al
forces acting on the bicycle.
(2)
(iii) With refer e n c e to the horizon t al force s acting on the syste m ,

explain why the syste m is travelling at const a n t velocity.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b) The total resis tive force acting on the syste m is 40 N and its spe e d is
8.0 m s –1 . Calculat e the useful powe r outp u t of the cyclist.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(c) The cyclist stops ped alling and the syste m com e s to rest. The total
mas s of the syste m is 70 kg.
(i) Calculat e the magni t u d e of the initial accel e r a ti o n of the syste m .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Estim a t e the dista n c e take n by the syste m to com e to rest from
the time the cyclist stops pedalling.
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Stat e and explain on e rea s o n why your answ e r to (c)(ii) is only
an estim a t e.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 12 mark s )
84 8 . This ques tion is abou t simple har m o ni c motion.
(a) In ter m s of the accel e r a t i o n, stat e two conditions nec e s s a r y for a

syste m to perfor m simpl e har m o ni c motion.
1. .............................................................................................................
.....................
2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) A tuning fork is sound e d and it is assu m e d that eac h tip vibra t e s with
simple har m o ni c motion.

The extr e m e positions of the oscillatin g tip of one fork are sepa r a t e d
by a dista n c e d .
(i) Stat e, in ter m s of d , the amplit u d e of vibra tio n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) On the axes below, sketc h a gra p h to show how the displac e m e n t
of one tip of the tunin g fork varies with time.
(1)
(iii) On your grap h, label the time period T and the amplit u d e a.
(2)
(c) The frequ e n c y of oscillation of the tips is 440 Hz and the amplit u d e of
oscillation of each tip is 1.2 mm. Dete r m i n e the maxim u m
(i) linea r speed of a tip.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) accele r a ti o n of a tip.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

84 9 . This ques tion is abou t elect ri c circ uit s
The compo n e n t s show n below are to be conn e c t e d in a circuit to

inves tig a t e how the cur r e n t I in a tungs t e n filame n t lamp varies with the
poten ti al differ e n c e V acros s it.
(a) Cons t r u c t a circuit diagr a m to show how the s e compo n e n t s should be

conn e c t e d toget h e r in orde r to obtain as larg e a ran g e as possible for
values of poten ti al differ e n c e acros s the lamp.
(4)
(b) On the axes, sketc h a grap h of I agains t V for a filame n t lamp in the
ran g e V = 0 to its nor m al working volta g e .
(2)

(c) The lam p is mar k e d with the symbols “1.25 V, 300 mW”. Calcula t e the
cur r e n t in the filame n t whe n it is workin g nor m ally.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(d) The resis tivity of tung s t e n at the lamp’s workin g tem p e r a t u r e is 4 ×

10 –7 Ωm. The total lengt h of the tungs t e n filam e n t is 0.80 m. Estim a t e
the radius of the filam e n t .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(e) The cell is conn e c t e d to two identic al lamps conn e c t e d in par allel. The
lamps are rat e d at 1.25 V, 300 mW. The cell has an emf of 1.5 V and
an inter n al resist a n c e of 1.2 Ω.
Deter m i n e whet h e r the lam ps will light nor m ally.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 15 mark s )

85 0 . This ques tion is abou t nuclea r fission and fusion.
(a) The grap h shows the variatio n of binding ene r gy per nucle on for
nuclides with a nucleon num b e r gre a t e r tha n 40.
(i) Define bindin g ener g y .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) On the grap h, label with the lette r S the position of the most
stable nuclide.
(1)
(iii) Stat e why the nuclide you have labelle d is the most sta bl e.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) In a nucle a r react o r , a nucle u s of ura ni u m ( U)- 235 fissions into
bariu m(B a)- 141 and krypto n(Kr)- 92. The equa tio n for this fission is
235 141 92 1
9 2 U  5 6 Ba3 6 Kr x 0 n .
(i) Use the grap h to show that the fission of one nucle u s of ura ni u m-
235 will releas e abou t 200 MeV of ene r gy.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(ii) Stat e the value of x in the equa tio n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) The mas s defect in this rea c tion is 3.1 × 10 –28 kg. Calcula t e the
num b e r of ura ni u m- 235 nuclei that mus t fission in orde r to
relea s e 1.0 kJ of ener gy.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

(2)

(iv) Outline how this fission reac tio n can lead to a chain reac tion.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c) Inten sive scientific effort is devot e d to developi n g nucle a r fusion as a

futur e ener gy sourc e. Discus s wha t could be the social and
enviro n m e n t a l benefits of using nucle a r fusion as com p a r e d with
nuclea r fission as an ener gy sourc e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 15 mark s )

85 1 . This ques tion is abou t global war mi n g.
(a) One reaso n often sugg e s t e d for global war mi n g is the enha n c e d
gree n h o u s e effect.
(i) Stat e what is mean t by the enha n c e d gre e n h o u s e effect.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Stat e two other possible caus e s of global war mi n g.
1. .....................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
2. .....................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b) One effect of global war mi n g is to melt the Antar c tic ice she e t. The
following data are availabl e for the Antar c ti c ice she e t and the Eart h’s
ocea n s .
Area of ice shee t = 1.4 × 10 7 km 2

Averag e thickn e s s of ice = 1.5 × 10 3 m
Density of ice = 920 kg m –3
Density of wat e r = 1000 kg m –3
Area of Eart h’s ocea n s = 3.8 × 10 8 km 2
Using the dat a, det e r m i n e the
(i) mas s of the Antar ctic ice.
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) chan g e in mean sea level if all the Antar c tic ice she e t wer e to
melt and flow into the oce a n s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(c) Outline the differ e n c e , if any, that the meltin g of ocea nic ice she e t s
makes to the mea n sea level of the Eart h.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
85 2 . This ques tion is abou t the hum a n eye.
(a) (i) Label the diagr a m of the hum a n eye to show the lens,
retin a and optic nerve.

(1)
(ii) Outline the function of the rods and the cone s in the retin a .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(b) Outline what is mean t by acco m m o d a t i o n in the eye.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

(3)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

The wavelen g t h diag r a m show n rep r e s e n t s thre e lines in the emission

spect r u m sam pl e of calciu m in a labor a t o r y.
A dista n t star is know n to be moving dire c tly away from the Eart h at a
spee d of 0.1c. The light emitt e d from the sta r cont ai n s the emission spec t r a
of calciu m. On the diagr a m sketc h the emission spec t r u m of the sta r as
obse rv e d in the labor a t o r y. Label the lines tha t corr e s p o n d to A, B, and C
with the lette r s A*, B*, and C*. Num e ri c al values of the wavele n g t h s are
not req ui r e d .
(Tota l 3 mark s )
85 4 . This ques tion is abou t optical resolution.
(a) The sepa r a t io n of two object s on the surfa c e of Eart h is d . The objec ts
are photo g r a p h e d by a cam e r a in a spy sat ellite orbiting Ear t h. The
photog r a p h i c image s of the objects are just resolve d. Use the
following data to det e r m i n e d .
Wavelen g t h of light emitt e d by the objec t s =

500 nm
Dista nc e of sat ellite above surfa c e of Eart h =
4.0 × 10 5 m
Diam e t e r of cam e r a lens =
0.10 m
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(b) Stat e on e way in which the resolution of the cam e r a could be
improv e d.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 4 mark s )
85 5 . This ques tion is abou t polarizin g filter s and sour c e s .
You are given two unlab ell ed light sour c e s , one of which emits pola riz e d
light and the other does not. You are also given two unla b elle d tra n s p a r e n t
plastic shee t s , one of which is a polariz e r and the othe r is not.
(a) Descri b e how you would dete r m i n e which one of the sourc e s emits
polarize d light and which shee t is a polarizing filter.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) You are given a glass tube that cont ai n s an optically active solution.
Explain how you would use the app a r a t u s in (a) to mea s u r e the
conce n t r a t i o n of the solution.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
85 6 . This ques tion is abou t qua n t u m physics and elect r o n s .
(a) Photo n s of frequ e n cy 2.1 × 10 15 Hz strike the surfa c e of ura niu m and
elect r o n s are emitt e d from the surfa c e . The work function of ura ni u m
is 3.6 eV.
(i) Show that the maxim u m kine tic ene r gy of the emitt e d elect r o n s

is abou t 5.0 eV.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Explain what chan g e to this ene r gy would occur if the light
inten si ty was double d.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b) The de Broglie wavel en g t h of an elect r o n with ene r gy 5.0 keV is λ.
(i) Dete r m ine λ.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(ii) A stud e n t makes the stat e m e n t “The elect r o n wavele n g t h is not

real, it is just a mat h e m a t i c a l cons t r u c ti o n. Elect r o n s are
par ticl es and never waves.” Outline evide n c e which sugg e s t s that
the stud e n t’s stat e m e n t is not corr e c t.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................

..................
(2)

(c) Outline how the
(i) “elect r o n in a box” model accou n t s for the existe n c e of disc r e t e

ene r gy levels in the hydrog e n atom.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) line spect r a of atomic hydro g e n provide evide n c e for elect r o n

ene r gy levels in the atom.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 14 mark s )
A nucle u s of the isotop e iodine- 124 (I-124) (proto n num b e r 53) may
unde r g o positive beta decay to a nucle u s of an isotop e X.
(a) Stat e the nuclea r reac tion equa tio n for this dec ay.
.................................................................................................................

.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(b) The half- life of iodine- 124 is 4.2 days. A freshly pre p a r e d sam pl e of the
isotop e has an activity of 810 Bq. Dete r m i n e the activity of the sa m pl e
after 6.0 days.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
85 8 . This ques tion is abou t storin g infor m a t io n on a CD.
The gra p h shows how the voltag e V of par t of an analog u e signal varies
with a time t .
In orde r to conver t this signal to a digital signal that can be stor e d on a CD,
the signal voltag e is mea s u r e d at regul a r time interv al s. The me a s u r e d
value is then conve r t e d into four- bit bina ry num b e r by dividing the signal
into 1 V levels.
(a) Stat e
(i) the value of the volta g e at 0.30 ms.
.........................................................................................................

..................
(1)

(ii) the four- bit binary num b e r corr e s p o n d i n g to the value of the
voltag e at 0.30 ms.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) and explain the value of the least significa n t bit of the four- bit
binary num b e r in (a)(ii).
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b) The binary num b e r in (a) is encod e d onto the surfa c e of a CD as a

series of pits. Outline, with the use of an appr o p ri a t e diagr a m , how
light from a laser is used to disting ui s h bet w e e n a bina ry 0 and a
binar y 1.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)

(c) As a result of noise in elect ric circuits, digital pulse s can often lose
their shap e and henc e distor t the infor m a ti o n that they car ry. The
pulses can be re- shap e d using a circ uit calle d a Sch mit t trigg e r .
In the situatio n show n the outp u t volta g e V 0 of the amplifier is at its

minim u m value of
–6.0 V. The voltag e at the non- inverti n g input to the amplifier is equ al
to 1.0 V and at the inverti n g input it is V X. The outp u t volta g e will
switch to its maxim u m value + 6.0 V if the voltag e V X just exce e d s
+1. 0 V.
Deter m i n e the minim u m volta g e V in that will resul t in an outpu t

voltag e of + 6. 0 V.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 12 mark s )
85 9 . This ques tion is abou t CCDs.
(a) Define capacita nc e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) Light of a particul a r frequ e n c y and inte nsi ty 1.2 mW m –2 is reflec t e d
from an object on to a pixel of a CCD. The are a of the pixel is 5.5 ×
10 –10 m 2 and its capa cit a n c e is 2.2 pF.
The ene r gy of a photon of the light is 4.6 × 10 –19 J.
(i) Deduc e that the rate at which photo n s are incide n t on the pixel is
1.4 × 10 6 s –1 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Using the answ e r to (b)(i), det e r m i n e the time it take s the
poten ti al acros s the pixel to cha n g e by 40 µV.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(iii) Stat e on e assu m p ti o n tha t you have mad e in arriving at your

answ e r in (b)(ii).
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................

..................
(1)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

86 0 . This ques tion is abou t special rela tivity.
(a) Stat e what is mea n t by an inerti al fram e of refe r e n c e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) Aibhe is at rest in an inerti al fram e of refe r e n c e A and Eua n is at rest

in an inertial fram e of refe r e n c e B. B is moving in the x -dire c tio n, with
spee d v, relative to A. The table T is at res t with res p e c t to Aibhe.
Aibhe meas u r e s the lengt h of T to be 1.5 m and Eua n me a s u r e s it to

be 1.2 m.
(i) Explain which observ e r me a s u r e s the prop e r lengt h of T.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Dete r mi n e the spee d v .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(c) Two insect s land at the sam e point on T. Accordi n g to a clock at rest
with resp e c t to Aibhe, one of the insect s lands 2.4 secon d s afte r the
other . Calculat e, accor di n g to Eua n, the time interv al betw e e n the
landing s of each insect.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(d) Two other insect s land at eithe r end of the table. Thes e two event s
may occur at the sam e time as me a s u r e d by one of the obse r v e r s
(Aibhe or Euan) but not to the othe r. Outline, with refe r e n c e to the
post ul a t e s of relativity, why the s e time s differ.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................

.....................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

86 1 . This ques tion is abou t fermion s and bosons .
(a) Disting ui s h, with refer e n c e to the Pauli exclusion principle, the

differ e n c e betw e e n fermion s and bosons.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) Identify the boson that media t e s the
(i) elect r o m a g n e t i c inter a c ti o n betw e e n elect r o n s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) stron g inter a c ti o n betw e e n nucleon s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(c) The stron g inter a c ti o n betw e e n nucle on s has a ran g e of the orde r of
10 –15 m. Show that the mass of the boson in (b)(ii) is about 100 MeV c –
2
.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(d) The Feyn m a n diagr a m shows the dec ay of a meso n into an anti- muon
and a neut ri n o.
(i) Stat e the char g e on the meso n and on the anti- muon and explain
your answ e r s .
Meso n: ............................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
Anti-
muon: ......................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Identify the particle labelle d X.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
86 2 . This ques tion is abou t the star Becr ux and Ceph ei d variabl e s .
(i) the app a r e n t mag nit u d e scale.
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) absolut e mag nit u d e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b) Becr ux is a main sequ e n c e sta r and is one of the sta r s tha t mak e up
the Sout h e r n Cross.
The following data are availa ble for Becr ux.
Appar e n t magni t u d e = 1.25

Absolut e mag nit u d e = –3.92
Appar e n t bright n e s s = 7.00 × 10 –12 b Sun
b Sun is the appa r e n t bright n e s s of the Sun. Use the data to dedu c e
that the
(i) dist a n c e of Becrux from Eart h is 108 pc.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) luminosity of Becr ux is 3.43 × 10 3 L Sun whe r e L Sun is the

luminosity of the Sun.
(1 pc = 2.05 × 10 5 AU)
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(c) Becr ux is a spect r al class B star. On the axes of the Hertz s p r u n g–
Russell diagr a m label with the lette r B the appr oxi m a t e position of
Becr ux.
(1)
(d) On the axes of the Her tzs p r u n g–R u s s e ll diagr a m above, dra w the
appr oxi m a t e region in which Ceph ei d variable sta r s are locat e d.
(1)
(e) Stat e the reas o n for the periodic varia tio n in luminosity of a Ceph ei d
variabl e.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(f) Stat e the two quan ti tie s that nee d to be mea s u r e d in orde r to use a
Ceph ei d variabl e as a “sta n d a r d candle” to det e r m i n e the dista n c e to
the galaxy in which the Ceph ei d is locat e d.
1. .............................................................................................................
.....................
2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 14 mark s )
86 3 . This ques tion is abou t cosmology.
(a) The diagr a m below repr e s e n t s a sphe ri c a l region of spac e base d on

Newt o n’s model of the unive r s e . Eart h is at the cent r e of the region.
The dark line repr e s e n t s a very thin sphe ric al shell of spa c e dista n c e
R from Ear t h.
With refer e n c e to the diag r a m and Newto n’s model of the unive r s e
explain qua n t i t a t i v e l y Olbe r s’ par a d ox.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)

(b) Outline how the Big Bang theor y provide s a resolution to Olbe r s’
par a d ox.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
86 4 . Two cars, X and Y, are travelling towa r d s a junction. The velocity of car X is
V X and car Y is V Y.
Which of the following vector s repr e s e n t the velocity of Y relative to X?
(Tot al 1 mar k )

86 5 . If a moving object is subject to a const a n t force, which of the following can
be corr e c tly ded uc e d from Newt o n’s first law?
A. The object contin u e s to move with a cha n gi n g velocity.
B. The object contin u e s to move with a cons t a n t velocity.
C. The object contin u e s to move with a cha n gi n g dire c tion.
D. The object contin u e s to move in the sam e dire c tion.

(Tot al 1 mar k )
86 6 . A vehicle is driven up a hill at const a n t spe e d. Which of the following best

descri b e s the ener gy chan g e s involved?
A. Chemic al ener gy is conver t e d into gravit a tio n a l pote n ti al ene r gy.
B. Chemic al ener gy is conver t e d into gravit a tio n a l pote n ti al ene r gy,

C. Gravit ation al poten ti al ene r gy is conve r t e d into che mic al ene r gy.
D. Gravit ation al poten ti al ene r gy is conve r t e d into che mic al ene r gy,
(Tot al 1 mar k )
86 7 . Which of the following repr e s e n t s a scala r and a vector qua n ti ty?
Scal a r Vect o r
A. elect ric pote n ti al elect ric pote n ti al
gra di e n t
B. elect ric pote n ti al elect ric pote n ti al
gradi e n t
C. elect ric pote n ti al elect ric pote n ti al
differ e n c e
D. elect ric pote n ti al elect ric field
gradi e n t
(Tot al 1 mar k )

86 8 . A football is kicked with an initial velocity u at an angle θ to the horizon t al
and reach e s the grou n d t secon d s late r.
Ignorin g air resist a n c e what is the rang e R of the football?
A. ut
B. ut cos θ
C. ut sin θ
D. ut tan θ
(Tot al 1 mar k )

86 9 . Four point char g e s of magni t u d e s + q , + q , –q , and –q are held in plac e at
the corne r s of a squa r e of side r.
The Coulom b const a n t is k . Which of the following is the elect ric al pote n ti al
at the cent r e of the squa r e O?
A. 0
4k q
B. r
4k q 2
C. r
 4k q 2
D. r2
(Tot al 1 mar k )
87 0 . The beh aviou r of real gas es is differ e n t from that pre dic t e d for ideal gas e s.
Which of the following stat e m e n t s about real gase s is not corr e c t ?
A. Gas molecul e s have pote n ti al ene r gy.
B. Forc es betw e e n gas molec ul e s are always negligible.
C. Gas molecul e s have volum e.
D. Real gas es can liquefy.

(Tot al 1 mar k )

87 1 . The gra p h below shows the varia tion of the pres s u r e p with volum e V of an
ideal gas during one cycle of an engin e.
Which of the following cor r e c tly nam e s the the r m o d y n a m i c proc e s s

associ at e d with the par t s Y→Z and Z→X of the cycle?
Y→Z Z →X
A. isoba ric isochoric
B. isoba ric isoth e r m a l
C. isocho ric isoba ric
D. isocho ric isoth e r m a l
(Tot al 1 mar k )

87 2 . Diagr a m 1 repr e s e n t s equally spac e d bea d s on a sprin g. The bea d s are 1
cm apar t.
Dia gr a m 1
A longit u di n al wave prop a g a t e s along the spring. Diagr a m 2 shows the

position of the bea ds at a partic ul a r insta n t .
Dia gr a m 2
Which of the following is the best estim a t e of the wavele n g t h ?
A. 2 cm
B. 4 cm
C. 8 cm
D. 16 cm
(Tot al 1 mar k )

87 3 . Diagr a m 1 repr e s e n t s equally spac e d bea d s on a sprin g. The bea d s are 1
cm apar t.
Dia gr a m 1
A longit u di n al wave prop a g a t e s along the spring. Diagr a m 2 shows the

position of the bea ds at a partic ul a r insta n t .
Dia gr a m 2
Which of the following is the best estim a t e of the amplit u d e ?
A. 0.4 cm
B. 0.8 cm
C. 1.6 cm
D. 3.2 cm
(Tot al 1 mar k )

87 4 . Which of the following is a corr e c t comp a r i s o n betw e e n sta n di n g waves
and travelling waves?
Sta n d i n g wav e s Trave l li n g wave s

A. wave amplitu d e is cons t a n t wave am plit u d e dep e n d s
at all points along the wave upon the position along the
wave
B. ene r gy is always tran sf e r r e d ene r gy is not tra n sf e r r e d
C. the wavele n g t h is twice the the wavele n g t h is the
dist a n c e betw e e n dista n c e betw e e n
cons ec u t iv e nodes cons e c u tive cre st s
D. phas e varies continu o u sly phas e is const a n t betw e e n
along the wave cons e c u tive cre st s
(Tot al 1 mar k )
87 5 . Two galaxies with an ang ul a r sepa r a ti o n at the obs e rv e r of 5.0 × 10 –4

radi an s are obse rv e d with a radio teles c o p e . Both galaxie s emit radio
waves of wavelen g t h 2.5 × 10 –2 m.
The imag e s of the galaxies are just resolve d by the teles c o p e . The diam e t e r
of the circul ar collectin g dish of the teles c o p e is
A. 61 m.
B. 50 m.
C. 30 m.
D. 25 m.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

87 6 . The diagr a m shows sunligh t reflect e d from a lake surfa c e. The reflec t e d
sunligh t is plan e- polarize d.
The plan e of polariza tion of the reflect e d sunlight is
A. par allel to the lake surface .
B. perp e n d i c ul a r to the lake surfa c e .
C. par allel to the direc tio n of the reflect e d sunligh t.
D. in the plan e of the diag r a m .

(Tot al 1 mar k )
87 7 . The diagr a m below show s a particle with positive cha r g e q acc el e r a t i n g

betw e e n two cond u c ti n g plate s at pote n ti al s V 1 and V 2 .
Which of the following is the kinetic ene r gy gaine d by the char g e in moving
betw e e n the plat es ?
A. V2q
B. V1q
C. (V 1 – V 2 )q
D. (V 2 – V 1 )q
(Tot al 1 mar k )

87 8 . A cylindrical condu c t o r of lengt h l, diam e t e r D and resistivity ρ has
resis t a n c e R . A differe n t cylindric al cond u c t o r of resis tivity 2 ρ, lengt h 2 l
and diam e t e r 2 D has a resist a n c e
A. 2R.
B. R.
R
C. 2.
R
D. 4.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
87 9 . A test char g e is a
A. char g e d object with a very small mass.
B. char g e d object with a very small cha r g e .
C. point char g e which has no effect on the elect ric field in which it is
place d.
D. point char g e which slightly chan g e s the elect ric field in which it is
place d.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

88 0 . A magn e t i c field of stre n g t h B links a coil. The direc tion of the field is
nor m al to the plan e of the coil.
The gra p h shows how B varies with time t .
Which of the following grap h s shows how the induc e d em f ε in the coil
varie s with t?
(Tot al 1 mar k )

88 1 . Raoul sugg e s t s that powe r losse s in a tra n sfo r m e r may be redu c e d by the
following.
I. Const r u c ti n g the core from a solid block of steel.
II. Using larg e diam e t e r wire in the coils.
III. Using wire of low resis tivity.
Which of the above sugg e s ti o n s would red uc e powe r loss?
A. I only
B. II only
C. II and III only
D. I, II and III
(Tot al 1 mar k )
88 2 . Proto n s and neut r o n s are held toge t h e r in the nucle u s by the
A. elect r o s t a t i c force.
B. gravit atio n al force.
C. weak nuclea r force.
D. stron g nuclea r force.

(Tot al 1 mar k )

88 3 . A radioac tive isotop e has an initial activity A 0 and a half- life of 1 day. The
grap h shows how the activity A varies with time.
A0
The ratio A2 is equ al to which of the following?
A1
A. A3
A0
B. A3
A0
C. 2
A3
D. 3
(Tot al 1 mar k )
88 4 . The squa r e of the amplitu d e of the elect r o n wave function in a hydrog e n

atom is a meas u r e of the
A. unce r t a i n t y in position of the elect r o n.
B. mom e n t u m of the elect r o n.
C. prob a bility of finding an elect r o n at a par tic ul a r point.
D. unce r t a i n t y in the velocity.

(Tot al 1 mar k )

88 5 . A particle is accel er a t e d from rest thro u g h a pote n ti al differ e n c e V . Which
of the following gra p h s best show s how the de Broglie wavele n g t h λ
associ at e d with the par ticle varies with V?
(Tot al 1 mar k )
88 6 . Which of the following is a corr e c t stat e m e n t associ a t e d with the

photo el e c t r i c effect?
A. Elect r o n emission is insta n t a n e o u s .
B. Elect r o n s are only emitt e d if the incide n t light is above a cert ai n

minim u m wavelen g t h .
C. The ene r gy of the emitt e d elect r o n s dep e n d s on the light inte n si ty.
D. The ene r gy of the emitt e d elect r o n s does not depe n d on the frequ e n c y
of the inciden t light.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

88 7 . Which of the following ene r gy sourc e s res ults from the solar ene r gy
incide n t on Ear t h?
A. Nucle a r fission
B. Wind ener gy
C. Nucle a r fusion
D. Geoth e r m a l ener gy
(Tot al 1 mar k )
88 8 . A ther m al powe r station is 20 % efficien t and gene r a t e s useful elect ric al

powe r at 1000 MW. The fossil fuel use d has an ene r gy density of 50 MJ kg –
1
. The mas s of fuel in kg cons u m e d every secon d is given by which of the
following?
A. 0.01
B. 0.25
C. 4
D. 100
(Tot al 1 mar k )

88 9 . Venus and Ear t h may be reg a r d e d as beha vin g as black bodies. The me a n
tem p e r a t u r e at the surfac e of Venus is about 600 K and at the surfa c e of
Eart h is about 300 K. Which of the following is the best estim a t e for the
ratio
p o w e r a d ia t epde ru n ita r e ao n E a r t h
p o w e r a d ia t epde ru n ita r e ao n Ve n u s?
1
A. 2
1
B. 4
1
C. 8
1
D. 16
(Tot al 1 mar k )
89 0 . The volum e of the Pacific Ocean is V and the volum e expa n s ivity of
seaw a t e r is γ. If the aver a g e tem p e r a t u r e of the Pacific Oce a n incr e a s e s by
∆T , wha t would be the fraction a l incre a s e in volum e of the Pacific Oce a n ?
A. γV ∆T
γV
B. ΔT
C. γ∆T
γ
D. ΔT
(Tot al 1 mar k )

89 1 . A laser of wavelen g t h λ is used in a comp u t e r to rea d dat a from a CD.
Which of the following is the appr o p r i a t e dept h of a pit on the CD?
λ
A. 2
λ
B. 4
C. 2λ
D. 4λ
(Tot al 1 mar k )
89 2 . Incr e a s i n g the quan t u m efficiency of a CCD will incr e a s e the
A. signal stre n g t h .
B. magnificatio n.
C. pixel size.
D. resolutio n.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

The frequ e n cy f of the funda m e n t a l vibra tion of a sta n di n g wave of fixed

lengt h is mea s u r e d for differ e n t value s of the tension T in the string, using
the app a r a t u s show n.
In orde r to find the relation s hi p betw e e n the spee d v of the wave and the
tension T in the string, the spee d v is calcul a t e d from the relation
v = 2 f L
wher e L is the lengt h of the string.
The dat a points are show n plott e d on the axes below. The unce r t a i n t y in v
is ±5 m s –1 and the uncer t ai n t y in T is negligible.
(a) Draw error bar s on the first and last dat a points to show the
unce r t a i n t y in speed v .
(1)

(b) The origin al hypot h e si s is tha t the spe e d is dire c tly propo r tio n a l to the
tension T .
Explain why the dat a do not suppo r t this hypot h e s i s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c) It is sugg e s t e d that the rela tion s hi p betw e e n spee d and tension is of
the form
v = k T
whe r e k is a const a n t .
To test whet h e r the data suppo r t this rela tion s hi p, a gra p h of v 2

agains t T is plott e d as show n below.
The bes t- fit line show n take s into accou n t the unce r t a i n t i e s for eac h
dat a point.
The unce r t ai n t y in v 2 for T = 3.5 N is show n as an error bar on the
grap h.
(i) Stat e the value of the unc e r t ai n t y in v 2 for T = 3.5 N.
.........................................................................................................

..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) At T = 1.0 N the spee d v = 27 ± 5 m s –1 . Calcula t e the
unce r t ai n t y in v 2 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(d) Use the grap h in (c) to dete r m i n e k withou t its unc e r t a i n t y.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 11 mark s )
89 4 . This ques tion is abou t ther m al ene r gy tra n sf e r .
(a) A piece of coppe r is held in a flame until it reac h e s the r m a l

equilibri u m . The time it takes to reac h the r m a l equilibri u m will

dep e n d on the ther m al capa city of the piece of coppe r .
(i) Define ther m al capacity .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Outline what is mea n t by the r m a l equilibriu m in this cont ext.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b) The piece of coppe r is tran sf e r r e d quickly to a plas tic cup cont ai nin g
wat e r. The ther m a l capacity of the cup is negligible. The following
dat a are availabl e.
Mass of copp e r = 0.12 kg

Mass of wat e r = 0.45 kg
Rise in tem p e r a t u r e of wate r = 30 K
Final tem p e r a t u r e of copp e r = 308 K
Specific heat capa ci ty of copp e r = 390 J kg
K–1
Specific heat capa ci ty of wat e r = 4200 J kg
K–1
(i) Use the dat a to calcula t e the tem p e r a t u r e of the flame.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) Explain whet h e r the tem p e r a t u r e of the flame is likely to be

grea t e r or less than your ans w e r to (b)(i).
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

89 5 . This ques tion is abou t gravit a tio n a l and elect ric fields.
(a) The equa tio n for the mag ni t u d e of the gravit a tio n a l field stre n g t h due
to a point mas s may be writt e n as below.
KX
2
Y = s
The equa tio n for the mag ni t u d e of the elec t ric field str e n g t h can also
be writt e n in the sam e form.
In the table identify the symbols used in the equ a tio n.
Sy m b o l Gravit a t i o n a l fiel d Ele c t r i c a l fiel d

qua n t i t y qua n t i t y
Y
K
X
s
(4)
(b) The mag ni t u d e of the elec t r o s t a t i c forc e betw e e n the proto n and
elect r o n in a hydro g e n atom is F E . The mag nit u d e of the gravit a tio n al
force betw e e n them is F G .
FE
Deter m i n e the ratio FG .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

89 6 . This ques tion is abou t microw a v e s .
(a) Radiatio n from a microw av e tra n s m i t t e r pass e s throu g h a single

nar r o w slit. A receive r is plac e d seve r a l met r e s beyon d the slit. The
receive r can be moved betw e e n point A and point B along a line
par allel to the slit.
(i) On the axes below, sketc h a gra p h to show the variation of

inten si ty of the microw a v e radia tion with dista n c e along line AB.
The gra p h has bee n sta r t e d for you.
(3)

(ii) The width of the nar r o w slit is red uc e d . Stat e and explain two
effect s on the inten si ty distrib u tio n you have show n in (a)(i).
Effect: .............................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
Explan a t io n: ....................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
Effect: .............................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
Explan a t io n: ....................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(b) Stan di n g waves are form e d in microw a v e ovens. Sugg e s t why it is

desir a bl e that food is rotat e d while being cooke d in the microw a v e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................

.....................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

A solid iron ball of mass 770 kg is use d on a building site. The ball is
sus p e n d e d by a rope from a cra n e . The dista n c e from the point of
sus p e n s i o n to the cent r e of mas s of the ball is 12 m.
(a) Calcula t e the tension in the rope whe n the ball hang s vertic al and
station a r y.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) The ball is pulled back from the vertic al and the n relea s e d . It falls
throu g h a vertical height of 1.6 m and strike s a wall.
(i) Calculat e the speed of the ball just befor e impa c t.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Calculat e the tension in the rope just befor e impa c t.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................

..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(c) The ball is broug h t to rest in 0.15 s. The sketc h gra p h below shows
how the force the ball exer t s on the wall varie s with time.
(i) Stat e what qua n ti ty is repr e s e n t e d by the are a und e r the gra p h.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Dete r mi n e the maxim u m force F max exer t e d by the ball on the
wall.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

89 8 . This ques tion is abou t the gene r a t i o n of elect ric a l ene r gy and global
war mi n g.
(a) The diagr a m , not to scale, shows a pum p e d- stor a g e powe r sta tion
used for the gen e r a t io n of elect ric a l ene r gy.
Water stor e d in the tank is allowe d to fall thro u g h a pipe to a lake via
a tur bi n e. The tur bi n e is conne c t e d to an elect ric al gene r a t o r . The
pum p e d- stor a g e ac gene r a t o r syste m is reve r si bl e so that wate r can
be pum p e d from the lake to the tank.
The tank is 50 m deep and has a unifor m are a of 5.0 × 10 4 m 2 . The

heigh t from the botto m of the tank to the turbi n e is 310 m. The
density of wate r is 1.0 × 10 3 kg m –3 .
(i) Show that the maxim u m ene r gy that can be deliver e d to the
turbin e by the falling wate r is about 8 × 10 12 J.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) The flow rat e of wat e r in the pipe is 400 m 3 s –1 . Calcula t e the
powe r deliver e d by the falling wat e r.

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b) The ene r gy losses in the powe r station are shown in the following
tabl e.
Per c e n t a g e los s of
So ur c e of en er g y los s
en e r g y
friction and turb ul e n c e of wat e r
27
in pipe
friction in tur bin e and ac
15
gene r a t o r
elect ric al heatin g losses 5
(i) Calculat e the overall efficiency of the conve r sio n of the

gravit a tion al poten t i al ene r gy of wate r in the tank into elect ric al
ene r gy.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Sketc h a Sank ey diag r a m to rep r e s e n t the ene r gy conve r sio n in

the powe r station.

(2)

(c) An ac gen e r a t o r is conn e c t e d to the tur bi n e use d in the pum p e d- wate r
powe r station.
The diagr a m s show two positions of one winding of the coil in the
gene r a t o r . The magn e t i c field acts horizon t a lly in the direc tio n show n.
The coil rotat e s clockwis e.
(i) By consid e r i n g the motion of XY, explain why the emf induc e d
betw e e n X and Y has a maxim u m value in position 2.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) In position 2 the vertic al spe e d of XY is 160 m s –1 . The mag n e t i c

field str en g t h is 0.015 T and XY = 1.5 m. Dete r m i n e the induc e d
emf betw e e n X and Y at this position.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................

..................
(2)

(iii) Side XY is par t of the rect a n g u l a r gene r a t o r coil that has 1500
windin g s conn e c t e d in serie s. Calcul a t e the total emf acros s the
ends of the coil at the mom e n t whe n XY move s vertic ally
down w a r d s at 90° to the mag n e t i c field direc tio n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(d) The elect ric al power prod u c e d at the powe r station is tra n s m i t t e d by
cables to the cons u m e r .
(i) Outline how the ene r gy losse s in tra n s m i s sio n are minimize d.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) Stat e on e advan t a g e and on e disa dv a n t a g e that a pum p e d-

stor a g e syste m has comp a r e d to a tidal wat e r stor a g e syste m .
Advant a g e : ......................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
Disadva n t a g e : .................................................................................
...................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(e) One effect of global war mi n g is to melt the Antar c tic ice she e t. The
following data are availabl e for the Antar c ti c ice she e t and the Eart h’s
ocea n s .
Area of ice shee t = 1.4 × 10 7 km 2

Averag e thickn e s s of ice = 1.5 × 10 3 m
Density of ice = 920 kg m –3
Density of wat e r = 1000 kg m –3
Area of Eart h’s ocea n s = 3.8 × 10 8
km 2
Using the dat a, det e r m i n e the
(i) mas s of the Antar ctic ice.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) chan g e in mean sea level if all the Antar c tic ice she e t wer e to
melt and flow into the oce a n s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 25 mark s )
89 9 . This ques tion is abou t nuclea r fission and fusion.
(a) The grap h shows the variatio n of binding ene r gy per nucle on for
nuclides with a nucleon num b e r gre a t e r tha n 40.

(i) Define bindin g ener g y .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) On the grap h, label with the lette r S the position of the most
stable nuclide.
(1)
(iii) Stat e why the nuclide you have labelle d is the most sta bl e.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b) In a nucle a r react o r , a nucle u s of ura ni u m ( U)- 235 fissions into

bariu m(B a)- 141 and krypto n(Kr)- 92. The equa tio n for this fission is
235 141 92 1
9 2 U  5 6 Ba3 6 Kr x 0 n .
(i) Use the grap h to show that the fission of one nucle u s of ura ni u m-
235 will releas e abou t 200 MeV of ene r gy.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................

..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(ii) Stat e the value of x in the equa tio n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) The mas s defect in this rea c tion is 3.1 × 10 –28 kg. Calcula t e the
num b e r of ura ni u m- 235 nuclei that mus t fission in orde r to
relea s e 1.0 kJ of ener gy.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iv) Outline how this fission reac tio n can lead to a chain reac tion.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) Inten sive scientific effort is devot e d to developi n g nucle a r fusion as a
futur e ener gy sourc e. Discus s wha t could be the social and
enviro n m e n t a l benefits of using nucle a r fusion as com p a r e d with
nuclea r fission as an ener gy sourc e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 15 mark s )
90 0 . This ques tion is abou t char g e- couple d device s (CCD).
(a) Stat e the condition neces s a r y for two points on an imag e to be

resolved by a CCD.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) The following data are for a CCD in a cam e r a .
Dimen sion s of CCD = 24 mm × 16 mm

Num b e r of pixels = 10.2 × 10 6
(i) Each pixel on the CCD is squa r e and they all have the sam e
dime n sio n s . Show tha t the lengt h of one side of a pixel is about 6
μm.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................

..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) The pixels have quan t u m efficiency of 80 % and a capa ci t a n c e of
35 pF. Photo n s are incide n t on a pixel at a rat e of 1.6 × 10 8 s –1 .
Calculat e the poten ti al differ e n c e acros s a pixel after 12 ms.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(iii) A photog r a p h is take n of a dist a n t building using the cam e r a . The

mag nification of the CCD is 2.2 × 10 –6 . Two window s on the
building are sepa r a t e d by 2.5 m.
Dete r mi n e whet h e r the imag e s of the window s can be resolve d
by the CCD.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c) In ter m s of dat a stor a g e , sta t e two adva n t a g e s of using a digital

cam e r a as comp a r e d to an analog u e cam e r a that uses film.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

90 1 . This ques tion is abou t simple har m o ni c motion.
(a) In ter m s of the accel e r a t i o n, stat e two conditions nec e s s a r y for a

syste m to perfor m simpl e har m o ni c motion.
1. .............................................................................................................
.....................
2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) A tuning fork is sound e d and it is assu m e d that eac h tip vibra t e s with
simple har m o ni c motion.
The extr e m e positions of the oscillatin g tip of one fork are sepa r a t e d
by a dista n c e d .
(i) Stat e, in ter m s of d , the amplit u d e of vibra tio n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) On the axes below, sketc h a gra p h to show how the displac e m e n t
of one tip of the tunin g fork varies with time.

(1)

(iii) On your grap h, label the time period T and the amplit u d e a.
(2)
(c) The frequ e n c y of oscillation of the tips is 440 Hz and the amplit u d e of
oscillation of each tip is 1.2 mm. Dete r m i n e the maxim u m
(i) linea r speed of a tip.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) accele r a ti o n of a tip.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(d) The sketc h gra p h below show s how the velocity of a tip varies with
time.
On the axes, sketc h a grap h to show how the acc ele r a t io n of the tip
varies with time.
(2)

(e) In practice, the motion of the tips of the tuning fork is da m p e d .
(i) Describ e what is mea n t by da m p e d motion.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Sugg e s t on e reas o n why the motion of the tips is dam p e d .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 14 mark s )
90 2 . This ques tion is abou t ther m o dy n a m i c s .
(a) The first law of ther m o dy n a m i c s can be writt e n as the following

equa tio n.
Q = ∆U + W
Identify the symbols in this equ a tio n.
Q ..............................................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
∆U ...........................................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
W .............................................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................

.....................
(3)

(b) A fixed mas s of an ideal gas is cont ai n e d in a cylinde r by a piston. The
friction betw e e n the piston and cylinde r wall is negligible.
Two proc e d u r e s are carri e d out on the gas. The ther m a l ene r gy input
to the gas is the sam e in both proc e d u r e s .
Pro c e d u r e 1 The gas is hea t e d and expa n d s at const a n t pres s u r e

with the piston free to move. The tem p e r a t u r e of the gas
incr e a s e s by 21 K.
Pro c e d u r e 2 The gas is now brou g h t back to its initial stat e and
again heat e d with the piston fixed in position. The
tem p e r a t u r e of the gas incr e a s e s by 35 K.
(i) Stat e the nam e of the proc e s s in proc e d u r e 2.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Explain why the tem p e r a t u r e cha n g e is gre a t e r in proc e d u r e 2

than in proce d u r e 1.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(iii) In proc e d u r e 1, ∆U cha n g e s by 120 J. Use the first law of

ther m o d y n a m i c s to calcul a t e the missing value s in the table
below.
∆U / J W / J Q / J
Proc e d u r +1 2 0 +2 0 0

e 1
Proc e d u r +2 0 0
e 2
(3)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

90 3 . This ques tion is abou t elect ri c circ uit s.
The compo n e n t s show n below are to be conn e c t e d in a circuit to

inves tig a t e how the cur r e n t I in a tungs t e n filame n t lamp varies with the
poten ti al differ e n c e V acros s it.
(a) Cons t r u c t a circuit diagr a m to show how the s e compo n e n t s should be

conn e c t e d toget h e r in orde r to obtain as larg e a ran g e as possible for
values of poten ti al differ e n c e acros s the lamp.
(4)

(b) On the axes, sketc h a grap h of I agains t V for a filame n t lamp in the
ran g e V = 0 to its nor m al working volta g e .
(2)
(c) The lam p is mar k e d with the symbols “1.25 V, 300 mW”. Calcula t e the
cur r e n t in the filame n t whe n it is workin g nor m ally.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(d) The resis tivity of tung s t e n at the lamp’s workin g tem p e r a t u r e is 4 ×

10 –7 Ωm. The total lengt h of the tungs t e n filam e n t is 0.80 m. Estim a t e
the radius of the filam e n t .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)

(e) The cell is conn e c t e d to two identic al lamps conn e c t e d in par allel. The
lamps are rat e d at 1.25 V, 300 mW. The cell has an emf of 1.5 V and
an inter n al resist a n c e of 1.2 Ω.
Deter m i n e whet h e r the lam ps will light nor m ally.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 15 mark s )
90 4 . This ques tion is abou t elect r o n s .
(a) In 1924, Davisson and Ger m e r car rie d out an expe ri m e n t in which
elect r o n s wer e accele r a t e d throu g h a pote n ti al differ e n c e of 54 V. The
elect r o n s wer e scat t e r e d at the surfa c e of a nickel cryst al.
(i) Outline how the res ults of the expe ri m e n t sugg e s t e d tha t
elect r o n s exhibit wave prop e r ti e s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Calculat e the de Broglie wavele n g t h of the elect r o n s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(b) Explain how the de Broglie hypot h e s i s is used with the “elect r o n in a
box” model to und e r s t a n d the origin of atomic ene r gy levels in the
atom.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(5)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
90 5 . This ques tion is abou t the star Becr ux and Ceph ei d variabl e s .
(i) the app a r e n t mag nit u d e scale.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) absolut e mag nit u d e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) Becr ux is a main sequ e n c e sta r and is one of the sta r s tha t mak e up
the Sout h e r n Cross.
The following data are availa ble for Becr ux.
Appar e n t magni t u d e = 1.25

Absolut e mag nit u d e = –3.92
Appar e n t bright n e s s = 7.00 × 10 –12 b Sun
b Sun is the appa r e n t bright n e s s of the Sun. Use the data to dedu c e
that the
(i) dist a n c e of Becrux from Eart h is 108 pc.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) luminosity of Becr ux is 3.43 × 10 3 L Sun whe r e L Sun is the

luminosity of the Sun.
(1 pc = 2.05 ×1 0 5 AU)
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(c) Given that the powe r in the mass–lumi no si ty relations hi p is 3.5, show

that the mas s of Becruz is abou t 10 M Sun whe r e M Sun is the mas s of the
Sun.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(d) Stat e the differ e n c e s betw e e n the event u a l fate of the Sun and Becrux
after they leave the main sequ e n c e .
Sun: .........................................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Becr ux: ....................................................................................................

....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(e) Becr ux is a spect r al class B star. On the axes of the Hertz s p r u n g–

Russell diagr a m
(i) label, with the lette r B, the app r oxi m a t e position of Becrux.
(1)
(ii) draw the evolution a r y pat h of Becr ux afte r it leave s the main
sequ e n c e .
(1)

(f) On the axes of the Her tzs p r u n g–R u s s e ll diagr a m above, dra w the
appr oxi m a t e region in which Ceph ei d variable sta r s are locat e d.
(1)

(g) Stat e the reas o n for the periodic varia tio n in luminosity of a Ceph ei d
variabl e.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(h) Stat e the two quan ti tie s that nee d to be mea s u r e d in orde r to use a
Ceph ei d variabl e as a “sta n d a r d candle” to det e r m i n e the dista n c e to
the galaxy in which the Ceph ei d is locat e d.
1. .............................................................................................................
.....................
2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 19 mark s )

90 6 . This ques tion is abou t cosmology.
(a) The diagr a m below repr e s e n t s a sphe ri c a l region of spac e base d on

Newt o n’s model of the unive r s e . Eart h is at the cent r e of the region.
The dark line repr e s e n t s a very thin sphe ric al shell of spa c e dista n c e
R from Ear t h.
With refer e n c e to the diag r a m and Newto n’s model of the unive r s e
explain qua n t i t a t i v e l y Olbe r s’ par a d ox.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)

(b) The Big Bang theory provide s a resolutio n to Olber s’ par a d ox. Two
pieces of evide nc e to suppo r t the theor y are the exist e n c e of cosmic
microw av e backg r o u n d radia tion (CMB) and the red- shifte d light from
dista n t galaxies.
(i) Outline how CMB is consist e n t with the Big Bang theo ry.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) The following dat a are availa bl e for the red- shift of light from a
dist a n t galaxy.
Wavelen g t h of light from galaxy = 130

nm
Wavelen g t h mea s u r e d in labor a t o r y = 120
nm
Hubbl e const a n t = 74 km s –1 Mpc –1
Use the dat a to dete r m i n e the dista n c e of the galaxy from Eart h.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

(a) Disting ui s h betw e e n a signal wave and car rie r wave.
Signal
wave: ...............................................................................................
.................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Car ri e r
wave: ...............................................................................................
................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) With refer e n c e to a car ri e r wave, disting uis h betw e e n amplitu d e

modul a tion and frequ e n cy modul a tio n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(c) The diagr a m is a sketc h of an audio frequ e n c y signal.
A radio wave is frequ e n c y modula t e d by the audio frequ e n c y sign al.

Stat e the chan g e s , if any, in the frequ e n c y of the modul a t e d signal in
the following time interv als.
A→
B ......................................................................................................
...................
B→
C ......................................................................................................
...................
C →
D ......................................................................................................
...................
(3)
(d) For a partic ul a r frequ e n cy modul a t e d carri e r wave, the maxim u m

frequ e n c y occur s every 1.2 ms. Ther e are 2.2 × 10 5 oscillation s
betw e e n each maxim u m frequ e n c y.
Deter m i n e the frequ e n cy of the
(i) signal wave.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) carri e r wave.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
90 8 . This ques tion is abou t digital signals.
(a) The grap h shows the variatio n with time of an analog u e signal.
In orde r to conver t the analog u e signal into a 3- bit digital signal it is

sam pl e d every 100 µs. The possible outpu t volta g e s of the analog u e to
digital conver t e r that is use d are show n below.
Anal o g u e si g n a l / V Bin ary out p u t

0 – < 0.5 000
0.5 – < 1.0 001
1.0 – < 1.5 010
1.5 – < 2.0 011
2.0 – < 2.5 100
2.5 – < 3.0 101

3.0 – < 3.5 110
3.5 – < 4.0 111

Deter m i n e , explaining your answ e r , the
(i) bit- rate (dat a tran sf e r rat e).
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) digital outp u t of the signal for the sixth sam pl e sta r ti n g from t =
0 s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b) Explain the effect s that incre a si n g the sam pling frequ e n c y and
num b e r of bits will have on the quality of the repr e s e n t a t i o n of the
analog u e signal.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

(3)
(c) The digital signal in (a) is to be tra n s m i t t e d along an optic fibre tha t
has a powe r loss of 2.0 dB km –1 .
(i) Stat e, in watt s, how powe r loss is define d on the decibel scale.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Calculat e the dista n c e travelle d by the signal that will result in a
powe r loss of 75 %.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(d) As a result of noise in elect ric circuits, digital pulse s can often lose
their shap e and henc e distor t the infor m a ti o n that they car ry. The
pulses can be re- shap e d using a circ uit calle d a Sch mit t trigg e r . The
diagr a m show s a Schmit t trigg e r tha t incor po r a t e s an oper a ti o n a l
amplifier.
(i) Stat e two esse n ti al prop e r t i e s of an ope r a tio n a l amplifier.

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) In the situation show n the outpu t volta g e V 0 of the amplifie r is at
its minim u m value of – 6.0 V. The volta g e at the non- inver ti n g
input to the amplifier is equal to 1.0 V and at the inver tin g input
it is V X. The outpu t volta g e will switch to its maxim u m value +
6.0 V if the voltag e V X just exce e d s +1. 0 V. Dete r mi n e the
minim u m voltag e V in that will resul t in an outpu t volta g e of + 6.0
V.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(Tot al 16 mark s )
90 9 . Outline on e mor al or ethical issue and on e enviro n m e n t a l issue that arise

from the use of mobile phon e s .
Moral or ethical
issue: .......................................................................................................
...
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
Environ m e n t a l
issue: .......................................................................................................
......
.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(Tota l 4 mark s )

91 0 . This ques tion is abou t the elect r o m a g n e t i c spec t r u m .
(a) The tran s m i s sio n from a television station has a frequ e n c y of 100
MHz. It is known that the elect r o m a g n e t i c waves associa t e d with this
tran s m i s sio n prod u c e a ma gn e t i c field.
Stat e on e reas o n why a comp a s s does not res po n d to this field.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b) It is propos e d that inste a d of using radio wave s for television

tran s m i s sio n gam m a- rays are use d.
(i) Stat e a typical gam m a - ray frequ e n c y.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Sugg e s t on e disadv a n t a g e of using ga m m a- rays for television

tran s mi s s io n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 3 mark s )

91 1 . This ques tion is abou t chro m a ti c abe r r a t i o n and a lens.
(a) Two par allel rays of white light are incide n t on a convex lens.
On the diag r a m , after refr a c tio n in the lens, dra w the path s for the
rays of red light and blue light pre s e n t in the white light.
(2)
(b) Use your diagr a m in (a) to explain chro m a ti c abe r r a t io n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c) Stat e on e way in which chro m a t i c abe r r a t i o n may be redu c e d .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................

.....................
(1)

(d) An object is place d 5.0 cm from the lens and is illumin a t e d with red
light. The focal lengt h of the lens for red light is 8.0 cm. Calcula t e the
(i) position of the imag e.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) linea r magnificatio n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 9 mark s )
91 2 . This ques tion is abou t two- sour c e inte rfe r e n c e .
(a) Light from a laser is incide n t on two identic al par allel slits whos e
width is small comp a r e d to their sepa r a t i o n.
After pas sin g thro u g h the slits the light is incide n t on a scre e n. The

sepa r a t i o n of the slits is 0.50 mm and the dista n c e betw e e n slits and
scre e n is 2.0 m. The wavele n g t h of the light is 700 nm.

(i) Stat e why a laser is used as the light sourc e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Dete r mi n e the sepa r a ti o n of points of maxim u m inte nsi ty on the

scre e n .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Describ e the effect that incr e a s i n g the num b e r of slits would
have on the inten sity patt e r n on the scre e n .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b) The slits in (a) are replac e d with a diffrac tion gra tin g that has 3.5 ×
10 5 lines per met r e.
Deter m i n e the num b e r of positions of maxim u m inte n si ty that will be
obse rv e d on the scre e n .
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
91 3 . This ques tion is abou t thin film inte rf e r e n c e .
A tran s p a r e n t thin film is som eti m e s use d to coat spec t a c l e lens e s as shown
in the diag r a m below.
(a) Stat e the phas e chan g e which occur s to light tha t
(i) is tran s m i t t e d at boun d a r y A into the film.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) is reflect e d at boun d a r y B.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) is tran s m i t t e d at boun d a r y A from the film into the air.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) Light of wavele n g t h 570 nm in air is incide n t on the coating.
Deter m i n e the smalles t thickn e s s of the coating requi r e d so that the
reflection is minimize d for nor m a l incide n c e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
(a) The diagr a m below is a sketc h that shows the X-ray spec t r a prod u c e d
by elect r o n s of ener gy 25 keV and of ene r gy 20 keV striking a
molybd e n u m targ e t .
Sugg e s t why no char a c t e r i s ti c spec t r a are produ c e d by the 20 keV

elect r o n s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) Show that the minim u m X-ray wavele n g t h prod u c e d by the 25 keV
elect r o n s in (a) is 0.050 nm.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c) The wavele n g t h s of the X-rays in (a) are me a s u r e d by scat t e ri n g the m

from the surfac e of a cryst al that has a cubic lattic e stru c t u r e . The
spaci n g of the lattice ions is 0.28 nm.
Calcula t e the wavel en g t h of the X-rays that prod u c e a first orde r
Brag g angle of 21°.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
91 5 . This ques tion is abou t special rela tivity.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) Aibhe is at rest in an inerti al fram e of refe r e n c e A and Eua n is at rest
in an inertial fram e of refe r e n c e B. B is moving in the x -dire c tio n, with
spee d v , relative to A. The table T is at res t with res p e c t to Aibhe.
Aibhe meas u r e s the lengt h of T to be 1.5 m and Eua n me a s u r e s it to

be 1.2 m.
(i) Explain which observ e r me a s u r e s the prop e r lengt h of T.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Dete r mi n e the spee d v .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................

..................
(4)

(c) Two insect s land at the sam e point on T. Accordi n g to a clock at rest
with resp e c t to Aibhe, one of the insect s lands 2.4 secon d s afte r the
other . Calculat e, accor di n g to Eua n, the time interv al betw e e n the
landing s of each insect.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(d) Two other insect s land at eithe r end of the table. Thes e two event s
may occ u r at the sam e time as mea s u r e d by one of the obse rv e r s
(Aibhe or Euan) but not to the othe r. Outline, with refe r e n c e to the
post ul a t e s of relativity, why the s e time s differ.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(e) Muons are produ c e d in the uppe r atmos p h e r e by the bomb a r d m e n t of

cosmic rays. The muons travel close to the spe e d of light and are
unst a bl e. They have a very shor t half- life as me a s u r e d in a muon’s
fram e of refer e n c e . Explain how the dete c tio n of muons at the surfa c e
of the Eart h provides evide n c e for the speci al theory of rela tivity.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 13 mark s )

91 6 . This ques tion is abou t relativistic ene r gy and mom e n t u m .
(a) Particle A is at rest with resp e c t to an obse rv e r . Anoth e r identic al

particl e B is moving with resp e c t to the obse rv e r . Disting uis h betw e e n
the total ene r gy of particle A and the total ene r gy of par ticle B as
mea s u r e d by the obse rv e r .
Particle
A: .....................................................................................................
...............
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Particle
B: .....................................................................................................
...............
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) Two proto n s are travelling towa r d s eac h othe r along the sam e straig h t
line in a vacuu m .
The spee d of each proto n, as mea s u r e d in the labor a t o r y fram e of

refer e n c e , is 0.960c.
(i) Calculat e the relative spee d of one proton with res p e c t to the
othe r proton.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Show that the total ene r gy of one of the proto n s, accor di n g to an
obse rv e r at rest in the labor a t o r y, is 3.35 GeV.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c) The collision of the two proto n s res ult s in the following reac tio n
p + + p + = p + + n 0 + π+
whe r e π + is a particle calle d a pion and has a rest mas s of 140 MeV c –
2
. The total ene r gy of the pion is 502 MeV. Dete r mi n e , accor di n g to an
obse rv e r at rest in the labor a t o r y, the
(i) total ener gy of the proton form e d plus the total ene r gy of the
neut r o n form e d by the collision.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) mom e n t u m of the pion.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

(2)
(d) The diagr a m shows the path s followe d by the neut r o n and pion in (c).
The dott e d line shows the path of the original collision of the proton s
in (b). On the diag r a m , dra w the direc tio n of the proton form e d in the
collision.
(1)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

91 7 . This ques tion is abou t spac e ti m e and black holes.
(a) Stat e what is mea n t by the conc e p t of spac e ti m e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) Outline, with refer e n c e to the motion of photon s in spac e ti m e , what is

mea n t by the Schw a r z s c hil d radius.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c) The mas s of the Sun is about 2 × 10 30 kg. Show that, if the Sun wer e
to beco m e a black hole, its radius would be about 3 km.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

(a) Outline how variation s in sound pre s s u r e in the air are amplifie d in
the middle ear.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) A sound of intensi ty I = 2.0 × 10 –6 W m –2 is incide n t on the ear. The

loudn e s s det ec t e d by the ear due to this soun d is L .
(i) Sugg e s t why the loudn e s s of a soun d of inte nsity 4.0 × 10 –6 W m –

2
det ec t e d by the ear is not 2 L .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Use the decibel scale to det e r m i n e to wha t value the inte nsity I
must be incre a s e d in orde r that the loudn e s s dete c t e d by the ear
is 2 L .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(iii) In light of your answ e r to (b)(ii), outline possible effects of long-
ter m expos u r e of soun d at this loudn e s s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

91 9 . This ques tion is abou t the use of X-rays and the use of lase r light in clinic al
diag no sis.
(a) A par allel beam of X-rays of inte nsity I 0 is incide n t on a block of

mat e ri al of thickn e s s x .
The inten sity of the X-rays eme r gi n g from the block is I and the half-
x1
value thickn e s s of the mat e ri a l is 2 .
Using the axes below, sketc h a gra p h showin g four data points, to
show how I varies with x for blocks of the sa m e mat e r i al but differin g
x1
thickn e s s e s . The position of I 0 and of 2 are show n mar k e d on the
res p e c t ive axes.
(2)

(b) The att e n u a t i o n coefficien t for bone is µ b and for tissu e µ t . The tabl e
μb
shows the ratio μ t for X-rays of thre e differ e n t photon ene r gi e s.
Phot o n en e r g y / MeV μb
μt
0.08 3.0
0.01 8.0
1.00 1.0
(i) Explain why X-rays of photo n ene r gy 0.01 MeV are the most
suita bl e for use in det e c ti n g a bone fract u r e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii) The att en u a t i o n coefficie nt of bone for X-rays with photo n ene r gy
0.01 MeV is 0.60 cm –1 . X-rays of this ene r gy use d to imag e a
sus p ec t e d leg bone fract u r e pass thro u g h bone thickn e s s of 6.0
cm and tissu e thickn e s s 9.6 cm. Dete r m i n e the following ratio.
fin a lin t e n s itof

y x - r a ysa ft e rp a s s in gt h r o u gbhon e
fin a lin t e n s itof
y x - r a ysa ft e rp a s s in gt h r o u g his ts u e
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(c) Regions of the elect r o m a g n e t i c spec t r u m othe r tha n the X-ray region,
can also be used in clinical diagno si s. In this res p e c t , light from two
laser s is used in pulse oxime t r y.
(i) Identify the two region s of the elect r o m a g n e t i c spec t r u m in

which the wavele n g t h of the light emitt e d by eac h lase r is found.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) Outline how the laser light is use d to mea s u r e hemo glo bi n
satu r a ti o n in the blood.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 13 mark s )
92 0 . This ques tion is abou t radioa ctive isotop e s use d as trac e r s .
(a) Define biological half- life and physical half- life .
Biological half-
life: ..................................................................................................

...
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Physical half-
life: ..................................................................................................
......
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) Radioa ctive isotop e s can be use d as “trac e r s ” in orde r to study cer t ai n
physiological proce s s e s in the body. Stat e, for thes e isotop e s , on e
reas o n why
(i) it is impor t a n t that such isotop e s have a shor t biologic al half- life.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) the physical half- life is gre a t e r tha n the biologic al half- life.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(c) The physical half- life of a partic ul a r isotop e use d as a trac e r is 4.0
days and its biological half- life is 2.0 days. Calcula t e the perc e n t a g e
decr e a s e in the activity of the isotop e 4.0 days afte r it is introd u c e d
into the body.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
92 1 . This ques tion is abou t fermion s and bosons .
(a) Disting ui s h, with refer e n c e to the Pauli exclusion principle, the

differ e n c e betw e e n fermion s and bosons.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) Identify the boson that media t e s the
(i) elect r o m a g n e t i c inter a c ti o n betw e e n elect r o n s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii) stron g inter a c ti o n betw e e n nucleon s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(c) The stron g inter a c ti o n betw e e n nucle on s has a ran g e of the orde r of
10 –15 m. Show that the mass of the boson in (b)(ii) is about 100 MeV c –
2
.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(d) The Feyn m a n diagr a m shows the dec ay of a meso n into an anti- muon
and a neut ri n o.
(i) Stat e the char g e on the meso n and on the anti- muon and explain
your answ e r .

Meso n: ............................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
Anti-
muon: ......................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Identify the particle labelle d X.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
(a) Differ e n t types of particles may be prod u c e d by the collision of

accel e r a t e d proto n s with station a r y proton s . Explain why the
accel e r a t e d proto n s must have high ene r gy.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b) The diagr a m shows some of the feat u r e s of a linea r par ticle
accel e r a t o r used to accel e r a t e proton s .

The vacuu m cham b e r cont ai n s a succ e s sio n of cylindric al anod e s of
which only four are show n, anod e s 1, 2, 3 and 4.
(i) Stat e why the proton s are not acc el e r a t e d whilst travelling
inside the anod e s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Describ e the mech a ni s m by which the proton s are acc el e r a t e d by
the anod e s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(c) The minim u m ene r gy requir e d to prod u c e a K – meson in the collision

betw e e n a high ener gy proto n and a station a r y proto n is 1890 MeV.
Deter m i n e the minim u m kine tic ene r gy E K that the high ene r gy proton
mus t have in orde r to prod u c e a K – meso n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(d) In par ticle accel e r a t o r s such as sync h r o t r o n s , it can be arr a n g e d to

have collisions betw e e n proton s and antip r o t o n s travelling in opposit e
directio n s. Stat e on e adva n t a g e and on e disa dv a n t a g e of this
arr a n g e m e n t in ter m s of particle produ c tio n as comp a r e d with that
describ e d in (c).
Advant a g e : ..............................................................................................

....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Disadv a n t a g e : .........................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 12 mark s )

3

(a) –
The str a n g e n e s s of the Ω had r o n is –3 and its spin is 2.
(i) Explain how it is know n tha t the qua r k s truc t u r e of the Ω– had r o n
is sss.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii) Explain, with refer e n c e to the qua r k s truc t u r e of the Ω– hadr o n,

why the concep t of the colour of qua r k s was introd u c e d .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Stat e why the Ω– hadr o n has no colour.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b) As well as providin g evide nc e for the existe n c e of qua r k s, dee p

inelas tic scat t e r i n g experi m e n t s also provide evide n c e for the

existe n c e of gluons.
(i) Stat e what is mean t by dee p inela sti c scat t e ri n g .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Outline how the expe ri m e n t s provide evide nc e for the exist e n c e
of gluons.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
92 4 . The orde r of mag ni t u d e of the weight of an appl e is
A. 10 –4 N.
B. 10 –2 N.
C. 1 N.
D. 10 2 N.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

M
ρ
92 5 . The density of a met al cube is given by the expr e s sio n V whe r e M is the
mas s and V is the volum e of the cube. The perc e n t a g e unc e r t a i n ti e s in M
and V are as show n below.
M 12 %
V 4.0 %
The per ce n t a g e unce r t a i n t y in the calcul a t e d value of the density is
A. 3.0 %.
B. 8.0 %.
C. 16 %.
D. 48 %.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
92 6 . A ball is throw n vertically upwa r d s from the grou n d. The gra p h shows the
variation with time t of the vertic al displa c e m e n t d of the ball.

Which of the following gives the final displa c e m e n t afte r time T and the
aver a g e speed betw e e n time t = 0 and time t = T ?
Dis pl a c e m e n t Aver a g e spe e d
A. 0 0
0 2D
B.
T
2D 2D
C.
T
D. 2D 0
(Tot al 1 mar k )
92 7 . A gene r al expr es sio n for Newto n’s secon d law of motion is
Δp
F .
Δt
What condition is applied so that the law may be expr e s s e d in the form F =
ma ?
A. The mas s m is cons t a n t .
B. The accele r a ti o n a is cons t a n t .
C. The force F is const a n t .
D. The directio n of the force F is cons t a n t .

(Tot al 1 mar k )

92 8 . Mandy stan d s on a weighin g scale inside a lift (eleva t o r) that accele r a t e s
vertically upwa r d s as show n in the diagr a m below. The force s on Mandy
are her weigh t W and the reaction force from the scale R .
The readi n g of the scale is
A. R + W.
B. W.
C. R.
D. R – W.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
92 9 . Two sphe r e s of mas s e s m 1 and m 2 are moving towa r d s eac h othe r along the
sam e str aig h t- line with spee d s v 1 and v 2 as show n.
The sphe r e s collide. Which of the following gives the total chan g e in line a r
mom e n t u m of the sphe r e s as a res ult of the collision?
A. 0
B. m 1v1 + m 2v2
C. m 1v1 − m 2v2
D. m 2v2 − m 1v1
(Tot al 1 mar k )

93 0 . A brick is place d on the surfac e of a flat horizont a l disc as show n in the
diagr a m below. The disc is rota ti n g at const a n t spe e d abou t a vertic al axis
thro u g h its cent r e. The brick does not move rela tive to the disc.
Which of the diag r a m s below corr e c tly rep r e s e n t s the hori z o n t a l force or
forces acting on the brick?
(Tot al 1 mar k )

93 1 . A frictionle s s trolley of mas s m moves down a slope with a cons t a n t
accele r a ti o n a. A secon d simila r frictionle s s trolley has mas s 2 m . The
accele r a ti o n of the secon d trolley as it moves down the slope is
1
a.
A. 2
B. a.
C. 2 a.
D. 4 a.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
93 2 . The inter n al ener gy of a solid subs t a n c e is equal to the
A. aver a g e kinetic ene r gy of the molec ul e s.
B. total kinetic ener gy of the molec ul e s.
C. total pote n ti al ener gy of the molec ul e s.
D. total pote n ti al and total kinetic ene r gy of the molec ul e s.

(Tot al 1 mar k )
93 3 . A gas is cont ai n e d in a cylinde r fitted with a piston as show n below.
When the gas is com p r e s s e d rapidly by the piston its tem p e r a t u r e rises
bec a u s e the molec ul e s of the gas
A. are sque ez e d close r toget h e r .
B. collide with each other more frequ e n t ly.
C. collide with the walls of the cont ai n e r more freq u e n t ly.
D. gain ene r gy from the moving piston.

(Tot al 1 mar k )

93 4 . The specific heat capacity c of a solid block of mas s m is dete r m i n e d by
heati n g the block and meas u r i n g its tem p e r a t u r e . The gra p h below shows
the variation of the tem p e r a t u r e T of the block with the ther m a l ene r gy Q
tran sf e r r e d to the block.
The gra di e n t of the line is equal to
c
.
A. m
m
.
B. c
C. mc .
1
.
D. mc
(Tot al 1 mar k )

93 5 . The gra p h below shows the varia tion with time t of the displa c e m e n t x of a
par ticl e unde r g oi n g simple har m o ni c motion.
Which gra p h corr e c tly shows the variation with time t of the accele r a ti o n a
of the par ticle?
(Tot al 1 mar k )

93 6 . A woode n block is at res t on a horizont a l frictionl e s s surfa c e . A horizon t al
sprin g is att ac h e d betw e e n the block and a rigid suppo r t .
The block is displace d to the right by an amou n t X and is the n rele a s e d .

The period of oscillation s is T and the total ene r gy of the syste m is E .
X
For an initial displac e m e n t of 2 which of the following shows the best
estim a t e for the period of oscillations and the total ene r gy of the syst e m ?
Peri o d Tot al en e r g y
E
A. T
2
E
B. T
4
T E
C.
2 2
T E
D.
2 4
(Tot al 1 mar k )
93 7 . Which of the following cor r e c tly desc ri b e s the cha n g e , if any, in the spe e d,
wavele n g t h and frequ e n cy of a light wave as it pass e s from air into glas s?
Sp e e d Wave l e n g t h Freq u e n c y
A. decr e a s e s dec r e a s e s unc h a n g e d
B. decr e a s e s unc h a n g e d dec r e a s e s
C. unch a n g e d incr e a s e s dec r e a s e s
D. incr e a s e s incr e a s e s unc h a n g e d

(Tot al 1 mar k )

93 8 . The diagr a m below show s a puls e travelling along a rope from X to Y. The
end Y of the rope is tied to a fixed suppo r t.
When the pulse reach e s end Y it will
A. disap p e a r .
B. caus e the end of the rope at Y to oscillat e up and down.
C. be reflect e d and be inver t e d.
D. be reflect e d and not be inver t e d.

(Tot al 1 mar k )
93 9 . In the circuit below, the batt e r y has negligible inte r n a l resis t a n c e . Thre e
identic al lamps L, M and N of cons t a n t resis t a n c e are conn e c t e d as shown.
The filame n t of lamp N brea k s. Which of the following show s the

subs e q u e n t chan g e s to the bright n e s s of lamp L and lamp M?
Lam p L Lam p M
A. stays the sam e dec r e a s e s
B. incr e a s e s stays the sam e
C. incr e a s e s dec r e a s e s
D. decr e a s e s incr e a s e s
(Tot al 1 mar k )

94 0 . In the circuit below, the voltm e t e r has a resis t a n c e 100 k Ω. The batt e r y has
negligible inter n al resist a n c e and emf 6 V.
The readi n g on the voltm et e r is
A. 0 V.
B. 2 V.
C. 3 V.
D. 4 V.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

94 1 . In the circuit show n below, the cell has negligible inte r n a l resist a n c e .
Which of the following equa tio n s is corr e c t ?
A. I1 = 2 I2
B. I1 = 2 I3
C. I2 = 2 I3
D. I3 = 2 I1
(Tot al 1 mar k )
94 2 . In Newt o n’s univer s al law of gravit a tion the mas s e s are assu m e d to be
A. exten d e d mas s e s .
B. mas s e s of plane t s .
C. point mas s e s .
D. sphe ric al mas s e s .

(Tot al 1 mar k )

94 3 . The elect ric field stre n g t h at a point may be define d as
A. the force exer t e d on unit positive cha r g e plac e d at tha t point.
B. the force per unit positive cha r g e on a small test cha r g e plac e d at that
point.
C. the work done on unit positive cha r g e to move the cha r g e to tha t point
from infinity.
D. the work done per unit positive cha r g e to move a small test cha r g e to
that point from infinity.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
94 4 . An elect r o n is moving in air at right angle s to a unifor m magn e t i c field. The

diagr a m below shows the pat h of the elect r o n . The elect r o n is slowing
down.
Which of the following cor r e c tly gives the dire c tion of motion of the
elect r o n and the direction of the mag n e t i c field?
Dire c t i o n of mot i o n Dire c t i o n of ma g n e t i c

fiel d
A. clockwis e into plane of pap e r
B. clockwis e out of plane of pap e r
C. anti- clockwis e into plane of pap e r
D. anti- clockwis e out of plane of pap e r

(Tot al 1 mar k )

7
94 5 . The binding ener gy per nucleon of the nucle u s 3
Liis app r oxim a t e ly 5 MeV.
The total ener gy requi r e d to compl e t e ly sepa r a t e the nucleon s of this
nucle u s is appr oxim a t ely
A. 15 MeV.
B. 20 MeV.
C. 35 MeV.
D. 50 MeV.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
94 6 . The initial activity of a sam pl e of a radioa c tive isotop e of half- life 10 hour s
A
?
is A . What is the age of the sam pl e whe n its activity is 3 2
A. 30 hour s
B. 40 hour s
C. 50 hour s
D. 320 hour s
(Tot al 1 mar k )

94 7 . When the isotop e alumini u m- 27 is bom b a r d e d with alph a particle s, the
following nucle a r reac tion can take plac e.
4
2 H e 21 73Al  X n e u t r o n
Which of the following cor r e c tly gives the atomic (proto n) num b e r and
mas s (nucleo n) num b e r of the nucle u s X?
Prot o n nu m b e r Nu c l e o n nu m b e r
A. 15 30
B. 16 31
C. 30 15
D. 31 16
(Tot al 1 mar k )
94 8 . The volum e of a given mas s of wate r at a tem p e r a t u r e of T 1 is V 1 . The

volum e incr e a s e s to V 2 at tem p e r a t u r e T 2 . The coefficie n t of volum e
expa n sio n of wat e r may be calcula t e d from
V2 V1
 .
A. T2 T1
V2  V1
.
B. T2  T1
V2  V1
.
C. V1 T2  T1 
V2  V1
.
D. V2 T2  T1 
(Tot al 1 mar k )

94 9 . The com m e r ci al produ c tio n of ene r gy by nucle a r fusion is not yet possible
mainly due to difficulties with
A. obtaini n g plentiful supplie s of a suita bl e fuel.
B. reac hi n g the high tem p e r a t u r e s requir e d .
C. confining the hot plas m a.
D. disposin g of the radioa c tive was t e prod u c t s .

(Tot al 1 mar k )
95 0 . A wind gen e r a t o r prod u c e s 5.0 kW of powe r for a wind spe e d of 6.0 m s –1 .

The best esti m a t e for the powe r prod u c e d for a wind spe e d of 12.0 m s –1 is
A. 10 kW.
B. 25 kW.
C. 40 kW.
D. 125 kW.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
95 1 . It is hypot h e siz e d that global war mi n g may lead to significa n t chan g e s in

the aver a g e sea- level. This hypot h e s i s assu m e s that
A. aver a g e rainfall will incre a s e .
B. icebe r g s will melt.
C. glacier s will melt.
D. the rat e of evapo r a ti o n of sea w a t e r will incre a s e .

(Tot al 1 mar k )

95 2 . Two black bodies X and Y are at differ e n t tem p e r a t u r e s . The tem p e r a t u r e
of body Y is high e r than that of body X. Which of the following shows the
black body spect r a for the two bodies ?
(Tot al 1 mar k )

95 3 . The diagr a m below show s a simplified model of the ene r gy bala nc e for
Eart h.
The albedo of the Eart h accor di n g to this model is equ al to
2
.
A. 340
100
.
B. 340
238
.
C. 340
240
.
D. 340
(Tot al 1 mar k )

95 4 . This ques tion is abou t the elect ric a l powe r availa bl e from a wind tur bi n e .
The maxim u m elect rical powe r gene r a t e d by a wind tur bi n e , P out , was
meas u r e d over a ran g e of incide n t wind spe e d s , v in .
The gra p h below shows the varia tion with v in of P out . Unc e r t a i n ti e s for the
dat a are not show n.
vin .
(a) It is sugg e s t e d that P out is propo r tio n a l to
(i) Draw the line of best- fit for the data points.
(1)
(ii) Stat e on e reas o n why the line you have dra w n does not suppo r t
this hypot h e s i s .
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(1)
(iii) The unce r t a i n t y in the powe r at 15 m s –1 is 5 %. Draw an erro r

bar on the grap h to repr e s e n t this unc e r t a i n t y.
(2)

(b) The theo r e ti c al relations hi p betw e e n the available powe r in the wind,
P in , and incide n t wind spe e d is show n in the gra p h below.
4000
3500
3000
2500
2000
P m / kW
1500
1000
500
0
0 5 10 15 20 25
–1
V m / m s
Using both grap h s ,

(i) det e r m i n e the efficie ncy of the turbin e for an incide n t wind spe e d
of 14 m s –1 .
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(3)
(ii) sugg e s t , withou t calcula tion, how the efficiency of the turbin e
chan g e s with incr e a si n g wind spe e d.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(3)
(c) Outline on e adva n t a g e and on e disa dva n t a g e of using wind tur bin e s
to gen e r a t e elect ri cal ener gy.
Advant a g e : .................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................

..................
Disadv a n t a g e : .................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 12 mark s )
95 5 . This ques tion is abou t an elect ric circuit.
A particul a r filame n t lamp is rat e d at 12 V, 6.0 mA. It just lights whe n the
poten ti al differ e n c e acros s the filame n t is 6.0 V.
A stud e n t sets up an elect ric circuit to mea s u r e the I-V cha r a c t e r i s ti c of the
filame n t lamp.
In the circuit, show n below, the stud e n t has conne c t e d the voltm e t e r and
the am m e t e r into the circuit inc or r e c t l y .
The batt e r y has emf 12 V and negligible inte r n a l resis t a n c e . The am m e t e r

has negligible resis t a n c e and the resist a n c e of the voltm e t e r is 100 k Ω. The
maxim u m resist a n c e of the varia bl e resisto r is 15 Ω.
(a) Explain, witho u t doing any calcul a tion s , whet h e r the r e is a position of
the slide S at which the lamp will be lit.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(b) Estim a t e the maxim u m rea din g of the amm e t e r .
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) Complet e the circuit diagr a m below showin g the corr e c t position of
the voltm e t e r and of the am m e t e r in orde r to det e r m i n e the I-V
char a c t e r i s ti c of the filam e n t lamp.
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
95 6 . This ques tion is abou t gravit a tio n a l fields.
(a) Define gravitational field stre n g t h .
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) The gravit a tio n al field stre n g t h at the surfa c e of Jupite r is 25 N kg –1
and the radius of Jupiter is 7.1  10 7 m.
(i) Derive an expr e s s io n for the gravit a tio n a l field stre n g t h at the
surfac e of a plan e t in ter m s of its mas s M , its radius R and the
gravit a tion al cons t a n t G.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(2)
(ii) Use your expr e s s io n in (b)(i) above to estim a t e the mas s of

Jupite r.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
95 7 . Simple har m o ni c motion and the gre e n h o u s e effect
(a) A body is displace d from equilibriu m . Sta t e the two conditions

neces s a r y for the body to execu t e simple har m o nic motion.
1. .........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
2. .........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

(b) In a simple model of a meth a n e molec ul e , a hydro g e n atom and the
car bo n atom can be reg a r d e d as two mas s e s att a c h e d by a sprin g. A
hydrog e n atom is much less mas sive tha n the car bo n atom such that
any displace m e n t of the carbo n atom may be ignor e d .
The grap h below show s the variatio n with time t of the displ ac e m e n t x
from its equilibri u m position of a hydrog e n atom in a molec ul e of
met h a n e .
The mas s of hydrog e n atom is 1.7  10 –27 kg. Use dat a from the gra p h
above
(i) to det e r m i n e its amplitu d e of oscillation.
.........................................................................................................
................
(1)
(ii) to show that the frequ e n c y of its oscillation is 9.1  10 13 Hz.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

(iii) to show that the maxim u m kinetic ene r gy of the hydrog e n atom
is 6.2  10 –18 J.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(2)
(c) On the grid below, sketch a gra p h to show the variation with time t of
the velocity v of the hydrog e n atom for one period of oscillation
sta r ti n g at t = 0. (Ther e is no nee d to add values to the velocity axis.)
(3)
(d) Assumin g that the motion of the hydrog e n atom is simple har m o ni c,
its frequ e n cy of oscillation f is given by the expr e s si o n
1 k
f ,
2π mp
whe r e k is the force per unit displa c e m e n t betw e e n a hydrog e n atom

and the car bo n atom and m p is the mas s of a proton.
(i) Show that the value of k is appr oxi m a t e ly 560 N m –1 .
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................

................
(1)

(ii) Estim a t e , using your answ e r to (d)(i), the maxim u m accel e r a ti o n
of the hydro g e n atom.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(2)
(e) Met h a n e is classified as a gre e n h o u s e gas.
(i) Describ e what is mea n t by a gre e n h o u s e gas.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(2)
(ii) Elect r o m a g n e t i c radia tio n of frequ e n c y 9.1  10 13 Hz is in the

infrar e d region of the elect r o m a g n e t i c spec t r u m . Sugg e s t , bas e d
on the infor m a ti o n given in (b)(ii), why met h a n e is classified as a
gree n h o u s e gas.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(2)
(Tot al 17 mark s )

95 8 . Specific heat and a dom es tic show e r
(a) Define specific heat capacity .
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b) Equal mass e s of two differ e n t solid subs t a n c e s A and B are at the
sam e tem p e r a t u r e . The specific hea t capa city of subs t a n c e A is
grea t e r than the specific hea t capa ci ty of subs t a n c e B. The two
subs t a n c e s now have their tem p e r a t u r e s raise d by the sam e amou n t .
Explain which subs t a n c e will have the gre a t e r incr e a s e in inte r n a l

ener gy ass u mi n g both rem ai n in the solid phas e.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c) The diagr a m below shows part of the heati n g circuit of a

dome s ti c show e r.

Cold wat e r ente r s the show e r unit and flows over an insula t e d hea ti n g
ele m e n t . The heati n g elem e n t is rate d at 7.2 kW, 240 V. The wat e r
ent e r s at a tem p e r a t u r e of 14 C and leave s at a tem p e r a t u r e of 40 C.
The specific heat cap acity of wate r is
4.2  10 3 J kg –1 K–1 .

(i) Estim a t e the flow rat e of the wate r.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(4)
(ii) Sugg e s t on e reas o n why your answ e r to (c)(i) is only an estim a t e .
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(1)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
95 9 . This ques tion is abou t nuclea r powe r produ c tio n.
(a) The purp o s e of a nucle a r powe r sta tion is to produ c e elect ric al ene r gy
from nucle a r ene r gy. The diagr a m below is a repr e s e n t a t i o n of the
princip al compo n e n t s of a nucle a r rea c t o r pile used in a cer t ai n type
of nuclea r powe r station tha t use s ura ni u m as a fuel.
The function of the mode r a t o r is to slow down the neut r o n s prod u c e d

in a reactio n such as that desc ri b e d above.

Explain,
(i) why it is neces s a r y to slow down the neut r o n s .
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(3)
(ii) the function of the cont r ol rods.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(2)
(b) With refer e n c e to the conc e p t of fuel enric h m e n t in a nucle a r reac t o r

explain,
(i) the adva n t a g e of enric hi n g the ura ni u m use d in a nucle a r

react o r .
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................

................
(3)

(ii) from an inter n a t io n a l point of view, a possible risk to which fuel
enrich m e n t could lead.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(2)
(c) A particul a r nuclea r react o r use s ura ni u m- 235 as its fuel sourc e .
When a nucle u s of urani u m- 235 abso r b s a neut r o n, the following
reac tio n can take place.
235
92 U  01 n  144
Xe  93 08S r 2 01 n
54
235
rest mas s of 92 U = 2.189 5  10 5 MeV
c –2
144
rest mas s of 54 Xe = 1.340 8  10 5 MeV
c –2
90
rest mas s of 38 S r = 8.374 9  10 4 MeV
c –2
1
n
rest mas s of 0 = 939.5 6 MeV c –2
(i) Show that the ener gy rele a s e d in the rea c tio n is app roxi m a t e ly
180 MeV.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(1)
(ii) Stat e the form in which the ene r gy app e a r s .

.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

(d) The ene r gy relea s e d by 1 atom of carbo n- 12 during comb u s ti o n is
appr oxi m a t ely 4 eV.
(i) Using the answ e r to (c)(i), estim a t e the ratio
e n e r g dy e n s it oy f u r a n iu -m23 5
e n e r g dy e n s it of
y c a r b on -1 2 .
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(3)
(ii) Sugg e s t , with refer e n c e to your answ e r in (d)(i), on e adva n t a g e

of ura ni u m- 235 comp a r e d with fossil fuels.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(1)
(e) When a urani u m- 238 nucle u s abso r b s a neut r o n the following reac tio n
can take place.
238
92 U  01 n  239
92U
The isotop e urani u m- 239 is radioa c tive and dec ays with a half- life of
23 minut e s to form an isotop e of nept u ni u m- 239 (Np- 239).
(i) Define radioactiv e half- life and explain what is mea n t by an

isotop e.
Radioactive half- life:
.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
Isotop e:
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(2)
(ii) Compl et e the reaction equ a tio n for this dec ay.
239
92 U
(3)

(iii) The isotop e nept u ni u m- 239 unde r g o e s radioa c tive β dec ay to
form an isotop e of plutoniu m . Outline on e adva n t a g e and on e
disadv a n t a g e of this dec ay in relation to nucle a r powe r
produ c t io n.
Advant a g e :
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
Disadva n t a g e :
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(4)
(Tot al 25 mark s )
96 0 . Mech a ni c al power
(a) Define power .

.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) A car is travelling with const a n t spe e d v along a horizont a l str ai g h t
road. Ther e is a total resistive forc e F acting on the car.
Deduc e that the powe r P to over co m e the force F is P = Fv .
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c) A car drives up a str aig h t incline tha t is 4.8 km long. The total heigh t
of the incline is 0.30 km.
The car moves up the incline at a ste a dy spe e d of 16 m s –1 . During the

climb, the aver a g e friction force acting on the car is 5.0  10 2 N. The
total weigh t of the car and the drive r is 1.2  10 4 N.
(i) Dete r mi n e the time it take s the car to travel from the botto m to
the top of the incline.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(2)
(ii) Dete r mi n e the work done agains t the gravit a tion a l force in
travelling from the botto m to the top of the incline.

.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

(iii) Using your ans w e r s to (c)(i) and (c)(ii), calcula t e a value for the
minim u m powe r outpu t of the car engine nee d e d to move the car
from the botto m to the top of the incline.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(4)
(d) From the top of the incline, the roa d continu e s downw a r d s in a
str aig h t line. At the point whe r e the roa d sta r t s to go down w a r d s , the
driver of the car in (c), stops the car to look at the view. In continui n g
his jour n ey, the driver decid e s to save fuel. He switc h e s off the engine
and allows the car to move freely down the hill. The car desc e n d s a
heigh t of 0.30 km in a dist a n c e of 6.4 km befor e levelling out.
The aver a g e resistive force acting on the car is 5.0  10 2 N.

Estim a t e
(i) the accel e r a t io n of the car down the incline.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(5)
(ii) the spee d of the car at the botto m of the incline.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(2)
(e) In fact, for the last few hund r e d met r e s of its journ e y down the hill,
the car travels at const a n t spe e d. Stat e the value of the friction al forc e
acting on the car whilst it is moving at cons t a n t spe e d.
.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 18 mark s )

96 1 . Radioactive decay
(a) Carbo n- 14 is a radioac tive isotop e with a half- life of 5500 yea rs. It is
prod u c e d in the atmos p h e r e by neut r o n bom b a r d m e n t of nitrog e n .
The equa tio n for this reactio n is
14
7 N  01 n  14
6 C X.
(i) Explain what is mea n t by isotop e s .
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(1)
(ii) Identify the particle X.
.........................................................................................................
................
(1)
(b) Each gra m of a living tree cont ai n s app r oxi m a t e ly 4  10 10 atom s of

car bo n- 14.
On the axes below, draw a gra p h to show the variation with time of
the num b e r of carbo n- 14 atom s in one gra m of wood from a tre e. Your
grap h should indicat e the num b e r of atom s for a period of 1.8  10 4
years after the tree has died. (Half- life of car bo n- 14 = 5500 yea rs)

(3)
(c) The activity of a radioac tive sam pl e is propo r tio n a l to the num b e r of
atom s in the sam pl e. The activity per gra m of carbo n from a living
tree is 9.6 disint e g r a t i o n s per minut e . The activity per gra m of car bo n
in burn t wood found at an ancie n t cam p si t e is 1.9 disint e g r a t i o n s per
minut e.
(i) Estim a t e the num b e r of atom s of car bo n- 14 in the bur n t wood.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(1)
(ii) From the gra p h you have draw n in (b), estim a t e the age of the
bur n t wood.
.........................................................................................................
................
(1)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
96 2 . The gra p h below shows the overall relative light absor p tio n curve for the
light- sensitive cells involved in scotopic vision. The rela tive light absor p ti o n
is expr e s s e d as a perc e n t a g e of the maxim u m .

re la tiv e lig h t a b s o rp tio n
100
60
80
40
20
0
400 500 600 700
wavelen g t h / nm
(a) Stat e the nam e of the cells involved in sc o t o p i c vision.
.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) (i) On the axes above, sketc h a rela tive light abso r p ti o n
curve for a cell involved in pho t o p i c vision.
(2)
(ii) Stat e the colour to which the cell is most sensitive.
.........................................................................................................
................
(1)
(c) Outline how colour blindn e s s may arise from defec t s in the retin a’s
light sensitive cells.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

96 3 . This ques tion is abou t the Rayleigh crite rion.
(a) Light from two monoc h r o m a t i c dista n t point sourc e s , S 1 and S 2 , is

inciden t on a nar r o w slit. After pas sin g throu g h the slit, the light is
inciden t on a scre e n.
On the axes below, draw the inte nsi ty distrib u tio n of the diffrac t e d
light on the scre e n from each sourc e whe n the image s of S 1 and S 2 are
just resolve d accor di n g to the Rayleigh crite rio n.
(3)
(b) A wom a n views an appr o a c h i n g car at night. The ape r t u r e s of her eyes
are each of diam e t e r 3.0 mm. The hea dl a m p s of the car are sepa r a t e d
by a dista n c e of 1.2 m and emit light of wavele n g t h 400 nm.
Calcula t e the dista n c e of the car from the wom a n at which the imag e s
of the two hea dl a m p s are just resolve d.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(Tota l 6 mark s )

.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b) Polarized light of intensi ty I 0 is incide n t on an analys e r. The

tran s m i s sio n axis of the analys e r make s an angle θ with the direc tio n
of the elect ric field of the light.
(i) Calculat e, in ter m s of I 0 , the inte nsi ty of light tra n s m i t t e d

thro u g h the analys e r whe n θ = 60 .
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(1)
(ii) On the axes below, sketc h a gra p h to show the variation with
angle θ of the intensity of the tra n s m i t t e d light.
(2)
(c) Outline how polarizin g sungl a s s e s redu c e glar e from a reflectin g

surfac e.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

96 5 . This ques tion is abou t wave- particle duality.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b) An elect r o n is accel e r a t e d from rest throu g h a pote n t i al differ e n c e of

1250 V. Deter m i n e the associa t e d de Broglie wavele n g t h of the
accel e r a t e d elect r o n.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
96 6 . This ques tion is abou t line spec t r a .
(a) Light is emitt e d from a gas disc h a r g e tube. Outline briefly how the
visible line spect r u m of this light may be obtain e d .
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) The table below gives infor m a t io n relatin g to thr e e of the wavele n g t h s
in the line spect r u m of atomic hydrog e n .
Pho t o n en e r g y /  10 − 19
Wavel e n g t h /  10 − 9 m
J
1880 1.06
656 3.03
486 4.09
Deduc e that the photon ene r gy for the wavele n g t h of 486  10 − 9 m is

4.09  10 − 19 J.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c) The diagr a m below shows two of the ene r gy levels of the hydr og e n
atom, using dat a from the table above. An elect r o n tra n si tio n betw e e n
thes e levels is also shown.
(i) On the diagr a m above, cons t r u c t the othe r ene r gy level nee d e d
to prod u c e the ener gy cha n g e s show n in the table above.
(1)
(ii) Draw labelled arrow s to rep r e s e n t the ene r gy cha n g e s for the
two other wavelen g t h s show n in the table above.
(1)

(Tota l 6 mark s )

In an experi m e n t to inves tig a t e the photoel e c t ri c effect, light of freq u e n c y f

is inciden t on the met al surface A show n in the diagr a m below. A pote n t i al
differ e n c e is applied betw e e n A and elect r o d e B. The photoel e c t r i c curr e n t
is meas u r e d by the micro a m m e t e r . (No t e : the com pl e t e electrical circuit is
not sho w n.)
(a) Indicat e on the diag r a m the pola rity of A and of B.

(1)
(b) The frequ e n c y f of the light is red uc e d and it is found tha t the r e is a
frequ e n c y f 0 , the thr es h ol d frequ e n c y, below which the microa m m e t e r
does not indicat e a cur r e n t . Explain how Einst ei n’s photo el e c t ri c
theor y accou n t s for this obse rv a tio n.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(c) The poten t i al differ e n c e betw e e n A and B is now reve r s e d . For a
particul a r frequ e n cy of the light, the pote n ti al differe n c e is cha n g e d
until ther e is zero curr e n t in the circuit. The gra p h below shows the
variation of frequ e n cy f of the light with the pote n ti al differ e n c e , V s ,
for zero cur r e n t .
Explainin g your working, use the gra p h to det e r m i n e the
(i) thre s h ol d frequ e n c y.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(1)
(ii) work function, in eV, of the met al.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

96 8 . In a comp u t e r code, text (lett e r s , spa c e s and punc t u a t i o n mark s) is
repr e s e n t e d by binary num b e r s . The lett e r “E” is rep r e s e n t e d by the two
four bit binary num b e r s below.
0100 and 0101
(a) Define least significan t bit .
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b) Calcula t e the decim al equivale n t for the two four bit bina ry num b e r s .
0100 .........................................................................................................
................
0101 .........................................................................................................
................
(1)
(c) Using this comp u t e r code stat e how many sepa r a t e bits would be
need e d to repr e s e n t the following phr a s e .
IBO Physics is easy!
.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(d) Discus s , in ter m s of repr o d u c i bilty and port a bility, the disa dva n t a g e s
of storin g text in analog u e rat h e r tha n digit al form.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(5)
(e) Stat e on e enviro n m e n t a l implica tion of storin g text in analog u e form.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 9 mark s )
96 9 . A digital cam e r a is used to photo g r a p h an object. Two points on the objec t

are sepa r a t e d by 0.002 0 cm. The cha r g e d couple d device (CCD) in the
cam e r a has a collectin g area of 16 cm 2 and cont ai n s 4.0 meg a pixels. The
mag nification of the cam e r a is 1.5.
(a) Define magnificatio n .
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) Deduc e that the imag e s of the points can be resolve d.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
97 0 . The diagr a m below show s an inverti n g amplifier circuit.
(a) Stat e what is mea n t by an invertin g am plifie r circ uit.
.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) The input voltag e is 12 mV. Calcula t e
(i) the curr e n t in the 150 k Ω resisto r .
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(2)
(ii) the pot en ti al differ e n c e betw e e n A and B.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(1)
(c) Outline any ass u m p ti o n s tha t you have mad e in (b).
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) A space c r a f t is moving with a spe e d of 0.80c with res p e c t to obse r v e r s
on Eart h. After 6.0 year s of travel, accor di n g to the spac e c r a f t clocks,
the space c r af t arrives at a dista n t solar syste m .
(i) Calculat e the time the journ e y has take n accor di n g to an

.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(3)
(ii) Calculat e the dista n c e betw e e n the Eart h and the sola r syste m
accor di n g to an obse rv e r on Eart h.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(2)
(iii) The spac ec r af t obse rv e r s send a signal to Eart h to anno u n c e that

they have arrive d at the solar syste m . The spa c e c r a f t continu e s
to move. Dete r m i n e how long it will take the signal to arrive on
Eart h accor di n g to the spa c e c r a f t obse rv e r s .
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

(a) The Feyn m a n diagr a m below repr e s e n t s a β– dec ay via the weak
inter a c ti o n proce s s .
The excha n g e particle in this weak inter a c t io n is a virtual particle.
(i) Stat e what is mean t by a virtu al par ticl e.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(1)
(ii) Dete r mi n e whet h e r the virtu al particle in the proc e s s

repr e s e n t e d by the Feyn m a n diag r a m is a W + , a W – or a Z 0
boson.
.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

(b) The orde r of mag nit u d e of the mas s of the W and Z 0 boson s is 100
GeV c –2 . Estim a t e the rang e of the weak inter a c ti o n.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

97 3 . This ques tion is abou t a proto n.
The proto n is mad e out of thre e qua r k s.
(a) Explain why the thr e e qua r k s in the proton do not violat e the Pauli
exclusion principle.
.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)
1
(b) Quark s have spin 2 . Explain how it is possible for the proton to also
1
have spin 2 .
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )
97 4 . This ques tion is abou t star s.
Betelg e u s e and Rigel are two supe r giant s in the const ell a tion of Orion.
(a) Disting ui s h betw e e n a const ellation and a stellar clust e r .
Cons t ella tio n: .................................................................................

.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
Stellar clust e r:
.................................................................................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
(2)
(b) The star Betelg e u s e has a par all ax of 0.007 7 arc secon d. Deduc e tha t
its dista n c e from Eart h is appr oxi m a t e ly 130 pc.
.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(c) Stat e why the Hippa r c o s satellite which orbits Eart h is able to
mea s u r e stellar par allaxe s for sta r s at conside r a b ly gre a t e r dist a n c e s
than 130 pc.
.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(d) The table below gives som e infor m a ti o n abou t the type s and
magni t u d e s of Betelg e u s e and Rigel.
Appar e n t Appar e n t
Star Type Colo ur
ma g n i t u d e bri g h t n e s s
Betelge u 2.0  10 − 7 W
M −0.04
se m −2
3.4  10 − 8 W
Rigel B 0.12
m −2
(i) Compl et e the above table for the colour s of the sta r s.
(2)
(ii) Stat e why Betelg e u s e has a lower appa r e n t mag nit u d e tha n
Rigel.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(1)
(iii) Given that the dista n c e of Betelg e u s e from Eart h is 130 pc,
calcula t e the luminosity of Betelg e u s e .
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(4)
(iv) The luminosity of Rigel is 2.3  10 31 W. Without any furt h e r

calcula tion, explain whe t h e r Rigel is close r or furt h e r tha n
Betelg e u s e from Eart h.

.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(3)
(Tot al 14 mark s )
97 5 . This ques tion is abou t Olber s’ par a d ox.
(a) Newt o n ass u m e d that the univer s e is sta tic and that the sta r s are
unifor mly distrib u t e d . Stat e on e furt h e r assu m p t i o n of the Newt o ni a n
univer s e .
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b) Explain how Newt o n’s ass u m p t io n s led to Olbe r s’ par a d ox.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(5)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

97 6 . This ques tion is abou t amplit u d e- modula t e d radio waves.
The diagr a m below show s a sketc h gra p h of signal volta g e agains t time for
an amplit u d e- modulat e d radio wave.
(a) The inform a t io n signal consist s of a contin uo u s single frequ e n c y sine

wave. The freq u e n cy of the car ri e r wave is 18 kHz.
(i) Dete r mi n e the freq u e n c y of the infor m a ti o n signal.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(3)
(ii) On the axes below, dra w the powe r spec t r u m for the amplit u d e-
modula t e d wave.
(Nu m e ri cal values are not requir e d on the powe r axis.)
(3)

(b) The block diagr a m below shows the princip al syste m s in a radio tha t
receive s an amplitu d e- modul a t e d signal. The unla b ell e d boxes
repr e s e n t amplifier s.
(i) Label the blank boxes with the type of amplifier use d.
(1)
(ii) Stat e the function of the demo d ul a t o r .
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(1)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

97 7 . The gra p h below shows the varia tion with time t of the volta g e V of an
analog u e signal.
The signal is sam pl e d at a frequ e n c y of 200 Hz and digitize d using a thr e e-

bit analog u e to digital conver t e r (ADC). The first sam pl e is take n at t = 0.
The possible outpu t s of the ADC are given below.
(a) Calcula t e the time at which the fourt h sam pl e is take n.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b) Deter m i n e the binary outp u t of the fourt h sam pl e.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................

..................
(2)
(c) The ADC outpu t is fed into a thre e- bit digital to analog u e conve r t e r
(DAC). Stat e, and explain, whet h e r the outpu t of the DAC will be a
faithful repr o d u c t io n of the original analog u e signal.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
97 8 . This ques tion is abou t com m u ni c a t i o n cha n n e l s.
(a) Stat e the order of mag nit u d e of the frequ e n ci e s use d for
com m u ni c a t io n with geost a ti o n a r y satellit e s.
.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b) A voice com m u ni c a t io n cha n n e l is to be est a blis h e d betw e e n a

scientific base in the nort h e r n hemis p h e r e and its hea d q u a r t e r s in the
sout h e r n hemis p h e r e .
For this com m u ni c a t io n cha n n e l, stat e and explain on e adva n t a g e of

using
(i) a geos t a ti o n a r y satellite.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(2)
(ii) a polar orbiting sat ellite.
.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

(c) Stat e on e reas o n why the up- link frequ e n c y and the down- link
frequ e n c y for com m u ni c a t io n satellite s are differ e n t .
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
97 9 . This ques tion is abou t laser light.
(a) Stat e two differ e n c e s bet w e e n the light emitt e d by a lase r and tha t
emitt e d by a filam e n t lamp.
1. .........................................................................................................
................
2. .........................................................................................................
................
(2)
(b) The produ c tio n of laser light relies on popul a tio n inver sion. Outline
the mea ni n g of the ter m popul a tion inver sio n.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )

(a) The diagr a m below shows two rays of light from a dist a n t sta r incide n t
on the objective of an astr o n o m i c a l teles co p e . The pat hs of the rays
are also show n after they pass thro u g h the objective lens and are
inciden t on the eyepiec e lens of the teles co p e .
The princip al focus of the objec tive lens is F O .
On the diag r a m above, mar k the position of the
(i) princip al focus of the eyepie c e lens (label this F E ).

(1)
(ii) imag e of the star form e d by the objec tive lens (label this I).
(1)
(b) Stat e wher e the final imag e is form e d whe n the teles c o p e is in nor m a l
adjus t m e n t .
.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(c) Complet e the diagr a m in (a) to show the direc tio n in which the final
imag e of the star is form e d for the teles c o p e in nor m al adjus t m e n t .
(2)

(d) The eye ring of an astro n o m i c a l teles c o p e is a device tha t is place d
outsid e the eyepiec e lens of the telesc o p e at the position whe r e the
imag e of the objective lens is form e d by the eyepiec e lens. The
diam e t e r of the eye ring is the sam e as the dia m e t e r of the image of
the objective lens. This ens u r e s that all the light pas si n g thro u g h the
teles co p e pass e s throu g h the eye ring.
A particul a r astro n o m i c al teles c o p e has an objec tive lens of focal

lengt h 98.0 cm and an eyepie c e lens of focal lengt h 2.00 cm ( ie f O =
98.0 cm, f E = 2.00 cm). Dete r mi n e the position of the eye ring.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

98 1 . This ques tion is abou t interf e r e n c e and diffrac tio n.
Light from a laser is inciden t on two slits of equal width. After pas sin g
thro u g h the slits, the light is incide n t on a scr e e n . The diagr a m below
shows the inten sity distri b u tio n of the light on the scre e n .
(a) The wavele n g t h of the light from the lase r is 633 nm and the angul a r
sepa r a t i o n of the bright fringe s on the scr e e n is 4.00  10 –4 rad.
Calcula t e the sepa r a t io n of the slits.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(b) Light from the laser is incide n t on many slits of the sam e widt h as the
width s of the slits above. Draw, on the above diag r a m , a possible new
intensity distrib u tio n of the light on the scre e n .
(2)

(c) The laser is replac e d by a sourc e of white light. Desc ri b e , if any, the
chan g e s to the fringe s on the scre e n.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
98 2 . The volum e V of a cylinde r of height h and radius r is given by the

expr e s si o n
V = πr 2 h .
In a particul a r experi m e n t , r is to be dete r m i n e d from mea s u r e m e n t s of V

and h . The unce r t a i n ti e s in V and in h are as show n below.
V 7 %
h 3 %
The app r oxi m a t e unce r t ai n t y in r is
A. 10 %.
B. 5 %.
C. 4 %.
D. 2 %.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

98 3 . The gra p h below shows the varia tion with time t of the velocity v of an
object moving on a str ai g h t- line.
Which of the gra p h s below bes t repr e s e n t s the variatio n with time t of the
accele r a ti o n a of the object?
(Tot al 1 mar k )

98 4 . The variation with time of the vertic al spe e d of a ball falling in air is show n
below.
During the time from 0 to T , the ball gains kinetic ene r gy and loses
gravit a tion al poten t i al ener gy ΔE p . Which of the following sta t e m e n t s is
true?
A. ΔE p is equ al to the gain in kinetic ene r gy.
B. ΔE p is grea t e r than the gain in kinetic ene r gy.
C. ΔE p is equ al to the work done agains t air resist a n c e .
D. ΔE p is less than the work done agains t air resist a n c e .

(Tot al 1 mar k )
98 5 . A satellite is in orbit abou t Eart h. The sat ellite move s to an orbit close r to
Eart h. Which of the following corr e c tly gives the cha n g e in the pot e n ti al
ene r gy and the kinetic ene r gy of the sat ellite ?
cha n g e in pot e n t i a l en e r g y ch a n g e in kin e t i c en e r g y
A. decr e a s e s incr e a s e s
B. decr e a s e s dec r e a s e s
C. incr e a s e s incr e a s e s
D. incr e a s e s dec r e a s e s
(Tot al 1 mar k )

98 6 . A space c r af t orbit s Eart h. An astro n a u t inside the spac e c r a f t feels
“weigh tl e s s ” beca u s e
A. the gravit a tio n al field in the spac e c r a f t is negligible.
B. the Ear t h exert s equal force s on the spac e c r a f t and the astr o n a u t .
C. the space c r af t and the astr o n a u t have the sam e accel e r a ti o n towa r d s
the Ear t h.
D. the space c r af t and the astr o n a u t exer t equal and opposit e forc es on
each other .
(Tot al 1 mar k )
98 7 . Which of the following diag r a m s best rep r e s e n t s the gravit a tion a l

equipot e n ti al surfac e s due to two equ al sphe ri c al mass e s ?
(Tot al 1 mar k )
98 8 . The inter n al ener gy of a solid subs t a n c e is equal to the
A. aver a g e kinetic ene r gy of the molec ul e s.
B. total kinetic ener gy of the molec ul e s.
C. total pote n ti al ener gy of the molec ul e s.
D. total pote n ti al and total kinetic ene r gy of the molec ul e s.

(Tot al 1 mar k )

98 9 . A gas is cont ai n e d in a cylinde r fitted with a piston as show n below.
When the gas is com p r e s s e d rapidly by the piston its tem p e r a t u r e rises
bec a u s e the molec ul e s of the gas
A. are sque ez e d close r toget h e r .
B. collide with each other more frequ e n t ly.
C. collide with the walls of the cont ai n e r more freq u e n t ly.
D. gain ene r gy from the moving piston.

(Tot al 1 mar k )
99 0 . An oper a ti n g refrig e r a t o r with its door ope n is plac e d in a the r m a lly

insulat e d room.
The refrig e r a t o r oper a t e s for a long period of time. Which of the following
corr e c tly gives the chan g e in tem p e r a t u r e and the entr o py of the air in the
room?
Tem p e r a t u r e Entr o py
A. incr e a s e s incr e a s e s
B. incr e a s e s decr e a s e s
C. decr e a s e s decr e a s e s
D. decr e a s e s incr e a s e s
(Tot al 1 mar k )

99 1 . The diagr a m shows the pres s u r e / volu m e (p /V ) diag r a m for one cycle PQRS
of an engin e.
In which sections of the cycle is work done on the engine ?
A. SP only
B. PQ only
C. SP and PQ only
D. RS and SP only
(Tot al 1 mar k )

99 2 . The gra p h below shows the varia tion with time t of the displa c e m e n t x of a
par ticl e unde r g oi n g simple har m o ni c motion.
Which gra p h corr e c tly shows the variation with time t of the accele r a ti o n a
of the par ticle?
(Tot al 1 mar k )

99 3 . The two grap h s show the variatio n with time of the individu al
displac e m e n t s of two waves as they pass thro u g h the sam e point.
The displac e m e n t of the res ult a n t wave at the point at time T is equal to
A. x1 + x2.
B. x1 – x2 .
C. A1 + A2.
D. A1 – A2.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

99 4 . A tube is filled with wat e r and a vibra ti n g tunin g fork is held above its open
end.
The tap at the bas e of the tube is open e d . As the wate r runs out, the sound
is loude s t when the wate r level is a dista n c e x below the top of the tube. A
secon d loud sound is hear d whe n the wat e r level is a dist a n c e y below the
top. Which of the following is a corr e c t expr e s si o n for the wavele n g t h λ of
the sound produ c e d by the tuning fork?
A. λ= y
B. λ = 2x
C. λ= y −x
D. λ = 2( y − x )
(Tot al 1 mar k )

99 5 . A sour c e S, moving at const a n t spe e d, emits a sound of const a n t frequ e n c y.
The sourc e pass e s by a station a r y obse rv e r O, as show n below.
Which of the following shows the variatio n with time t of the freq u e n c y f
obse rv e d at O as the sour c e S appr o a c h e s and pass e s by the obs e rv e r ?
(Tot al 1 mar k )

99 6 . Unpol arize d light of inten sity I 0 is incide n t on a pola riz e r . The tra n s m i t t e d
light is then incide n t on a secon d pola riz e r. The axis of the secon d polarize r
make s an angle of 60  to the axis of the first polariz e r.
1
.
The cosine of 60  is 2 The intensity of the light tra ns m i t t e d throu g h the
secon d polarize r is
A. I0 .
I0
.
B. 2
I0
.
C. 4
I0
.
D. 8
(Tot al 1 mar k )
99 7 . Two binary star s emit radio wave s of wavele n g t h 6.0  10 − 2 m. The wave s
are receive d by a radio teles co p e whos e collectin g dish has a dia m e t e r of
120 m. The two star s are just resolve d if their mi n i m u m ang ul a r
sepa r a t i o n in radia n s is of the orde r of
A. 2  10 4 .
B. 2  10 2 .
C. 5  10 –2 .
D. 5  10 –4 .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

99 8 . An AC gene r a t o r prod u c e s a volta g e of pe a k value V . The freq u e n c y of
rota tio n of the coil of the gen e r a t o r is doubl e d. The rm s value of the
voltag e produ c e d is
V
.
A. 2 2
V
.
B. 2
C. V 2.
D. 2V 2 .
(Tot al 1 mar k )
99 9 . A powe r station gene r a t e s elect ric a l ene r gy at a pote n ti al differ e n c e V and

curr e n t I. The resis t a n c e of the tra n s m i s sio n lines betw e e n the powe r
station and the cons u m e r is R .
The powe r lost in the tran s m i s si o n lines is
A. 0.
V2
.
B. R
C. RI 2 .
D. VI .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

10 0 0 . Which of the following provide s evide nc e for de Broglie’s hypot h e s i s
conce r ni n g matt e r waves ?
A. Elect r o n diffraction
B. Atomic ener gy levels
C. Nucle a r ener gy levels
D. The photo el ec t r i c effect

(Tot al 1 mar k )
10 0 1 . Which of the following corr e c tly identifie s the mas s and mom e n t u m of
a photon ?
Mas s Mo m e n t u m
A. zero zero
B. zero non- zero
C. non- zero zero
D. non- zero non- zero

(Tot al 1 mar k )

10 0 2 . Light of wavele n g t h λ is incide n t on a met al surf ac e in a vacuu m .
Photoel e ct r o n s are emitt e d from the surfa c e of the met al.
Which of the following bes t shows the varia tio n with λ of the maxim u m
kinetic ene r gy E K of the emitt e d elect r o n s ?
(Tot al 1 mar k )
10 0 3 . A radioa c tive isotop e has a half- life of five minut e s . A partic ul a r

nucle u s of this isotop e has not dec ay e d within a time interv al of five
minut e s . A corr e c t stat e m e n t about the next five minut e inte rval is that
this nucleu s
A. has a lower than 50 % cha nc e of dec ayin g.
B. will cert ai nly decay.
C. has a 50 % chan c e of decaying.
D. has a bett e r than 50 % cha n c e of dec aying.

(Tot al 1 mar k )

10 0 4 . A bea m of elect r o n s of uniqu ely define d wavele n g t h λ is incide n t on an
ape r t u r e of heigh t d . The bea m is travelling along the x direc tio n. The
height d is of the sam e order as λ.
After passin g throu g h the aper t u r e , the compo n e n t of mom e n t u m in the x

direction is p x and the compo n e n t in the z direc tio n is p z . Which of the
following shows the uncer t ai n t y in p x and the unc e r t a i n t y in p z ?
Δp x Δp z
A. 0 0
h
B. 0
4πd
h
C. 0
4πd
h h
D.
4πd 4πd
(Tot al 1 mar k )

10 0 5 . A free elect r o n is confined within a one dime n sio n al region of fixed
lengt h. Which of the diag r a m s below show s the four lowes t ene r gy levels of
the elect r o n ?
(Tot al 1 mar k )
10 0 6 . Which of the following corr e c tly desc rib e s the natu r e of the ene r gy
spect r a of alpha (α), bet a (β), and ga m m a (γ) radia tio n?
α β γ
A. discr e t e contin uo u s disc r e t e
B. continu o u s disc r e t e disc r e t e
C. discr e t e disc r e t e contin uo u s
D. continu o u s contin uo u s disc r e t e

(Tot al 1 mar k )

10 0 7 . The binary equivale n t of the num b e r 12 is
A. 1010.
B. 1100.
C. 0011.
D. 0101.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
10 0 8 . The dept h of a “pit” on a CD is 150 nm. The wavele n g t h of the lase r

used to rea d the infor m a ti o n on the CD must be
A. 600 nm.
B. 450 nm.
C. 300 nm.
D. 150 nm.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
10 0 9 . The amou n t of char g e that builds on a pixel in a cha r g e d couple d

device (CCD) is propo r tio n al to which prop e r t y of the incide n t light?
A. Inten sity
B. Wavelen g t h
C. Freq u e n c y
D. Amplitud e
(Tot al 1 mar k )

10 1 0 . This ques tio n is about the elect ric al powe r available from a wind
turbin e.
The maxim u m elect rical powe r gene r a t e d by a wind tur bi n e , P out , was
meas u r e d over a ran g e of incide n t wind spe e d s , v in .
The gra p h below shows the varia tion with v in of P out . Unc e r t a i n ti e s for the
dat a are not show n.
vin .
(a) It is sugg e s t e d that P out is propo r tio n a l to
(i) Draw the line of best- fit for the data points.
(1)
(ii) Stat e on e reas o n why the line you have dra w n does not suppo r t
this hypot h e s i s .
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(1)
(iii) The unce r t a i n t y in the powe r at 15 m s –1 is 5 %. Draw an erro r

bar on the grap h to repr e s e n t this unc e r t a i n t y.
(2)

(b) The theo r e ti c al relations hi p betw e e n the available powe r in the wind,
P in , and incide n t wind spe e d is show n in the gra p h below.
Using both grap h s ,
(i) det e r m i n e the efficie ncy of the turbin e for an incide n t wind spe e d
of 14 m s –1 .
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(3)

(ii) sugg e s t , withou t calcula tion, how the efficiency of the turbin e
chan g e s with incr e a si n g wind spe e d.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(3)
(c) Outline on e adva n t a g e and on e disa dva n t a g e of using wind tur bin e s
to gen e r a t e elect ri cal ener gy.
Advant a g e : .................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................
..................
Disadv a n t a g e : .................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 12 mark s )

10 1 1 . This ques tio n is about optical resolutio n.
The two point sour c e s show n in the diagr a m below (not to scale) emit light
of the sam e frequ e n c y. The light is incide n t on a rect a n g u l a r nar r o w slit
and, after passin g throu g h the slit, is brou g h t to a focus on the scre e n .
(a) Point sourc e B is cover e d. Using the axes below, sketc h a gra p h to
show how the intensity I of the light from point sour c e A varies with
dista n c e along the scr e e n. Label the curve you have dra w n A.
(2)
(b) Point sourc e B is now uncove r e d . The imag e s of A and B on the scre e n
are just resolved. Using the axes above, sket c h a gra p h to show how
the intensi ty I of the light from point sour c e B varie s with dista n c e
along the scr ee n . Label this curve B.
(1)

(c) The bright star Sirius A is accom p a n i e d by a muc h faint e r sta r, Sirius
B. The mea n dista n c e of the star s from Eart h is 8.1  10 16 m. Unde r
ideal atmos p h e r i c condition s, a telesc o p e with an objec tive lens of
diam e t e r 25 cm can just resolve the sta r s as two sepa r a t e image s.
Assumin g that the aver a g e wavele n g t h emitt e d by the sta r s is 500 nm,
estim a t e the appa r e n t , linea r sepa r a ti o n of the two sta r s .
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
10 1 2 . This ques tio n is about polariz a tion and liquid cryst als.
(a) A liquid cryst al has the prop e r t y of being able to rota t e the plane of
polariza tio n of light. Explain wha t is mea n t by the expr e s si o n “able to
rotat e the plan e of polariz a tio n of light”.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) The diagr a m below is a repr e s e n t a t i o n of a liquid cryst al display.
P 1 is a polarize r and P 2 is an analys e r . The tra ns m i s sio n axis of P 2 is at

right angles to that of P 1 . E is an elect r o d e . G is a glass plat e upon
which a shap e d elect r o d e is etch e d . Unpola riz e d light is incide n t on
P1.
(i) Stat e, and explain, what the obse rv e r would see if the liquid
cryst al wer e not pres e n t .
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(2)
(ii) Outline how the applica tion of a pote n ti al differ e n c e betw e e n E

and the elect r o d e etc h e d on G ena bl e s the obs e rv e r to see the
shap e of the elect r o d e .
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(3)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

10 1 3 . This ques tio n is about an ideal gas.
(a) The pres s u r e P of a fixed mas s of an ideal gas is direc tly propo r tio n a l
to the kelvin tem p e r a t u r e T of the gas. That is,
P  T.
Stat e the relation betw e e n the
(i) pres s u r e P and the volum e V for a cha n g e at const a n t

.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(1)
(ii) volum e V and kelvin tem p e r a t u r e T for a cha n g e at a cons t a n t

pres s u r e .
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(1)
(b) The ideal gas is held in a cylinde r by a move a bl e piston. The pre s s u r e
of the gas is P 1 , its volum e is V 1 and its kelvin tem p e r a t u r e is T 1 . The
pres s u r e , volum e and tem p e r a t u r e are cha n g e d to P 2 , V 2 and T 2
res p e c t ively. The chan g e is broug h t about as illust r a t e d below.
heat e d at const a n t volum e to hea t e d at const a n t pre s s u r e to

pres s u r e P 2 and tem p e r a t u r e T ′volum e V 2 and tem p e r a t u r e
T2
Stat e the relation betw e e n

(i) P 1 , P 2 , T 1 and T .
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(1)
(ii) V 1 , V 2 , T and T 2 .
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

(c) Use your answ e r s to (b) to ded uc e , that for an ideal gas
PV = KT ,
whe r e K is a const a n t .
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

10 1 4 . This ques tio n is about throwin g a stone from a cliff.
Antonia stan d s at the edge of a vertic al cliff and throw s a stone vertic ally
upw a r d s .
The stone leaves Antonia’s hand with a spe e d v =8. 0 m s –1 . Ignor e air
resis t a n c e , the accel er a ti o n of free fall g is 10 m s –2 and all dista n c e
meas u r e m e n t s are taken from the point whe r e the ston e leaves Antonia’s
han d.
(a) Deter m i n e ,
(i) the maxim u m height rea c h e d by the ston e.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(2)
(ii) the time take n by the ston e to rea c h its maxim u m heigh t.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

(b) The time betw e e n the stone leaving Antonia’s hand and hitting the sea
is 3.0 s. Deter m i n e the heigh t of the cliff.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
10 1 5 . This ques tio n is about gravit a tion a l fields.
(a) Define gravitational field stre n g t h .
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b) The gravit a tio n al field stre n g t h at the surfa c e of Jupite r is 25 N kg –1

and the radius of Jupiter is 7.1  10 7 m.
(i) Derive an expr e s s io n for the gravit a tio n a l field stre n g t h at the
surfac e of a plan e t in ter m s of its mas s M , its radius R and the
gravit a tion al cons t a n t G.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................

................
.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

(ii) Use your expr e s s io n in (b)(i) above to estim a t e the mas s of
Jupite r.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
10 1 6 . Simple har m o nic motion and the gre e n h o u s e effect
(a) A body is displace d from equilibriu m . Sta t e the two conditions

neces s a r y for the body to execu t e simple har m o nic motion.
1. .........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
2. .........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

(b) In a simple model of a meth a n e molec ul e , a hydro g e n atom and the
car bo n atom can be reg a r d e d as two mas s e s att a c h e d by a sprin g. A
hydrog e n atom is much less mas sive tha n the car bo n atom such that
any displace m e n t of the carbo n atom may be ignor e d .
The grap h below show s the variatio n with time t of the displ ac e m e n t x
from its equilibri u m position of a hydrog e n atom in a molec ul e of
met h a n e .
The mas s of hydrog e n atom is 1.7  10 –27 kg. Use dat a from the gra p h
above
(i) to det e r m i n e its amplitu d e of oscillation.
.........................................................................................................
................
(1)
(ii) to show that the frequ e n c y of its oscillation is 9.1  10 13 Hz.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(2)
(iii) to show that the maxim u m kinetic ene r gy of the hydrog e n atom
is 6.2  10 –18 J.
.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

(c) Assumin g that the motion of the hydrog e n atom is simple har m o ni c,
its frequ e n cy of oscillation f is given by the expr e s si o n
1 k
f ,
2π mp
whe r e k is the force per unit displa c e m e n t betw e e n a hydrog e n atom

and the car bo n atom and m p is the mas s of a proton.
(i) Show that the value of k is appr oxi m a t e ly 560 N m –1 .
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(1)
(ii) Estim a t e , using your answ e r to (c)(i), the maxim u m accel e r a ti o n

of the hydro g e n atom.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

(d) Met h a n e is classified as a gre e n h o u s e gas.
(i) Describ e what is mea n t by a gre e n h o u s e gas.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(2)
(ii) Elect r o m a g n e t i c radia tio n of frequ e n c y 9.1  10 13 Hz is in the

infrar e d region of the elect r o m a g n e t i c spec t r u m . Sugg e s t , bas e d
on the infor m a ti o n given in (b)(ii), why met h a n e is classified as a
gree n h o u s e gas.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(2)
(Tot al 14 mark s )
10 1 7 . Char g e coupled device (CCD)
(a) A digital cam e r a is used to take a photog r a p h of a plant. The CCD in

the cam e r a has 1.6  10 7 squa r e pixels. Eac h pixel has an are a of 2.3
 10 –10 m 2 . A particul a r leaf of the plant has an are a of 2.5  10 –2 m 2 .
The imag e of the leaf form e d on the CCD is 1.0  10 –3 m 2 . Two
inden t a ti o n s on the leaf are sepa r a t e d by 0.50 mm. Deduc e that it is
unlikely that the imag e s of the two inde n t a t io n s will be resolve d.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(b) Light is incide n t on the imag e collec tion are a for a time of 100 ms.
The num b e r of photo n s incide n t on one pixel is 5.5  10 4 . Each pixel
has a qua n t u m efficiency of 80 % and a capa cit a n c e 40 pF.
(i) Stat e what is mean t by qua n t u m efficiency.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(1)
(ii) Estim a t e the chan g e in pote n t i al differ e n c e acros s eac h pixel.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(4)
(c) Outline how the variation in pote n ti al differ e n c e acros s individu al

pixels enabl e s a black and white imag e to be produ c e d by a digital
cam e r a .
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

10 1 8 . Nucle a r powe r produ c tio n
(a) With refer e n c e to the conc e p t of fuel enric h m e n t in a nucle a r reac t o r

explain,
(i) the adva n t a g e of enric hi n g the ura ni u m use d in a nucle a r

react o r .
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(3)
(ii) from an inter n a t io n a l point of view, a possible risk to which fuel

enrich m e n t could lead.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

(b) A particul a r nuclea r react o r use s ura ni u m- 235 as its fuel sourc e .
When a nucle u s of urani u m- 235 abso r b s a neut r o n, the following
reac tio n can take place.
235
92 U  01 n  144
Xe  93 08S r 2 01 n
54
235
U
rest mas s of 92 = 2.189 5  10 5 MeV
c –2
144
rest mas s of 54 Xe = 1.340 8  10 5 MeV
c –2
90
rest mas s of 38 S r = 8.374 9  10 4 MeV
c –2
1
rest mas s of 0 n = 939.5 6 MeV c –2
(i) Show that the ener gy rele a s e d in the rea c tio n is app roxi m a t e ly
180 MeV.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(1)
(ii) Stat e the form in which the ene r gy app e a r s .
.........................................................................................................
................
(1)
(c) The ene r gy relea s e d by one atom of car bo n- 12 during comb u s tio n is
appr oxi m a t ely 4 eV.
(i) Using the answ e r to (b)(i), estim a t e the ratio
e n e r g dy e n s it oy f u r a n iu -m2 3 5
e n e r g dy e n s it of
y c a r b on -1 2 .
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................

................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(3)

(ii) Sugg e s t , with refer e n c e to your answ e r in (c)(i), on e adva n t a g e
of ura ni u m- 235 comp a r e d with fossil fuels.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(1)
(d) A sam pl e of was t e prod u c e d by the reac t o r cont ai n s 1.0 kg of

stron ti u m- 90 (Sr- 90). Sr- 90 has a half- life of 9.1  10 8 s.
For the stronti u m in the sam pl e,
(i) show that its initial activity is 5.1  10 15 Bq.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(3)
(ii) calcula t e its activity afte r a period of 70 yea rs. (1 yr =3. 2  10 7

s)
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(3)

(e) Based on your answ e r s to (d), com m e n t on a proble m associ a t e d with
using urani u m- 235 as an ene r gy sourc e .
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 20 mark s )
10 1 9 . Elect r o m a g n e t i c induction
(a) Stat e Lenz’s law.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) A long solenoid is conn ec t e d in seri es with a batt e r y and a switch S.
Sever al loops of wire are wra p p e d arou n d the solenoid close to its
midpoin t as show n below.
The ends of the wire are conne c t e d to a high resis t a n c e voltm e t e r V

that has a cent r e zero scale (as show n in the inset diag r a m ). The
switch S is closed and it is obse rv e d that the nee dl e on V move s to the
right and then drops back to zero.
Descri b e and explain, the deflec tion on the voltm e t e r whe n the switc h
S is re- open e d .
Descri ptio n: .................................................................................

..........................
.................................................................................
..........................
.................................................................................
..........................
.................................................................................
..........................
Explan a ti o n: .................................................................................
..........................
.................................................................................
..........................
.................................................................................
..........................
.................................................................................
..........................
(4)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

10 2 0 . Mech a ni c al powe r
(a) A car drives up a str aig h t incline tha t is 4.8 km long. The total heigh t
of the incline is 0.30 km.
The car moves up the incline at a ste a dy spe e d of 16 m s –1 . During the

climb, the aver a g e friction force acting on the car is 5.0  10 2 N. The
total weigh t of the car and the drive r is 1.2  10 4 N.
(i) Dete r mi n e the time it take s the car to travel from the botto m to
the top of the incline.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(2)
(ii) Dete r mi n e the work done agains t the gravit a tion a l force in
travelling from the botto m to the top of the incline.
.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

(iii) Using your ans w e r s to (a)(i) and (a)(ii), calcula t e a value for the
minim u m powe r outpu t of the car engine nee d e d to move the car
from the botto m to the top of the incline.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(4)

(b) From the top of the incline, the roa d continu e s downw a r d s in a
str aig h t line. At the point whe r e the roa d sta r t s to go down w a r d s , the
driver of the car in (a), stops the car to look at the view. In continui n g
his jour n ey, the driver decid e s to save fuel. He switc h e s off the engine
and allows the car to move freely down the hill. The car desc e n d s a
heigh t of 0.30 km in a dist a n c e of 6.4 km befor e levelling out.
The aver a g e resistive force acting on the car is 5.0  10 2 N.
Estim a t e
(i) the accel e r a t io n of the car down the incline.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(5)
(ii) the spee d of the car at the botto m of the incline.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(2)
(c) In fact, for the last few hund r e d met r e s of its journ e y down the hill,

the car travels at const a n t spe e d. Stat e the value of the friction al forc e
acting on the car whilst it is moving at cons t a n t spe e d.
.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 15 mark s )
10 2 1 . Gravit ation al poten ti al
(a) Define gravitational poten tial at a point in a gravit a tio n a l field.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(b) The grap h below show s the variatio n with dista n c e R from the cent r e
of a plane t of the gravit a tion a l pote n ti al V . The radius R 0 of the plan e t
= 5.0  10 6 m. Values of V are not show n for R  R 0 .
Use the grap h to det e r m i n e the mag nit u d e of the gravit a tio n a l field
str en g t h at the surfac e of the plane t.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(c) A satellite of mass 3.2  10 3 kg is launc h e d from the surfa c e of the
plan e t. Use the grap h to dete r m i n e the minim u m launc h spe e d tha t
the satellite mus t have in orde r to rea c h a heigh t of 2.0  10 7 m above
the surfac e of the plan e t. (You may ass u m e that it rea c h e s its
maxim u m spee d imme di a t e ly afte r launc h.)
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
10 2 2 . Domes tic show e r
(a) The diagr a m below shows part of the hea ti n g circ uit of a dom e s ti c
show e r .
Cold wat e r ente r s the show e r unit and flows over an insula t e d hea ti n g
ele m e n t . The heati n g elem e n t is rate d at 7.2 kW, 240 V. The wat e r
ent e r s at a tem p e r a t u r e of 14 C and leave s at a tem p e r a t u r e of 40 C.
The specific heat cap acity of wate r is 4.2  10 3 J kg –1 K–1 .
(i) Define specific heat capacity .
.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

(ii) Estim a t e the flow rat e of the wate r.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(4)
(iii) Sugg e s t two reas o n s why your answ e r to (a)(ii) is only an

estim a t e .
1. .................................................................................................
..............
.................................................................................................
..............
2. .................................................................................................
..............
.................................................................................................
..............
(2)
(iv) Calculat e the cur r e n t in the hea tin g ele m e n t whe n the elem e n t is
oper a ti n g at 7.2 kW.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

(v) Explain why, when the show e r unit is switc h e d on, the initial
curr e n t in the heati n g elem e n t is gre a t e r tha n the curr e n t
calcula t e d in (a)(iv).
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

(b) In som e count ri e s , show e r units are oper a t e d from a 110 V supply. A
heatin g elem e n t oper a ti n g with a 240 V supply has resist a n c e R 240
and an elem e n t oper a ti n g from a 110 V supply has resis t a n c e R 110 .
Show that for heati n g elem e n t s to have identic al powe r outpu t s
R1 1 0
0.2 1.
R2 4 0
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 14 mark s )
10 2 3 . Photo el ec t r i c effect
A met al is place d in a vacuu m and light of frequ e n c y f is incide n t on its

surfac e. As a result, elect r o n s are emitt e d from the surfa c e . The gra p h
below shows the variation with frequ e n c y f of the maxim u m kine tic ene r gy
E K of the emitt e d elect r o n s .

(a) The grap h above shows that the r e is a thr e s h ol d freq u e n c y of the
inciden t light below which no elect r o n s are emitt e d from the surfa c e .
With refer e n c e to the Planc k cons t a n t and the photoel e c t ri c work
function, explain how Einst ei n’s photo el e c t r i c theory accou n t s for this
thr e s h ol d frequ e n cy.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(b) Use the grap h in (a) to calcula t e the
(i) thre s h ol d frequ e n c y.
.........................................................................................................
................
(1)
(ii) Planck cons t a n t .
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(4)

(iii) work function of the met al.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(2)
(Tot al 11 mark s )
10 2 4 . This ques tio n is about star s.
Describ e the final nucle a r reaction in the core, and the final evolution a r y
stat e, of
(a) a low- mas s star (of the orde r of 1 solar mas s).
nuclea r reactio n:
.................................................................................
...................
.................................................................................
...................
evolution a r y stat e:
.................................................................................
...................
.................................................................................
...................
(2)
(b) a high- mas s star (of appr oxi m a t e ly 15 solar mas s e s ).
nuclea r reactio n:
.................................................................................
...................
.................................................................................
...................
evolution a r y stat e:
.................................................................................
...................
.................................................................................

...................
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )

10 2 5 . This ques tio n is about extr a g a l a c ti c astro p h y sic s.
(a) In an observ a tio n of a dist a n t galaxy, spec t r a l lines are recor d e d .

Spect r al lines at thes e wavele n g t h s canno t be produ c e d in the
labor a t o r y. Explain this phe no m e n o n .
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b) Descri b e how Hubble’s law is use d to dete r m i n e the dista n c e from the
Eart h to dista n t galaxies.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c) Explain why Hubbl e’s law is not use d to me a s u r e dista n c e s to nea r by
sta r s or near by galaxies (such as Andro m e d a ).
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

10 2 6 . The diagr a m below shows an inver tin g amplifie r circ uit.
(a) Stat e what is mea n t by an invertin g am plifie r circ uit.
.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b) The input voltag e is 12 mV. Calcula t e
(i) the curr e n t in the 150 k Ω resisto r .
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(2)
(ii) the pot en ti al differ e n c e betw e e n A and B.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(1)
(c) Outline any ass u m p ti o n s tha t you have mad e in (b).
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
10 2 7 . In a mobile phon e syst e m an are a is divide d into a large num b e r of

cells.
(a) Stat e what is mea n t by a cell.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b) Sugg e s t two advan t a g e s of orga nizing the mobile phon e syste m in this
way.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )
10 2 8 . This ques tio n is about X-ray diffrac tio n.
The diagr a m below rep r e s e n t s an arr a n g e m e n t for mea s u r i n g the inte nsi ty
of X-rays scat t e r e d from the surfa c e of a cubic cryst al. The angle betw e e n
the surfac e of the cryst al and the reflect e d ray is θ.

The diagr a m below rep r e s e n t s two lattice plan e s of the cryst al. The lattic e
ions are repr e s e n t e d by the black dots.
(a) Add lines to the diag r a m above to repr e s e n t the incide n t and
scat t e r e d X-rays, explain why, as the dete c t o r of the scatt e r e d X-rays
is rotat e d , it regist e r s a maxim u m of inte n sity at various value s of the
angle θ.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(b) The wavele n g t h of the incide n t X-rays is 1.2  10 –10 m. The first
maxim u m value of inten si ty is recor d e d at θ = 12 . Show that the
lattice spacin g d in the diagr a m above is 2.9  10 –10 m.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

10 2 9 . This ques tio n is about a wedg e film.
In an experi m e n t to mea s u r e the thickn e s s d of a piece of adh e sive tape,

the tape is used to sepa r a t e two flat plat e s of glass as show n below. This
forms a wedg e shap e d air film.
A bea m of monoc h r o m a t i c light is incide n t on the wedg e film. The light that
is reflect e d at right angles to the wedg e , is viewe d using the micros c o p e . A
syste m of par allel fringes of equal spacin g is obse rv e d in the field of view of
the micros c o p e .
(a) Outline how the fringe syste m is form e d.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) The spacin g bet w e e n the fringe s is 1.2  10 –4 m. The dista n c e from
whe r e the two plat es of glass touc h and the edg e of the adh e sive tape
is 5.0  10 –2 m. The wavele n g t h of the light is 480 nm. Estim a t e the
thickn e s s d of the adh e sive tape.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
10 3 0 . This ques tio n is about relativistic kine m a t i c s .
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b) A space c r a f t is moving with a spe e d of 0.80c with res p e c t to obse r v e r s

on Eart h. After 6.0 year s of travel, accor di n g to the spac e c r a f t clocks,
the space c r af t arrives at a dista n t solar syste m .
(i) Calculat e the time the journ e y has take n accor di n g to an

.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(3)

(ii) Calculat e the dista n c e betw e e n the Eart h and the sola r syste m
accor di n g to an obse rv e r on Eart h.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(2)
(iii) The spac ec r af t obse rv e r s send a signal to Eart h to anno u n c e that

they have arrive d at the solar syste m . The spa c e c r a f t continu e s
to move. Dete r m i n e how long it will take the signal to arrive on
Eart h accor di n g to the spa c e c r a f t obse rv e r s .
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
10 3 1 . Two elect r o n s are travelling dire c tly towa r d s one anot h e r . Eac h has a
spee d of 0.80c relative to a station a r y obse rv e r . Calcula t e the rela tive
velocity of appr o a c h , as mea s u r e d in the fram e of refe r e n c e of one of the
elect r o n s .
.........................................................................................................................
.....................
.........................................................................................................................
.....................
.........................................................................................................................
.....................
.........................................................................................................................
.....................
(Tota l 3 mark s )

10 3 2 . This ques tio n is about mas s- ene r gy.
(a) Disting ui s h betw e e n the res t mas s- ene r gy of a particl e and its total
ener gy.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b) The rest mas s of a proton is 938 MeV c –2 . Sta t e the value of its res t
mas s- ener gy.
.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(c) A proto n is accele r a t e d from res t throu g h a pote n ti al differ e n c e V

until it reac h e s a speed of 0.980 c. Dete r mi n e the pote n ti al differ e n c e
V as meas u r e d by an obse rv e r at rest in the labor a t o r y fra m e of
refer e n c e .
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

10 3 3 . The diagr a m below illust r a t e s the distor tion of spa c e by the
gravit a tion al field of a black hole.
(a) (i) Describ e wha t is mea n t by the centr e and the surfac e
of a black hole.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(3)
(ii) With refer e n c e to your answ e r in (a)(i), define the Sch w a r z s c hil d
radius .
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(1)
(iii) Calculat e the Schw a r z s c hild radius for an object having a mas s of
2.0  10 31 kg (ten solar mas s e s ).
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

(iv) Scienc e fiction freq u e n tly port r a y s black holes as objec ts that
“swallow” everyt hi n g in the unive r s e .
A space c r af t is travelling towa r d s the objec t in (a)(iii) suc h that,

if it contin u e s in a straig h t- line, its dista n c e of close s t app ro a c h
would be about 10 7 m. By refe r e n c e to the diagr a m and your
answ e r in (a)(iii), sugg e s t whet h e r the fate of the spac e c r a f t is
consist e n t with the fate as port r a y e d in scienc e fiction.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(2)
(b) In 1979, Wahl, Cars w ell and Weym a n n discove r e d “two” very dist a n t
quas a r s sepa r a t e d by a small angle. Spec t r o s c o pi c exa mi n a tio n of the
imag e s show e d that they wer e identic al.
Outline how thes e obse rv a ti o n s give suppo r t to the theo ry of Gene r a l

Relativity.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
10 3 4 . This ques tio n is about sound inten sity levels.
(a) Disting ui s h betw e e n sound inte nsi ty and loudn e s s .
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................

(2)

(b) An engin e gen e r a t e s 2.4 W of sound powe r tha t is emitt e d unifor mly
in all direction s . The intensity level at the ear mus t not exce e d 82 dB.
Calcula t e the minim u m dista n c e that any per s o n mus t be from the
engin e unless weari n g ear prot e c tio n. (The surfa c e are a of a sphe r e of
radius r is 4 πr 2 )
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(5)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
10 3 5 . Nucle a r mag n e t i c reson a n c e (NMR) imagin g is a tech ni q u e in which

proton s inside the patie n t are mad e to emit an elect r o m a g n e t i c signal.
(a) Outline the mech a ni s m by which the signal is emitt e d by the proton s .
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(b) Stat e on e adva n t a g e to the patie n t of using NMR imagi ng comp a r e d

to X-ray radiog r a p h y.

.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

10 3 6 . This ques tio n is about X-rays.
A par allel bea m of X-rays is use d to investi g a t e a broke n bone. The

att e n u a t i o n coefficien t for soft tiss ue (muscle) is 0.035 cm –1 . The X-ray half-
value thickn e s s for bone is about 150 time s less than tha t for soft tissue .
(a) Define the ter m half- value thick n e s s .
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b) Deduc e that the atte n u a t i o n coefficie nt for bone is 5.3 cm –1 .
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) The par all el bea m of X-rays is incide n t on a hum a n leg. The leg has a
bone of diam e t e r 5.0 cm, surr o u n d e d by muscle on eac h side of
thickn e s s 5.0 cm. A section throu g h the leg is show n in the diagr a m
below.
The inten sity of the X-ray bea m at the surfa c e A of the leg is I A. At the
surfac e B of the bone, the inte n sity is I B and the inte n sity of the bea m
eme r gi n g at surfac e C of the bone is I C .
Deter m i n e the ratio
IB
.
(i) IA
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(2)
IC
.
(ii) IB
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

(d) Use your answ e r s in (c) to explain how it is possible to obtain a
shado w imag e of the leg and bone.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 9 mark s )
10 3 7 . This ques tio n is about dosim e t r y.
(a) Explain what is mea n t by quality factor (rela tive biologic al

effectiven e s s ).
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) The radioac tive isotop e potas si u m- 40 occur s natu r ally in the body.
Use the data below to calcula t e the ann u a l dos e equivale n t tha t the
body receives from the dec ay of pota s si u m- 40 within the body.
num b e r of atom s of potas si u m- 40 per kilogr a m of the body = 8.0 

10 18
decay const a n t of potas si u m- 40 = 5.3 

10 –10 year –1
ener gy absor b e d by the body from the dec ay of one atom

of potas si u m- 40 = 4.0  10 –14 J
quality factor of the radiation from dec ay of pota s si u m- 40 = 1
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )
10 3 8 . This ques tio n is about radioa c tive isotop e s of iodine.
The isotop e iodine- 131 is used to tre a t malign a n t growt h s in the thyroid
gland. The isotop e has a physic al half- life of 8 days and a biologic al half- life
of 21 days.
(a) Explain the ter m biological half- life.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) Calcula t e the effective half- life of the isotop e.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c) The isotop e iodine- 123 has a physic al half- life of 13 hour s.
Sugg e s t why it is prefe r a b l e to use this isotop e for ima g i n g the

thyroid rath e r than iodine- 131.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )
10 3 9 . This ques tio n is about funda m e n t a l inte r a c ti o n s.
(a) The Feyn m a n diagr a m below repr e s e n t s a β– dec ay via the weak
inter a c ti o n proce s s .
The excha n g e particle in this weak inter a c t io n is a virtual particle.
(i) Stat e what is mean t by a virtu al par ticl e.

.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(1)
(ii) Dete mi n e whet h e r the virtu al particle in the proc e s s repr e s e n t e d

by the Feyn m a n diag r a m is a W + , a W – or a Z 0 boson.
.........................................................................................................
................
(2)


(b) The orde r of mag nit u d e of the mas s of the W and Z 0 boson s is 100
GeV c –2 . Estim a t e the rang e of the weak inter a c ti o n.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
10 4 0 . This ques tio n is about a proton.
The proto n particle is mad e out of thr e e qua r k s .
(a) Explain why the thr e e qua r k s in the proton do not violat e the Pauli
exclusion principle.
.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)
1
(b) Quark s have spin 2 . Explain how it is possible for the proton to also
1
have spin 2 .
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )

10 4 1 . This ques tio n is about the synch r o t r o n and par ticle prod u c tio n.
(a) In a synch r o t r o n ring, a bea m of proto n s and anot h e r bea m of

antipr o t o n s move in opposit e direc tio n s thro u g h regions of elect ric
and magn e t i c fields as they circle the ring.
Descri b e the pur po s e of the
(i) elect ric fields.
.........................................................................................................
................
(1)
(ii) mag n e ti c fields.
.........................................................................................................
................
(1)
(b) Explain why the mag ni t u d e s of the ma g n e ti c fields in a synch r o t r o n

mus t be incr e a s e d as the ene r gy of the accel e r a t e d particle s
incr e a s e s .
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(c) The neut r al lambd a baryo n Λ and its antip a r t i cl e may be prod u c e d in
proto n- antip r o t o n collisions accor di n g to the following rea c tio n.
p p  Λ Λ
The minim u m ene r gy requir e d to prod u c e the Λ and the Λ is 2240

MeV. The rest mas s of the proto n is 938 MeV c –2 .
Calcula t e the mi n i m u m kinetic ene r gy, E K, of the antipr o t o n, in orde r

to produ c e the Λ and Λ par ticl e s when
(i) the proto n and the antipr o t o n are eac h accel e r a t e d to a kinetic
ene r gy E K;
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(1)
(ii) the antip r o t o n is accele r a t e d to a kine tic ene r gy E K and collide s

with a station a r y proton.
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(3)
(d) By refer e n c e to your answ e r s to (c), stat e an adva n t a g e of collisions

betw e e n proto n s and antip r o t o n s in a synch r o t r o n comp a r e d with
collisions betw e e n station a r y proton s and moving antipr o t o n s .
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

10 4 2 . (a) Outline
(i) what is mean t by a dee p inelas tic scat t e r i n g expe ri m e n t .
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
.........................................................................................................
................
(2)
(ii) how deep inelas tic scat t e ri n g expe ri m e n t s give evide n c e in

suppo r t of the existe n c e of qua r k s and gluons.
quar k s : ................................................................
.......................................
................................................................
.......................................
gluons: ................................................................
.......................................
................................................................
.......................................
(4)
(b) Deep inelas tic scat t e ri n g expe ri m e n t s indic at e tha t the qua r k s inside
hadr o n s behav e as free particle s. Sugg e s t a rea so n for this.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c) Stat e two fund a m e n t a l differ e n c e s betw e e n the sta n d a r d model for
quar k s and lepton s and the theory of string s.
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )


IB Physics QB

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Descrizione originale:

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

IB Physics QB

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

1. Which of the following cont ain s one funda m e n t a l and one derive d unit?

2. The cur r e n t , I, throu g h a resis to r is me a s u r e d with a digital am m e t e r to be

3. A skydive r of mas s 80 kg falls vertic ally with a const a n t spee d of 50 m s –1 .

Ins t a n t a n e o u s Aver a g e spe e d / m

The net (result a n t ) force on the car is

The mag ni t u d e of the chan g e in mom e n t u m of the ball is

Has don e the mo s t Has dev e l o p e d the

9. A cyclist rides arou n d a circul a r tra ck at a unifor m spe e d. Which of the

Net horiz o n t a l forc e Ne t horiz o n t a l forc e

The gra di e n t of the gra p h is k and no ene r gy is lost to the surr o u n d i n g s .

What is the refr ac tive index of glas s?

17. One elect r o nv olt is equ al to

What is the emf of the bat t e r y?

B. An incr e a s e in light inten sity

D. A decr e a s e in light intensi ty

What is the direction of the ma g n e t i c forc e on the elect r o n ?

A. Into the pag e

B. Out of the page

26. In which of the following places will the albe do be gre a t e s t ?

D. A polar ice cap

A. nuclea r ener gy to kinetic ene r gy.

B. kinetic ener gy to ther m al ene r gy.

C. ther m al ener gy to elect ric a l ene r gy.

D. kinetic ener gy to elect ric al ene r gy.

30. What is the unit of surfac e heat capa city?

(c) Theory sugg e s t s that D 2 = kn .

(ii) Based on the secon d gra p h, stat e on e piec e of evide nc e that

32. This ques tion is abou t motion in a ma gn e t i c field.

An elect r o n, that has been accele r a t e d from rest by a pote n ti al differ e n c e

(i) spee d of the elect r o n afte r accele r a t i o n is 9.4 × 10 6 m s –1 .

(i) On the diagr a m above, draw an arro w to indica t e the vector

33. This ques tion is abou t circula r motion.

A ball of mas s 0.25 kg is attac h e d to a string and is ma d e to rota t e with

(a) (i) On the diagr a m above, draw and label arrow s to

(ii) Stat e and explain whet h e r the ball is in equilibri u m .

(b) Deter m i n e the spee d of rota tio n of the ball.

34. This ques tion is abou t a nuclea r rea c t o r .

(a) Uraniu m is used as a fuel in a small res e a r c h nucle a r rea c t o r. The

(b) The reac t o r produ c e s 24 MW of powe r. The efficiency of the reac t o r is

(ii) Com m e n t on the inte r n a t i o n a l implic atio n s of the prod u c t of

A longit u di n al wave travels throu g h a mediu m from left to right.

Grap h 1 show s the variation with time t of the displa c e m e n t x of a particle

(a) For par ticle P,

(ii) calcula t e the mag nit u d e of its maxim u m accele r a ti o n.

(iv) stat e its directio n of motion at t = 0.12 s.

(b) Grap h 2 shows the variatio n with position d of the displa c e m e n t x of

Deter m i n e for the longit u di n a l wave, using gra p h 1 and gra p h 2,

(ii) the spee d.

Grap h 2 – repr o d u c e d to assist with answ e ri n g (c)(i).

36. This ques tion is abou t mech a ni c s and the r m a l physic s.

(c) After 10 s the ball has fallen 190 m.

37. This ques tion is abou t nuclea r physics.

(a) (i) Define bindin g ener g y of a nucle u s.

(i) Calculat e the num b e r x of neut r o n s prod u c e d .

38. This ques tion is abou t elect ri c circ uit s.

(i) electro m o ti v e force (emf ) of a batt e r y.

(ii) electrical resista n c e of a condu c t o r .

(ii) The poten ti al differ e n c e acros s resisto r R 1 is V 1 and that acros s

The powe r dissip a t e d in eac h of the two resisto r s is the sam e .

Using the grap h given in (c),

(i) det e r m i n e the emf of the batt e r y.

(ii) calcula t e the total powe r dissipa t e d in the circ uit.

The aver a g e equilibri u m tem p e r a t u r e of the Ear t h’s surfa c e is T E and